Download SIMPLIFIED GRAMMARS

TRUBNER'S COLLECTION
OF
SIMPLIFIED
GRAMMARS
OP THE PRINCIPAL
ASIATIC AND EUROPEAN LANGUAGES.
EDITED BY
REINHOLD ROST, LL.D., P H . D .
IX.
OTTOMAN TURKISH.
BY J. W. REDHOUSE.
TRUBNER'S COLLECTION OF SIMPLIFIED GRAMMARS OF THE
PRINCIPAL ASIATIC AND EUROPEAN LANGUAGES.
EDITED BY REINHOLD ROST, U J . D . , PH.D.
I.
HINDUSTANI, PERSIAN,
AND ARABIC.
BY
MODERN GREEK.
BY
E. M. GELDABT, M.A.
Price 2s. 6d.
THE LATE
E. H. PALMEE, M.A.
Price 5s.
VI.
ROUMANIAN.
BY
R. TORCEANU.
II.
HUNGARIAN.
BY
Price 5s.
VII.
TIBETAN.
I. SINGES.
Price 4s. 6d.
BY H. A. JASCHZE.
Price 5s.
III.
BASQUE.
BY
VIII.
DANISH.
W. VAN EYS.
Price 3s. 6d.
BY
E. C. OTTE.
Price 3s. 6d.
IV.
MALAGASY.
BY
G. W. PABKEE.
Price 5s.
IX.
OTTOMAN TURKISH.
BY
J. W. REDHOUSE.
Price 10s. 6d,
Grammars of the following are in preparation .—
Albanese, Anglo-Saxon, Assyrian, Bohemian, Bulgarian, Burmese,
Chinese, Cymric and Gaelic, Dutch, Egyptian, Finnish, Hebrew,
Kurdish, Malay, Pali, Polish, Russian, Sanskrit, Serbian, Siamese,
Singhalese, Swedish, &c, &c, &c.
LONDON: TRUBNER & CO., LUDGATE H I L I .
SIMPLIFIED GRAMMAR
OF THE
OTTOMAN-TURKISH LANGUAGE.
BY
J. W. REDHOUSE, M.R.A.S.,
HON.
MBMBER
OF
THE
ROYAL
SOCIETY
OF
LITERATURE
LONDON:
TRUBNER & CO., LUDGATE HILL.
1884.
[All rights reserved.]
LONDON:
GILBERT AND RIVINGTON, LIMITED,
BT. JOHN'S SQUARE, CLERKENWELL ROAD.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE
Preface
.
.
.
.
.
Note on Identity of Alphabets
.
.
.
.
CHAPTER
I.
.
.
.
.
.
ix
xii
LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
SECTION I.
Number, Order, Forms, and Names of
Letters
.
.
.
.
.
.
Synopsis of Arabic, Greek, and
Letters
„
1
Latin
.
4
I I . Phonetic Values of Letters, Vowel-Points,
Orthographic
Signs,
Ottoman Euphony
Transliteration,
.
.
.
.
15
CHAPTER II.
OTTOMAN ACCIDENCE.
SECTION I. Nouns Substantive
„
I I . Nouns Adjective
„
I I I . Numerals
„
IV. Pronouns
.
.
51
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
68
.
74
.
.
82
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
PAGE
SECTION V. Demonstratives
„
V I . Interrogatives
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
88
89
„
V I I . Relative Pronouns
90
„
V I I I . Derivation of Verbs
92
„
„
„
(Table)
.
.
.
94
I X . Conjugation of Verbs ; Moods; Tenses ;
Participles ; Verbal Nouns ; Gerunds .
„
X. Numbers and Persons
.
.
„
X I . Complex Categories of Verbs .
„
X I I . First Complex Category
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
115
.
119
.
.
99
120
„
X I I I . Second
„
„
.
125
„
X I V . Third
„
„
„
X V . Combined (Turkish) Conjugation
.
133
„
X V I . Negative and Impotential Conjugations .
135
129
.
„ X V I I . Dubitative, Potential, and Facile Verbs .
141
„ X V I I I . Verb Substantive
144
„
X I X . Verbs of Presence and Absence, Existence
and Non-Existence
.
.
.
„
X X . Compound Verbs
.
.
„
X X I . Interrogative Verbs; Interrogation
„ X X I I . Adverbial Expressions
„ X X I I I . Prepositions .
„ XXIV. Conjunctions
„ X X V . Interjections
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
147
.
148
.
151
.
154
. 1 5 6
.
.
156
157
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
CHAPTER
T H E OTTOMAN
vii
III.
SYNTAX.
PAGE
SECTION I.
Conversational
writing.
brevity. — Precision
.
.
„
II.
„
III.
„
Adjectives
„
IV.
„
Numerals
,,
V.
„
Pronouns .
„
VI.
„
Verbs
.
Syntax of Substantives .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1 7 0
.
173
.
.
. 1 7 4
„
VII.
„
the Participle
VIII.
„
the Verbal Nouns and Infinitive
179
„
IX.
„
the Gerunds
181
,,
X.
„
the Adverb
„
XL
„
the Preposition .
„
XII.
„
the Conjunction
„
XIII.
„
the Interjection .
.
.
.
.
168
„
Addendum, on suppressed letter j
Index .
.
.
.
.
.
158
. 1 6 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
in
.
178
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1 8 2
. 1 8 5
.
.
184
.
191
. 1 9 3
195
ERRATA.
PAGE
o
10,
1. 22,
for
16,
1. 18,
after
24,
1. 15,
28,
1. 4,
29,
i. 2,
99
J»
1. 9,
1. 9,
for
read
X*
k
c
99
S
J*
&c.
O
x
»
vll
OX
r>
oo
oo
o wl
O u>
»
»
Si +
»
•
vis
Jiae. - Xo
»
.Uafi - J *
Ml
1. 10,
o 5*
J)
1. 16,
30,
1. 1,
31,
1. 19,
35,
1. 2,
JJ
47,
last line,
»
o fi -
Jto,>e
O
bal
1
1)
f/
'•^1
1
»
O x
J •
54,
1. 18,
»
91,
1. 10,
„ VIII....Verb „ I X . ...Conjugation,
p. 100
124,
last line,
127,
first line,
154,
1. 3,
1. 7,
In pp. 10—16
168,
jr
ox , J
J>
&!/
)>
o Ox
O O,
»
add:
»
(See p. 73, 1. 4.)
for
(jf^lil^
>>
>
read
>>
L^^f
5
PREFACE.
T H E Ottoman* Language, A>jJLiULc ismanlfja, is the most
highly polished branch of the great Turkish tongue, which
is spoken, with dialectic variations, across the whole breadth,
nearly, of the middle region of
the continent of Asia,
impinging into Europe, even, in the Ottoman provinces, and
also, in Southern Russia, up to the frontiers of the old
kingdom of Poland.
The Ottoman language is, in its grammar and vocabulary,
fundamentally Turkish.
I t has, however, adopted, and con-
tinues more and more to adopt, as required, a vast number
of Arabic, Persian, and foreign words (Greek, Armenian,
Slavonic, Hungarian, Italian, French, English, & c ) , together
with the use of a few of the grammatical rules of the Arabic
and Persian, which are given as Turkish rules in the following
pages, their origin being in each case specified.
The great Turkish language, ^J
turkje, Ottoman and non-
Ottoman, has been classed by European writers as one of the
" agglutinative" languages ; not inflecting its words, but
X
PREFACE.
" glueing on," as it were, particles, " which were once independent words," to the root-words, and thus forming all
the grammatical and derivative desinences in use.
To my mind, this term "agglutinative"
and its definition,
are inapplicable to the Turkish language in general, and to
the Ottoman Turkish in particular.
These are, essentially
and most truly, inflexional tongues ; none of their inflexions
ever having been " independent words," but modifying particles only.
The distinctive character of all the Turkish languages, or
dialects, is that the root of a whole family, however numerous,
of inflexions and derivations, is always recognizable at sight,
seldom suffering any modification whatever, and always standing at the head of the inflexions or derivations, however
complex in character these may be.
When a modification
of a root-word does take place, it is always of the simplest
kind, always the softening of a hard or sharp consonant into
the corresponding more liquid letter, and always of the final
consonant only of the root.
Thus, a o
or t
sometimes
becomes a a, a j becomes a c, a sharp Arabic d becomes a
soft Persian d , or the Ottoman modification of this latter,
which is then pronounced like our most useful consonant y,
or, in case of a dominant o or u vowel in the root, is pronounced like our consonant w.
PREFACE.
XI
The Ottoman Turkish has more vowel-sounds (eleven in
number) than any other tongue known to me.
As each of
these may have a short and a long modification, they make
twenty-two possible vowels in all.
Every one of these is
distinguished by a special mark in the transliterations of the
present treatise, though it is impossible to attempt any such
differentiation in the Arabic characters to which the Ottoman
language is wedded.
The rules of euphony regulate the pronunciation of every
word in the Ottoman language; perfectly, in all of Turkish
origin; and as far as is practicable, in what is radically
foreign.
Although a compound word is a thing totally unknown to
the Turkish dialects, and of very rare occurrence in Arabic,
the Ottoman language abounds with such, adopted from the
Aryan, compounding Persian.
Persian grammarians and writers first learnt how to mould
into a harmonious whole the incongruous Aryan Persian and
Semitic Arabic elements.
Ottoman ingenuity has gone a
step further, and blended in one noble speech the three
conflicting elements of the Aryan, Semitic and Turanian
classes of vocables.
Fault is found by some with this intermixture of idioms;
xii
PREFACE.
but an Englishman, of all the world, will know how to appreciate a clever mosaic of diction; and a real student of the
language will learn to admire many a true beauty, resulting
from a masterly handling of the materials at his command,
by any first-rate Ottoman literary celebrity, whether prosewriter or poet
NOTE.—The manuscript of the present sketch Grammar was completed
before Christmas, 1882, and copies of my table of identic alphabets have been
in the hands of a few friends for the last four or five years. I have just
had the pleasure and privilege of reading the admirable and exhaustive
treatise on " The Alphabet," by the Rev. Isaac Taylor, and am rejoiced to
find that he has come to the same conclusion as to the identity of the
three; probably at an earlier date than the time, perhaps twenty years ago,
when the idea began to force itself on my mind. I still feel inclined,
however, to hold by the inference that the Phenicians gave the alphabet
to Italy, quite independently of the Greek action which later on doubtlessly
influenced the Italian culture.
LONDON,
September, 1883.
J.W. R.
OTTOMAN T U R K I S H GEAMMAE.
CHAPTER
I.
T H E L E T T E R S AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
SECTION I.
The Number, Order, Forms, and Names of the
Letters.
T H E R E are thirty-one distinct letters used in the Ottoman
language.
Some of these have more than one value ; and
four of them are sometimes consonants, sometimes vowels.
There is also a combination of two letters into one character,
5) or V, la, which Arabian piety has agreed to count as a
letter, and which Persian and Turkish conformity has had no
option but to adopt.
Thirty-two letters have, therefore, to
be named and enumerated, as follows:—
t ellf, v^ be, CJ pe, o te, & se, -. jlm, •. chlm, - ha, ~ khf,
a d&l, j zel, j rl, j ze, j zhe, ^ sin, ^ shin, ^> sad, ^J> did,
\o tl, ]e> zl, c 'ayn, c gayn, c i fe, j qaf, ci) kaf, J lam, ^ mlm,
^ nun, j w6v, 8 he, S lam-ellf, ^ ye.
The foregoing is the ordinary arrangement of the letters of
the Ottoman alphabet, as learnt and repeated by children;
B
2
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
excepting that they are not at first taught to mention, or to
know, either of the three Persian letters, L-> pe, ~ chlm, and
J zhe, which are not contained in the Arabic alphabet, their
sounds and values being unknown to, and unpronounceable
by, an Arab.
I t is called the ellf-be, &> uJM, i.e., the alphabet;
and it might be conveniently styled the alphabet by
forms;
letters of the same form being brought together in it, more
or less.
There is another very different order necessary to be learnt
of the twenty-nine Arabic letters.
I t is called ebjed, j £ l ,
and is arranged in eight conventional words, as follows :
jjssl ebjed, jyt hevwaz, Jaa> huttl,
{L)J^
keleman, yahx* sa'f&s,
oJ^S qarashat, °j£ sakhaz, l&iki dazagila.
The letters of the Arabic alphabet, as arranged in this
ebjed series, have each a numerical value.
The first nine in
order represent the nine units, 1 to 9 ; the second nine stand
for the tens, also in order, 10 to 90 ; the third nine count as
the hundreds, serially, 100 ,to 900 ; the twenty-eighth in the
series, c , stands for 1000; and the last, V, though always
enumerated, has no value of its own, but counts as the sum
of the values of its two components, J 30, I 1; i. e., as 31.
This system appears to have been in use in very early
N times
indeed.
The order of the letters in it is that of the
Hebrew alphabet, as far as this goes; that is, as far as the
end of the sixth word qarashat, izJ*/, with which the Hebrew
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
alphabet terminates.
3
The letters of the two last words
(omitting now all consideration of the factitious V) are
Semitic inventions of a comparatively modern date, and are
modifications, by means of dots, of letters, undotted or dotted,
represented in the Hebrew alphabet.
Thus, £> is modified
from o , ± is from -., i from a, ^o from ^>, k from L>, and
c from c .
This may be called the numeral alphabet
A circumstance that invests this ebjed arrangement with a
European antiquarian interest of the very highest order, is
the fact that it proves, beyond the remotest shadow of a
doubt, the unity of origin of the Semitic (usually taken to
be Phenician, but I imagine it to be much more ancient than
Moses, or even Abraham), the Greek, and the Latin alphabets.
Not only can the now divergent forms of each separate letter
in the series be traced through successive modifications back
to one ancient Phenician character, but the order of the
whole series from I to o
is absolutely identical in the
Arabic (Hebrew, Phenician),. Greek, and Latin alphabets,
as the following synopsis shows.
An additional proof is
furnished by the identity of the numeral values of the letters
in the Arabic and Greek alphabets,—a method totally un^
known to the Latins, who must have had a method of their
own, probably Etruscan, before they received their alphabet
direct from the Phenicians, quite independently of the Greeks,
and quite as early.
4
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Arabic. Greek. Num. Latin.
i
UJ
A
B
C
r
j
A
5
a
E
T
Z
H
@
I
K
A
M
N
U*
A
3
j
c
]»
<s
d
J
r
V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20
30
40
50
60
A
B
C
D
E
F
G.
H
I
K
L
M
N
-
Arabic. Greek. Num.
Latin.
v_*
t
°n
0
P
u°
-
S ioo
j
Ji
o
&
£
j
u*
b
c
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
70
80
90
90 Q
100 R
200 S
300 T
400 U
500 Vr<
600 X
ilr 700
£2 800 Z
3 900 <P
P
S
T
Y
<l>
X
The apparent discrepancies and vacancies occurring on
comparison of the three alphabets and the series of numerals,
are in reality additional proofs of their absolute identity.
The two first letters call for no remark, though it is known
to scholars that the Greek B has been degraded in Ramaic
into a V, and the so-called modern Greek man is unable to
pronounce a b, "writing it, when necessary, /JLTT. This combination in Greek words he reads and pronounces as though
it were written yu/3.
i The Hebrew system is identical with the Arabic is far as its alphabet
goes. Thus: p 100, T 200, VJ 300, J1 400; beyonc this the words are
written in full. This incident is a condemnation of t le Greek system for
the higher numbers.
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
O
The —, r , G, must originally have been a hard g.
In
modern Egyptian, as in Hebrew, and in Greek, it is so pronounced, though the rest of Arabia has softened it into the
sound of our English j or soft g, and though the Latins
hardened it, apparently, into a K value.
The first serious remark is called for on our coming to
the change made by both the Greeks and the Latins of the
Semitic soft aspirate consonant s into their vowel E.
It
would almost seem as though the old Phenicians used that
letter as a final vowel, exactly as is done by the Persians
and Turks at present.
A more remarkable divergency, in-
explicable to me, but parallel to the foregoing conversion,
is the change made by the Greeks of the Semitic hard
aspirate consonant — into their long vowel H, rj, whereas the
Latins preserved the letter as a consonant and as their sole
aspirate, under the same written form as that used by the
Greeks, H, h, and which was in reality the Phenician form
of the letter.
The next remark is as to the Latin F, which the Greekg
long ago discarded from their alphabet, after having in the
first instance adopted it in its Phenician form T, and used it
to represent the numeral 6.
they continued
After discarding it as a letter,
to use it as a numeral, though with a
corrupted, cursive form, s-, to which they still, to this day,
give the Phenician name of Bav, j\j waw, vav.
The Latin
modification of its sound, from a w or v to an / , is of no
6
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
importance.
The Arabs of to-day, having no v letter or
sound in their language, write the name of Her Majesty the
Queen-Empress,
Fiktoriya.
As the Greek phonetic value of Z exactly corresponds to
the Semitic power of j ,
their numeral value being identical,
and the form of the Latin G being merely a modification,
one is tempted to imagine that originally the Latin power
of this letter was soft g, our j , perhaps even our z.
Certain
it is that in some dialects of Italian a z is used in words
where a soft g is found in other dialects.
The Greeks made the Semitic \> into their ® ; the Latins,
having no such sound, discarded the letter.
The Semitic ^ being both a consonant, like our y, and also
a long vowel, 1, it followed, as a matter of course, that both
Greeks and Latins should make it into the vowel L
But the
Latins preserved its consonantal use also as an initial; though
they forgot, or never realized, that it is a consonant in that
position.
We now use a y to express that value; but the
Germans have adopted the Latin modification j to represent
it.
Three western letters, », j , y, are now used for the one
Semitic (j.
The next four letters require no comment; but the Semitic
U* of the eastern Arabs is not a good parallel for the Greek
3.
The Hebrew letter D, that holds its place in the
alphabet, is the equivalent of the Arabic ^>, and the western
Arabs of Morocco transpose the ^
and ^
in their j £ \
7
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
alphabet, making the fifth word yah**, the letter ^
being
the exact equivalent of the Hebrew % in place and in power.
The ^
is a better representative of 3
than the <j*>, but
the two sounds are still very remote from one another.
I should be inclined to suggest that when the Greek alphabet
was formed, the Semitic ^
by the ^p and the (j*».
held the place afterwards taken
The Greek 3
is an attempt to
represent our value sh> as is seen in the name Xerxes, of
which the old Persian was Khsharsha.
The Latins dropped
this letter, whichever it really was.
The conversion of Semitic consonantal c into Greek and
Latin vowel o is not unnatural.
This letter c is absolutely
unpronounceable by any other than a Semitic.
I t is a kind
of convulsion in the throat; and as the two aspirates were
converted into vowels, so was this guttural.
This was so
much the more to be expected, as the Semitic letter I, which
became Greek and Latin a, is also a guttural consonant,
serving likewise as a long vowel on occasions.
I t is the
soft guttural, of which the c is the hard parallel; and an o
may well be looked upon as a hard a.
What the Arabians use as f, i j , is read in Hebrew, as in
Greek and Latin, p.
Even the Arabians, when they have
to express a foreign letter, p, which they cannot pronounce,
write and pronounce it as a b, or as f.
The next letter,
or JJ£, is dropped in both Greek and Latin.
^
I t appears never
to have been used in Greek, even as a numeral; differing in
8
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
that respect from the T .
When this latter was dropped as a
letter, it was retained, modified, as a numeral.
omitted letter ^
But the
became the numeral o-a/zTrc, J^ representing
900 instead of 90.
From this omission of the ^y> from its proper place in the
Greek numerals, a slip of the whole subsequent series became
necessary, so that each letter, from j , Q, Q, onwards, had a
higher numeral value by one degree in the Semitic than its
representative had in Greek; j
standing for 100, while <?
has the value of 90 only; j represents 200, while P stands
for 100 only; &c.
This slip is very remarkable; it was filled
up further on by % 900.
Although the six " additional" letters of the Semitic and
Greek alphabets have no relation to each other as representatives of sound, their numerical value goes on exactly
in the same order observed in those of the original series,
and with the same slip up t o e , representing 1000, while ^
is only 900.
On the other hand, however, the three Greek
additional, v, <p, x, are evidently the originals in form of the
Latin u, v, x, and the Semitic b is possibly the original of the
Latin Z.
This letter is usually attributed, by ancient and
modern authors, to the Greek £, which it certainly agrees
with in shape, though not in sound.
The forms of the Arabic and Persian Ottoman letters given
above are those of the isolated characters.
They are liable
9
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
to various modifications, according to their being initials,
medials, or finals, in a combination of written letters.
In the first place, they may, in this respect, be conveniently
divided into two classes : those which join on to the following
J
** ° "
JJ
2il
nil
1
letters in writing a combination, JUL>J *~»jj* hnrufa vwasliyye,
and those which do not so join, ALSLO ^JJJ^ h4ru.fi. m4nfaslla.
The latter, the less numerous class, a r e : I, a, i , j , J , J , j and
O x
O S
O '
O x
O x
O x
Ox
O x
V; eight in number ; thus, t-,1, C ^ , ~i, L-^, ^ J , Jflj, JJ, *V.
X
OX
O^
Ox
O X
O''
x
O «,
O
^
All the others join, as b , ^ J , o * , <-*J , C*J, J , l**> s*^> V*"'
Ox
x
O x
O x
O
X
O X
Ox
X
O x
O x
OX
O ^ x " Ox
Ox
> . , U , L-^i, LyA-O, C - f i , <£jfi>, Jo, W , <-*C > V-A9, C^S, <^S, J , ^ * ,
Ox
„.
ox
J , U , L-*£ , &C.
All the letters join on in writing to the character that
precedes them (other than to the eight enumerated above)
whether they be themselves finals or medials.
-
OX
O x
O x
As finals their
O X
OX
O ^
O^
forms are as follows : b , c - ^ , e^a., c » , c*«*», J*, ^ , ^*»»
Ox
Ox
OX
Ox
Ox
°£xx
OX
O^
O-'
Jo, J ^ , ^ , ^ 9 , J i , J 3 , ^ j j , ^ j i * ,
Ox
C
Ox
Ox
Ox
Ox
J
x
U
x
O -"
O x
O
xx
Oxx
oxx
Ox
xx
L-ftJ, jj»., <<*U, J&>, **», ^ j ^ , A-O, J o , JU?.
are figured thus: v^b, v-***., j * , ^ ,
°~
•
Cx
Ox
tf,u^,l»,lij.,gjgi
O" "
-..
,
As medials they
O xx
xx
x x
°
** S
Js&, ^ j U°, W**, <_*£",
1
It having been found impracticable to mark in type the varying
Ottoman tone-values of the Arabian and Persian long vowels, the student
must learn to supply the numbers 1 and 2 over the long-vowel marks.
For this purpose, he must apply the rules for the short vowels, according
as they follow, or are followed by, a consonant of tbe soft or hard class.
By practice, the correct habit will be thus acquired; the case of the short
vowels teaching the tone, which will then be instinctively used when the
vowel is long.
10
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
O O *»
OC*»
O O/
O O *•
OO -
OO/
O O «•
O O *»
0<*#»
0 XX
O ^T
0 * J ? , ^.Ifi , ^J^aS , ^*<a*') ^la«*» , Jta> , C£A*J , 6 J W , ^>iL* , J£<?, loXi ,
O^^
OO/
O , *
OO-
O
^JS, ^ j , eui*., J4*., ££*>.
Those which do not join are, as
O x
medials, thus written:
OO/
OO/
O xx
O C
/OJ-/
O O*
C
u-A?, ^ J A , J j j , !^9, *)»>, 8^*£, ^>y>, ji.
Longer combinations vary, ad infinitum, as follows : KZJ>J> ,
0
' .
*'
o
^ < ~
o if*
j
o
J
*
0
«•#•>
o 9
*<
-5
'y^
/o/o
j •>
o
O/oo
-»
u J L c , H ^ ' J k - j l o , ^ X j k l i l o , J * ^ > ^ * * > Ali^jJjl, d i J / ^ j j
o 0^0
*
*•
'
'
*
-
( ^ ^ a u ^ t , AJUUob , &C.
Besides the simple names of the letters hitherto mentioned,
most of the characters have other, more complicated appellations.
/O/
The 1 is usually called hemze, *}+&, when a consonant, in an
Arabic word ; and ellfl memdude, i±jX+* u-all, prolonged I,
when it is a long vowel, initial or medial.
I t can never be
a long final vowel in an Arabic word, being then always
followed by another consonant hemze ; as, At* sha'&, l\j>. jeza'A,
&c.
final.
It is called ellfl m£qsure,
call, shortened I, when
I t is then more commonly written ^
Arabic; but by no means always so.
in classical
In Persian and Turkish,
or foreign words, the 1 is always a vowel, but is called
indifferently elif and hemze.
I t is always long in Persian
words, when medial or final. When initial in a Persian word,
it may be short or long.
When a long initial, it is distin-
guished, as in Arabic, by the sign medd, ^ (") over it, as :
A. w=JT afet, P . LJ\ ab.
When a short initial, it is, in Arabic,
generally a consonant, and may take the sound 'a or 'e, of '1,
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
or of 'u.
11
When a short initial in Persian, it is a vowel, and
may have any one of the three values 4 or e> 1, u.
The details
of the powers of I in Turkish words are given further on.
The L-J is distinguished from the other letters of the same
isolated form by being called t±>j+ ^ (ba'l muv&hh&de), the
o
*
*oJ
single-dotted c-> ; as the o is named O I J U gl> (ta'l musnat),
the double-dotted o , and the & is designated A*k* glj (sa'l m i
sellese), the triply-dotted e*.
The o is further distinguished
from the L>, also named tk9 IL, by being called c ^ S *U (ta'l
q&r&shlt), the o
of (the word) t = ^ - 9 ; while k is named
^ » sl£> (ta'l hutti), the L o / (the word^JLL.
Again, the o
is distinguished, as a medial or initial, from the <_$, then identical in form with it, by being called a j y o l i L (musnatl fevqiyye), superiorly double-dotted;
whereas the ^
is then
termed A J I ^ oUi* (musnatl tdhtanlyye), inferiorly
double-
dotted. The ^ is also called jsJ &>
t (ea'l sdkh&z), ^ e ti> 0 / js?.
The t-j might be called ±g\ s\t (ba'l ebjed), the L-> O/ ±&\; but
I do not recollect the expression.
I t is, however, distin-
guished from the Persian LJ by being designated *~-\JZ fb (ba'l
c
arabiyye), *fo Arabian <_>, the t^ being called *u-^U ^
(ba'l
farislyye), and a-*sP *G (ba'l 'ajitmiyye), the Persian t j .
The simple name of the -j., +*?» jim, sufficiently distinguishes
the letter from all other Arabic characters.
no other designation in purely Arabic works.
It has, therefore,
I t is, however,
12
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
distinguished from the Persian — by their being styled respectively i+jjs. ++>> (jIml e areblyye), and 6~»j* ^
or ju»gp ^
(jiml farlslyye),
(jiml 'ajdmlyye).
The — and ± are distinguished from one another by the
terms ,»Qtt 5U. (ha'l mfthmele) neglected (undotted) —, and
&+*?* ell (kha'l mu jeme) distinguished (dotted) £ , respectively.
In Persian they are often called JaLlo &U (ha'l bi-nuqta) dotless
_ , and^bdu^ii^ll (kha'l nuqtd-dar) dot-possessing (dotted) ±.
These two pairs of Arabic and Persian adjectives go all
through the alphabet, in the cases where a dot is the sole
distinction between two letters of the same form; as, A* ^ Jta
(dall nruhmel£) ^ ; &*s?* J l i (zall mujeme) j .
So also the
distinctions by the words of the " numeral alphabet;" as,
**} J b (dall ebjed), i±? J l i (zall sakhaz), i ; e>^3 ^ (ra'l
qar&sh&t)^ ; jja> gU (za'i hevvez) ; ; & c ; AI^O tyc*> (sinl mnhmele), ^ ; <u^** c^» (shlnl mu'jeme), JL ; &c.
When we come to u J , the written names of the letters are
so distinct of themselves, that no addition is necessary for
U (fa), ^ ;
«_jlf (qaf), j ; <..& (kyaf, vulgarly
kef), <*J;
^V (lam), J ; ^ * (mim), ^ ; ^ y (nun), ^ ; J\J (vwaw), j .
With s a distinction again comes in, to differentiate the letter
from —. We, therefore, say ^
&U
(ha'l hevvez), *; as the
- is then termed J a * &L. (ha'l hutti); and ^ is termed, as
13
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
mentioned above, AJUSS o b i * sb (ya'l musnatl tahtanlyye);
being also called Ja* s b (ya'l huttl).
The Persian L-» and — are distinguished as is described
above; and in like manner the J is called ju^li $U (za'i farlelyye), and Ajj^P ^ (za'i'ajamlyye).
There remains now to distinguish, among consonants, the
different sorts of d used in Ottoman Turkish, and to point
out their several names, as follows : The original Arabian
d is named t^je. v_io (kyafl fareblyy&, vulg. kefl'arebi), the
Arabian d ; its value is that of our h
This letter was next
used by the Persians for their hard g; it was then, and is
still, distinguished by the name of A ^ U UJO (kyafl farlslyye,
vulg. kyafl farlsi, kefl farlsi), and A!*S? u_i\T(kyafl 'aj&miyye,
vulg. kefl eajaml).
This variety is sometimes distinguished, in
writing, in one or the other of two different methods.
The
Persians themselves mark the difference by doubling the
upper dash of the letter in all its written variations—isolated,
initial, medial, and final; thus : CsJTj^^K*, (&*•» ; whereas the
original Arabian d , when isolated or final, has no dash at all;
O J/-
O Jo
as, dy.l, do? I; and a single dash, when initial or medial; thus:
jj£, A^J, also shaped^j^s=>, AI^=U.
When these two values of the one letter d passed into use
for the Ottoman language, a new mode of distinguishing the
Persian from the Arabian variety was introduced.
It con-
14
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
sisted of placing three dots over the Arabian form of the d,
together with a single dash in non-final positions; thus: d, j £
°^ \*
J*J> , di-»; thus marking the Persian hard g value of the
letter.
But this letter, so differentiated in Persian writing, received
in Ottoman Turkish a third value, that of our consonantal y,
as a softened variety of its Persian value of hard g.
This
Ottoman value never occurs elsewhere than at the end, or
in the middle of a word ; as : d> (bey), d*£j (beyanmek),
^ K j (ylylrml), di»J/ol (lyranmek). In the middle of a word
it may begin or end a syllable : be-yan-mek, ly-ran-mek.
When this letter follows a u vowel, and is itself followed by
yJ
an e vowel, it glides into the value of our w; as A_5^
(suwe), &c.
In Turkish, the d, retaining the same form, received
another value still, the fourth; being then for distinction's
sake, called surd &, ^j> J^> (saghir nun) ; as in dl (en),
<j*^»t (aiimaq), d^-» (sdnln), jj£z*J» (qdMr)>
is never initial.
This value
When medial, it may begin, and may also
end a syllable, as it ends many words.
The three dots over
the d, mentioned in the preceding paragraph, are used by
some to designate this Turkish value of surd ^ ; and at other
times a single dot is used for that purpose, leaving the three
dots to mark the Persian value of the letter.
These varying
15
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
values of the ts) constitute a serious difficulty in learning to
read Ottoman Turkish.
Surd ^ is here transliterated n.
A similar variation in the phonetic value of the Arabic
letter c. is to be observed in Ottoman
Turkish
words.
Originally it is, in an Ottoman mouth, a simple hard g ; as :
i l l l i (gallb), CJX\ (agleb), i l j i i - I (maglub).
In Turkish
words it has a softened value, very much like that of our gh, but
still more softened, even to the point of practically disappearing from the pronunciation; as : cl_L (dagb, almost daw),
ttUlL (daghffi, almost da'in), i l L (dagha, da'a), ^ l t (daghi,
dM), ^ i l l L (d&'dan), oill* (da'di), &c.
When preceded by
an o or u vowel, the c , in Turkish words, if followed by a
vowel, glides into the value of our w, even as our own gh
O
^
J
does in the word throughout (pronounced thruwoui); a s : ^\s.Jo
O
«•
O J
J
J
(dowHn), ^Uj-d (s6w&n), j j ^ j i (qowush); or it nearly disO J
JO
appears in pronunciation, as before ; thus : Jo^j\
J
Jo
J
(61duwum,
J
or oldu'um), ijijj^l (olduwii, or Aldu'u).
SECTION I I
The Phonetic
Values of the Letters and Vowel-
Points, the Uses of the other Orthographic Signs, our System
of Transliteration, and the Doctrine of Ottoman Euphony.
We must divide the thirty-one Ottoman letters (omitting V)
into vowels and consonants.
But it must first be premised
that every letter is sometimes a consonant, while only four of
16
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
them are sometimes vowels.
These are \, j9*>
ij•
others, twenty-seven in form, are always consonants.
All the
I t will
be more convenient to treat of the four vowel letters first,
together with the vowel-points, which are not letters, but
simply marks.
Usually, the vowel-points, three only in number, are not
written ; they are supposed to be known.
But, in children's
books, in Qur'ans, in books of devotion, &c, they are written;
and sometimes in other books and papers also.
o J o J
The vowel-points are named : 1, ustun, ^JZ**J\ (over), the
mark of which is a short diagonal from the right downwards
towards the left, placed over any consonant; as: *.->, o , -., &c;
2, esere, t^\
(no meaning), a similar diagonal, marked under
J
•» J
any consonant; as: —, ±9 ±, i, &c; 3, uturu, jjj>j\ (no meaning), a small j-shaped mark, placed over any consonant; as:
j
J
J
J
.
.
j » J ' J9 u*> <^c*
These vowel-points mark, originally, the three Arabic short
vowels, to which the additional Ottoman vowel-sounds, a, a, 4
have been added.
The ustun has the value of & or e, accord-
ing to the consonant, & c , accompanying i t ; the esere has the
value of 1 or i ; and the uturu that of 6, u, u, u, also according
to its accompaniment.
The short vowel-sound indicated by each of these three
marks always follows, in pronunciation, the sound of the consonant to which it is appended; so that we have the following
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHT.
17
Ottoman syllabary, No. 1 : v-> ba, ba, ba, ba, be ; L-J b}, b! ;
t-> b6, bu, bu, b u ; and so on through the alphabet.
When it is required to make the vowel long, one of the
o
three Arabic letters of prolongation, x* <—*j>- (harfl medd, pi.
±+ ^ijj>- hurufi medd), has to be added to the consonant, still
marked with its short vowel-point.
The letters of prolonga-
tion, true long vowels, are 1, j , ^ ; of which \ always accompanies ustun, ,j always accompanies esere; and j always
accompanies nturu.
We now have Ottoman syllabary No. 2,
as follows : \> ba, b a ; ^ J bl, bi ; j) b5, bu, bu, b u ; &c.
We thus see that there are eleven Ottoman short vowels,
and eight long.
Our system of transliterating them is also
made apparent.
I t is the simple method of using a or e to
represent ustun, i to represent esere, and o or u to represent
uturu.
As these vowel-points shade off in phonetic value, we
use &, £, &, 4, or e for ustun ; 1 or i for esere; and 6, or u, 4,
d, for uturu.
After long consideration, we have for some
years past adopted this system, as the simplest, and, on the
whole, the most rational.
The values of these Ottoman vowels are those of the vowels
in the following eleven words.
They are all familiar English
words, excepting the French tu9 the vowel of which is
unknown in ordinary English, though it exists in the dialects
of some of our counties.
These words are: far, war, a-(bove),
c
18
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
pan, pen; pin, girl; so; put, tu, cur.
We mark the vowels
of these eleven guide-words to the Ottoman pronunciation, in
the order in which they stand : far, w&r, dbove, pdn, pen, pin,
girl, si, put, tu, c u r ; and for the eight Ottoman long vowels
we use: far, war, pin, girl, so, put, tu, cur.
That is, nineteen
Ottoman vowel-sounds in all, long and short.
The student
has but to remember the series of ten English words and one
French, to become possessed of the key to the Ottoman vowel
pronunciation.
But he must learn never to swerve from the
values of those guide-vowels.
To an Englishman, with our
slouchy method, this unswervingoess is the most difficult
point; but, with a little patience at first, it is to be achieved.
He must practice himself in pronouncing pasha, lib (not
pdsblw), b&b&, \Ai (not b4yb&), dan, ^
(not sen), ben, ^
(not den), san,
^
(which he will at once pronounce right),
O ++ O
O /
/O
O
J
is-(temek), (*LLJ, fir-(lamaq), j - o ^ i , q6l, Jj-i (not q&l),
o
j
o
J
o
j
qui, JjS (not qui), yuz, j ^ (not yuz or yuz), and g y u z , ^ ^
(not gyuz or gyuz, though these are also words or syllables).
The English student of Turkish has to exert his utmost
care, in respect of the Ottoman vowels, to break himself of
the home method of pronouncing a short vowel, and the same
vowel when long, in two very different ways.
The Ottoman
vowels remain alw«iys p u r e ; they never change in phonetic
value with a change in phonetic quantity; thus, a is always a
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
19
made long; I is always 1 long, 6 is always 6 long, u is always
u long, &c, in the same word and its derivatives.
The student will have noticed above the Arabic sign of
quiescence of a consonant.
I t is named jezm, *j>. and is never
placed over a vowel, long or short.
The fourth Ottoman vowel letter, *, which, when a consonant, is the soft aspirate h, is also derived from the Arabic,
but has a special history of its own.
This letter is never
used as a vowel in Arabic in any other position than that of
a final to a noun, substantive or adjective, usually of the
feminine
gender,
sometimes singular,
irregular (hrolcen, technically) plural.
and sometimes
an
Such are the words—
ALU> khalife, &1* snnne, AI-A. hasana, A-J? tayylbe, &c.
In Arabic, these pronunciations (as modified in Ottoman
Turkish, as to the vowels, and as to the consonants) are those
of the words when they close a sentence or clause in classical
reading.
They are also the pronunciations of the words in
modern conversational Arabic.
But, originally, and to this day, in classical Arabic, those
and all such words end not in a vowel at all.
They all end
in a consonant, in a letter t ; which, for certain grammatical
reasons, is never figured o , but always appears in the shape
of a letter s surmounted by the two dots of the o , thus l.
Our specimen words are therefore, originally, i i i i . kh&lifet,
l^t sunnet, AIM-A. hasanet, i^-Jo tayylbet.
There are other
20
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
vowels and consonants to be added to the termination of these
in classical Arabic, to mark the case-endings or declinations.
Thus Si-Is., when definite, may be marked iftii. khallfetu for
the nominative, iLli. khalif&tl for the genitive, iiLk. khaiiftt& for
the accusative.
X X
When indefinite, it becomes iU&. khalif&tun,
£"
X
iflii. khalif&tln, AAJ» khalif&tHn.
In all these cases, when final
in a sentence or clause, the case-endings are dropped from
the pronunciation, though still written in vowel-pointed books,
and the word becomes simply khalif& throughout.
These
indefinite case-ending marks are called in Turkish jjj>j\ ,>ot
(Ikl uturu), double uturu, »^J ^Si\
(Ikl &s&&), double bs&b,
and ^jL-jl je-^-i^ (Ikl As tun) double ustun.
A consideration now arose.
In classical Arabic, final con-
sonants may be either silent, or vocal with any one of the
O x x- "^"
three short vowels.
J O " £x-
Thus : o y s j k&t&bet, cu~. ; > k&tebtu,
KZ+AS ketebta, o»-i3 k&tebtl.
When such words are final in
a sentence or clause, the final consonant is made silent; so
that we have k&t&bet, as before, for the first; but ketebt for
J
all three of the remaining words.
0O/
becomes nasr, as does ^aS
O'
ana
x
Ox
x Ox
So ^ * 3 , j^>, j*>, final,
2 Ox
* ^»5, though ^oi (always dis-
tinguished by a servile I being added—]^o5 n&sran) remains
fully pronounced, or only loses the sound of the final n, and
is read nasra.
When the final I of iaJi. khdlifi, and similar words, was
dropped from the pronunciation, the letter might have been
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
21
dropped in writing also; for v_Li&. would read khalife just
as well.
I t could, however, and would, be read LJLU. khalif?
as Europe has done in making it into Caliph.
I t was neces-
sary, then, to devise a method which should prevent the
suppression of the vowel belonging to the last consonant of
such words, and yet not be liable to be pronounced as a t
with the case-endings.
This convenient method was dis-
covered by the arrangement adopted of suppressing the dots
of the I, and leaving the nude A appended to the word, as
A.aJL&. khalife, &c.
By this method final A in such words
became virtually a vowel in Arabic, though it is never mentioned as such in Arabic grammars or lexicons.
Persian has a very large number of nouns, substantive and
adjective, that end in an ustun vowel.
When the Arabic
alphabet became the sole mode of writing Persian, the Arab
teachers would naturally use their quasi-vowel final 5 to
represent that final Persian sound.
Thus, *j> ber&, a^L* SU-
gurne, «^U1 amade, »ju**», reside, &c, were written.
The B
was thus made a vowel in Persian also, when final. I t was
even made to follow one of the other two short vowels in
very rare cases, when no other device was available.
Thus
we have the numeral A-*» (si), three (in Ottoman Turkish
usually pronounced A*> se), & (kl), that, A*, (chl), what, that.
When, by another historical step, Turkish began to be
written in the Arabic characters modified by the special
22
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Persian letters (Turkish scribes learning the method from
Persian teachers in the land of Persia conquered by Turkish
invaders, who there embraced Islam), the use of s as a final
vowel was found so convenient as to be naturally adopted.
So AJI ebe, ALI £d&, &c, were written.
Now, a whole class of
Turkish gerunds, optatives, and imperatives of the third
person, end with this vowel ; we, therefore, have sjjl ld&,
*±S glde, %j£ gyure, JlS qala, \j<& qir&, &c.
A further step was, therefore, possible to be taken in
Ottoman Turkish, from which Persian writers had and have
shrunk.
The vowel s was used as a medial also, whenever it
was found that its introduction served to distinguish two
words written alike, but pronounced differently.
bllmek, could also be read d J b bllemek.
Thus IEJUJ
If the vowel-points
were always marked, they would suffice for this case ; but
they are generally omitted.
ALJ was already in use.
- i
The gerund and optative AL or
By writing d j b bllmek and ISLALJ
•
bllemek, the distinction was made clear.
*
~
i
Hence, s as a medial
Ottoman vowel, always indicating a preceding nstnn short
vowel-point, became fully established.
This medial or final
Turkish vowel 5 never joins on to the next letter in writing;
as, (sLoi^j! nremek, AJIALJI 6diya\
From this sketch of the history of final and medial vowel a,
we see plainly how fundamentally erroneous is the common
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
23
European (or rather English) method of transliterating such
words with a final or medial h.
The nearest approach to
correctness o f which our orthography is capable, since we
possess not the French e or German e, is to write all such
words with a final a, as khalifa, Fatima, Mehha,
Brusa, &c.
Jeddah;
Medina,
These are usual; but **>. Jidda, is usually spelt
while J^-ALJ Qdhira (usually Cairo), AS&°
Tanja
(usually Tangiers), &c, have been made into monstrosities.
The phonetic value of an initial I is at first a difficulty
to the European student, inasmuch as there appears to be
nothing like it in Western languages.
This, however, is
more apparent than real, when fully explained.
We must remember that in Arabic the initial I or I is a
consonant, not a vowel.
Like any other initial consonant,
it takes the three short vowel-points, and is then pronounced:
1 3e, I 4, I >u.
When it became a Persian letter, it was
generally named hemze, as it is usually called in Arabic when
a consonant (but never when a vowel of prolongation, or final
and short); although, in Persian words, it is always a vowel,
whether initial, medial, or final. With the short vowel-points,
this initial \ is always a short vowel in Persian words, and
the Arabian hemze sign is never placed over i t ; t h u s : j \ er,
j \ ez, f^J
esb, eu*»\ est, & c ; sL*»l ispah, ^Uli^l Isfahan, &c;
i $ ulag, &c.
24
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
This initial short vowel Persian system was extended (in
practice, not in theory) to all Arabic words used in Persian
with I for their initial letter.
But the Arabic consonantal I
was then taken (in practice) to be a Persian vowel 1.
Thus,
\J\y) was read ebvab, Ij^l Ibtlda, Jj^l u s u l ; &c.
When, in Arabic, the vowel of the initial consonantal I
became long, then, as with any other initial consonant, a vowel
letter of prolongation,—a long vowel letter,—was appended to
the i ; thus: II, pronounced >i, jl> pronounced>u, ^ 1 , pronounced >i.
This system passed also into use in Persian words, the
Arabic hemze sign being omitted, even in Arabic words
adopted into Persian ; and thus the combinations II, j l , <^l,
became the initial Persian long vowels ; being pronounced
_
respectively—a, u, I.
o
£
o * j
ox
Thus : u^ll ab, J^\ ubar, y^\ Tzed ; and
T
w ith words originally Arabic: Ul aba, Vjl ula, UJI Ima ; <fcc.
The Arabians found the use of II somewhat cumbersome.
They therefore invented a sign, ", called medda, s j * , and x„
niedd, to be placed over an initial 1, with or without the
hemze sign, to designate the long vowel.
Ul, they wrote U >aba, &c.
Thus, instead of
The Persians adopted this system
also, writing i^l ab instead of i^W.
The double \ system,
however, is still to be found in use in native Persian lexicons;
where the first section of chapter I is^ generally figured with
the two II, not with I.
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
25
It may be useful to mention here, that the Arabian writers
employ this sign of medd to mark a medial or a quasi-final
long vowel \ , whenever this is followed in the word by a
heinze, i. e.9 a consonantal I.
5
>alina, l ] ^ hamra u, &c.
Thus they write ^jlsL** yetesa^
These medd signs are omitted in
Persian, as well as the final *; so that \j+>> h&mra is written,
as well as pronounced, for ^*&.; <fec.
If a medial consonantal hemze in an Arabic word be followed by a long vowel I, the two are united, as in the initial I,
into one I letter with the medd sign over i t ; as J U ma5al (for
J1U).
This also is adopted in Persian with such Arabic words
as it occurs i n ; not being found in any original Persian
words.
The medd sign is also used, in Arabic, sometimes taking
another form, that of a small, perpendicular ', to mark the
traditional omission, in writing (not in pronunciation), of a
ot
long vowel I in a few well-known words, such as all >llah (for
^i\\ ^ \ nlahi (for j»"i\), {j^J
or ^ ^ rahman (for J^j),
&c
This perpendicular small ellf-shaped medd is also placed,
in Arabic, sometimes over a letter j , to mark that, though
radically a j , it is a long vowel I in pronunciation, in the
two words only, i^.
O
hay at (usually written »L>., in Persian
--
I
O .
'
and Turkish oLa.) and S^U salat (usually written »5L©, in
Persian and Turkish o5L>).
26
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
The medd sign is sometimes placed, in Arabic, over a long
vowel j or (j, when they are followed by a hemze in the same
word ; as in ^
su>u, 2 _*. jpa.
This peculiarity is not used
in Persian or Turkish.
I t is also sometimes placed over a long vowel medial t,
when this letter is followed by a reduplicated consonant in
the same word; as: »^U madde; it is not used in Persian or
Turkish.
Such of the foregoing Arabic usages as have been adopted
in Persian for words of Persian or of Arabic origin, are also
employed in Ottoman Turkish for the same words j though
they are sometimes omitted in ordinary writing.
We now come to a purely Ottoman use of the medd sign,
utterly unknown in Arabic and Persian.
Thus : Whenever
an initial vowel 1 of an Ottoman word of Turkish or foreign
(European or Indian) origin has the short sound of a or a,
the medd sign is placed over it, as a distinction from the
initial sounds a, a, e; as : J j ^ T amiral (French), ^ 1 arl,
JpTada (Turkish); but tlillf asalet, j y avval (Arabic), J er
(Turkish; also Persian; but two different words).
Another Ottoman peculiarity connected with the initial 1,
when followed in writing by a vowel j or ^ , is that these two
vowels are not necessarily long vowels in words of Turkish
or foreign origin.
Thus o j l 6t, JJ\ ur, yj\ utu, c*L>jl utmek,
Jlrfjt oflchal, illvj-jl irlanda.
They may then be called
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
directing vowels.
27
In many old or provincial books and
writings, these directing vowels are often or systematically
omitted, the writers, from habit, or system, adhering to the
original Arabic method of spelling by short vowel-points, for
the most part omitted in current writing.
This makes such
books and papers immensely difficult to read and understand.
The three Arabic long vowels, I, j , fj, having thus acquired
a footing as Ottoman short directing-vowels, when following
an initial letter I, it was found convenient to extend the
system, and to use them as short directing-vowels, following
initial or medial consonants, thereby departing entirely from
the Arabic and Persian systems.
There is no method in use
for distinguishing a long vowel letter from a short one in an
Ottoman word of Turkish or foreign origin.
We may almost
venture to say that all such medial vowel-letters in Turkish
and foreign Ottoman words are short vowels ; whereas, in
Arabic and Persian words they are always long.
yib bash, JJS q!r, ^y
O-OJ
J
. C + Cf
Thus:
qush, jf*}UI aghlamaq, <jd)?o sizlldl,
J
,OJ
fjj)j> bozulmaq, d J ) ^ buzulmek, xs^jy
O ^OJ
J^-
gyuruldu,
J,
div^
gyurunmek.
Hitherto we have considered only the open syllables, that
is, those which end with a vowel.
We have now to treat
of the closed syllables,—those which end with a consonant.
In the original Arabic system, when a word or syllable
ended with a quiescent consonant,—a consonant not followed
28
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
by a vowel sound or vowel letter in the same syllable,—such
consonant was marked, in pointed writings, by the sign °
placed over it, which, as was before remarked, is called jezra,
+)>.. T h u s : L-*f beb, c->li bab, c-^ bub, L-*-J bib, &c.
I t is a rule in classical Arabic, that two quiescent consonants cannot follow one another in the same syllable,
whether as initials or as finals. Such a word or syllable as
crusty tart, blurt, flirt, & c , is unknown.
As far as two such
initial consonants go, this rule prevails in the vernacular
Arabic also, and has passed into the Persian and Turkish.
Foreign words with such combinations of initial consonants
to words or syllables are treated in one of two ways.
When
initial in a word, they may be separated into two syllables,
either by a servile vowel I, generally with an esere vowel,
being prefixed ; or by a vowel, generally eser£, being intercalated ; and when the combination is initial to a non-initial
syllable of a word, the latter method alone is used, or the
syllables are so divided as to separate the two consonants.
Thus : KXifia has become *Jsl Iqlim, kral has become J^i qlral,
oo
o^
o
prince has become gj^ pirlnj, and Svizzera has become j*Ly>\
Isvlcher.
In classical Arabic, a final word in a phrase or clause could
terminate in two quiescent consonants ; a s : k>. rabt, As urn,
c^»
huzn, &c. This liberty is much used in Persiau, Turkish,
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
29
and foreign, as well as in Arabic Ottoman words; thus :
O O JJ
COf
OO
0°
o-*,a durust, ^,1 ard, ^ ^ plrins, 2 ^ plrlnj {prince); &c.
When a letter in an Arabic word ends one syllable, and
begins the next in the same word, it is not written twice,
but one sole letter is made to serve for the two, in pointed
writings, by having a special mark, *, placed over it.
This
mark is an abbreviation of the Arabic word jJt» shedd, which
means a strengthening, corroboration, reduplication.
Thus we
have, oJ-i» shlddet, o l c 'Met, JI& baqqal, jpos. 'attar, j * medd,
Mi
WJ
j j vldd, J umm, &c.
It is a sine qua non in Ottoman reading,
and in correct speaking, to redouble such letters in the pronunciation. We can derive a correct idea of this reduplication
by studying our expressions, mid-day, ill-luck, run next, &c.
But, if such reduplicated Arabic word has passed into vernacular Ottoman use, then the redoubling is excused
ordinary conversation ; as in the words J l L baqal,
in
.Uac
aqtar ; &c.
This reduplication is really unknown in Persian; consequently, reduplicated Arabic words are much
used
in
o
Persian without reduplication ; thus ki. is generally used in
Persian as k» khat, and has thence, as similar words, passed
into Ottoman Turkish.
On the other hand, pedantic imitation
has commonly given to a few Persian words the Arabic peculiarity of reduplication, so passing into Ottoman also : thus,
30
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
j ^ per (a wing), is sometimes pronounced ^ perr ; and sjj^
perende, »jj^ perrende ; &c.
This reduplicating system is not used in correctly writing
Turkish Ottoman words, but it is sometimes met with in
incorrect writings.
The two letters should be written in
O JO
J
O JO J
full in such Turkish words; thus, J-Dj^ ehulluq, J J J J J billuq,
etU*l emmek, &c.
The Arabic word hemze, »}•&, besides being a name for the
letter I, as before explained, is also the name of an orthographic sign, mark, or point, very variously used in Arabic
and Persian.
Most of the rules concerning it, which derive
from the two languages, have passed into Ottoman Turkish,
with an addition or two used in the Turkish transliteration
of foreign words.
Turkish words never require the sign.
The hemze sign, ', would appear to be a diminutive head of
the letter c , thus indicating to the eye the guttural nature of
the vocal enunciation it represents; which is, in fact, a softened
choke, in an Arab mouth.
But in Persian and Turkish pro-
nunciation it is a slight hiatus, at the beginning of a noninitial syllable, or at t h e end of any syllable, initial, medial
or final.
I t is placed over a letter when it bears the ustun
or utfirii vowel, or is quiescent; under it, generally, with the
esere vowel.
The hJmze, in a word of Arabic origin, always represents
a consonantal letter I, sometimes radical, sometimes servile.
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
31
In Persian words, the theory of the sign is the same as in
Arabic, but the sign itself is always servile, and either final
or nearly so.
When a hemze, radical or servile, is initial in an Arabic
word, it is never written or pronounced in Persian or Turkish.
The 1 letter is then taken to be a vowel, and is treated accordingly.
Thus, J J >emel, becomes J*l emel; J J ! 'Ibll, becomes
o>
Jjl Ibll ; J ' k m , becomes J Amm.
and short.
:
Oj
S>
These are all radicals,
So again, JQ\ ^efkyar, becomes J6s\ efkyar ; JlJ\
>lqbal, becomes JUI iqbai; .j*l 'umur, becomes jy\ umur; &c.
These initials are all servile, and short.
The modes and
doctrine of making them into long vowels have already been
described.
In Persian, Turkish, and foreign words, an initial
I is always a vowel, and is made long in the same way as if
the word were of Arabic origin, as has been said before.
When a hemze, radical or servile, in an Arabic word, is
medial or final, a rather numerous body of rules come into
play.
Sometimes the letter I, then always called hemz6, is
written, together with the h£mz& sign over it, \ (as in ^ K re>s),
and sometimes the h6mz& sign above is figured, as a letter
OJ f*
**
now, without the I, in the body of the word; as in ^jJ^L^e
yetesa>elun.
In the former of these two cases, the hemze is
o X
usually a final, quiescent consonant in its syllable; as, eusi*
o A.
re>-fet, ^ U rae>-men, &c. In the latter case, the hemz& is the
initial consonant of its medial or final syllable, movent with
32
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
ftstun ; as in l*ja. juz->an, \%y>. jeza'an, &c.
But it may also
be both; that is, a quiescent hemze may terminate one syllable,
while another, a movent h&mze, may begin the next syllable.
In this case, as with any other consonant so occurri ig, one 1
alone is written, with a hemze sign over i t ; and ar ove this,
the teshdid sign is superadded, with an ustun sign over it
a
again ; as in JliJ thfb->h\. This step never occurs ii Turkish
phrases ; but the explanation is needed, so as to m ike clear
what follows.
This reduplicated medial hemze, movent with istun, is
sometimes followed by a long vowel 1.
In this case, instead
of writing, for instance, ^Wj ra>->as, the two letters I are combined into one, with the signs medd and hemze, anc without
the ustun vowel; thus, ^ T . ra>->as, as before.
This ;ombiua-
tion is of very rare occurrence, happening only in d erivative
words, of which the root is triliteral, with hemze for second
radical.
But a movent initial hemze of a syllable, medial ii a word,
may be followed by a long vowel \, without being redi plicated.
I t is then figured by a single written I with the hemze and
medd signs ; as, JU ma'al, &c.
These combinations, when used in Turkish, drop the hemze
and teshdid signs, but preserve the medd sign.
The ustun
vowel that precedes such medd sign is hardened from e into a,
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
33
on account of the following a, even with a preceding soft consonant.
But, when such medial or final h£mz& is itself movent with
esere, it is no longer written in the form of \; it then takes
the form of ^ , without dots, and with a h&nize sign over i t ;
as, ^J^JJ rens.
If its vowel is uturu, it is written as a j letter,
o
with hemze sign over i t ;
JJ
as, ^JJJ
ru>us.
In these two
examples the vowels are long; hut there are words in Arabic
some perchance used in Turkish, in which they are short.
Of course, the long vowel letters do not then follow the
O
modified, disguised hemz£.
Thus, ^J^
Moreover, when such medial
^
O jO^
ripls, ^Jjl eb>us.
or final hemze, whether
movent or quiescent, is preceded by a consonant movent with
eser&, the hemze is figured as a letter ^ ; and when movent
with uturu, the hemze is written as a letter j ; in either case
surmounted by a hemze sign ; thus, ^^
bfcsa, ^>jj bu^a.
Such disguised medial hemze may be followed by a long
vowel letter; as, *\y fcbad, JjJ~*o mes^ul,
LrJJ
rens.
If the
hemze be changed into a ^ figure, and be followed by a long
vowel \, it becomes changed in Turkish, and sometimes in
Arabic, into a consonant ^ ; as in o - l ^ rlyaset (for o*-tf,
rbaset).
There is a striking peculiarity in certain Turkish Ottoman
derivatives, which causes great embarrassment to students,
and has filled continental Turkish dictionaries and grammars
D
34
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
with totally misguiding examples and rules of pro aunciation,
with regard to the interchangeable vowel-letters j and
(j.
The peculiarity arose, I imagine, when all Ottoman Turkish
was provincial, and was governed by the pronu aciation of
Asia Minor, variously modified
in its various
provinces.
Thus the earliest writers made use, in all such derivative
words, of the vowel-letter j (when they used a ly at all).
O
J ^
O
J
0
O
J "
They, therefore, wrote \^JS gelnb, L_>JXS gldub, t_>j J& qachub,
o
O J
J j
Jo-
JO*
c-ij^J qirnb, ^jjy
qurub;
and jU,b b&shlu, j U I ellu; &c.
These derivatives became, in course of time, in Europe, and
in Constantinople, modified in pronunciation into gellb, gldlb,
qachib, qlrib, qurub, bdshl?, elll, &c.
The orthography, how-
ever, has remained sacred, excepting in the case of provincials,
who sometimes write, as they pronounce, v-J&, c-^u^, W-A-SJS,
O
O
J
U-AJI^J , ^jjf,
J
O
A
^ b , ^
Os
, &c.
This subject will be further
developed in the paragraphs on Euphony.
Proceed we now to the phonetic values of the co isonants.
The letter ^ , equally used in Ottoman words of Arabic,
Persian, Turkish, and foreign origin, has the value of our b
generally, whether it be initial, medial, or final in a word.
o,
o
o +
o
oJ
Thus : j j bed, j> blr, Jo bar, j o biz, ^
buz, btk, buz, biz ;
\>\ij rlbat, \&j rabt, e^-> subut; c-jbS kltab, t - j ^ . j3iiub, i-*j»l
erib, \~>j> harb, uJs qalb ; &c.
But when medisl or final,
ending a syllable or word, it sometimes, anomalously, takes
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
the value of our p.
35
Thus it is common to hear, L^li-T kltap,
i^Jo tip, \±i>\ Iptlda, ^ I I J kltapji.
Especially is this the case
with the gerunds in L^J ; as, ^>jsS gidip, ^j6
gelip, v j j ^ .
5
yazip, L-^SJI oquyup, VJUK qfrip.
The Persian letter <_> is our p in all positions: ,JJ peder,
Jj\ apar, «_*>! lp.
The Persian word v-**J esp, and the Turkish
word LJ>JO t6p, are usually written with i_>.
The Arabic o is our t in all positions: —t taj, taj, J J I etel,
Iji? fetva, o l et, o l at, O J ! it, Ojl ot.
In Turkish grammar
it is sometimes changed into movent ^ in derivatives, when it
O OJ
J OJOJ
is originally final and quiescent; as, o ^ durt, ^ ^
OJOJ
^ J
J
J
OJ
d ^ durdun, **j± durde, ^ ^
durdu, ^^
durdunju,
J
C
dtirdum, &c.;
o^l
It, j±J\ Ider, L-ijJol Idlp, ^ ^ ^ J idlji ; il+J git, ^ 1 / glder,
L-JJJJJ* gldlp, ^-^S
gldljl; &c.
The Arabic o is found in Arabic words only, and in a very
few borrowed from the Greek.
O
our th in think;
i J
Its original value is that of
.*
so that &j|yU aya-thulug, for ayios OeoXoyos,
was not as bad as our bishop for emfffcoTros. But in Turkish
and Persian this value is unknown; the letter is pronounced
as our 5 (sharp, never z) ; aya-sulug is therefore the Turkish
name of Ephesus, c^(j is pronounced sablt,^! eser, oij^.1 Ihdas,
&c.
I n some Arabic-speaking countries this letter has become
a t; as, o 5 6 talata, &c.
The Arabic - in Turkish is our soft g, which we represent
36
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
by a j in all positions of all words, whatever the r origin.
OO
O
O ^ O ^
si*
Thus, JJM^. jms, (j*»U>.l ejnas, —Ipl aghaj.
In some Arabico
o •»
speaking countries it is pronounced like our hard g ; as, ±sr*
mesgld, sjs;*' segdd, &c.
Sometimes it takes the sharp sound
o f £ , q.v.
The Persian _ has the value of our ch in church, o * our tch
in crutch.
We never use the latter orthography in o ur transom O X
< „
literations,—always the former ; as, j ^ l dchmdq,
C *
J
O
J
^ O
J
J
O
cs^ja. churek, taJ^j^ chur&k, l^j*. chirba,
eis"^ chlchek.
fl U
ch&m,
O ^
- J I Ich, sL> chek,
In Turkish derivation, this letter, in Turkish
or foreign (not Persian, and there are no Arabic) words,
sometimes becomes Arabic -., but not as a rule.
The Arabic — has the harshly aspirated sound of our h in
horse, hurl, her; not its soft sound, as heard in head, - lim, half,
o * +
&c.
I t is chiefly used in Arabic words; as, ^ > hisin,
\tf~*s» huseyn, _ b fettah, _ ^ jurh.
We represent it by h ;
some adopt h, to distinguish it from 5, q.v.
Aspirate it always.
The Arabic ± has no equivalent in our language.
I t is the
counterpart of the Scotch and German ch in loch, ich, &c.
is generally transliterated Tch, as in the present treatis ).
It
Until
the student has learnt its true pronunciation, he shculd consider it as a variety of h, and never pronounce it as a k,
especially when it is initial.
O
' A
0 0
'
Thus jjj£. kMdiv (pronounce
'•*
hidiv, not kldiv), .L&jjlji. khudfivendghyar (pron. tiuda...),
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
o ^
37
o J - o
^L» shakh, j y ^ \ Ikhlamtir.
In Turkish words, this letter is
often used, provincially, for JJ , and is itself sometimes pronounced <j.
Thus, JUe b&khallm (for J lib bHqlllim), l l i i i
dqshdm (for dkhshlm).
The Arabic $ is our d in all classes of Ottoman words, and
requires no comment, unless it be to repeat that, in the
derivation of Turkish words only, it sometimes takes the
place of o , and is used instead of \> in original words also ;
as, (*Ui5 gltmek, jsS
glder; clL>, c b dUgh.
The Arabic i, in an Ottoman mouth, is a z.
Arabic words alone.
Different Arab communities pronounce
it as our soft th in this, as a d, or as a z.
0
O O X
I t is found in
°/^
O i
%*
The Turk reads,
O O <"
j^.1 dkhz, ^pi zlkr (vidg. zlklr), Jji.L me>khuz, ^,jj bezr.
The Arabic , is our r in every position, in all classes of
o *e-s
o "
ocm>
words: thus, KZJS\J re^fet, Jo bar, ^1 ard.
There are two
important remarks, however, which it is necessary for the
English student to bear in mind with respect to this, to him,
peculiar letter.
Firstly, it must always be pronounced (never
dropped or slurred over, as we pronounce part, p i ' t ) ; and
secondly, the value of the vowel before it in the same syllable
must never be corrupted (as when we pronounce pot, p a t ;
for, f&r; cur, cur ; & c ) , but always kept pure, as with any
other consonant; thus, j ^ q6r, jji qur, jy* sur, jj> gyur, &c.;
o
Jii
o
P i r > JS»
q!r
o
» -**
q i r ;
&c#
38
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
The Arabic j is our z in every word and every position;
jh zad, ^-jj zlr, ^ j z6r, ziir, ^j_.i nezd,
\\ ez, ^1 az, az,
O J
Jjl uz ; &c.
The Persian J is only found in Persian and Frenei words ;
it is of the value of our s in treasure, pleasure, and is transliterated zh)
as, j\j
zhazh, »^>*£ pezhmurde, jjj
mazh6r, &c.
I t is of very rare occurrence.
AJ\ &ta-
The Arabic ^ is a soft s, always followed by a soft vowel
in all words.
I t must never be pronounced as z ; thu3, ill asa,
JJ^JS qavs, jj«* suz, suz.
The Arabic y i is our sA, always; as, ^U shad, ^ 1 Ish,
^ l i neshr.
The Arabic ^a, in Turkish, is a hard 5, used in Turkish,
o J
and foreign words also, to designate a hard vowel; 1 hus, Jfc\
Ass, <j**>l dsmiq, J ^ > J ^ susmaq, {j^»J qism&q. Never read it z.
The Arabic ^
only.
is very peculiar, being used in Aral ic words
It is generally pronounced as a hard z in Tur kish, but
sometimes as a hard d; thus, ^>\j razl, Us qaza, ^ l i \\ enqaz ;
^ \ 3 qadi, J K - ^ 1 ^JIS qazi-'l-'&sker ( v u l g . ^ _ ~ s ^13 qh '-'a^ker),
&c.
Its Arabic sound is inimitable to a European without
long practice. The Arabic L, besides being an element of Arab c words,
always as a hard t, is used in Turkish and foreign words,
sometimes with that value, sometime* as a very hard d, when
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
initial.
o
« y
00 J
O J J
. . .
39
o
O
,
+
Thus, c^lL tulu*, Jb5 qdfcr, ki. k h a t t ; JAJ> titll, c l t
dagh, j^W tuz, j*UJ? tiqamaq, j ^ j l L davranmaq.
The Arabic k is used in Arabic words only, as a very hard
z.
O
Thus, J i b zallm, I k zAlm, J L b zifr, jJo
zafer, ) L i hazz,
J O ..
k^iis? mahzuz.
The Arabic c is, as a general rule, used in Arabic words
only.
I t is a strong guttural convulsion in an Arab throat,
softened in Turkish to a hiatus, and often disappearing entirely.
Thus, ^ac easr,
"We represent it by a Greek spiritus asper.
Oo-«
o
o o ^
jo*
o
J
o,
^ b ta*n, ^jxL melun, *WS qat', c j W maqtu\
The Turkish
word vjs. 'araba (for AJU) is, however, with its derivatives,
always written with this letter, of course corruptly.
The Arabic c is, originally, a peculiar Arabian kind of
hard g, with a sound vergeiug on that of the French r grasseye,
which English dandies sometimes imitate.
But in Turkish
pronunciation it is either a simple hard g9 when initial; as,
vJlfi gallb, KZAAZ g&flet, SJJIS. gay da, &c; and either that when
medial or final in Arabic words only, or like our softened gh
in Turkish w o r d s ; often disappearing, or nearly so, and
changing, like it, into a w sound after or before an Aturu
hard vowel.
O
Thus, Jltel igfal, c,x* sadg, j^k* magfur; J ^ J U I
,
J
J OJ
aghlamaq, clW dagh, ^^j\
O J J
O
J
o
O
s
J
°
?
"*
1
2
ilduwu, J&j* siwan, J&jio do wan,
,
J
^f-y> s<Wu.q; o^° ^ w u q , A^J^V lawuta; &c.
The Arabic u J is our f in all words and all positions,
40
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
There is no reason whatever to write the senseless, false
Latin-French ph instead of f9 as in caliph, a corruption of
khallfe, A&J*.
The Arabic j
Thus, ^J
ikvz, ka) lUz, \^Jy£ SOI.
is our g in all words and all positions.
It
is erroneous and regrettable to represent it by k, as is generally
done.
The words ^[^s qur>an, jfl aq, e>3> waqt, are thus cor-
rectly rendered, leaving the k to represent its legitimate
ancestor, d .
T h e Arabic d, in all words and all positions, is our k.
When initial in a word or syllable before a long 1 or j vowel,
and also before a short uttiru vowel, it borrows, in an Ottoman
mouth, the sound of a y after itself before the vowel; but not
so before the short ustun, the short esere, or the long I vowel.
Thus, c-^5 kyaztb, J j ^ » l ekyul, i£bj^=> kyttpek ; (^A^=» kedl,
A^=a klram, J^-^'j vekil.
Its name, in Arabic, requires no
addition; but in Persian and Turkish it has to be distinguished from the Persian letter of the same form, but widely
different phonetic value.
'areblyye.
I t is then termed A*-^C UJO kyafl
In Arabic and Persian Ottoman words it remains
unchangeable by grammatical inflexion;
but in Turkish
words, when final, it undergoes phonetic degradation on
becoming movent, and is pronounced as a Persian d, and
even as a y ;
or sometimes as a w after an iittiru vowel.
Thus, i^Lj\ Ipek, dC->l Ipeyln, &ls\ Ipeye, £ l j l ipeyl;
$jj»
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
O 3
3 3
y
3
3
3
41
3 3
0*«0
euluk, dL^=sjlj*» sultiyun, A ^ S ^ M suluye, ^ » ^ suluju; &+zA
Itmek, \y±£^m>\ Itm&yln.
The Persian <*J, called A ;->»^l-i uJo kyafl farlslyy&, and
^^U u j ^ kyafl farlsi, or ^jjs? * »\s kyafl 'ajami (vulg.
'aj&m kaTl), is the Persian hard g.
fjS^^
I t is unknown in Arabic,
is unchangeable in Persian words, and is never final in
Turkish words or syllables.
Thus, eL» seg, d-feu** segln,
A^SU* s£g&, .£*• segl; J£ g41. In ordinary writing and print
it is undistinguished from its Arabic original; but the Persians
mark it with a double dash : j £ gyul, SL*> seg.
In some
Turkish books it is marked with three dots: JS, dU.
The Ottoman d, ignored by all previous writers, eastern
and western, consequently nameless, but which we venture
a J o J
*y
to term AJLLJ: »_JO kyafl 'Asmanlyye, the Ottoman <<*), is
found in Turkish words only, as a medial or a final, never
as an initial to a word, though it is used as an initial letter in
a non-initial syllable.
Its phonetic value is that of our y in
all cases, though it has no mark to distinguish it.
radical, as in db bey, J & dlyll, ^ ^
I t is both
ylylrml; or it is gram-
matical, declensional, servile, representing a softened Arabic
O*
3
radical or servile d, become movent, as in <£by£» kyupek,
<si£Lp kyupeyln, iJCj^S
surmek, yjS^^jy^
G&jjj* s&vdlyin,
kyupeye, [jf-*j%
kyupeyl; <*L^-,
surmeyln ; d^*, s&vdlk, X-*.^_*> savdlyim,
L£i±j*
savdlyl.
Most European writers
42
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
represent this value by gh; but the practice is insufficiently
considered, and altogether misleading.
The Ottoman nasal e), distinguished by the name of surd n,
o
J
o
^yjZle
«•
sag Mr nun, is a second special Turkish phonetic value
of the letter d, or nasal letter, which we transliterate with the
Spanish nasal n.
I t has the phonetic value of our English ng
nasal, as in sing, thing, &c.
I n ordinary writing and print, it
has no mark by which a student may recognize i t ; but sometimes three dots distinguish it, and one recent writer has
marked it with one dot, u*j (as with him the three dots, d ,
serve to point out the Persian letter or sound).
is never initial to a word.
This value
As a medial, it sometimes ends,
sometimes begins a syllable; as, j ^ X ^ l anlamdq (vulg. annamaq), {jj£=6 t&xhi (vulg. tar!) ; J $ j ^ » gyunul, j£=*s deiilz,
^-^=»T aMz, ij£y> s6nra (vulg. s6ra).
When final to a word,
it is usually sounded as a simple n; as, tsb ben (ben), eL*»
s^nln (sanln), eXlS g^llii (galln), dlL dlii (d&n), &j*> sdn (sbri).
When medially final it is usually softened in like manner, or
is elided in pronunciation. In ^%^=A
and its derivates (itself
derived from e)l an), the following J is exceptionally incorporated with it in pronunciation, as though by a kind of
inversion of the Arabic rule of conversion for the J of the
definite article Jl before certain letters called solar (for which
see next paragraph on letter J ) .
The Arabic J is our letter I in all words and all positions ;
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
as, ^jjJ lazum, v^OI alln, JU dal.
43
The Turkish word j ^ i l f e i ,
mentioned above, is, with its derivatives, a modern Ottoman
exception of the capital; and the Arabic rule for the conversion of the J of the definite article J l , in pronunciation,
when followed by a noun or pronoun beginning with a solar
letter, ^^*
u J ^ . harfl shemsi, into that solar letter redupli-
cated by a teshdid, is a classical exception, peculiar to Arabic
compounds. The solar letters are fourteen in number (exactly
the half of the alphabet) ; viz., o , d>, ^, ^>j>J> <j*»> u-> u°i
ijo, L>, k , J ,
^^J\
cJ.
Thus we have <yoJI et-tln, ^ J l es-semen,
es-sumn, UJJI ed-duea, ^ ^ > j J I ez-zlkr, <*UJ1 es-semek,
^ ^ ^ J l esh-sh^ms (whence the name ot ^*****»), uLaJi es-saia,
Is.-*3' ed-duhd, ez-zuha, *JlkJl it-tall', JLkJl ez-zulm, ppM ellazlm, ^ J l en-nur.
In the pronoun <^JJl, and its derivatives,
the written J of the article disappears also.
The sign " placed
o o ^
over the J , so omitted in pronunciation, is named vwasl, J-oj
junction;
and is the letter ^
of that word, specially modified.
The Arabic letters * and ,j are our m and n respectively, in
all words and positions: JU mal, J J emel, ~ J benlm,^k\i nazlr,
O O J
^j>. huzn.
The Arabic letter j is sometimes a consonant, sometimes a
vowel.
When a consonant, it has the phonetic value of our v,
of our w, or of these two combined, the v beginning, and the
w ending the sound of the letter.
Thus, Jj var, ^\j^
jewab,
44
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
o o «.
o
uJL>j vwasf, «.$!j vwaq!\
differences.
The ear alone can decide these
But when the consonant j is reduplicated in an
Arabic word, it has always the v value; as, Jjl dvval, J\ji
q^vvdl.
Ottoman corruption even then may sound it, in hard
lettered words, as a reduplicated w—q&wwal.
The word u-ily
qawwaf (or ^J\^ q&w&f) is an Ottoman corruption of Arabic
n^jUi. khaffaf.
When the letter j is a vowel in an Arabic or Persian word,
it always has the value of u ; excepting a few Persian words,
become Ottoman vernaculars, in which it takes the sound of A.
O J J
O
O J O ^
>
O
O
J
Thus, *jjJ ltizum, ^ji** memnun ; j ^ shur; o * ^ d6st (dust),
o
•>
(jip. khosh (khush).
In Turkish and foreign words it is
generally, if not always, short, and may have either the value
of 6, or of u, u, u, which there is no means of distinguishing,
save that of accompanying hard or soft consonants.
With a
hard consonant, in a Turkish or foreign word, the vowel-letter
j (often omitted) must have the sound of either 6 or A, unless
it be considered long, when it becomes o or u ; thus, j ^ i
q6m&q, ^ j S qunn&q.
With a soft consonant, it must be read
either u or u, u or u ; as, etL^ yuzmek, jljj-*
suzlu.
If
the accompanying consonant or consonants be neutral, all
°J
°J
guidance is lost; as, jj> b6z, buz, buz, jj«* suz, suz.
In
derivatives there is, however, frequently a servile vowel or
consonant, hard or soft, that helps.
o *o J
o ^ o j
Thus, ^jy> boz&n, (jljljj*
o y
buzluluq, &k*jj> buzmek, <&*\j*t suzmek; but jj**> suz has no
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
such helping derivative.
45
As to the long and short value, each
individual ear must decide for itself in words of these two
classes—Turkish and foreign.
Vowel j is never initial; it
must be preceded by I to represent an initial uturu sound ;
as, j j j l ilmaq, dljjl uimek, &c.
The Arabic letter 5 has already been fully discussed.
The Arabic letter <j, like the j , is either a consonant or a
vowel.
When a consonant, it has the value of our consonant y,
whether it be initial, medial, or final, simple or reduplicated.
Especially must this be understood when the letter is consonantally final in an Arabic word.
As a consonant, and only
as a consonant, we transliterate it by a y.
Therefore, when
we use a y as the final of a transliterated Arabic word, it must
be read and sounded as such, never as an i vowel; an observation that continental scholars do not generally understand,
unless they may be Germans.
yedek, jV. l^h
uz
Thus we have: j n yer, i<*Jjj»
n
jjl y > OH % > &fj> % u n ; [yi pfy, °J>
shey, J\j re<y, ^> mey, £> hayy, ° j j qayyum, ^
remy, J*j v£shy, ^ * meshy.
vely,
^
This is a difficulty to a student
at first, as we have nothing like it in English.
When the ^ is a vowel, it is never initial.
If a vowel 1
or i sound be initial in any Ottoman word (Arabic, Persian,
Turkish, or foreign), the ^, if written, is always preceded by
46
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
an I; as, ^jsA Idl, j^y)
irlainaq.
When medial, it is always
o
.#
o
long in Arabic and Persian words ; as, j ^ \ emir, <^UJ bin.
In Turkish and foreign words, medial vowel (j is generally, if
not always short; as, d ^ j vlrmek, j ^ J qirmaq.
When final
in an Arabic word, it is also always short; as, ^jl5 qazi,
razl, _ c b da'l, ^ U jaii, ^jj^»* sari, &c.
-i|L
But there are hosts
of Arabic words ending in reduplicated consonantal <j, which,
in Persian and Turkish, are used as Arabic words, generally
- adjectives, terminating in a long vowel i or ! ; as, ^^
ijju* senevi, ^j^
shehrT, ^ ^ c arebi, ^Js
iLil uf&qi, -M*- hlfzi, &c.
farlsi,
yevmi,
xks qat'i,
When these become feminine, the
reduplicated nature of their final consonantal ij becomes
apparent; as, A~OJJ yevmlyye, <u*ki q&teiyy£, &c.
There are many Persian derivative words, adjectives or
substantives (besides others not used in Turkish), which
really end in long vowel ^ .
The adjectives are precisely
similar to the Arabic adjectives just described, as modified in
Persian and Turkish ; but they have no feminine.
jjbli shahi, 'royal;'
'of Shiraz ;' &c.
Thus,
(jjj~*>- khAsrevT, 'imperial;' IJJ\JJJ shirazT,
The substantives indicate abstract qualities;
as, (jbli shahi, ' royalty;' {jj>jj vezlrl, ' vezirial ofiice or functions;' &c.
Turkish and foreign final <j, radical or servile, is always a
short vowel ; as, ,jjd kedl, ^
s!ni, ,c-i<si^ 6dayi, ^jj
ari, &c. ; ^j\ evl, ^ ^
terejl, &c.
:
babd-
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
47
The vowels I and s are sometimes interchangeable in
Turkish words and derivations, and are sometimes omitted,
0x
"°
without any inflexible rule being assignable. Thus, (^LLLJI ,
dL*A*aJ, eU^aj, Itm^mek, are all admissible.
The true rule
is : " Never introduce a vowel letter into a Turkish or foreign
word without removing a possible doubt as to pronunciation ;
never leave out a vowel in such word, if by the omission a
doubt is created as to pronunciation."
The orthography of
Arabic and Persian words is fixed, and admits of no such
variation.
Persian words admit, however, of abbreviation by
the omission of a vowel; as, sU» shah, & sh£h ; sUolj padshah
(vulg. padlshah), <L£OG padsheh; ILLAU» shahlnshah, AJUj&li>
shahlnsheh, »LL^» shehlnshah, A*£J^ shehlnsheh ; &c.
In many Turkish words the vowels j and ^ are used for
one another by different writers, at different times, in different
places; even at one place and time ; even by one writer at
different times, or in the selfsame document; but this last as
a license or an inadvertency.
advisable.
j£gellr;
Consistency in this matter is
Thus we have: JLib, b&shlil, j i b b&shli, ^jft gelAr,
jj\ arA, <jj &ri; & c ; words differently written, but
the selfsame in reality.
The Ottoman alphabet is divided into three classes of consonants, hard, soft, and neutral.
The hard letters are nine in
number: - , -t, yjo, ( j ^ > i 9 j k , c , c , j .
are only six : I, o , J , <j*, <sJ, 5.
The soft letters
The remaining letters,
48
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
sixteen in the whole, are neutral: i__>, c-> , o , ^ , « , .3, J , «,
As the orthography of every Arabic and Persian Ottoman
word is fixed and unchangeable, it is only in Turkish and
foreign Ottoman words, and in the declensions and conjugations of all Ottoman words, that the rules relating to hard
and soft letters are carried out.
This is the first and chief
part of the beautiful system of Ottoman euphony.
If any one of the hard or soft consonants is used in a,
Turkish Ottoman word, all the other radical and servile
letters of the word, of its derivations, and of its declension
or conjugation, must be of the same class, or of the neuters.
oy o x
o ^o ' ^
r>
Thus we have: j*jl5 qazmaq, di*p gezmek; ^.yft
J o ^ ) j gezdlyl; jj^ls qarliq, \^f
,
qazdighi,
gyuzluk; &c.
The Ottoman vowels are also of these three classes.
hard vowels are : a, a, I, T, 6, 6, u, u ; eight in all.
vowels also eight: a, e, 1, I, u, u, u, u.
are a, a, a.
The soft
The neutral vowels
These vowels always accompany their own class
of consonants, or the neutrals.
accompany any class of consonant.
bl ana, U»IJ pasha, ^
O^ '
The
0<*0 J
The neutral vowels can
Thus we have : bb bdbd,
san, ^ ben, j ^ J qirmaq, dU^f glrmek,
O '(1/ i y
O fO
J /
j ^ S qimaq, j ^ j S qurmaq, dLJj^ gyuzetmek, etl*^ gyurmek.
When in a Turkish Ottoman word a vowel is the dominant
letter, its consonant or consonants being neutrals, the declen-
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
49
sion, conjugation, and derivation from that word follow the
class to which the dominant vowel belongs ; thus, j^Jl atrnaq,
O O ,-•
OX X O
O' xO J
O'OJ
jJ/M aghirliq, j^V/J irlamaq, j + ^ 1 Ammaq, &>\JS-J\ 6ghramaq;
O »
4"
O /O
O xo
J
OxO
J
islo j l elemek, csUijil Inmek, i*Lo}j> ytizinek, d l ^ y tirmek.
When an Arabic or Persian word is declined or derived
from, in Ottoman Turkish, its last dominant letter or vowel
decides whether the declension or derivation shall be made
O J Ox
with hard or soft letters and vowels ; thus, Lj^* merbut,
rJ~> J c /
O x
o o
^
O 'i*
oc
x^
($o£j* merbutluq ; j u ! emir, dd^*l emirllk; ^ U asan, ^liUI
asanliq ; &c.
When the sole dominant vowel of a Turkish Ottoman word,
or the last dominant letter or vowel of a Turkish, Arabic,
Persian, or foreign Ottoman word, is of the o or u class, hard
or soft, all possible consonants, and all vowels in the declension,
conjugation, or derivation therefrom, not only conform to the
class of such dominant, but furthermore, all consecutive servile
vowels in the derivatives that would otherwise be esere,
become uturu, of the class of the dominant; that is, become
u when the dominant is 6 or u, and become u when the
O
JO J
J ot
OiO
J~> J
dominant is u or n ; thus, [#J&J\ olgun, <jLjiJjl olgAnluq, ^jJjl
O
JO J
CJO JO
JO
J
J
O , 0^1^
J J
61du; \yJz>jb mtgun, jjJLi^L tutgunluq, <jjJ^ tutdu; e*L.S$j,**
O "• OJ J
O
J
O X OJ
J
•*
sfirukdurmek, (sJiJ^jjSs»j^^» snrukdurulmek ; d U ^ ^ i surushO X O J O J
J
O so J J
OJ
J
mek, id*j*Z>jj-**> sumshdurmek, d l ^ j J ^ j - - surnshdurulmek ;
O 'OJ
J-^
O/OJOJ
J
O^rjJo-f
J
Cil^j) gyurushmek, d ^ j J ^ ^ a gyurushdurmek, <*JUJ,jg2^s3
E
50
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
gyurushdurulmek.
But if, in such words, an ustun vowel
come in by the ordinary course of derivation or conjugation,
and be followed by a syllable or syllables with an esere
vowel, the influence of the radical dominant uturu is destroyed
o,rj
j
o 0,0J
J
by such intervention ; as, <jJ»\j> bozushmaq, J^-ft*^)j> bozushmaqliq, ^kj^j)
bizushmaghin ; d i ^ y gyurushmek, isJJiC^jJ
gyurushmekllk, £^£1^} gyuiushmeyln.
(
51
)
C H A P T E R IL
T H E OTTOMAN ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
SECTION I
T H E R E is no gender.
The Noun
Substantive.
If the female of an animal has not a
special name, as, jfjlL (taw&q), a hen, j ^ ~ i (qisraq), a mart,
O
O O x
*
t*L>l (tnek), a cow, j ^ t e (qanjlq), a bitch, the female is named,
as with us, a she..., ^LJ± (dlshi); as, ^ ^ , 1
a lioness ; &c.
-£JO (dlshl arslan),
If the female be a girl or woman, she is never
o
«
named dishl, but is mentioned a s ^ J (qiz), maiden, or ^jjd (q&ri)^
matron, accordingly; as, (j^j^jj
(qiz khizmetjl),
(khizmetjl qiz), a servant maid, a maidservant;
orjJ(j^"bj*>
^ s n ^jj& (qaii
dshji), or ^ l i ^ f l (ashj! qari), a woman cook, a cook woman.
There is, really, no declension of nouns in Turkish; but
the prepositions, perhaps eight in number, by some termed
postpositions, are subjoined to the noun, singular or plural,
the plural being always formed by adding the syllable^ (lar,
lex) to the singular; thus :
Nom.
j j l 6q
{arrow),
Gen.
dijl Aquii
(of—),
j-^j\
oqlar (arrows).
\&j&j\ oqlatln.
52
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Dat.
63j\ 5qa
j^Juij! oqladi.
(to - ) ,
+ o J
Loc.
i±9j\ 6qda
(in — ) ,
bjfij\ oqlarda.
Ace.
^ i
(the — ) ,
U?j£jl oqlail.
°"°
Abl.
6qn
j
0dJj\
Inst.
6qdan
&±J3\ 6qla
O
J
(/rom — ) ,
Noni.
O
J
'O
J
oq Ichnn (/or — ) , &j$)j3j\
•
Gen.
6qlar Ichnn.
ev (house),
^
£vler (houses).
evln,
d#
evlerln.
eve,
^1
evlere.
j'
o
2jsj\ oqlarla.
(WJIVA — ) ,
O J
Caus. Cjf\ jj\
^ ^ j l oqlardan.
Dat.
!?
Loc.
Sij!
evde,
5^jl
evlerde.
<jj
evl,
e$
evlerl.
Ace.
O
SO*
Abl.
Inst.
Jji
Caus. ^yz) j \
evden,
evlerden.
44'
evle,
ev Ichun,
o&-J^
evlerle.
evler Ich&n.
Most Turkish singulars (not all) ending in o soften this
letter into ^ before a junctional vowel preposition ; thus, o , j 5
C JO J
„ o
J
JO
J
(qiirt), wolft d - ^ i qurdAn, s^jS qArda, [S^j? q^rdu;
not so
before a consonant or separate word ; as, sjJ,*i, ^jJ^y, *l3>j«S,
\j&y ^>jf \Dut
^ ^ ^ i /c^^ °^u> &cMost, if not all, Turkish singulars, of more than one
syllable, ending in j , soften it into c before junctional
vowels; as, J ^ L ^
(chardaq), trellis, dLcl^U cbardaghin,
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
A-CI^U chardaghd, ^ x l ^ U . chardaghi.
53
Those in Arabic d
soften it into Turkish d (y value); eL-jl (Ipek), silk, dX-*-jt
(Ipeyln), A_1JV (Ipeye), Jv-oJ (Ip^yl).
Those in Persian d (g
value), do not change i t ; as, du**> seng, stone, dX-i-> (sengln),
dX-^*i (senge), - X - ^ » (sengl).
These rules do not apply to Arabic and Persian substantives ; these retain their final j or d unchanged; unless the
borrowed word has passed into the mouth of the vulgar as an
o o
o
o
everyday expression; as, j p * i fistiq, d*i~i fistighin, &c.
Singulars ending in a vowel, take ^ in the genitive, and
consonant <j in the dative and accusative, to support the
vowel taken by a final consonant; as, Ob (baba), father, dlilA*
(l)Ibiuln), AAJG (b&baya), .riV^ (bab&yi); j j (qapu), door, gate,
<&jjj (q&punto), A^J (qapuya), ^ j J
(qap&yu, where uturu
dominates); ^ 1 (arl), foe, d^,l (&rinin), <u^l (arlyd, written
separately on account of two letters ^), ^t^jj
(ariyl);
^xS
(kedi), cat, d i i i ^ k e d l n l n ) , 4 j i ^ ( k e d r y e ) , ^ ^ j T ( k e d l y l ) , &c.
Singulars ending in vowel s do not join this letter to the
sign of the plural, in writing; as, sj^o (pide), J*X>J (pideler).
The word y> (su), water, irregularly forms its genitive as
O J
J
djj-p (suyun, almost the only exception or irregularity in the
language). (jy> (soy), sort, ends in a consonant, and is regular;
djj-* (s6yun), vyo (siya), ^ j * (s6yu).
54
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Arabic and Persian substantives never change their final
• ^-
O
"
consonants for declension; {j^e> (tlb&q), plate, <*1LL t&baqin;
O
^ O
__
* ^ xO
dL^I (Imsak), refraining,
worship, jjiL* (salati).
_
O
x
^
A-SL^I (imsake); oil—© (salat) r
Their final vowels follow the same
/J
O
,
rules with those in Turkish words; l o (dua), 'prayer, <*UICJ
d^ e anin); W L J (piyade), foot-man,
charsu), market, ^j**j^
AJ5^LJ (plyadeye); j _ * ^ L ^
(eharsuyu) ; ^1% (suiasl), triliterai
root, /c-i^^J (sulaslyl).
They form their plurals as Turkish words; but Persian
names of men and their kinds use the Persian plural also,
if judged proper.
This is formed by adding an ustun vowel,
followed by <jl, to the final consonant of the singular; as,
SJA (merd), man, ^±j* (merdan).
If the singular ends in »
vowel, it is changed into consonant d (Persian), with ftstun
O
"
+
vowel, before the ^1 of the plural; as, A > ! ^ (kh'aje), master,
J&^j*
(kh'ajegyan).
Singulars ending in vowel j take conJ
O
J
sonant ^ instead of d ; as, J.I_>J&> (khub-ru), a beauty in face,
U ^ V J * (khub-riiyan).
Those ending in vowel ^ change it
into consonant \j in like manner; as, <j*l~*» (slpahi), man-at0 x
"
_
arms, ^LAL** (slpahlyan). [Persian writers explain this by
saying: " The final long vowel is in reality two letters ^
rolled into one.
One of these is now used as a consonant."]
Other Persian substantives form the plural by adding the
syllable U h a ; as, l^SU (nan-ha), loaves, breads, I4--J (esb-ha),
horses.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
OO
Arabic plurals,.of the regular forms for men and women,
and of the various irregular forms for these and other things,
and also the Arabic duals, are used in Turkish.
The dual is
formed by adding ustun followed by u l (an) in the nominative,
OO
which becomes ^
(eyn) in the oblique case.
The latter is
frequently used in Turkish as a nominative; as, <!&£ (qutb),
O / I
J
O 0*T> J
pole, J^3* (qutban),
UT^s
(qutbeyn), the two poles.
The regular plural masculine nominative for men is formed
by adding uturu followed by ^j (un) to the singular.
becomes esere followed by ^
This
(in) in the oblique case, also
used as a nominative in Turkish; the plural feminine is with
O
O O J
ustun followed by o l (at) in all cases ; thus, JL*> (musllm),
O
J O J
O
a Muslim, I^JL** (musllmun),
O
J
O
/
OJ
C>-JL* (musllmm), o U L * (mus-
llmat), Muslims.
The irregular Arabic plurals commonly used in Turkish
are of rather numerous forms, and there are many more plural
forms used occasionally.
These irregular plural Arabic forms
are not obtained by adding a letter or letters, vowel or con^
sonant, to the end of the singular, but by varying the vowel
or vowels of the word, and by adding letters, consonant or
vowel, as the case may be, before, between, or after, the
letters of the singular.
To enable the student to obtain
a fair insight into this very intricate but beautiful system,
I have to say, first of all, that a paradigm has been adopted
by Arabian grammarians, according to which all such modi*
56
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
fications may be effected.
They have taken the triliteral Jxs
(fa'ala) as the representative of any and every triliteral rootword, and they have modified this root into every shape that
can, under any circumstances, be taken by any derivative of
any triliteral root in the language.
All those modifications,
when not made on the vowels alone of the triliteral, are
effected by adding servile letters, or a servile letter, here and
there, before, after, and in the midst of, the three radical
consonants, with appropriate mutations, in each case, of the
vowels, long or short, in the new word.
Thus, to speak only
of Arabic nouns, substantive or adjective, used in Turkish, we
have, in the first place, to learn the forms of their singulars
(for they all have definite forms), and then the forms of the
plurals special to each of these singulars.
To facilitate and systematize this knowledge, the Arabian
grammarians have divided the whole language into sections
of biliteral, triliteral, quadriliteral, quinqueliteral, & c , roots,
which they term, respectively, ^JLJ (sunan), Skj
j-cl\. (raba'i), ^C-UA. (klmmasi), ^lj**» (stidaVi), &c.
are the Turkish pronunciations of the terms.
(siVasi),
These
I do not re-
member ever to have seen or heard the expression ^ U . !
(uhadi), which would be the analogous name for uniliteral
root; but it may perhaps be found.
Of these, the triliterak
form by very far the most important and numerous class,
the quadriliterals
coming next.
These
are
represented,
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
57
respectively, by the supposititious paradigmatic words J-x-J
(fa'ala) and J U (ft'lele).
Every triliteral root is theoretically capable of giving rise
to fifteen chapters of derivation, called C-JL) (bab, pi. L-^J-JI
ebvab).
These chapters are respectively termed : 1, ^ J U JXS
(fa'ald babi), the chapter of the triliteral;
2, ^\> J*xw (tefil
babi), the chapter of (the verbal noun) J-x*J ;
3, ,~JIJ AICU*
(mftfaVUA b^bi); 4, ^ C J U (If al babi); 5, . j l T jltf (t4fi"Al — ) ;
6, ^ b J ^ l i J (tifa'Ai—); 7, ^ C J ^ ] (Inffal—); 8, ^ l T j u J l
(Iftlal — ) ; 9, ^ C J I J U ( I f Hal — ) ; 10, ^ C J U i J (Istlf al — ) ;
l l , ^ C j l J l (Ifllal—); 1 2 , ^ C J U ^ K l f V a l — ) ; 1 3 , ^ b j £ J l
(Iffvval — ) ; 14, ^ C j £ * 1 (Ifinlal — ) ; 15, ^ C J I J l (Iflnla—).
The use of words from the last four chapters is next to
unknown in Turkish, if not quite so; and the use of chapters
9 and 11, JJLSI , J \ * ^ , is confined to the expression of
colours, the second expressing an intensity of degree. All the
other nine chapters of derivation are constantly met with in
Turkish, as nouns, substantive and adjective.
Occasionally,
even a verb is used; but as a kind of invocatory interjection.
All but the first of these names (which is the form of three
out of the six varieties of its verb) is the form of one of the
verbal nouns, or of the sole verbal noun, connected with the
verb of the chapter; and each chapter has two adjectives
58
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
deriving from it, the active and passive participles of the verb
of the chapter.
The first, or triliteral, chapter possesses,
furthermore, several other special forms of nouns deriving
from its verb other than its verbal nouns (which are a kind
of infinitive, or noun of action or being, corresponding with
our English substantive form in -ing, as, walking, singing, cutting,
suffering, lasting, & c , as acts or states).
Of these, I give here
merely those frequently met with in Turkish ; and it must be
understood, that in this simple triliteral chapter, the various
forms of verbal nouns are never all found deriving from one
verb ; but certain forms belong to one or more kinds of triliteral verbs, others to other kinds.
These hinds of verbs,
again, are of two sorts; there are verbs transitive or active,
and there are verbs intransitive or neuter; and certain verbal
nouns are more used than others with each of these two kinds.
Again, there are the six conjugations of this simple triliteral
chapter ; and each conjugation has its preferential form or
forms of verbal noun.
The Turkish Qamiis dictionary dilates
on this subject more than other works, and much information
can be obtained from it, in addition to what should be "studied
in the " Grammar of the Arabic Language," by Dr. Wm. Wright,
vol. i., p. 109, par. 196, where 36 forms of " nomina verbi "
are given for this triliteral chapter alone, and several others
may be found in De Sacy's " Grammaire Arabe," 2nd edition,
1831, vol. i., p. 283, par. 628.
Those that are principally
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
59
used in Turkish are the following: 1, J * (fa'l); 2, J ^ (faMl);
3, j i (fl'l) ; 4, J ^ (fu'1) ; their feminines: 5, A \JJ
(fa'le) ;
e
6, &i (fa'ale); 7, ' & (fl le); 8, &* (fu'le) ; the same forms,
with an insititious or servile long vowel \ : 9, J ^ (fa'al) ;
10, JUj ( f l a l ) ; 11, J U (fuTil); and their feminines : 12, J &
(fa ale) ; 13, J U (fl ale); 14, J & (fuale); some of the same,
with long vowelj or <j ; and their feminines: 15, Jjxs (fa'ul) ;
16, J ^
(ffi'ul) ; 17, J ^
(fill) ; 18, ^
(fa'ule) ; 19, Aji
(fa'ule); 20, jJLx9 (fa'Ile); the same, with final servile ^\ added :
21, j Q
(fa'lan); 22, ^
(fl'lan); 23, J&
(faIan) ; the
special feminine form: 24, e>JUs (fa'allyet) ; and the special
forms in initial servile * , with their feminines : 25, Jxa*
(mef'al); 26, j £ (meffl); 27, *Uiu (mef'ale); 28, A W (meflle);
with the two special forms in initial servile o , with long
vowel I intercalated: 29, JUS (tef al); 30, j Q (tif al).
Many
original substantives and adjectives are of one or other of the
forms here given; and in frequent cases it is disputed whether
such words are substantives or verbal nouns.
The active paro
ticiple, nomen agentis, of this chapter i s : 31, JcU (fa e il); 32,
feminine, AJUCLS (fa'lle) ; and the passive participle, nomen
patientis, i s : 33, J^d* (mef ul); 34, feminine, djxiu (mefule);
derivative adjectives are met with, branches of this chapter,
as: 35, J ^ (fa'l); 36, J ^ ( f i l l ) ; 37, ]jZk (faul; often feminine);
38, J-xs (fa'il); and the feminine of this last: 39, aLas (fa'lle) ;
60
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
the diminutive, substantive or adjective: 40, J ^
(f&'ayl); the
noun of unity: 41, J** (fale); the noun of kind or manner :
42, A1X9 (fl'le) ; the noun of place and time : 43, J*io mef'al;
sometimes mef cii and A1*A* mef'die); the noun of the place of
abundance: 44, AW© (mef'die); the noun of instrument and
receptacle: 45, Jxi© (mlf 'II; sometimes JUd* mlf al, and
^U
e
mlf'ale; rarely Jxi« muf ul and *Ui* mufule); and others still
which need not be classified here, though a knowledge of their
special forms and meanings, when acquired, assists greatly to
an accurate appreciation of Arabic diction, as occasionally met
with in Turkish.
T h e irregular plurals of these forms mostly met with, when
the words are substantives and masculine, a r e : 1, JUsl (ef al);
2, jJJ> (ffl'ul); 3, J l i (fl'al) ; 4, j 2 l (if'Al) ; 5, AUI (effle) ;
G, J l i J (fu"al) and 7, J L i i (fa'ale; both for the form Jcli) ;
8, }U (fA'ala) and 9, iJ\ (ef U a ; both for the form J ^
fall);
10, Vli (fa*ala; for the form iUs fa'la); when they are feminine
O y
xO
,
O +J
in form, either; 11, J*s (ffill; for the form d*9 fi'le), or 12, J**
(fu'al; for the form al** f&'le), or 13, JUsI (ef'al; as for masculines) ; 14, JjUs (fa'a'll; for the forms jJUi fa'ale, AJJXS fa'ule
t \ .. - j faeil£); 15, J s j y (fevall; for the form ai-cli) ; besides
16, J * & (mefall; for the forms mef al, mef il, mlf al, and
o
y
_
o so
o
Jo*
their variants) ; 17, J-sl** (m^fa'il; for the forms JUi*, JJ*A*);
and others more rarely used.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
61
Adjectives masculine derived from this triliteral chapter,
much used in Turkish, are of the two forms J-*9 (fall) and
Jxs! (ef'al) ; feminines, respectively, ALX* (fa'lle) and %& (fa'la,
for Arabic i%a ; of J«s! when not comparative) or %& (f&'la,
for Arabic ^ x s ; of the same Jxsl when comparative).
The
plurals of these a r e : %& (fd'ala) or jLal (ef'ile), for J ^ , as in
the substantive; and Jxs (fuel), for Jxsl and its feminines.
We now come to the derived chapters.
The verbal nouns of the second chapter a r e : J ^ ' (tef II),
JUAJ (tefal; sometimes tlfal), and *kaJ (tefile) ; the plurals
of the whole of which are of the form J-claJ (tefa'il) ; though
the first makes also a quasi-regular plural, o^Lxw (tefl'at).
O W / J*
*v4s J
Its active participle is J*A* (mnfa'll, fern. al*io mtifa'lle); and
its passive participle is JXA* (mu.faeeal, fern, *£&» mufa"ale), of
which the masculine is also used as a noun of time and
place.
The verbal nouns of the third chapter a r e : alxla* (mnf a'ale)
o .»
and J U (fl'al ; this latter only occasionally used) ; the active
participle is Jclio (mftfall, fern. AICUO muialle); the passive
participle, j i l i u (mAfa'al, fern, ak\i* mtifa'ale, exactly like the
first verbal noun).
. o #»o
The verbal noun of the fourth chapter is JUsI (if'al); a. p.
J*io (mAf 11, fern. A W ) ; p . p. J*a« (mufil, fern. A W ) .
62
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
The fifth chapter h a s : v. n., J * £ (tefa^ul); a. p. J*u* (mutefall, fern. A U ^ ) ; p. p. j X (mutefiTal, fern. J ^ ) .
The sixth : v. a j l l l i (tefa'ul) ; J c U l l (mutefall, *LlSl) 5
JcUi* (mutefaal, AICU^*).
The seventh: JUsl (Infial), J ^
(munfall, i £ ) , J i i H
(mflnfaal, Axtu*).
The eighth : JU*1 (Iftlal), j i L (mifti'Il, A 1 ^ ) , J*iu (mufta'al, ALC^U).
c
T h e ninth: JiLi 1^ (Ifllal), a.p. j 2 1 (mufall, j £ u mufalle);
no p. p.
The tenth: J U A ^ J (istlfal), J*a^** (mustefil, *!»«•;«»,<>), J*AZ-~<>
(mustefal, A1*A1~O).
o
„
The eleventh: J ^ M (Ifllal), j u £ (mufall, IlllL mufalle) ;
no p. p.
As to the significations of these chapters, it may be shortly
said that when the first is transitive, the second is causative
or intensitive; and when the first is intransitive, the second—
causative still in the same sense, but not intensitive—is transitive.
Sometimes the second has the sense, not of making
(a thing) do or be (so or so), but of making (it) out to be
(so and so), of deeming, judging, pronouncing, or calling (it
so and so) ; rarely, it unmakes also.
The third chapter denotes reciprocity of the action between
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
63
two, or among several or many agents, or an expected
reciprocity when one agent only is shown.
Thus, AJ>&> a
mutually writing letters (to one another), a writing in expectation of a reply;
J l i a mutually striving to kill one another,
O O J
fighting.
When the triliteral is expressive of a state, as cr ^>.
(h&sn), a being beautiful or good, the third form expresses an
action corresponding with that state in the agent; thus, 4u-As?
(mfthasene), a doing good, and acting well, kindly
to (the
other).
The fourth form is causative, generally, but sometimes
° *°
intransitive; thus, JL^I (Irsal), a sending (some person or
o *o
thing) ; J l i i (Iqbal), an advancing.
The fifth form has the sense of acquiring a state, sometimes
by one's own act, sometimes through the act of another; as,
. . ^ ^ j (tekessur), a becoming broken.
This may be transitive at
times; as, + ,~Ly., ,.T (ta'alltim), a becoming knowing in (a science,
art, &c.) ; i. e., a learning (it).
The sixth form has the idea of reciprocity, something like
the third, but more decided, more certain in fact; thus, J j l i u
(taqatul), a mutually killing one another.
Sometimes it has the
sense of feigning a state ; as, Jals* (tejahul), a feigning to be
ignorant.
Sometimes, again, it expresses a repeated act; thus,
LilLJ (taqaza), a dunning, repeatedly demanding the fulfilment
and discharge (of some incumbent act or debt).
64
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
The seventh and eighth forms, like the fifth, imply the
acquisition of a state, either by one's own act, or as the result
of the act of another; thus, JUail (Inffal), a being acted upon,
o
^
o
_
affected, hurt, wounded, vexed (by another's act); J]Q£\ (Intlzar)
a (becoming) looking forward (for the occurrence of an event).
Sometimes the eighth form
acquiring;
is transitive in the sense of
thus, (j^l^al (Iftlras), an acquiring (game) by huntO
X
O
ing; or, a seeking to acquire; as, ^ U J I (lltlmas), a seeking to
obtain (a favour) by (morally) feeling one's way (by touching,
groping, requesting); a requesting.
The ninth and eleventh express two degrees of state as to
colour, and sometimes as to defects; the eleventh denoting
o ^
o
intensity of that state ; thus, ,]/•»! (Ihmlrar), a being red; redO x
O
_
O -
O
ness; j\j<+2»\ (Ihmirar), a being very red; 9^j^
O
"
(i'vijiij, a being
O
crooked; crookedness; —L:s2j_cl (1'vijaj), a being very crooked;
anfractuosity.
The tenth usually expresses a trying to get (the act or state
O
y O O
signified by the first form) ; as, ^L.&uJ (Istlfsar), an asking for
an explanation of (a matter). Sometimes it has, like the
second, the sense of deeming or judging (a thing) to be (what
° "° °
the first form signifies); as, Jl&i*»l (Istlsqal), a deeming (a person or thing) heavy, disagreeable, tedious. And sometimes it
means an acquiring a state, expressed by the first form ; thus,
,. o
o
laJ^I (Istlshfa), a becoming restored to health.
And again, it
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
65
o
^o
o
occasionally has the sense of the first form ; as, JjjuiJ
(Istl'dad), a being or becoming ready prepared;
readiness
(external or mental); mental capacity and quickness in acquiring
dexterity or knowledge.
Quadriliteral roots have but four forms ; of which only two
are perceptibly used in Turkish, the first and second.
The
first has two verbal nouns, figured paradigmatically by AIU*
o *o
(fa'lele), and ^%9 (fl'lal); the second, but one, figured by
J W (tefa'lul); culkL* (saltanat) may serve as an instance of
O J Oy '
a verbal noun of the first form, and ^WLJ (tesaltiin) as an
example of the second.
I t would occupy too much space to detail here the modifications of these results arising in the case of roots where the
second and third radicals are identical, or of those in which
one, two, or all three of the radicals belong to the trio \, y <^,
out of which the long vowels, the letters of
spring.
prolongation,
These details should be studied in Wright's, or in
De Sacy's Arabic Grammar.
But it is necessary to remark
that these Arabic verbal nouns belong equally to the active
and passive voice of their verbs; so that, as in English, the
same word, js fet-h for instance, will sometimes mean a conquering, at others a being conquered, just as our word conquest
does.
This last rule holds good with Persian verbal nouns,
not much used in Turkish.
It is not so, however, with
Turkish verbal nouns, excepting, to a slight extent, with the
F
66
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
present, as in A* ma, me ; and this for the simple reason that
every passive Turkish verb has its own special verbal nouns
complete, present, past, and future.
Every Turkish, Persian, and Arabic substantive has its
diminutive, the two latter seldom used in Ottoman phrases.
The Turkish diminutive substantive is formed usually by
o
o
suffixing the syllable <&U (jlk) or j * (jiq) to the word, of
whatever origin, whether it end in a consonant or vowel.
o
o >-
«.
o
o
Thus, db?^l (erlkjlk) a little plum, db&l (Itjlk) a little dog,
^UliT(kltabjlk or J^liTklt&bjlq) a little booh, dbtf^(kyatlbO
x^
O J
J J
jlk) a little cleric, <&U*j.> (devejlk) a little camel, U&>J>J\ (utujuk),
a little flat-iron, dL*sjS^(kAdljlk) a little cat, jfc-ljl
(elmajiq)
a little apple, jfc.U»b (pasbajiq) a little pasha, (jsPuoli (padlshahjlq) a little monarch, J^j*? (q&pAJM)
O
*
J
a
O
little door or gate,
'
^ A ^ l j i i (khojajiq) a little professor, ^yjgj*
(qirljlq) a little
woman.
o
o
In words ending with eJ or J J , after a movent consonant, it
would form a cacophony to repeat
diminutive.
these letters for the
The less important is therefore sacrificed to
euphony, and omitted in the diminutive, a vowel letter usually
taking its place: v&yf (kyurek), <&L^j> (kyurejlk), a little
O »
J
OJ
J
J
shovel or oar; jf»-j> (chojuq), <J»j>^ (chojujuq), a little child.
This form of the diminutive is sometimes modified into that
of j \ i * (jeylz), jk> (jaghfz); thus, JXJ*JI (evjeylz) a little house,
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
o
67
+ o
jJu^yJ*
(qizjaghiz), a little girl.
As is seen, the former esere
vowel of the -. in the diminutive has now become an ustun,
as the eser& has been passed on to the e) or j ; , modified into
Turkish d (y value) or c (soft gh value). Euphony requires it.
These diminutives are used as terms of endearment also,
exactly as in German, and as our nursery vocabulary says,
daddy, mammy, granny, aunty, doggy, horsey, &c. ; only, in
Turkish, the method is of universal application, by all classes,
not by children only.
The Persian diminutive always ends in *L (che); as,
b (pa), **b (pache), or in d preceded by an As tun vowel; as,
j<±5 (kemz), (S^JT(kenizek).
The Arabic diminutive also makes its first vowel uturu, and
the next vowel ustun, followed by a quiescent consonantal ^,
whatever may be the vowels or quiescences of the original
O *• *
word; as,
cr*&.
O O*
J
O O
(hasan), £>w* (huseyn) ; ^ ^
O O " J
(hisn), ^^a*.
(husayn); &c.
The Persian and Arabic diminutive applies equally to
substantives and adjectives.
fications in details.
The Arabic rule has many modi-
But as these Persian and Arabic diminu-
tives are taken into Ottoman use as original words, enough
has been said on their subject for the present purpose.
68
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
SECTION I I .
The Noun
Adjective.
As a general rule, the adjective, in Turkish, is invariable,
having no gender, number, case, or degrees of comparison;
and this, whether the word be of Turkish, Arabic, or Persian
origin.
I t always precedes the substantive qualified; as,
+±\ dj^j (blyuk adam), a great man, J*±\ eJ^j (btyuk adamlar),
great men; JCJJ\ ISJ^J (blyuk Inekler), big cows.
But the Persian form of phrase is also much used (especially
in writing), by which an adjective of Persian or Arabic origin
follows the substantive qualified ; such adjective remaining in
the singular after a Persian substantive plural, the substantive
qualified always taking an esere of subjection to join it to the
o o i
•*
*o
*
adjective; thus, &jj-> &\<*j-* (merdani buzurg), great men;
o
,0 * *
d^j <j\$+£ ('amelhay! nik), good works.
If, in this Persian construction, both words are Arabic, and
the substantive is a feminine singular, or an irregular plural of
any kind, the adjective must be put in the feminine singular,
or in an irregular plural form; as, A+IaZ* J> L*c (e4saklrl muntazlme), regular troops, ^Lk-c ^^-LiL** (selatml e izam), great
Sultans.
Persian adjectives have three degrees of comparison, more
or less in use in Turkish composition.
The comparative is
o*
formed by adding the syllable^' (ter) to the end of the posi-
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
69
tive ; and the superlative, by adding the syllables ^J
(terln);
but these never qualify preceding substantives, being only
used as substantive members of phrases, or to qualify a
following substantive; thus, o l i J5L^ \$.jm (blhterinl vesa>U1 nejat), the best of the means of salvation; (blhterin vesa>lll
nejat), the best means of salvation.
Arabic adjectives have but two degrees of comparison.
"Whatever the form of the positive, the comparative is of the
O/O/
form Jxsl ( e f &l).
This is used, in Persian construction, more
as an exaggeration than as a degree of comparison, more as a
substantive than an adjective.
If followed by a substantive
singular, it is a superlative with the sense of very, extremely,
exceedingly, and the like; thus, o W eA^j o~^
nejat), a very good means of salvation.
(ahsant vesile5i
If the following sub-
stantive be in the plural, the adjective is a superlative, with
the sense of the most
; as, ol*s J5Ly c^*&.l (&hsiinl vesa5lll
nejat), the best of the means of salvation.
If an adjective be used as a substantive, it admits the
OX J
plural and the prepositions, as substantives; thus,Jjjl (lyuler),
the good; \&Jj>\ (lyulerlii), of the good, &c, &c.
Every Turkish adjective, besides its positive signification,
betokens, on occasions, the comparative, the superlative, and
an excess of the quality it expresses, which we explain by
O J
employing the adverb too before the word. Thus, dj-j (blyuk),
70
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
o -.
lat*ge, larger, largest, too large; ,j\^f
O
J
(sijaq), hot, hotter, hottest,
J
too hot; ijje-je (sdghuq), cold, colder, coldest, too cold; &c.
The Persian compound adjective, much used in Turkish, in
the positive degree only, is of many kinds.
Some are com-
pounded of two substantives, one or both of which may be
Arabic or Persian, never Turkish ; as, c^L*. +S» (jem-jenab),
O
O *
0'W
majestic as Jemshid; ^JAJ LJLA (asaf-tedbir), Asaph in counsel;
uJ,^s*£ (sheker-leb), sugar-lipped;
»\CJL»O o J l j c
('adalet-
destgyah), a very loom of justice (i. e., just) ; others of an
O
-
O
J '
adjective followed by a substantive ; as, ^ L ^ s * ^ (sebuk-pay),
light of foot, light-footed;
or a substantive followed by an
adjective; as, AL£JJ.> (dll-tlshne), thirsty-hearted (i. e., ardently
desirous) ; or a substantive preceded by ^> (hem); as, jiLiT J&
(hem-ashyane), of the same nest;
genus;
(hem-jlns), of the same
jjj^~** (hem-shehri), of the same town or country, a
fellow-countryman;
like;
UJ***
as, J^jijj-i
CO/
of a substantive followed by J^j (vesh),
(peri-vesh), fairy-like;
o «»
O
followed by d ^ (rang), *U (fam), or ^
OO,
of a substantive
-*^
(gyun), all signifying
CO,
O
colour; as, t s J ^ ^ (sebz-rang), green-coloured;
fam), emerald-coloured; ^*xS
'Oti*J
Js^(zumurrud-
(gendum-gyun), wheat-coloured
(i. e., dark-complexioned, brown); of a substantive followed by
J(T(kyar, gyar), J T ( g e r ) , a U (ban), or j> (dar) ; as,
(shirin-kyar), sweet-mannered; jC±ij\
]C^fi
(aferid-gyar), creative
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
71
(i. e., creator) ; ^ T j (zer-ger), goldworker, goldsmith;
O
*
IJLCIJ
OOJ
(bag-ban), garden-keeper (i.e., gardener) ;J\±J$* (muhr-dar), sealkeeper; or followed by J\± (dan), j \ \ (zar), ^L, (sar), or ^L-l
(Istan), all names of special places; as, <jljj£ (qalem-dan), a
O
-
C
J
pen-case; JjA£=* (gyul-zar), a flower-garden, a flowery mead;
.Ljfcjj (kyuh-sar), mountainous district;
Arabia;
^ L L ^ C ('arablstan),
or a substantive repeated; as,
(chak-chak),
imitative of the sound of repeated blows with axe or sword;
the same, or two different substantives, with I placed between
them ; as, eJUoU (chakya-chak), same signification, \i\p> (sera-pa), from head to foot;
or with \J or o in place of the I; as,
\j\5j* (ser-ta-pa), same sense; jJij*
O
(ser-te-ser), from end to end,
O
JO
- *
from beginning to end; or with ^\ in jjj>\~Z* (sheban-ruz), night
and day (which is unique), JJ^AJLi (shebane-ruz), meaning:
a whole night and day, all night and all day, twenty-four hours,
or several nights and days in one succession; or with some
other Persian preposition between the t w o ; as,-cjjJ^ pey-derpey),
step by step, gradatim;
eu*»^euM».s (d£st-ber-dest), hand
on hand, hands crossed; AL^A:*** (sm^-be-sine), breast to breast;
O
J
'
J
O'JJ/O'
jj^^Uy^ (dush-a-dush), shoulder to shoulder, bach to back; j$+>/*>
(ser-b£-rauhr), with the head (or mouth of a bag, bottle, &c.)
sealed up; or with a substantive and compound adjective ; as,
/ ?».^a ; i
^ i - (bakht-ber-geshte), w;^0S£ £wc& is reversed; or even
72
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
four words combined; as, »ju£> dJ^*» (ser-be-felek-keshlde),
whose head is lifted up to the very spheres ; besides many other
varieties ; especially the two privatives in ^ J (bi), without,
and li (na), not;
as, v-ol ^
(bi-edeb), without education or
manners, unmannerly, impolite;
L*j\j (na-bina), not seeing, sight-
less, blind.
Some Arabic expressions may be regarded as compound
o
«» o
*»
epithets in Turkish and Persian; as, MK%»U (sahib-qiran),
ford o/* tAe conjunction (i. e., tAe master of the age) ; ou+xJ-Jj
(veli-nl'met), associate of benefits (i. e., a benefactor) ; expresJ
o
o o^
*
o ^ cv
sions formed ofj i (zu), o U (zat), Jal (ehl), and C-JI^I (erbab),
all of which imply possession; as, Afljiji (zu-zu>abe), possessed
"* J (zu-zunabe), possessed of
of a forelock or topknot, and Afliiji
a following (i.e., a comet); u ^ ' o l i (zatu-'l-jenb, vwty. satlljan),
tfAe possessor of the side (i. e., pleurisy) ; or in Persian construction; as, j j ^ J a l (ehli-'lrz), possessed of honour or virtue,
O < O x
honorable, honest, virtuous ;
*0>»
x~~.**->\iS (erbabi-mesned), those
who possess the chief seat (i. e., high dignitaries); or an adjective
qualified w i t h ^ c (g&yr)> other; as, ^ j s ^ - c (gayri-mahdud),
other than circumscribed (i. e., unlimited, undefined);
or an
Arabic verb in the aorist made negative with V (la), not; as,
l*o5sV (la-yAhsa), wo^ to be counted, innumerable; JJOV (la-yu'add),
untold, innumerable; OJ*JV (la-yemut), wfo cZ^5 no^, immortal;
fjjs&V (la-yetejezza), not to 00 subdivided, indivisible;
or an
73
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
Arabic adjective followed by a definite article and substantive;
as, J J J J I ^ J J I (ebedlyyu-'d-devam), eternal in duration; ^Lyi) <jfi
(q&vlyyu-'l-bunyan), strong in build; <fec, &c, &c.
Every Turkish adjective is also an adverb; that is to say,
that, without any modification of form, the Turkish adjective
qualifies verbs as well as substantives; thus, o l ^jf
O+
a beautiful stallion;
gracefully.
J
J
O *
(gyuzel at),
*S"
isUj.ji Jjj> (gyuzel yurumek), to walk
The same is the case with Persian adjectives,
whether used in Turkish or in Persian phrases.
Arabic
adjectives, as Arabic substantives, require to be put in their
5 O
own accusative case indefinite when used as adverbs; as, iUs
0 - *
(fl'lan), by act; L*o. (hasanan), beautifully.
Arabic substan-
tives are also sometimes used as Turkish adverbs by being put
in their own genitive, indefinite or definite, as may be, and
preceded by an Arabic preposition; as, iUs ^
('an gafletln),
by inadvertence; ^JljJLlI ^Ic ('ale-'t-tevall), in continued succession, successively; AP « a J ' ^j (fl-'l-haqiqa), in reality, really,
truly;
oU-ijJl; (bl-'d-defa'at), on several occasions, repeatedly;
uZL) (ll-sebebln), for a reason; &c.
As with substantives, so also every Turkish adjective has
its diminutive, formed by the addition of the suffix A> (je, ja),
-ish, to the word, whether this end in a consonant or vowel;
as, j £ j (yeshll), green, A_SP* (yeshllje), greenish, somewhat
green; Jj_5 (qizil) red, *srj-i (qlzllja) reddish; <<s)j-> (blyuk)
74
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
large, *S?^-*-J ( D ty a kje)
largish;
j l i ^ (uf&q) small, 4L_S?LSJI
(uf5,qj4) smallish; ijj\ (hi) large, &*ij\ (Irlje) largish;
(qara) black, &z»*j} (q&raja1) blackish;
(quvujd) dryish.
^y
(quru) dry,
ij3
^jjy
A modification of this form, dictated by the
principle of euphony, is used for the words d ^ o , d ^ ,
o
o
jUjl,
'
by substituting a final d o r j for the t, and suppressing those
letters at the end of the radical word, as for substantives ; thus,
O *
J
<sU^j (blyujek), largish. A further conformity with the sense
of euphony, avoiding two ^jz**^ vowels in succession, makes
O
*
3
O
•>
O 3
" i
P /
j£.Uj! (Afajiq) smallish, and d ^ s r (kuchujuk) smallish;
this
last being doubly euphonic.
These diminutive adjectives, as in every language, often
express in Turkish the reverse of diminution in the quality
they represent, being in fact exaggeratives in sense, and meaning very, exceedingly, extremely, &c.; as, j$ +±\ &>jf~£» (jesurja
Jddm dlr), he is a bravish man (i. e., a very brave man).
SECTION I I I , The
Numerals.
Turkish, Arabic, and Persian numerals, cardinal and ordinal,
are used in Ottoman.
one-tenth.
Arabic fractions are also used as far as
In this sketch, however, the five sorts of Turkish
numerals alone are explained.
These are the cardinal, ordinal,
distributive, fractional, and indefinite numbers.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
75
o
The simple Turkish cardinal numbers are : jj
JJi (Ikl) two, -j\ (uch) three, o^> (durt) four,
^
(bir) one,
(besh) Jive,
j J I (alti) six, ^±1 (y&dl) s ^ w , j X - (seklz) eight, jyb
nine, ^j\ (6n) ten, ^J^i
(diquz)
(ylylrml) twenty, jj~*j\ (6tuz), ^/r/y,
J^S (qlrq) forty, J J I (elll) j£/ty, J L d T (altmfsh) strrty, J U * (yetmlsh) seventy, ^IjC* (seksan) eighty, ^ L i t (d6q?an) ninety,
\jj (yuz) a hundred, (sL* (bin) a thousand.
The two substan-
CJ
O JO
tives, (£)# (ynk), a hundred thousand, and ^^U (mllyin), a
million, are also used; but they are not true numerals.
They
are names of aggregates, and require the numerals before
o -> o
o * ° o
them; as, ^jij> (bir yuk), one hundred thousand, ijjj*j> (bir
mllyon) one million; and so on for higher numbers, dj> Lc^} >
O JO
O »
O JO
^j^JU ^j\, &c.
O
J3
The French numerals ^jJ* (bllyin), ^j^tj
(tlrll-
yon), <fec, are sometimes used.
The compound Turkish cardinal numerals are uniformly
built up by putting the units after the tens up to 99, and by
O J
placing the word jji before the simple or compound expression
O J
up to 1 9 9 ; then by adding the units from 2 to 9 before jj>
o
up to 9 9 9 ; next by using dLj before these simples or compounds up to 1999; and finally, by again using the simples
o
o o J
or compounds before dL-> up to 999,999; thus, ^Jjl (6n-blr)
^
° ^
O J
O J
J O J
eleven, ^ J ^ J > o (ylylrml Ikl) twenty-two, ^jyj^jji
(y&z otuz
tich) one hundred and thirty-three, ^
dL-j (bin
gJjjijS-*
76
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
s&klz yuz qirq besh) one thousand eight hundred and forty-Jive,
O O J O J O J
O
cjjSij\jji
O
^
'
O
O Ol*
O
J
Of
ctL-> J - X A (jl^-lijji JJ^J (beshyuz altmishseklz bin yuz
6n durt) 568,114, ^ T JLJ1 jjlj\
dU ^
U ^ ^ J ij*. Uj^A gj'
(uch mllydn, yedi yuk, doqsan iki bin, uch yuz, Alii alti)
3,792,356.
I t will be noticed that'no conjunction enters these
•
T
combinations.
O
J
O
When the foreign expression ^ j . ,L« , or the
treasury word &ji is not used, the native method of expressing
O
O
J
multiples of <*LJJJJI is to state the simple or compound
number of such multiple, and then to intercalate the word
•3 < ^
O
O
o
J
o
J
S 'f
"
»,_S (kerre) £m£s, before the word du-fj^i ; as, eL-jj^j a^JS ^ J J
(yedi kerre yuz bin) sgum iimes o?ie hundred thousand, 700,000;
dLoji. Ir^J^
KS^°J£
^J* ( d ^ r t ^
z
^
*k* k erre y ^ z b * fi )
45,200,000.
T h e Turkish interrogative cardinal numeral is — Is (qach)
fow; many ?
The cardinal numerals are adjectives ; but, like all adjectives, may be used as substantives, and declined.
Even the
interrogative — l i is used as a substantive when enquiring
" what number ? " or " what is it o'clock ? " or " at what price ? "
or " what is the day of the month ? "
Thus : JJXJJJA gli (qach
dldlnlz) "how many did you say?" ^jdS **l5 c>fcL» (sa'at q&cha
o J c ^
^ ^
gaidl) " to ^010 many (hours) has the clock come ? " ij^jfji)
*>^
(qacha verly6rsun) " at how much art thou selling (it, them) ? '
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
o
77
*» o „ •
^ ^ 1 3 usbl (ayfn qachl d!r) " the how-manyeth of the month
is it ? "
The Persian compound cardinals place the higher elements
first, as in Turkish and English; but the conjunction j is inO Ox
J O '
*
O
•*
J
++
troduced between each two members; as, o i a • o*o£»« e^u*j«.3• ,U»
(hezar A duwist u shast u heft), a thousand, two hundred, and
sixty-seven.
The Arabic compound cardinals take the conjunction j between each pair also ; but the lower elements stand first; as,
oo^
J o,£
j
o„
Jo
+,
u l l j c i w L j t j w ^ j JUJ >&*» (seoe-i tlse A khamsin & ml>eteyn u
elf) the year one thousand two hundred and fifty-nine, expressed
in Turkish, ^*Ai*,jjSk ^>\ jyltSyJ\
ISSLJ (bin Iklyuz elll diquz
senesl).
The Turkish ordinal numbers are formed by adding an esere
to the last quiescent consonant of the cardinal, simple or como
pound, followed by the termination ^4
JO J J J
first, i&jy^
o
; as,
^
c 5
(blrlnjl)
JO J J
(ituzunju) thirtieth, ^jy.
o-X'
0
^ y ^ H (blSlnjl) thousandth, ^j^s^
„
(yuzunju)
0<"
{Ji}\,
Joj
^j^o
Ji
hundredth,
oo
o ;o/
jJjjtA*
o
^ •
But, in the numbers that end in vowel ^ , this is suppressed
before the same termination ; as, | y i £ j . (Iklnjl) second, ^ J ^
(aitlnjl) sixth, ^yf^i
(yedlnjl) seventh, ^^^S^i
(yiylrmlnjl)
O Ox
iii
twentieth, ^rr
i^n$)
o oJ
fiftieth*
The cardinal o ^
changes
JOJQJ
its final into ^ before the ordinal termination; as, ir&*j*
(dn-diirdunja) fourteenth.
O J
^
78
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
The Arabic and Persian ordinals are frequently used, and
may be found in the lexicons, &c.
The Turkish distributive numbers are formed from the cardinals by making their last quiescent consonant movent with
o
o *
ustun, and then adding a quiescent . to the word; as,
(blrer), J l i (besher), jjyj\
(otuzer); j ^ (yuzer), ^
jj
(blner).
Their sense is expressed in English, which has no such
numerals, by the words each and apiece;
the
foregoing
examples will thus be rendered : one each, five apiece, thirty
o o J
each, a hundred each, a thousand each.
becomes j ^ (durder) four apiece,
The cardinal o>.>
°*
When the cardinal ends with a vowel, the s y l l a b l e ^ (sher)
is suffixed to form the distributive ; as, jLS^\
(Iklsher) two
apiece, ******—* » yalt Isher) six each, ^ I J J O I (yedlsher) seven apiece
^ L J ^ X J (ylylrmlsher) twenty each, j£JA\ (elllsher) fifty each
In the case of more than one hundred or thousand, it is the
cardinal that designates their number that receives the distributive suffix; as, jji ^ ~ r ^ (Iklsher yuz) two hundred each,
duj JZJ (besher bin) five thousand apiece.
And in compound
numbers the distributive suffixes are added to the numbers of
thousands, of hundreds, and of final units or tens, to indicate
one distribution; thus, jjt ^J^i jji j2*i (besher yuz ylylrml
Ox
blrer) five hundred and twenty-one
^
O O
O J
o'
*
O
O >»^ ^
^ch,jl^\^'^J^Si^tj6sMa
(seklzer bin, yedlsher yuz, qirq Iklsher), 8,742 apiece; JtJ\\ jj>
(yuz elllsher), 150 each.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
79
The Turkish fractional numbers are very simple. The number
of the denominator in the locative, and followed by the number
of the numerator is the form; as, j> *±S>\ (Iklde blr) in two
(parts), one; i.e. | , the half; ^^A *±1J (beshde Ikl) in five, two;
i.e. f, two-fifths.oo j
Sometimes one of the synonyms ^
oo
(pay),
a
*y^ (juz>), *~* (qism), &*>. (hissa) part, is added after each
numeral of the fraction; as, ^j>
»JJU SA (Ikl payda, blr pay)
in two paints, one part.
The Arabic fractional numbers are also used up to ten,
oo
Excepting the word ujLai (nisf) a half, the half, they are all
O 0-*
OOJ
O OJ
of the form Jx*; thus, eJij (stils, vulg. sums) a third, jto. (rub*)
o o J
OO''
a seventh, ^
on J
o o J
a fourth, ^j*** (khums) a fifth, ^x*
(suds) a sixth, *-*» (sub*)
OOJ
OOJ
(sumn) an eighth, su-J (tus e ) a ninth, jL& ('ushr,
O ^ O J
OOJ
vw?^. ushur) a tenth, a tithe.
The dual of e J u is used, ^UJL*
(sulsan) two-thirds ; but for all the others a Turkish numerator
03-»
O
O OJ
»
^ *
is used; as, vjj —jl (uch rub e ) ^r^^ quarters, y*+>- ^y^
o oJ
o*»
khums) two-fifths, *«J ^
(Ikl
(besh tuse) five-ninths, &c.
There are two special Turkish adjectives and one Turkish
o
~
substantive to express half. One of the adjectives, ^U (yaxlm),
and the substantive, ^ b (yari), signify the half (of one sole
thing; as, Ql *,G (yarlm elma) half an apple, a half
apple;
ir+ljk eJLSlJl (elmanin yarlsi), the half of an (or of the) apple.
O J
J
The other adjective, <Jj># (buchuq), is used after some whole
80
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
+o,
o i
»
o
number, never alone ; as, Ul {Jy*-y. j> (blr buchuq elma) an
apple and a half, LS*CL» £y*yt if^} (ikl buchuq sa'at) two hours
and a half.
When a complex fractional number consisting of an integer
and a fraction other than one-half has to be expressed, the
Turkish or Arabic fractions are used, the conjunction J or the
preposition A)) being introduced between the integer and the
fraction;
as, *_^ y J {SJ\ or **j y AS\ ^P^-A two and oneo
fourth.
When the Turkish fraction is used, the numeral y
in the genitive is also introduced before the fraction;
as,
^-^.jl 8^}_>w*i &y A>\ ^j+> Jive, and three-eighths of one.
The indefinite numerals a r e : yt> (her) every; y yt> (her blr)
o
every one, each;
o
o
-*& (hlch) no, none; y
o*
o,
o
_*a (hlch blr), no ;
«»
o
(jiso (ba'zi) some; ji.£=>\ (ekser) the most part;
*• o
r^j*
(blr qach)
some, a few; j \ (az) few; <jj-* (ch6q) many; j l ^ J (blr az)
o
J
o
a few, a little ; y$y»j>. (blr ch6q) a great many, a great quantity;
as
&c. Of these, y* is always an adjective; the rest are adjectives
and substantives.
There is a small series of Turkish numerals of a peculiar
nature, from j~$*->} (Ikiz), twin, twins, through J-->jl (uehuz)
o J
•»
triple, a trine, j j ^ p (durduz) fourfold,
o
^
toj~2j (beshlz) five-fold,
o J J
and perhaps on to j^j\ (6nuz) ten-fold.
Adjectives are formed
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
from these in j ! ; as, j]}^\
81
(Iklzli), possessed of twins, oj twin
J o J J
(branches, &c.); jjJ^jl (nchuzlu) with three (lambs, branches,
&c);
&c.
The written digits a r e : I 1, r 2, r 3, i 4, <s 5, i 6, v 7. A 8,
q 9, • 0.
With these, compound numbers are written as in
English, from left to r i g h t ; as, r© 25, n . 160, r i . l 3409,
v A . . r . n 78003046, &c.
In dates, the thousand, and generally the hundreds, of the
year of the Hijra are omitted, as also the dots of the letters;
thus, A-*— stands for A. ,.w (sene bin Iklyuz doqsan alt!)
in the year (of the Hijra) 1296 ; 2 1 b r i <j (fi ylylrml blr
za, sene 97) <w the 2\st ZVl-Qada,
'97 (A.H.).
The signs for the months, in dates, are: +, for ^ s ^ ; ^ , for
j*>)
\J9
for ^ji\ £fj ', j> for^i-Vl gjj
—, f o r ^ V l ^ U * . ; <->, for u ^ , ; ^
o 3
-
x o , o'*
,
; W, for J^Vi <jJU*» ;
for (jLa*; j , for ^Li^,;
i \I
J , for J1j-£ ; b , for sjouiJl <^ ; a, for AS?1 ^ S .
The day
always precedes the sign of the month ; and the first day is
termed ^
as,
(gurre), while the thirtieth is named i * (selkh);
A~*> * ip
s,
A^*I if J"> <J > a ^ dots being omitted in
these shortened numeral dates.
Not so, however, when the
date is written out in full words ; as, ^ L i J o ; *5ol (<*LJ «---£l
^ ^ J AJ^l^i ^ H
^
e L ^ *}-* &*>-;** **'~» jjb> (Ishbu bin
Iklyuz d6qsan doquz senM hljiiyyesl mah-i muharremlnlii 6n
82
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
b&shlnji penjshenblh gyunu) This day of Thursday, the 15th of
the month of Muharrem, of the Hijra year 1299.
SECTION IV.
The
Pronoun.
The Turkish personal pronoun has no distinction of gender:
^ (ben) / , ^
(sdn, not sen) thou, j \ ( 6 ; in writing, generally,
O J
O
O
j y 61) he, she, it; and their plurals : jj (hlz) we, j*> (slz) you,
^ J j l (&nl&r, inldr) they.
o
o
o
In politeness, J « J and j - * are used instead of ^
^
o
^
and ^j-*,.
They then have their own plurals: Jj> (blzler), Jy*> (slzler),
which cannot be expressed in English.
as singulars, by the over-polite.
These are even used
The third person plural is
used, in the same way, out of politeness, for the singular, as
is practised in Italian ; but it has not its plural.
The word
ijXd (kendi) self, is a kind of common pronoun, of all the
persons, singular and plural.
I t is specialized by the posses-
sives.
The personal pronouns, singular and plural, are declined in
the same way as the nouns substantive, excepting that some of
them have a special genitive,—all but those of the second
person, singular and plural.
These genitives a r e : ^ (b^nlm)
of me, my; (SJLMI (s4nln) of thee, thy; dlil (Unin, 6nuii) of him,
o
her, it; his, her, its; ^
o
(blzlin) of us, our; \s£y» (slzln) of you,
your ; d^lil (dnldiin, onlarin) of them, their.
But, to take either
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
o J
83
^
of the prepositions <jj£l , AA , after their singulars, they must
be put in the genitive, all but the third person plural; as,
£jg\ ^J forme, AMfiJ}->with you, <jj*-ldijl for him, her, it, ALI^JUI
with them.
These genitives are used, when required, to emphasize and
corroborate the possessive pronoun of the same number and
person.
They are never used alone, without their possessives
to corroborate; thus, JA> (bSMrn) my father (not my mother,
o
&c),
*
*
o «»
JJJJ +* (benlm b&b&m) my father (not your father, or his
father).
The possessive pronouns, too, have no distinction of gender,
either on the English or French principle.
They are 1 (1m,
o
im) my; d (in, in) thy; ^j (1, !), or, after a vowel, ^
his, her, its; y* (Imlz, imiz) our, jS
(si, si)
(Inlz, inlz) your; ^J (lerl,
ldri), their.
These possessives are suffixed
to the substantives they
qualify, and form one word with them.
That compound
word is then declined like a simple substantive ; thus, *>jj
(evlm) my house, ISUJJ! (evlmlii) of my house, A*>J! (evlme) to
my house, »J*JJ! (evlmde) in my house;
&c.
(The ^
added
here before the bare possessive, is thought by some to be
needed in the case of a preceding consonant that does not
join on in writing to its next letter in the same word.
Others
do not consider it necessary, and write: ^ , is)jl, ^ 1 , &c; but
84
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
when the compound, in declension, &c, takes another vowel
after it, it is more usual to add this preceding vowel also; as,
<$UJJ1 (evlmlii) of my house, A^J! (evlme) to my house;
JS^J^\
(evlnlz) your house ; &c.
The vowel that precedes the bare possessive is an £s6re, soft
or hard, given grammatically to the final consonant of the
qualified substantive, when it ends in a consonant.
0#*
Or*
Thus,
Op*
,**
o l (at) a horse, J\ ( M m ) my horse, dUl (&tin) thy horse, Jil
(atf), his, her, its horse, j+-5\ (itimiz) our horse, J « A . J 1 (Mniz)
your horse, <JJLJ\ (dtldri) their horse.
After an uturu vowel
o J
J
dominant, this esere becomes Aturu also; thus, J£jl (6ghul)
OJJ
J
O
Oj
J
J
a son, Acj\ (6ghalu.ni) my son; O^J (but) a thigh, Jj> (butum)
n j J
OJ
oJ j
or +±j> (budAm) my thigh; \£ (yuz) a face, +jji (yuzum) my
face; j j M g y u z ) an eye, jljjS (gyuzAm) my eye.
When the substantive ends with a vowel, the bare possessive
is added to form a syllable with that vowel, whatever it may
be; thus, JJIJ (babam) my father;
^jj
c^ajb (yanq6n) thy echo;
(qapAsA) his, her, its door or gate; JAJJ^JJ** (sungyumuz)
O
J •» ° -»
our bayonet; jS^jf
-
(gyurgyunuz) your experience;
J
9
\s)jjy»
(surulerl) their flock. The example here given, with the
possessive singular of the third person, shows clearly that
when the substantive ends with a vowel, ^» is the possessive,
in lieu of <j after a consonant.
If the final vowel of the substantive is 5, it is never joined
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
O
on to the possessive in writing.
85
^
O
x-
Thus, #»»}---J (tejzem) my
(maternal) aunt, i&ijj (teyzen), thy aunt,
^ijZ (teyzesl) his or
her aunt; j**)J (teyz&rnlz) our aunt, j-£*}£ (teyzenlz) your aimt,
L$Jl/s> (teyzeleri) their aunt.
When the final vowel is ^ , the possessives of the first and
second persons singular do not join on to it in writing.
In
the third person singular, and in all the possessive plurals,
o
o *
they join on.
o *"
Thus, {jjjS (terzl) a tailor, *\£JJ-J (terzlm) my
tailor, &<jjj> (terzlii) thy tailor, ^ijj
J+OJ O&rzlmlz) our tailor, jSsjJ
(terzllerl) their tailor.
(terzlsl) his or her tailor,
(terzlnlz) your tailor,
{jjtjj
There is no valid reason for this rule;
custom alone has it so.
Thus are formed: ^joJf (kendlm)
myself, &xS {kendln) thyself, ^ 4 x 3 (kendlsl) his, her, itself;
j*l xS\(kendlmlz)
ourselves, y& jji (kendlnlz) yourselves, <jj>i±£
(kendllerl) theirselves.
A final j , in a polysyllable, as in declension, changes into
c before the possessives, singular or plural, excepting that of
the third person plural; so also, an Arabic d changes into
o , J
Turkishes) (y value) in like cases.
mansion, ^LjjJ
Thus, jlijS (qonaq), a
(q6nagh!m) my mansion;
dx^jl (Ipeyln) thy silk;
dujl (Ipik) silk,
j j l k (tawuq) a fowl, ^J]o (tawAghA)
his or her fowl; j*clijS (q6nagh!miz) our mansion,
(Ipeylnlz) your silk ; (jjAJj\Jio
(tawuqlar!) their fowl.
j3^-+-A
The
86
OTTOMAN TURKISH
GRAMMAR.
reason of the exception is evident,—the final consonant takes
no vowel before ^J.
These possessives equally qualify plural substantives, and
follow the sign of the plural.
Thus, +jj\ (evlerlm), my houses;
ts^JLJl (atlailn) thy horses; ijjjj<-jy> (Miugyulerl) his, her, its
bayonets; j+sjjjj^
niz) your aunts;
(sfirulerlmlz) our JlocJcs; jS^J^
(tevzelerl-
^^JuLjjS (qin&qlari) their mansions.
By a consideration of the examples above given with the
possessives of the third persons, singular and
plural, as
attached to singular and plural substantives, two peculiarities
become evident, namely: 1, the plural sign is not repeated for
the possessive when the substantive is itself plural ; 2, consequently, the combination of a substantive and a possessive
of the third person, when it has the plural syllable J
between
the two, leaves it altogether doubtful whether this plural sign
belongs to the substantive or to the possessive.
*o* o x
combination ^JJjXjjJ
Even if the
J
(qondqlarleri) had been in use,—which
is not the case,—it would • have been impossible to decide
whether ^jj&bja (qonaqlari) was intended to betoken the sense
of his or her mansions, on the one hand, or their mansion, on
the other.
Add to this difficulty the third sense of their man-
sions, and the puzzle becomes still more complicated.
In
conversation, the doubt of the hearer may be removed, if
necessary, by proper enquiries.
But, in a written document,
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
87
intended to be understood by an absent reader, possibly after
the death of the writer, a method was seen, especially by
judges and legists, to be necessary for distinguishing between
the three cases.
That distinction is effected, in writing, somewhat at the
expense of plain grammar, as follows.
To distinguish the
single possessor of the plural possessions, the singular corroborative genitive of the personal pronpun is placed before
the combination containing the plural sign; thus, ijjjijja
(anln qonaqlari) his or her mansions.
dul
To distinguish the
plural joint possessors of a single possession, the genitive of
the plural personal pronoun is prefixed, and grammar is
violated by omitting the plural sign from the combination
of substantive and possessive; as, \f-^
their mansion.
d^Lil (tularin qonaghl)
In the third case, the sign of the plural is
used in the corroborative and in the combination ; thus,
ijjskji d,lil (dnldrfn qin&qlM) their mansions.
A doubt may
still be felt, and these distinctions are not always used.
The declension of the combination with the possessive of
the third person, singular or plural, takes a special form, a ^
being introduced before the prepositions, and the final vowelletter of the original combination suppressed before this C ),
when the latter is joined in writing to the combination singular, or does not itself possess a vowel in the combination
88
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
plural.
This rule, applied to possessives joined to substan-
tives ending respectively in consonants or vowels, acts t h u s :
x
>/"
^jl^-S, (sL)UJ5, A^ILS , »A^IL5 , ^e-^^-3, ^yJcS
^x»
;
x
x
*
^O
x j S
O
s
* '
X
'
'C/
XOx
SO
x jS'
^ x
O
x*
XO
s-
+
y
x ^
s*
x
/O/
*
x
x
/C/
x
X
x*
^ X X
'
x
xx
^
X
xO
<0/
8Jklwsjj, ^ M » 8 ) J , ^JJu-^o ; (j?^»^ > ^^SLJ^*}^ 9 *^lj*}s> >
•
..O ,
O
CSL^LLJ,
^x
^"V
O
zO<
O XO
x
5
X
/ C
^ i ^ )
x
'
When ^ J - i J is an adjective, it remains unchanged, and
'
O
X
*
O
" ^
means own ; thus, J^L* ^J-L-i (kendt b&b&m) ray own father,
\SZjjJtd\j
ijXLJ
(kendl valldelerlnlz) yowr oww mothers, &c.
SECTION V,
TAe Demonstratives.
These are, y (bu) this, £» (stm) that or jAi's, ^ (6) or J^\
O
./
O
O
J
(61, as in the personal) that, J^>J\ (6-blr) o r ^ J j l (61-blr) the
other.
They are used as substantives and as adjectives; being
declined or invariable, accordingly, like other substantives and
O
adjectives.
O 'I*
C
x
^
J
^
C^O
x
^x-
J
Thus, L^ULJ y this book, J*\-zS y these books;
*
OxOx»*0
^\ J)J\ that other man, J*±\J)J\
J
those other men; &c.
As substantives, y and j^» are thus declined, something like
*
i
*
oJ J
y i
x o •»
the personal j l or J j l : j j (bu), diijj (bunun), o^ (buna), sjjg
J
(bunda),
3
O
xO
J
C^O
J
O
xO
J
JJJ (bunu), ^Jjj-j (bundan) ; Jjj-> (bunlar), eJjlSjj
(bunlarin), lj>y (bilnlara), w j l ^ (bunlarda), ^J>y (bunlari),
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
OsO
s
O
3
89
9
O
J
^ ^ J L J ^ J (bunlardan) ; jJi, (shu, sometimes written Jj_£, proC J
J
<, J
sO
J
nouneed sh6l), dii^t (shAnM), &^» (shMa), »jj^» (shunda),
J
>
O -O
•»
O/O
J
J^i. (shunu), <jjjj£ (shundan) ; jijl
SS O J
sOsO
O ^ O J
(shunlar), c^Uj^» (shAn-
J
sO J
larin), ^lij^i (shunlara); s^lij^ (shunlarda), ^ ^ j ^ (shunlar!),
^j^ljj^ (shunlardan).
With ^jjsl and AA their singulars are
put in the genitive; as, ^jg) a^jji for this, M dt3j£ with that.
o
J
But J)J\ , to be used as a substantive, must have the possessive suffix of the third person appended to i t ; <^J>J\ (A-blrt)
its other one, the other one (of the two). I t is then declined
O
3
+
3
sO
J
like all similar combinations : d L ^ j ] , A i ^ j i , ^s^j\9
O sO
3
SO
*
O
sO
3
*
so
J
SO
sO
3
SO
J
J
^i/jK
O sO 'O
3
Or it may take either of the two possessive suffixes of the first
o
J
and second persons plural; as, j*ij>j\ (6-blrlmlz), the other one
n
3
s^
f
of us, d j ^ j l of the other one of us; a/oyjl to the other one of
SO
SO
3
s*
SO
3
you ; ty^iyj>j\ in the other ones of us; ^$y^Jj>^\ the other ones
of you; &c.
SECTION V I
The
Interrogates.
who ? is always a substantive, and declined as
such, singular and plural: ^jfofwhom
s O ^
^
o s O ^s-
? whose ? ±+fto whom ?
OSQ
sS
i±+5 in whom ? ^+5 whom ? &S+.S of or from whom ? J+ZS
who, what or which persons ? &c.
90
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
AJ (ne) what ? is generally a substantive, and declined; but
it is also used as an adjective, and is then invariable : (*J13AJ
(nenln) of what ? *-) (for A)A3, neye) to what ? saw (nede) m
what? ^ A J (neyl) wAa* (accus.) ? ^ j j (for ^ A J , neddn) from
what ? Jj (forJl«u, neler) what (things)? esJ^S (nelerln) of what
(things); &c.
tfX
(S$n$i
vulg. h&ngi) which ? is both substantive and
adjective,—declined or invariable accordingly.
These three words, as substantives, take the possessive
suffixes.
Thus, ~+S (klmlm) my who ? ^AJ (nem) my what ?
V&jf (kimln) thy who?
d^S (nen) thy what? ^Jc$
(q&ngM)
its which, which (one) of it ? +j\ •.«.,•> (klmlerim) my what pero
-
x
o
c »»
sews ? *^<u (nelerlm) my what things ? j+J^J (qanglmlz) which
(one) of us ? J C J L i ^ (q&ngilerlnlz) w;HcA (ones) of you ? \jJJcs
(qangileii) which (one, or, which ones) of them ?
^ji A3 or jSlJ {vulg. naqadar) how much ? j ar*e both sub^
> stantives and
JrJ
Jj* A5 (vulg. ne turlu) what sort ?
\
adjectives.
SECTION V I I .
THERE
IS NO RELATIVE
The Relative Pronoun.
PRONOUN
IN
TURKISH,
though
attempts are made to use the Persian relative and conjunction,
A-5|kl), as such, in literary composition.
junction A_$IS a very different thing.
The Turkish con-
Its use by Europeans
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
91
peans and others, as a relative pronoun, is greatly to be
avoided.
This avoidance of all use of the relative pronoun
is the prime distinction of Turkish from all Aryan and Semitic
tongues.
It is the perfection of language.
The numerous active and passive participles of the Turkish
verb obviate the necessity of a relative.
The active par-
ticiples take the place of our relative when it is nominative
to a verb ; and the passive participles do so when our relative
is the accusative, or any indirect object of a verb.
(See this
explained in the paragraphs on the Participles, in Section V I I I . ,
on the Verb.)
There is a peculiar Turkish relative, however, to which we
have no parallel in English,—the suffix S(kl).
to nouns and pronouns substantive in two ways.
It is attached
If the sub-
stantive be in the genitive, the combination is a substantive,
and indicates that which belongs to (the substantive) ; thus,
bb, diiljlj,
Ss_fol^ (b^bdninkl) the one which belongs to a (or
the) father,
{j^JX
(bab&minkl) the one which belongs to my
father,
LAJG^GC
(b&bMniiiki) the one belonging to his (or her)
father,
his father's one;
&c.
If the substantive be in the
locative case, the combination is sometimes a substantive,
sometimes an adjective.
The substantive combination then
indicates that which exists in (the simple substantive) ; the
adjective combination expresses the (substantive) which exists
92
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
in (the first substantive).
Thus, ^jftxS^
(babamdekl) the
thing, the one that exists, that is in (the possession or keeping
of) my father, which my father has or holds;
JA ^S&J^UU
c
(babaslndekl illm) the science possessed by his father, that is in
his father.
The substantive combinations form the plural, and
are declined; the adjective combination is invariable.
With a noun of place or of time the same particle, ^\, forms
a relative combination, substantive or adjective, having relation to the place or time named.
In the case of the noun of
place, the locative* preposition may also be employed.
Thus,
^iU.1 the foot, or lower 'part, S~&i»\ and ^ j ^ l i l that which
is at the foot;
- L ^ l the evening, {Ss^zj^\
that which was or
will be (present) in the evening.
SECTION V I I I .
The Derivation of the Verb.
As a general rule, each primary Turkish verb forms, itself
included, a system of twelve affirmative, twelve negative, and
twelve impotential verbs, by regular derivation ;—thirty-six in
a l l ; one half being verbs active, the other half verbs passive;
the active verbs being transitive or intransitive;
the passives
having for their nominative the direct or the indirect object
of the transitive, the indirect object only of the intransitive
primitive.
In another mode of subdivision, on the other hand, these
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
93
thirty-six verbs divide into two equal classes, in pairs, one of
each pair being simple, and the other causative (which is also
permissive, as the sense may show).
Each simple and causative pair of verbs is either determinate,
indeterminate, or reciprocal; so that, by a special division of
the same thirty-six, there are twelve determinate, twelve indeterminate, and twelve reciprocal verbs ; thus (giving the
imperatives of each, for economy of space):—
ACTIVE.
CLASSES.
'A
>
Simple
H
<
£
S
*4
>
O
Causative
[Permissive) *
Simple
Causative
{Permissive) *
TRANS. OR IN TRANS.
H
O
Causative
(Permissive)'
OR INTRANS.
INTRANSITIVE.
Indeterminate.
Reciprocal.
(t*p)
hick (him); kick.
J (tepln)
kick about, dance
(in pain, with joy, &c).
(teplsh)
kick mutually one another.
jX~J
(tepdir)
?na7^ or Ze£ (him) #0
kicked;...kick.
jSJ^J (teplndlr)
make (him) kick about.
*•-*-> (fepmd)
Kc& (him) wo£; #zc& wo£.
(teplnma)
kick not about
JO-MJ (teplsh dlr)
make (them) kick mutually]
one another.
L*J (teplshma)
kick not mutually one
another.
^ ; ) . ; ; ) (teplndirma)
6^jSl^ (teplshdlrma)
**jjJ» (tepdlrma)
wa&0 or Z<?£ 7^2 (him) fo make not (him) kick about. make (them) not kick one
another mutually.
kicked; ...kick.
&A6~5 (teplneme)
A*A*1J (teplsheme)
#e unable to kick (him);
... to kick.
be unable to kick about.
be unable to kick one
another mutually.
AASJX^J (tepdlrerne)
<ju»,jJvJ (teplndireme)
be tenable to make (him)
kick about.
*+6j±~J (teplshdlreme)
be unable to make (them)
kick one another mutually.
A~©A_*-J (tepeme)
Simple
TRANS.
Determinate.
be unable to make (him)
be kicked; ... hick.
PASSIVE.
CLASSES.
I N T R A N
i
IMPOTENTIAL
NEGATIVE
AFFIRMATIVE
Determinate.
Simple
) he kicked, he kicked in, &c.
Causative \
(Permissive) 1
Simple
}
J ^ j j (tApdlrll) '
he made to he kicked.
Indeterminate.
j j .(tipbii)
he kicked about in, &c.
]jXJ
(t&plndlrll)
he made to he kicked
about in.
AJL> (tipllmll)
AJL*3 (t^plnllmd)
he not kicked.
he not kicked about in.
i^jSJ (t6pdlr6lm&)
Causative \
(Permissive) 1 he not made to he kicked.
A*JLJ (t£pll£m&)
Simple
1
S I T I V E .
t+ijXJ (t&plndlrllm&)
he not made to he kicked
about in.
A*ALJ (t£plnll&m&)
}
he unahle to he kicked.
he unahle to he kicked
about in.
Causative \
{Permissive) 1
(tApdtrflJmA)
he unahle to he made to
be kicked.
i*AjX*3 (t£plndliil£m&)
|
Reciprocal.
J J i i (tiplshll)
he mutually kicked in, &c.
J ^ j i i (tJplshdlrll)
he made to kick mutually
one another.
^ 4 (%lshllm4)
he not mutually kicked in.
A J ; J ^ J (t£plshdlrllm&)
he not made to mutually
kick one another.
|
**dltJ (t£plshll£m&)
he unahle to he mutually
kicked in.
\
&*djXtJ (t£plshdlrll£m6)
he unahle to he made to he he unable to be made to
mutually kick one another.
kicked about in.
96
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Remarks on the foregoing Table.
The imperative singular is the root, or simplest form in the
conjugation, primitive or derivative, of the Turkish verb.
This conjugation—unique for all the thirty-six forms, as will
be seen further on—consists in adding certain vowels and consonants to the end of this conjugational root.
When the conjugational root of the simple affirmative form
ends in J , or in a vowel, it forms its passive by adding ^
O J
instead of J .
O J J
Thus : J^> (bul) fnd,
dominating) be found;
^
(bulun, the titurft
%\$ (qapla) cover, ^%\3
o
J J
J
(qaplan) be
J
covered; js>j\ (6qu) read, ^jsj) (6qun) be read.
In the fore-
going case of the vowel-ending, the passive sometimes takes
both the £ and the J , the ^ always preceding; thus, J A l S
(qaplanil, as &%}*>), be covered, J 5 ^ l (oqunul, as &J>j\) be read.
When the root of the simple affirmative has more than one
syllable, and ends in J , j , or a vowel, its causative is formed
0
.
-
o
o
by adding a letter o in lieu of the syllable ,,>.
^
Thus, JUi
(qisal) become shorter, e J U i (qlsalt) make or let (it) become
O
J
O
J
O O J
O
J
shorter; shorten (it); ^-*^=>jl (uksur) cough, i2>jj*„<z->j\ (uksurt)
make or let (him) cough; <aJL>j-> (suweyle) speak, say, eJuj-*»
(stiweylat) make or let (him) speak or say, make or let (it) be
spoken or said (by him); jjj\
(oqu.) read, recite, Ojijl (6qut)
make or let (it) be read or recited (by him), make (him) read.
97
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
Many simple affirmative verbs ending in consonants also
form their causatives in ?, preceded by a servile esere, sometimes written Ja, and even J j , with uturu ; not in . 3 .
No
rule appears to exist on this subject, and the dictionary alone,
o
or experience, can help the student in it.
drink (it), j ^ \ (Ichlr) or jjg)
o
Thus, f\
(Ich)
(Ichur) make or let (it) be drunk
-
o
<»
(by him); o b (bat) sink (thou), J\> (batir) make or let (it) sink,
sink (it); J& (qach) flee, escape, jJ& (qachir) make or let (him)
flee or escape.
When the simple verb, affirmative, negative, or impotential,
is transitive, its causative governs the same accusative ; and
the nominative to the simple then becomes a dative to the
o o x
causative.
o
o o*
Thus, -^jLi ^
'*
*
+
o
^
„
(ben an! yazdlm) I wrote it,
o *
ttJ-V^i & (V^ cr* ( s ^ u ^
band yazdirdin) ZAow madest it to be
written by me (thou causedst to me the writing it), thou madest
or lettest me write it.
When the simple verb is neuter, its nominative becomes
the accusative of its causative; as, **jij\ (uyudum) /
O JO J J
*
slept,
Ox
d j j ^ y I** ^
(san benl uyutdun) thou madest or lettest me
eleep.
An indefinite series of causatives of every verb may be
O
O
o
formed by repeating the causative suffixes, o after ^ , and ..3
o
after o .
"
They are sometimes useful, but are generally used
in irony; each augment adds an agent to the chain ; as, j>*}li,
H
98
OTTOMAN T U R K I S H GRAMMAR.
O XO O x
O/OO O x
O^O
OO O X
<J}+jy\h, (jVi^jt > I3*J^JS\\I
, &c.; this last means to cause (a
thing) to be caused (by a second) fo fo caused (by a third) to
fo written (by a fourth agent).
The indeterminate is also called the Reflexive form.
two uses.
I t has
More generally it has the same intransitive sig-
nification with the simple form, as to the action, but betokens
that this action is then performed without any determinate
O /O X
exterior object.
^
Thus (sUiJ is, to kick one's feet or heels about
as one lies or stands (like a dancer, a man in a passion, a dying
animal, & c ) ; j ^ i l ? (baqiumaq) is, to look about, here and
there, in a perplexed or inquisitive manner ; &c. But, at other
times, this form is transitive, and then indicates that the
agent is either the direct or indirect object, also, of the
action,—that the act is done to or for the agent's self.
Thus,
ij^U^i -15 (qilij qush&nmaq) to gird a sword on to one's self;
O .»0
Ox
OxO
<»
dUijjl j ! (&v £dlnm£k) to acquire a house for one's self; ,j*jJi»ls
(qashinmaq) to scratch one's self (with one's nails) ; dl*ij>
o / O ^x- xO
(glyinmek) to put on one's clothes, (sUi-S **}-&. (chizma glylnmek)
O
x ^S
x XO
to put on boots, ^<Ju-> i&i)^}^
(chlzmalerlml glylneylm) let me
put on my boots; &c.
Passive verbs of neuters are defective ; they are conjugated
in the third person singular only, and in inflexions over which
person and number exercise no influence.
They signify, to be
such that the neutral action takes place in, to, for, by, on account
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
99
of, &c. (as expressed), something named, as the act of some or
any indeterminate agent.
Thus, jJ^J
&-ij> (buyle teplnllmaz)
the act of kicking about is not thus performed, j^S
**\)j> (burada
teplnllmaz) the act of kicking about is not allowed here; &c.
W e have such passive verbs in English; as, to he slept in, to
he fought for;
&c.
The Turkish passive verb always has, inherent in it, the
sense of to he —able.
Thus, ^ J L S (keslllr) it is cut (often),
it will be cut (then), it is cuttable ( a l w a y s ) ; y ^ (yenmaz) it is
not eaten (as a rule), it will not he eaten (then), it is not eatahle
(either now, or by nature).
SECTION I X . The Turkish
Conjugation.
All Turkish affirmative verbs, active or passive, transitive
or intransitive, are conjugated in one and the same invariable
manner, modified, as to their servile vowels and consonants,
by the laws of class and euphony alone.
The negative and
impotential verbs differ from the affirmative, as to conjugation,
merely in the form of the aorist active participle, and of the
analogous aorist tense indicative.
So that only one sole con-
jugation exists, in reality, in the Turkish language.
The conjugation consists of one simple and three complex
categories of moods, tenses, numbers, persons, participles,
verbal nouns, and gerunds; all four categories, simple and
100
OTTOMAN TURKISH
GRAMMAR.
complex, being fundamentally alike, but each modified in a
certain special manner, to express a modified variation of the
action.
Each category has six moods : the imperative, indicative,
necessitative, optative (also subjunctive), conditional,
and
infinitive.
The imperative mood has one tense, the future.
The indicative has eight tenses, in four pairs ; the present
and imperfect; the aorist and past; the perfect and pluperfect; the future and past future.
The necessitative, optative, and conditional, have one pair
each, the aorist and past.
The infinitive has but one tense,
the present.
Each category has five active participles; the present (which
is the general active participle, applicable, in one sense, to
any time, past, present, or future), the aorist, the past, the
perfect, and the future.
In Turkish, the present or active,
the perfect or passive, are not confused
together
as in
European languages ; each is distinct in form and in sense,
and is different from the gerund in form, as it is, in grammar
and in sense, different from the verbal noun.
T h e active participles of the passive verbs denote the direct
recipients of the action of verbs transitive; the passive participles of the same apply to the indirect objects thereof.
The
active participles of the passives of intransitives denote the
101
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
indirect objects of the intransitive action ; the passive participles of such passives are not in use.
Between the five active and two passive participles of each
category, a Turkish conjugation thus furnishes twenty-eight
participles for every verb, primitive or derivative.
By the
use of these numerous participles, it entirely avoids
all
necessity for a relative pronoun.
The present active participle adds an ustun and the letters
o
o
^ 1 , or only the letter ^ , to the root that ends in a consonant;
o
o
the aorist adds a vowel and the letters J , or only the letter^,,
o
o
o
with an ustun, ^ with an uturu, a n d ^ only (or sometimes^)
with an esere, for which no rale can be given; the past adds
o
iJL* (mlsh, mish) to all roots, whatever their ending; as the
o
o
perfect adds ista (dik) or j p (dlq).
Of
The future adds an ustun
< *
and the letters dc*» (&j&k) or j&.s (&j&q) to consonantal roots,
O f f
Of
f
and CSUAJ or J£>AJ , with ustun, to vowel roots, including the
negatives and impotentials.
Thus, ^
O*
(tepan), J^J
f
(qiran)
O f f
are present active participles; as, ^ T (teplnan), ^ ^ J (teplshan), ^%S (tepllan), ^%.J (teplnllan), and J%2*J (teplshllan),
are those of the simple affirmative derivatives.
o
o
The causatives
o
o
in j ^ and in J,^ add the ustun and ^\; while those in o change
'
O
O
f
Of
O fO
it into ^ before the letters , j l ; thus, &\J±J (tepdlran),
O
f
Of
(oturdan), J%jS^
O f
(tepdlk) ;
f f
O
(tepdlrllan), &c.;
O *
Of
O
yU+i (tepmlsh) ;
sfOf
(*UA-J (tepejek), (SUA-**? (tepmey&jek),
3
J
0\^j\
O f
Of
djj
ff
ff
eU^au)
102
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
(tepemeyejek), the final s of the negative particle A* being
elided as useless.
When the root ends with a vowel, as is the case with all
the negatives and impotentiais, the syllable ^G (yan, yan) is
added in the present participle, the final & or ^ of the root
being suppressed, and by some even the I ; but the « is kept
intact.
-cjL«duJ
Thus, (JIJ^JIS or ^jUbls (qaplayan), ^L^J (tepmeyan),
(teplnemeyan), &\*jjji (yuruyan), ^Ij^l (6quy&n).
The Turkish present active participle, in colloquial language, as a remanet from eastern Turkish, takes after it the
preposition t± de, da, to form an adverb of past or future time;
as, jjjjui (gldande) when (I, thou, &c.) went, or shall go.
The aorist active participle, of the same form as the third
person singular of the aorist tense of the indicative, always
o
o +
ends in a letter . in affirmatives, and in the syllable j - o (maz)
in negatives and impotentiais.
Thus, ^ J (teper), j+J (tepmaz),
U J J (tepemez).
In the simple affirmative, the vowel added to the last cono
sonant of the root, to which the final j is then appended,
cannot be defined by rule.
Of course, it must be hard or soft
according to the dominant in the root; but different verbs
have us tun, others esere, others again tituru, for their vowel;
and with the ustun, all hard verbs add I, as do some soft
verbs ; while other soft verbs dispense with this letter.
Thus
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
o *•
o *
o J
S
we have: J\^J (qirar), jxS
o
.
-»^
jfi
(gelur, vulg. gellr), j
103
*
( g l d e r ) , ^ y U (sanur, vulg. sanir),
o
^ (slylrir).
The simple reflexive forms its aorist in ftturu and ^
(gene-
o
rally pronounced as esere and^j).
The simple reciprocal does
O 3 "
the same.
We have, therefore, jyjj
0 3*
(teplnur, vulg. t£plnir),
'
jy2~> (teplshur, vulg. teplshlr).
All the simple and causative
O
J
passives follow this rule; thus, JJ-L-J
(teplnllur, t&plnlllr), jj£J
x
O
J
<
(tepllur, teplllr), jj-k-*->
(teplshllur, teplshlllr) ; ^ i ^ j j i (tep-
dlrlllr), jjijX~> ( t e p l n d l r l l l i ^ ^ j l ^ j i i (tepishdlrlllr).
I t will
be observed that a vowel ^ is intercalated before the J in
these words.
This is a mechanical rule.
The preceding j is
a letter that does not join on to its follower; this is the sole
reason for the addition of that ^ , when the following J has a
vowel.
The same rule is applied by many to the . of the
o
•
causative ,.>, in like cases ; that is, when it has its vowel, as
it always has in the aorist.
O J
O'
The words above given may
O J
O *
O J
o
*
therefore be written, jjtj,±+>, jjtj.±~> ? jj*jb>££ ; but this has
no effect on the pronunciation.
The aorist passive participle has the same form as the active
perfect, and the future passive is identical in form with the
future active: is)jJ (tepdlk) ; ISUJJ (tepejek).
There are three verbal nouns ; the present or general,
formed by adding A* (me, ma) to the root, exactly like the
negative imperative ; the perfect, identical in form with the
104
OTTOMAN TURKISH
GRAMMAR.
perfect active and aorist passive participles ; and the future,
identical with the two future participles.
d J J (tepdlk); eUAJ (tepejek).
Thus, &+J (tepme);
The form *•*> (tepme) of the
present verbal noun is also that of a verbal adjective passive,
signifying done, made, effected as the result of (the action of
the verb); thus, A*J , as such adjective, means caused by a
kick or kicks.
This derivative of the transitive verb active simple and
causative can also take the passive sense; thus, A*15 (kesme),
which naturally means an act of cutting, often means also an
act of being cut; as, fjV^S ^LiS
cut.
(kesmesl qolay) it is easily
I t is also much used as a passive adjective when the
verb is transitive ; as, ^jy
6+~S 6as?\ (Inje kesme tutan) finely
cut tobacco; and as an active adjective when the verb is intransitive ; as, JU AJU ^\Ai
(babadan qalma mal) property
remaining from (one's) father.
Leaving the gerunds for the present, we may now inquire
into the mode of formation of the tenses of each mood.
But
before doing so, we must indicate the differences that serve
clearly to distinguish the active participles, the passive paro
o
ticiples, and the verbal nouns, of the two forms in (<sb or .jp ,
and in isL** or j£.s.
In the first place, the participles are adjectives, while the
verbal nouns are substantives.
Therefore, whenever a deriva-
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
105
tive in either of those forms qualifies a substantive, it must be
a participle; it cannot be a verbal noun.
Secondly, the active participle qualifies the name of its
actor only.
I t is therefore always a simple and invariable
word, like the other active participles; as, ^Jj
*±\ ^&$ Ajljjl
is there any man who has gone there ? \j^» ^ - * <&>•***? art thou
he who is to go ?
Thirdly, the passive participle always qualifies the name of
the direct object, or of the indirect object, of the action, and is
always accompanied by a possessive pronoun indicating the
actor of that action.
The first of these two facts distinguishes
the passive participle from the verbal noun; the second distinguishes it from the active participle of the same form.
Thus, C-JI^J **i*yj\ (oqudughum kitab) the hook which I read
(now or formerly); L^\J£ JK»UJSJ\ (6quyajaghim kitab) the
book which I am going to read.
direct object qualified.
These are instances of the
So, ^Uj JLJI±JSJ\ (6quduglrum zeman)
the time in which (i.e. when) I read; and ,jJls? ^i^aajSjl
^^S
(kltabl iquyajaghlm mejlls) the meeting in which I am going to
read the book, are instances of indirect objects; as is also
atjl Ji>.vyJ\ (uyuyajaghlm 6da) the room in which I am going
to sleep.
As instances of the substantival nature of the verbal noun?,
let us take, ^ ^ 5 o ^ j 5 ,*».*& <J$^J (yazl yazdlghlml gyurdunuz-
106
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
mu) have you seen my past action of writing writing ? i. e., have
you ever seen me write ? ^jJbj*** ++S ^^X_*.A!S (galejeylmi klm
suweyledl) who mentioned my future action of coming? i. e., who
told (you, him, &c.) that I was about to come ?
Proceed we now to discuss the formation of the tenses.
The third person singular is the root of each tense, except
in the imperative.
Leaving the numbers and persons for
future consideration, we may say, in the first place, that, as
the second tense in each pair, of every mood (excluding the
imperative and the infinitive), is formed from the first tense
of the pair by the addition of the auxiliary ^jyA (Idl) was, after
it, we may leave these second tenses also for future
con
sideration.
By these means we arrive at the conclusion that there are
four tenses in the indicative, and one each in the necessitative,
optative, conditional, and infinitive, the forms of which have
to be defined.
The four indicative tenses are—the present, the aorist
(present habitual and future promissive), the perfect, and the
future; the single tense of the other three moods is their
aorist (present or future); and that of the infinitive is its
present.
o
J
The present indicative adds an esere and the syllable ,jj
° J"
(yor) to the consonantal root; thus, jjj> (teplyor).
I t indi-
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
107
cates a present action (actual or habitual) ; he is kicking (now);
he now habitually
(jjAjjtJ
kicks.
Add the auxiliary ^j±)\ to this,
(teplyor Idl), and it forms the imperfect, he was kick-
ing (then).
A final o
more frequently changes to ^ ; as,
dL*ii, j£±S (gldlyor); <&Ual, jjiJJ>1 (edlyir); &c.
The aorist indicative varies in form of the servile syllable,
but always ends in j in the affirmatives, and in \* (mez, maz)
in the negatives and impotentials, being identical with the
active aorist participle.
It indicates a present habit (not a
present action), or a future assurance, a future promise, as the
context or circumstances may require.
Thus, ^ J (teper) he
O x
kicks; he shall or will kick; j\Js (qirar) he breaks; he shall or
O
t
will break; jjj$.
he reads;
J
O 3 *
(yurur) he walks;
he will read;
JJto\
he will walk ; jj$j\ (oqur)
(IsMr) he bites; he will bite;
\+J (tepmaz) he does not kick ; he will not kick;
he cannot kick.
The auxiliary ^ J J I , added to this, forms the
past tense (showing a past habit, or an unfulfilled
(jsA^J
(tepemez)
condition);
(teper Idl) he used to kick; he would kick (if he could);.
he would have kicked (had he been able); in which two last
senses, the expression is a virtual negative : he kicks not, because he is not able; he did not kick, because he was not able ;
ijSi]j*J> (tepmaz Idl) he used not to kick; he would not kick (if
he could); he would not have kicked (had he been able);
\£±*\j*±* (tepemez idl) Tie used not to be able to kick; he would
108
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
not be able to kick (if so and so); he would not have been able
to kick (had not so and so); &c.
The perfect indicative is formed by adding the syllable
(dl, di), in all cases, to the root.
^
I t is used in a determinate,
and also in an indeterminate past sense, referring the action to
Ox
a given past time, or to all past time.
Thus, (jxS (tepdl) he
kicked (then) ; he has kicked (without defining when).
Add
the auxiliary <jJJ! , and the pluperfect results : ^±>\ ij±J (tepdl
Ox
y Ox
Idl), or <j±ix3 (tepdidl), he had kicked; ^JJI ^S+J he had not
kicked; ^JJI ^J^AJ he had not been able to kick.
The future indicative is identical in form with the active
and passive future participles, and with the future verbal
noun.
I t indicates that the action expressed by the conjuga-
tional root is about to take place; thus, &>.&+> he is about to
o x
kicky he is going to kick;
o x
x„ox
dL^A-*J he is not going to kick ;
xx xx
<sl>.A~odu) he will not be able to kick.
Add the auxiliary ^ j j l ,
o ,
^x
and the past future results ^$±A (*UAJ he was going to kick,
Ox
^
^/O/
ij±A d > ^
^
Ox
xx
x.»
he was not going to kick; tjsA d^^dJi he was
unable to be about to kick.
Final o
in the root generally
changes to a, and a final vowel requires the addition of a conO x
x
Ox
x - > 4
sonant ^ : dUaJj), C s U ^ j j .
The aorist necessitative is formed by adding the syllables
jL (meli, mali) to the root.
I t indicates a present duty to
perform a future act; and corresponds with our must or ought
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
Thus, j L J he must kick, he ought to kick;
109
JL©A*J he must not
kick, he ought not to kick ; JLLAJ" he ought not to be able to kick.
With the auxiliary <j±->\, we have the past necessitative,
^ X J I JJ*J
he ought to have kicked, he should have kicked;
ij±A ^jLLJ he ought not to have kicked; ^ J J ! J L L A J he ought
not to have been able to kick.
The aorist optative is formed by adding an ustuu and
vowel 5 to a consonantal root, or a syllable *J (ye, yi) to a
vowel root.
Sometimes 1 is used in place of ».
The tense
is a quasi-imperative, implying optation, or it is a subjunctive.
Thus, *J (tepe) let him kick, may he kick; (that) he may kick;
A**J (tepmeye, with suppression of the s of the negation) let
him not kick, may he not kick;
(that) he may not kick; A-*A*>
(tepemeye) may he not be able to kick; (that) he may not be
able to kick.
Add now the auxiliary ^j^A, and we form the
past tense, a virtual negative, expressive of regret; thus,
ijxA
AJ (tepe Idl, more frequently written and pronounced
\jxJ
tepeydi) had he kicked, if he had kicked;
kicked;
0 that he had
^ J ^ A ^ J (tepmeyeydl) had he not kicked, if he had not
kicked; 0 that he had not kicked;
^ j - ^ a J (tep&meyeydl) had
he not been able to kick, if he had not been able to kick;
0 that
he had not been able to kick.
The aorist conditional is formed by adding the syllable **»
(se, sa) to any root, consonantal or vowel.
This performs the
110
OTTOMAN T U R K I S H GRAMMAR.
function of our conjunction if in appearance; but, as^j£»l
(eyer), if can be placed before it, it really is a subjunctive
tense-ending.
As a present, it admits the possibility of the
action ; as a future, it virtually denies the occurrence.
Thus,
A~J (tepse) if he Icicle, if he were to kick; a~»J (tepmese, the &
of negation elided) if he kick not, were he not to kick; A~+*&J
(tepemese)
should he not be able to kick.
is desiderative, 0 that he kick!
&c.
Sometimes
it
With ^A>I added, we
have the past conditional, which is always a virtual negative.
Thus, (j****** (tepseydl, for ^ J J U - J ) had he kicked, if he had
kicked; ^ A , ^ , , , ) (tepmeseydl) had he not kicked; ^ A ^ d,.,„>
(tepemeseydl) had he not been able to kick.
The present of the infinitive is formed by adding dU (mek)
or j * (maq) to any root.
(q&plamaq) to cover.
Thus, (&LJ (tepmek) to kick; j*5Us
The negative and impotential are fre-
quently written with \, and sometimes without a vowel-letter
to end the root; as, isLLJ, &++J (tepm&mek), for dua^J ;
O x / / /
C x
O x / / /
x
x/
O . /
' O /
isLUaJ, d***J (tepememek), for dloA*AJ ; <j**}Ui (q&plamdOx/
X /O x
maq), j**aj^;lS (q&playamamaq).
This tense is often rendered
/O/
#
in English by the verbal noun in -ing; as,
C ,0'0 X
(gltmek q&lmllqdlln evla) going is belter than staying.
o
O/O
J^l jjjiJU &K" S
It also
o
takes the suffix dJ , j l after it to form an equivalent to our
*
*
O O /O
^
verbal noun in -ing; as, ei&*ij em act of going.
There are seven gerunds, one gerund-like verbal locution of
Ill
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
cause, one of verbal proportion, and six to indicate various
times in relation with the action.
All of these gerunds and
gerund-like locutions presuppose the occurrence of two actions
expressed in the sentence, one by the gerund, the other by a
subsequent verb.
The gerunds are a kind of verbal con-
junctions, while the gerund-like locutions are verbal adverbs.
The first gerund, the most frequently used, ends in an
o
o
*
uturu, followed by V-JJ (ub, ub) after a consonant, or by c-^-i
(yub,
yub) after a vowel.
I t indicates that two actions are
being mentioned, of which the one implied by the gerund is
prior as to time or natural sequence.
We more usually, in
English, express this relation of two actions by the conjunction and, though we occasionally use our gerund in -ing,
O *
as the Turkish does.
O
J*
Thus, J\jJ L->JJ (tepub qirar) he kicks
and breaks, will kick and break (it) ; ory kicking (it), he will
break (it).
Conversationally, this gerund is pronounced with
o
esere in lieu of dturu ; and with p in place of c-»; as, teplp,
qirip, &c.
The second gerund is formed by adding ustun, and the
letters t^s (erek) or j ^ s (araq),to a consonantal root, d,«u (yerek)
or J5,AJ (yaritq) to a vowel-root.
I t is sometimes used in lieu
of the first gerund, to obviate its too frequent recurrence; but
its distinctive use is to indicate that, of two contemporary
sustained actions expressed, the one, subsidiary, accompanies
the other.
Thus, ^JO-S <2)jdJ» kicking, he went off; i. e., he
112
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Ox
Cx x
J
went off, kicking away (all the time) ; fj& d ^ ^ g
he came,
laughing (all the time).
The third gerund, in ASS (tnje, inja), after a consonant, or
A5& (ylnje, yinja) after a vowel, and the fourth (used in writing
O x
Ox
only, and much more rarely), in d^s (Ijek) or j ^ s (ijaq) after
C x
OX
a consonant, disji (yijek) or j ^ j i (y^jaq) after a vowel, has the
sense that its action is to be a kind of signal for the occurrence of the other expressed in the sentence ; it may, then, be
rendered by our on ... (with a gerund), also by our as soon as
... (with a verb).
Thus, ^ A J A ^ ^ ( g y u r u n j e tepdl) on seeing
(him), he kicked (him) ; AIJI *jUl J i ^ l ^\j (vasll 61ijaq, ma'lum 61a) on reaching (as soon as it reaches), fo (it) known
(that
).
The fifth gerund is identical in form with the aorist optative, repeated.
I t expresses repetition of one act as a means
to the performance of a second.
Thus, (j±j3 AJ AJ (tepe tepe
qirdi), kicking, (and) kicking (it), he broke (it).
o
The sixth gerund is the infinitive with esere and ^ added;
the Persian d softened into Turkish eJ (y value), and the
into c .
j
I t expresses the verbal reason precedent for the
O
second action.
O
x
Ox
Thus, fJ^Li ^
O yS
X Ox
J
t^X »>> j \ Atf kicking, I fled;
i. e., because he kicked, I fled.
The seventh gerund expresses the beginning of a time commencing with the occurrence of an action and lasting until
113
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
now, during which another action has repeatedly or continuously occurred ; it is equivalent to our ever since
In form it is the fifth gerund (not repeated) with the syllable
J (lu) or J (li) added to it.
Thus, jjila$\ JlaJ (tepelu aqsayir)
ever since he kicked, he has limped.
The causal gerund-like locution is equivalent to the sixth
gerund in sense.
It is the infinitive, with its final consonant
softened down, and with the preposition <JLI (He, ila) added,
and shortened into AJ (le, la).
ing.
Thus, A&-*J (tepmeyle) by kick-
No agent of the verb is then expressed in the verb,
though it be so exteriorly; as, AJSL»J> ^ by my kicking, I kicking.
There is another form into which this idea is cast, and
in which a perfect verbal noun, with a suffixed possessive pronoun indicative of the agent, and the ablative preposition
(dan) are employed.
Thus, ^JW*JX_J>_*J (tepdlylmddn) by my
(past) act of kicking.
ijxStS^sJ
^
This pronoun varies as is required:
(tepdiylndan) by thy act of kicking;
&c.
The gerund-like locution of verbal, i. e., of actional proportion is formed of the perfect active participle, with the
adverbial suffix of manner, ^ (je, ja), added to it.
I t defines
a duration of time for two concurrent actions, the first circumscribing that duration for the continued or repeated occurrence
O
J
O *
of the other; as, o^W ^
o ,
*S" O •»
O S
**»*+> ^ (hen tepdlkje, san tut) while
I kick, so long as I kick, do thou hold (him).
I t sometimes
114
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
expresses the rate (proportion) of rapidity of the two actions \
O
J '
" ^
0^~
O O^
as, jy^kj>\ **?±s* u>5j (waqt gechdlkje, Irlleshlr) as time goes
by, it grows large (larger).
The six verbal times indicated, in reference to an action,
are the following: 1, the time before the action; 2, the time
when the action is just about to occur; 3, the time while the
action occurs ; 4, the time when it occurred; 5, the time just
when it has occurred ; 6, the time after its occurrence.
The
first is the present verbal noun in the ablative; as, ^x+J (tepmeden), to which, for precision's sake, the adverb Jjl (avval)
or *ji* (muqaddam), anteriorly, is subjoined.
The expression
Jjl ^IA+J (or Jjl ^jJ^Ji), then, means anteriorly to (earlier than)
the action of kicking;
i.e., before kicking.
Sometimes this is
vulgarly expressed as Jjl &$•*> before (the agent) kicks
not;
i. e., while (as yet) he has (or had) not kicked.
The second gerund-like locution of time is the future active
participle with the auxiliary gerund
O
IK*
o +
L ^=o1
(Iken), during,
+,
added to i t ; thus, ^ p o l SJUAJ during (the time of being) about
to kick; i. e , when just about to kick.
The third is the aorist active participle with the same addition :
Cj-5C^
J2 during (the time of being) kicking;
i. e., while
kicking.
The fourth is the perfect verbal noun or active participle,
put in the locative (of time).
I t may be used impersonally,
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
115
'with no addition in i t ; and it may be used, for precision, with
the possessive pronoun of the agent between the verbal noun
and the preposition.
In the former case, the verbal derivative
is possibly a participle ; in the latter, it is doubtlessly the
verbal noun.
Thus, *±S±^ ^
kicked; or *±£±sJ ^
when I (became) one who has
when I (performed) my (past) act of
kicking; i. e., when I kicked.
The fifth is the past active participle with the auxiliary
^ ^ X J ! ; as, {^S^A u^UJ during (this time of the condition of)
having kicked; i.e., now that kicking has occurred, since (J, &c.)
have kicked.
The sixth is the perfect verbal noun in the ablative (of
time), followed by the adverb *>jC* (s6nra, s6ra), after;
if~* yS&Ji
(tepdlkdan s6r&) after the act of kicking.
thus,
The
possessive pronouns may be introduced into this locution before
the preposition; as, a^X-* y±&i±$
(tepdlylmdan s6ra) after
my action of kicking.
SECTION X.
The Numbers and Persons of the Verb,
In all the tenses the first person singular is expressed by
o
the personal suffix * added to the verb, with esere given to the
tense-root, when this is a consonant; and suppressing the final
fj of the tense-root where it occurs ; adding one where wanted.
116
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
o
I t is wanting in the imperative.
•*
*
Thus : * i>*i-J (teplyirim) I
am kicking; ^SAJJ+JS (teply6r-ldlm) I was kicking; ^ J (teperlm) I kick; I shall or will kick ; A±>)J£ (teper-ldlm) I used to
° z"
kick; I would hick; I would have kicked; +x3 (tepdlm) /
° c"
° °"
kicked ; I did kick ; I have kicked; +£>_±J (tepdidlm) or ^ J J I *JJI
(tepdlm-ldl) / had kicked; ,%£-&•**> (tepejeylm) I am going to kick;
O
° x - *»
^x
O
J/O/
*
*JJ\_&.AJ (tepejekdlm) I was going to kick ; *jji*J (tepmellylm)
O
J S
Ox
I must kick; ^jjl jU J (tepmell-ldlm) i" should have kicked,
o ,*
ought to have kicked;
o
o xx
*AJ (tepem) that I may kick; pS-^-J
0 , 0 *
o o * ex
(tepeydlm) that I had kicked; +*~J (tepsem) if I kick ; *^~~J
(tepseydlm) * / / had kicked.
The second person singular, in all the tenses in (j*, is
formed by changing the vowel <j into the nasal Turkish d ;
as, &±A jyS) (tepiyir-ldtn), djjl j£ (teper-ldlii), d j J (tepdlii),
O
Ox
,*
O
JsO*
O
O*-'
is)±A CUAJI (tepejek-ldln), djol j U J (tepmeli-ldln), &xJ (tepey*
O
din),
o x O^
dj-~J* (tepseydln).
O
All the other tenses form it in ^ ^
o
(sin), sometimes written and pronounced eL*» (sin), excepting
the present of the conditional, which forms it with (s),u» (san,
O x
O x
sail); sometimes written dU, but pronounced like d*-*.
[j<»>jjz£ (teplyorsin), \j^J (tepersln), V^JZ^AJ
£^*IJUJ (tepmellsln), C ^ . A J (tepesln).
Thus,
(tepejeksln) ;
The first person plural, likewise, in all the tenses in ^5.3, is
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
117
formed by changing the vowel ^ into Arabic d (k value);
excepting that of the perfect, which, in hard words, always
O
O
°
forms this person in <j instead of d .
O
1
,
Thus, ISUJ! j^2
(teplyor-
Idik), ISJJJI! °Jj (teper-ldlk), d j J (t^pdlk), d j j ^ J (tepdidlk, or
^ j j j djJ^ tepdlk-ldl), (sJjj.1 ISUAJ (tepejek-ldlk, or
^sS^&J
tepejeyldlk, or ks$Z>^> tepejekdlk), djj»l J Q (tepm&ll-ldlk),
djujJ (tepeydlk), d j ^ J (t£pseydlk).
With a hard word like
j ^ G (baqmaq), the perfect forms jpiU (bHqdiq).
If this per-
son in the past future indicative, in the past optative, and in
the past conditional, is used in the contracted form, these also,
O
O
O
O "
-
X
with hard words, use j instead of d ; as, J J ^ A S U
O C
O
,
(baqajagh-
O' O *
diq), j j J J b (baqaydiq), <JX~*SIJ (baqsaydlq).
In the imperative
and present optative, it is formed by adding ustun and J s to
o
the consonantal root, the syllable J having eser& for its vowel;
o +
or, in vowel-roots, by adding the two syllables J J J (yellm,
yalim) ; thus, J<UJ (tepellm), J&\> (baqallm), JtJkj** (suweyO
+ J J
O
'
J J
leyellm), JjijSjl (6quyallm, for J*ijj\).
In hard words, the
o
present of the conditional forms this person with j ; also ; as,
O x O # »
O ^ O ^
O
>
J
J
jA-Jb (baqsaq, sometimes written ,J-J1J), J <jujjft-9ji ^oqusaq,
j*^l).
The present, aorist, and future indicative, with the
present necessitative, form it in j orj>, with £ser& added to
the final consonant of the tense-root of the indicatives, and
o
with that vowel given to the ij of ji in the necessitative ;
118
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
thus, jjx+i (teplyirlz), j
^ (teperlz), J«X_».AJ (tepejeylz, the
O
J/o/
Arabic d changed into Turkish d , y value), J>jL*> (tepmSliyiz).
In hard words, the future indicative is in c (softened
j ) , with esere before the final j ; as, J«*ASb (baqajaghiz).
The second person plural, again, in all the tenses in ^ , is
formed in \S±± (dlnlz ; which is hard in the perfect of hard
words, d!xi!z).
Thus, J _ X J O ^ J (teply6rdlnlz), JSJ^^J
(teper-
dlnlz), J _ X J O J (tepdlniz), yS*-y£>\ (bdqdinfz), J-X-JJJ>JJ (tepdidlnlz), jS^jsS^s^iJ
JSJXJ
(tepejey dlnlz), ^-XJJM JUJ (tepmell-ldlnlz),
(tepeydlnlz), JSJXU~J
o
o
(tepsey dlnlz).
The imperative
^
has two forms, in d and i n j J , both preceded by esere, and a
consonant ^ in vowel-roots ; as, dLJ (tepln), jS<J> (teplnlz,
written ako }S-Jf)
; dsb (baqlii), jSj\>
(baqiniz); d b i L U
(qaplayln), jS^iyj\
(6quyuMz ; the uturu dominating).
All
the other tenses form it in j_X_«> (slnlz, sfnfz), except the
present conditional, which has ustun for its first vowel, often
o ^
+
written J-SA-* (sanlz, sanlz, to distinguish it better).
jJs^jyJ
(tepiyorslnlz), ^S^J
(tepersliilz), J \ « * X ^ A J (tepejek-
slnlz; hard in hard words, j-X~i»A$b baqajaqsiniz),
(tepmellslnlz), yS^dJ
Thus,
jS^*JuJ
(tepeslnlz; hard in hard words, ^X*»ASC
baqasln!z),jjA^' (tepsenlz; hard in hard words,j - W s b baqsdniz).
The third person plural is formed from the same person of
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
119
the singular, with the syllable^ (ler, lar) added.
Thus, Jjj~~>
(tepstnler); j £ ^ J (teplyArlar), °Jl^ (teperler), J L J 2 ? (tepdller),
J&>.AJ (tepejekler), Jjj+j
(tepseler).
(tepmeliler), ^ J j J (tepeler), J&~J
The tenses in ^ J J I may be formed in this way,
ijsA becoming J±±A (idller); or, the plural sign may be given
to the radical element, and <jjj>l be kept unchanged; as,
{jSiJJjfJ
or Jj&) jpj;
and so throughout, except the past
optative, which prefers J±$.
SECTION XL
Of the Complex Categories,
The Complex Categories of every Turkish verb, active or
passive, transitive or intransitive, affirmative, negative, or impotential, are formed, even as to their roots, with an auxiliary
o < o J
verb, <j-Jjl (olmaq) to be or become; itself conjugated, as a
simple verb, in conformity with what has already been laid
down, and joined to the aorist, past, and future active participles of the verb of which the complex category is to be
formed.
The auxiliary follows the participle.
O
*
O J
With the aorist participle, the auxiliary verb j - ^ J j l
forms
the First Complex Category; with the past participle, it forms
the Second Complex Category; and with the future participle,
it forms the Third Complex Category.
I t would be possible to avoid using these terms, and to fuse
120
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
the whole into one vast conjugation, by following the method
used by European grammarians, each for the European language in which he treats of the subject.
In some respects,
such an arrangement would possess an advantage.
I t would
bring together tenses of the one verb, which are but delicate
modifications of each other.
the whole, preponderant;
The disadvantage would be, on
for the one vast conjugation of
simple and complex tenses formed with continually intermingling, varying participles, would be very puzzling to the
novice, would choke out of view the principles of the subdivision, and prevent a lucid exposition thereof, besides
demanding the invention of a host of new names by which
to distinguish the numerous tenses so brought
together;
whereas, by keeping the same names for the same tenses of
the four categories, it would seem that a truer perception
of the shade of meaning which distinguishes each of the four
tenses of each name will be more easily attained and more
firmly grasped.
Still, as a comparison with other systems
offers a certain amount of utility, we have given below the
three complex categories apart, to show their principles, and
have then arranged the whole four categories as a single conjugation.
SECTION X I I .
The First Complex Category.
This is formed with the aorist active participle, of every
121
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
class of verb, active or passive, transitive or intransitive,
primary or derivative, affirmative or negative.
In form, it
is simply the conjugation of the auxiliary verb <jjjl (olmaq)
to be, the participle, as an adjective, remaining invariable
throughout.
We give one person only in each tense.
Infinitive.
C O J O*'
j j j j l ^ j (teper 61mdq)
To be a willing, natural, determined, constant, or habitual
kicker; to be kicking; to
kick (habitually).
Imperative.
Jjl^J (teper 41)
Be thou kicking; kick thou
(habitually).
Indicative.
Present.
fjjh^J?
(teper 6Hy6rim)
I am continually kicking.
Imperfect.
*x\ jj^j\j+> (teper illyir Idlm) I was continually kicking.
Aorist.
o-» J J os*
*j$j\jf
(teper ilurAm)
I am continually kicking; I
shall be ever kicking.
Past.
j»jjl ,Jij\ jJ> (teper 61ur Idlm)
I used to be always kicking ;
I would be, or Would have
been, always kicking.
122
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Perfect,
^ j j j l ^ (teper 61dAm)
I became a constant kicker.
Pluperfect.
o i q S o*'
(^JJI pjJjl^-> (teper oldftm Idl) I had been or become a constant kicker.
Future.
j^>JjljJ (teper olajaghim) I am about to become a constant kicker.
Future Past.
+±i>>Jjl^J (teper olajaghdim) I was about to become a constant kicker.
Necessitative.
Aorist.
^JUjl^Jf (teper ilmaiijim)
I must be, or become, a constant kicker.
Past.
AJJI^LJJI^ (teper olmaiiyldlm) I ought to have been a constant kicker.
Optative.
Aorist.
^jjjl^j (teper 6laylm)
That I may be a constant
kicker.
Past.
I j J j i J j (teper Alaydlm)
That I had been a constant
kicker.
ACCIDENCE OH ETYMOLOGY.
123
Conditional.
Aorist.
o
* o J o++
+*+Jj\jJ (teper 6lsam)
Were I, should I become, a
constant kicker.
Past.
O CO J 0+*
^JJ^JJI^J
(teper 61saydlm)
Had I been a constant kicker.
Active Participles.
Present.
O "
J 0«.»»
&tyj£ (t£per 6lan)
Who or which is, was, will be,
a constant kicker.
Aorist*
O J $
O**
jjj\j*> (teper 61ur)
(perhaps unused, as a cacophony.)
Past.
t r * b W (teper ilmush)
Who has been a constant
kicker.
Perfect.
OiO J O "
JJJJI^J
(teper 61d4q)
ja.A!jl jj (teper ilajaq)
Who was a constant kicker.
Future.
Who is to be a constant kicker.
Passive Participles.
Aorist.
o jo J-' o++
JJJJI^J
(teper ildftq)
Who or which (a kicker) has
constantly kicked.
124
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Future.
Or
*
J
O,*
&?AJ\JJ
(teper ilajaq)
Who, which (I, &c.) am about
constantly to kick.
Verbal Nouns.
Present.
*>0 J
0,+
AJJ\JJ
(teper 61ma)
The act of being (at any time)
a constant kicker.
Perfect.
O JO J
O"
j j j j l ^ (teper olduq)
The act of having been (then)
a constant kicker.
Future.
O +
*
J
O**
(ja-JjI^J (teper ilajaq)
The act of being about (now)
to become (hereafter) a constant kicker.
Gerunds.
O
J J
O"
1st.
S i ^ j W ( ^ P ^ r ol4p)
Being a constant
(and
).
2nd.
^ A J J I ^ J (teper olaraq)
Continuing to be a constant kicker (so and so
also occurs).
3rd.
**P)\j£ (teper olunja)
"<- i J
4th.
or*
J ^ j l ^ ' (teper dlljaq)
kicker
N
/As soon as
becomes
r (became, will become) a
J constant kicker, ......
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
5th. Jjl AJJ! JZ (teper 61a 61a)
125
By continually being a constant kicker,
6th. ^^iJjl^Ji (teper 61maghin) By reason of being a constant kicker,
J 4 ? W 0^P^ r 61ali)
7th.
SECTION X I I I .
Ever since
became
(has been) a constant
kicker,
The Second Complex Category.
Infinitive.
Present.
<jjjl (jS*** (tepmlsh 61maq)
To have kicked.
Imperative.
Future.
O
J
O
O*
Jjl ^ • J ' (tepmlsh 61)
Be thou one who has
kicked ; have kicked.
Indicative.
Present.
O
J
»
O
O'
*ijjj\ ( j ^ ' (tepmlsh 6liy6rim)
I am, or am becoming, one
who has kicked; I have
kicked.
Imperfect.
^ j j j l (jl*J (tepmlsh 6lly6rd!m) I was, or was becoming,
one who has kicked.
Aorist.
o JJ
J
o
o,
JLV ^p^J (tepmlsh 61urum)
I shall have kicked.
126
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Past
OiO J J
O
C
**jj>j\ JZ-+? (tepmlsh Amrdum)
I should have kicked.
Perfect.
*jjjl IJL+J (tepmlsh oldum)
I became one who had
kicked, I had kicked.
Pluperfect.
JO J
O
O,
^ j j l *JJJ! jji**) (tepmlsh 61dAm idl)
I had become one who has
kicked.
Future.
o
<» x •»
o o«»
j»i^Jjl ijUJ (tepmlsh Alajaghim)
I am about becoming one
who has kicked; I am
going to have kicked.
Future Past.
O
O *
* J
O
O*
«»Jjlj>^^,j£**>(t6piiilsh olajaq Idlm) I
was about
kicked.
to
have
Necessitative.
Aorist.
(•ijQjl u W (tipmfah Almaliyim)
I must (now) have kicked
(then).
Past.
^ J J I J U J I yj*+* (tepmlsh Almally Idlm) I must (then) have (already)
kicked (before).
Optative.
Aorist.
^ J J iJUJ (tepmlsh olayim,
AAJJ)
61am)
That I may have kicked.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGT.
127
Past.
O
O, J
O
C
*±Jj\ Ju*> (tepmlsh Alaydlm)
That I had kicked.
Conditional.
Aorist.
O
'O^ J
O
c*
+&~3j\ IJL+J (tepmlsh Alsam, ~Jj\) Had I kicked (then).
Past.
o o «»o >
ls^jj\
o
o«»
yjUf (tepmlsh Alsaydlm)
Had I (already) kicked
(before then).
Active
Participles.
Present.
J)lj\ j,*»J (tepmlsh Alan)
Who has (already) kicked.
Aorist.
O J J
jjj\
O
O^
JU+> (tepnilsh Alur)
Who will have (already)
kicked.
Past and Perfect, perhaps not used.
Future*
j>>*Jjl JJ^UJ (tApmlsh Alajaq)
Who will become one who
has kicked.
Passive
Participles.
Aorist.
jfjjjl yi^J (tepmlsh AldAq)
Which
(a
kicker) had
(already) kicked.
128
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Future,
jj*Jjl {JUJ (tepmlsh olajaq)
Which (a kicker) will hare
kicked.
Verbal Nouns.
Present.
dJJ\ (jS^J (tepmlsh 6lma)
The
(present
state
of)
having (already) kicked.
Perfect.
j j L i <j^*^ (tepmlsh olduq)
The (past state of) having
(previously) kicked.
Future.
J ^ J j t <j£*i (tepmlsh 61 ajaq)
The (future state of)
having (previously)
kicked.
Gerunds. '
1st. t-^Jjl ij!uJ (tepmlsh 61up)
Having kicked (and....).
2nd. JJAJ\
...
(
...
olaraq)
Having the continued
quality of
having
kicked (and ...)'.
3rd.
A!py
...
(
...
ilunja)
As soon as ( — i s , was,
will be) one who or
which had kicked, ...
4th.
J^jV
...
(
...
olijaq)
The instant ( — )
kicked, ....
bad
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
> J
*
J
6*
o
5th. Jjl J J \ JL+*J (tepmtsh 61a 61a)
By continuing to have
kicked, .*...
6th. u « J j l
...
(
...
6lm&ghin) By reason of
kicked, ....
7th. je-JJjt
•••
(
•••
ol^O
SECTION XIV.
129
having
Since — became one
who had kicked, ....
The Third Complex Category.
Infinitive.
Present.
J j j l d b . ^ (tip^jik 61maq)
To be about to kick
(ready to kick).
Imperative.
Future.
Jjl dUaJ (tepejek 61)
Be thou about to kick.
Indicative.
Present.
O
J
J
O X
,+
j^jJjl CiU*J (tepejek 6Uy6rim)
I am (often) on the point
of kicking; I become
on the point ....
Imperfect,
^ j j j ^ j j l d i a J (tepejek 6Hy6r Idlra)
I was (often) on the
point ....
Aorist.
O i i l
Os
+jjLj\ C*UAJ (tepejek 6lurum)
I am (habitually), I
shall be (then) on
the point ...
130
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Past,
oo jj o
o J
J JJ
a >
o
*.»
**jjj\ *&>•*£ (tepejek olurd&m)
Perfect.
fjJji d i ^ (tepejek ildum)
I used (habitually) ; I
should be (then) on
the point ....
I was (then) on the
point ....
Pluperfect.
OJO J
O «»
^jjl ^JJJ! (*U.AJ (tepejek oldAm idl)
I
had
been
(before
then) on the point....
Future and Future Past.
J^Aj\ d i i i j (tepejek ilajaghlm) ^
»'"
*
I Not used, as being caco*Ji>Jjl i2U*o O ^ P ^ k 6lajaghdim)J
^
Aorist.
*£jLl/ <Jii>.A^ (tepejek 6lmdliyim)
I
must be on
point ....
the
Past.
/O J
O *
*'
*jjl jUjl <SUA*> (tepejek ilmaliyldlm) I ought to have been
on the point ....
Optative.
Aorist.
O
* J
O +
J%AJJ1 e U ^ j (tepejek olam)
That I may be on the
point ....
131
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGT.
Past.
fjjjl C^UAJ (tepejek olaydim)
That I had been on the
point ....
Conditional.
Aorist.
AA-JJI CfcUaJ (tepejek ilsa'm)
Were I to be or become on
the point ....
Past.
*jlJ«l CSJ^AJI (tepejek olsaydlm) Had I been on the point ....
Active Participles,
Present.
Ji)\
db-aJ (tepejek 61dn)
Who or which is or becomes
on the point ....
Aorist.
jjj\
db-ai (t£p&jek 6lnr)
Who or which is (naturally)
or will be (some time) on.
the point «...
Past and Perfect.
J%,\ £ £
( t e p ^ k olmish) j
^^-(tep^koldAq)
W h o
)
w
which
hag been
or
was (then) on the point....
Future.
j v J j l «^>**J (tepejek olaj&q)
Not used) as being cacophonous*
132
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Passive
Participles.
Aorist.
jpJ^I ^ U A J (tepejek ildAq)
Which (a kicker) was on the
point ....
Future.
Cacophonous ; not used.
Verbal
Nouns.
Present.
AJJI (SUAJ (tepejek Alma)
The act of being or becoming
(at any time) on the point....
Perfect.
o Jo J
+*
o*
JJJJI di>aJ (tepejek 6lduq)
The past act or state of being
(then) on the point ....
Future.
Cacophonous ; not used.
Gerunds.
1st. I->JJJ\ (SUAJ (tepejek 6lup)
Being about
(and ....)
2nd. j^Jjl
...
(
...
olaraq)
Continuing to be about
to kick (and ....)
3rd.
...
(
...
ilunja)
As soon «,s ( — is, was,
will be) about to kick,
A-S^JI
O^
I i
4th. . ^ ^ 1
...
Cacophonous.
to
kick
133
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGT.
5th. ijj\ Aj\ &?**> (tepejek 6la 61a)
O
6th.
By continuing to be
about to kick, ....
/O J
tyoeJj! ..*
(
...
6lmaghin) By reason
about ....
7th. J A J ^ ...
(
•••
ilall)
SECTION XV.
of
being
Ever since — became
on the point ....
The Combined (true Turkish) Conjugation.
Infinitive,
Present
O / C
O/O J O / /
OX
C J O'"
O/O j
O
Ox
O
Ox
o
ox
J j j l eU^j
Imperative,
O J
O J
Future,
O X
Indicative.
Present.
o
c
J *
J
J,J-J
i
"? °'»
°
J
"*
O J x
Imperf.
\S*jjs£
Aorist.
jJ
Past.
ij$j3
Ox*
Perfect.
^jj
o J
O x
JO
J
o J
-» J
tf^jl
^JJJJ
Future.
«UAJ
O *
J
JO J J
FutPast^jSo.^
Jo
J
J
J J
JO J
JO •»
tfjjt...
J
JO
3
Ox
X
J
J
JO
J
V^JJJJJ!
J
•.
JO J
tfjfcjjjl
...
Ox x J
(not used)
x^
° x ' xx
o
...
^ j j j j j l ....
Piuperf.
J
&iaU -
O
- x,
x- „J
Ox
x
J
(not used)
„„
134
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
" Necessitative.
* O J
Aorist.
j . !•>.)
j-LJjl^J
x ox
Fast. .OJII i , U i
4*
+
JAJJ\
+o J
JUS
>o J
*X
'
+
"
X
x>
xo J
^ J J J J J J . . . (^JJIJUJI
*
Ox
j - L J j l &*&+>
..»
(^JJIJUJI
^
"
+
'
Optative.
O
•J
Aorist.
Past.
AJJI^
V
AJJI
U
Ox
1»J
Aj\ <&»&+>
tfiJjl
Ij±m+-*J
...
Conditional.
x
O X
Aorist.
x o J o x x
o o*
+ o J
V
x O -»
O x^
Ox O J
O^O
O xO J
J
Fast.
(^XMJJI
Active
0
<•<»
xx
* ^ J ' *-*T"v
O x«*
o
...
Participles.
x j o xx
o *j •*
o e>
O
-. J
O x
^x
Fresent.
o
xx
O J J
O J
O J 3
Aorist
>
^ 1
O Ox*
Fast.
OJO
^UJjl ...
o
o> '
Perfect.
O Jo
J
* '
j j l j ! ...
o<»
xx
O x
...
OJo J
y
x J
(not used)
o jo
OJ O J
JJJJI
O X x
j
...
J
(wo* used)
Future*
Passive Participles.
OJO
Aorist.
x
r\
Future.
J
O XX
O JO
J
O
Ox
OJO
J
Ox
x-»
<s)jJ
v
o x xx
tSxWaJ
OX
X
J
^ A I J I ..•
Ox
X
J
JfrJjl
»M
(wot used)
135
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
Verbal Nouns.
Present.
xOX
xO J 0 " X
A*J
**1JW
O
Ox
Perfect.
<a)jJ
Future.
ctUaJ
O x
xX
O JO
XO J
O
Ox
xO i
*•!*' \J*+i
J
O JO 3
j p j j l ...
JJJJI
O x x J
O **
j^jjl...
O *
+'
**1J' dl>dJ>
CJO
...
J
J J ^ I ...
x J
(J*^* "•'
(not used.) -
.. .Gerunds.
O
O
Jx
J J
o
O^x
J J
o
O
C
^ J
O x
xx
1st.
^w
2nd.
x° -
3rd.
O
4th.
'
<•
**x
x,»
5th.
O
C
X •>
OX X J
Ox x J
J j j j l ...
XC,
jyljl
J
^ 1 . . .
^ 1
...
&fy ...
&ij ...
Ox
Ox • J
x„
V
V
^x-
/O*
6th.
ij/i j/> O
xO J
...
xO 1 J
JJUJ!
*
O
...
XO J
1 J
&p ...
jj/l Jjl ...
O
XO J
•
7th.
SECTION XYL
^i...
j j / l ...
xJ4>«
-
The Negative and Impotential Conjugations.
The Negative and Impotential Conjugations, twenty-four in
number to each simple verb, as a general rule, are formed precisely on the lines of the simple affirmative conjugation in its
four categories, as above given, with the exception of the
aorist of the indicative, as to its root-word of the third person
136
OTTOMAN TUEKISH GRAMMAR.
singular, and the corresponding aorist active participle, which
ox
o
end in J* (maz), instead of the final . of the aflBrmative.
Infinitive.
Present.
<VO S O ' O x
O "
O 'O J
x
O
O x " >*
° "
O X- "VOx
Ox
x xx
x x "*•
U - ; LdJl
'^^
Imperative.
Future.
O
x c
O
J O/O/
J
O
XOx
O
J
Ox
X«»Ox
A40
^
xx
O'
OX
xx
XX XX
...^J^UAJ
A*dJ
Indicative.
Present.
O J
O J Ox
•> O x o x
O J
J
O
«"Ox
O J
J
O x - xx<>"
J*2
O J
O
Ox •'x
xx
x
O *
xx
•*'
xx
. . . (£UjuAdU>
. . . JJIOUAJ
Imperfect.
JO
J
J
OxOx
JO
J
J
O
xOx
JO
J
J
Ox
x x C
O x *»^
...
...
j*&*>
<!*U.A-*A*>
Aorist.
O J J O'O x
O J J
O
xOx
O J J
O *
/ ' O /
xA'xV
Ox
'X
O
X XX
. . . fji+U&J
. . . db.A-xdJ
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
137
Past.
oxOx
JO
JO i J O / O /
OX
3 J
O
,*
JO J J
,o*
o
xxOx
- xx-
. . . (StUjUAjJ
... > A J
VfJ>*f
OS
Perfect.
JO J
J O J OxOx
xox
Ox
x xx
O
xOx » : » •
JC J
O <*
xXOX"
*,
...
dc^j^*jJi
Pluperfect.
O J
i£±yy*i
(^JjjJjl^O
...
(^JjJuoAJ
O -Ox
) J
O ,
- »OX
j^^jJj^ ^JIAWJ
J*AJ
. •
^^UAJ
x x '
*
~V
...
(^^.A^AJ
Future.
O «. . / O /
O * x J O -O x
Ox x J
-Ox
O
(not used)
Ox
X- *,
...
VoA*>
Ox
x J0,0-
• • • .JIAIAA*)
(not used)
Future Past.
Ox"x ^ ' O /
Ox x J
/O/
O
(not used)
x
* ~»
V
X
X
X*
O- x -
...
^*AJ
o
...
x
V
xx-
^JLOUAJ
(not used)
Necessitative,
Aorist.
x -Ox
*X
xO J O / O /
xO J
O
xOx
-O J
Ox XXOX
V
jUUaJ
• • • J**£
• * • ^£*UAJ
. . . (Sl^A****)
138
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Past.
/o J
x ,, x
v
(^JjljLloAJ
v
x x" x-
x x x
o ^o-»
s
'*
*o J
(J*** L A J
V*A
o x xxev
**v
x s x*
C^>A^»AJ
Optative,
Aorist.
x J
xxOA~«0
o xOx
AU
-*
ox
dl>3uwCO
* ~ v
^
*l*A
...
o
O- J
dli>.A~oAJ
Past.
^J>
W
x~
-o<
O , /^O/
"v
Ox
...
..J*d*g
,J«*^
...
x» xx
<£UA-*AJ
Conditional,
Aorist.
x-Ox
A~~CO
x O J OxCx
xO J
O
^O x
JjlJ^J
O X *.X
,j***U
. ^ A
Active
*o j o - / / < • /
A - J j l Uj)l>A~CO
Oxx ^ x
...(^>A^«AJ
Participles.
Present.
O xxOx
O XX XX i
O x J CxOx
O xOx
O x .» O x x x c x
. . . ,J1AU4U>
,..do-Ax-*Axj'
O x .»
O X Xx'
w
^
139
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY,
Aorist.
O J J 0x0o
O X oX
lodJ
O JJ
C Xo
O XOo
O o Xo
. . . ^J^LAJ
O J J O x xXOx
. . . (£1>4U*AJ
. .. v
Past.
Ox""j J *> - O x
o ; n J o x *xOx
(ftOf WStfd)
•
o
x oo
...
O , xX
>AJ
(no£ used)
...
O o o x XX
dl>A~eAJ
Perfect.
o xOx
OJJ J O / C /
O JO •*
O
oOX
... iptltdtJ
O J>0 J O o
rf«,0x
OX* Xx x *
. . . (S^-AX-OAJ
Future.
o x" „oO o
C*UA-*J
O x x3
O
xOx
(not used)
OX o x
...
Passive
^^OUAJ
(not used)
Participles.
Aorist.
o ».Oo
OjO .» O ,»0 x
0 JOJ ,O ' O '
o Jo J o - x^ox
OX o x
<SU<>AJ
V
X*
... > V
o x x'0>
O x ^ J O oO *
. . . &)b.A£AAJ
Future.
O x -• J
O
xO(wo£ ws^d)
O o ox
ei*.A^iuJ
... > * J
• •• .jMX»\x»dU>
(no* wsecT)
140
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Verbal
Nouns.
Present.
Jjlj^J
Aal*-J
AJJ! jji^Uo
AJ.I d^A^^J
AoLdU)
...
d»A~oAJ
...
d>A^*Aj
Perfect.
o Jo J
o «»cv
o
* ^
o
«»
* * • **•
Future.
(not used)
d>dUedJ
(not used)
ftMwoloA*)
...>oA*)
Gerunds.
O
1st.
O
J'
J J O /O -
O
J J
O
^O^
O J J
O * S'O*
±>Jj\ d>A**J
, .
O'
^-v
- J O ^C *
...
|JM*U
O * -» *
. . . d>A~«AJ
O
/ O '
O^ ^ J
* u V
O - ^ ° ^
j l j j j l d»A*^j»
2nd.
.
O x •»*> - x
[djA^AJ
>v
...
...
JJ»**L
^OjJ
,W
A-S^
3rd.
...
^OAJ
0 * » * * 0 .»
AST«1 d>A-w*Jl
IU*OIAA*>
...
O^ , J
o
(SUA-AAJ
O
*~;^
* C /
d>A?tAj
O "^ •j J O '+ -**0
©
"O ^
JS^I d^A-^J
JJM-ftu
...
db»A*«AJ
141
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
^ J
A-<0
' J O *>0 ^
x J
*• J
O
» *
* J
O*
**0*
^O J
O"
^<»0*»
4UCO
5th.
o
••• >V
...
o
*o j
Jjlj
o
^o-
O
CMAAUO
6th..
... ^ A J
,-
J o *o
...
,J1.«UA«J
-
.ML>
7th.
>V
. . . JJ^UAJ
SECTION X V I I .
The Dubitative, Potential and Facile Verbs, fyc.
o
The Dubitative Verb is formed by adding the syllable ^jlo
(mlsh, mish), or the word (JUi\ (Imlsh), to any personal verb,
indicative or necessitative, active or passive, affirmative, negative, or im potential; but, in the perfect indicative, it displaces
the syllable ijs (dl) of the root.
It casts a doubt on what is
said; and is often added, in conversation, by another speaker,
to express that he considers what has been affirmed by the
former speaker to be questionable, or hearsay, or mere assumption.
When the first speaker uses it himself, he does so to
express that what he relates is either doubtful, hearsay, or
erroneous assumption, from some other person.
It is a gross
vulgarism, to which Armenians and European novices are
addicted, to use this dubitative syllable, in conversation, where
142
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
the fj± of the perfect indicative, or of any compound tense,
is required.
In writing, there is no denying that this form iff
systematically used, by the best authorities, in place of the
tense they would employ in speaking.
The form has a more
musical sound ; and it is, in my opinion, a fruit of imitating
Persian verb-forms in Turkish; initiated, probably, by the
Persian scribes of the early reigns.
o
I n dubitative conjugation, this syllable ^Ju follows the
simple tense-root and its plural, preceding the compound and
personal terminations, singular or plural; unless it be spoken
by another person.
In this last case, it naturally comes alone,
O
after all other words.
O J
*
Thus : ~ 1 ^ _ J (teplyormlshlm) it is
said, supposed, pretended, suggested, ($*c, that I am
o
o
o J
kicking;
-
djol jjl^^j-J (teplyirmlsh Idlfi) it is said, fyc, that thou wast
kicking;
^ l ^ l ^ J (teper Imlsh) it is said, fyc, that he kicks;
&±i\ fjl+rt (t^permlsh Idlk) it is said, 8fc, that we used to kick;
j-X*» jjlfio (tepmtsh slnlz) it is said, fyc, that you kicked or
have kicked ; JUAJb-s**** (tepejekler Imlsh) it is said, $c, that
o
they are going to kick.
(This word or syllable, ^J^} ,
o
UU,
is
really the past active participle of the obsolete verb eU>!.)
The Potential Verb is formed of the fifth gerund (not repeated) followed by the verb d j b (bllmek) in its entire conjugation, the gerund remaining unchanged throughout.
This
auxiliary verb then means to be able, and answers to our
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY,
English can.
O
J
143
E x . : dub *J (tepe bllmek) to be able to kick;
"
( V ^ ^ (t&pe" billy 6rlm) / am a£te to kick, I can kick ; &c.
The Facile Yerb is formed by the root of a verb, to which
an eser& is added, followed by a vowel ^j and the auxiliary
.verb &*£• (vlrmek, vulg. vermek).
With a vowel verb other
than one in \j, a consonantal (j, with es£re, is added between
the root-vowel and the servile <j vowel; and with a verb in
vowel ij,
this is made into a consonant with esere, and the
0
,
0
-
servile vowel ^j is then added; as, du^jij_J (tepl-vlrmek),
c*3U^j-j-i^LjUl
(qaplayi-vlrmek),
dL*^j-_)j\5 (qaziyl-vlrmek).
dL^j-j^l
(iquyu-vlrmek),
The sense of these verbs is that
of great ease, readiness, off-handedness in the action, which we
express in English by saying just to kick, just to give a kick;
just
to cover over; just
out;
&c.
to read or recite; just
to scratch
There are several other Turkish verbs in use as special
o , o,^,
auxiliaries after the gerund of the original verb; as, dLjS
(galmek), J*,jO (durmaq), j J l S (qalmaq), j ^ U (yatmaq), and
j ^ b (yazmaq).
The first expresses a frequent or natural
happening; the next three signify persistency; and the last
the idea of having almost happened, of being within an ace
of happening.
Thus, csUST A-JJI' (61a galmek) to happen fre-
quently, of course, as is well known; to be a common occurrence;
< j * ^ u^jSG (baqup durmaq) to stand looking / j j l i ASC (baqa
144,
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
q&lm&q) to stand (remain) staring in surprise and amazement;
O+o ,
o
J J
J
j^Jli CJ>JL£J.> (dushuiiup y& tm&q) to remain (lie) pondering, in
a brown study; j ^ l j A1A> (bayM yazm&q) to give one1 s self up
(write) as about to faint;
&c, &c, &c.
SECTION X V I I I . The Verb Substantive.
In Turkish there is no extant verb substantive, answering
in all its moods and tenses to our verb to be. In one sense,
the Turkish , j j y performs the office, as an auxiliary and as an
independent verb ; but as such, it is a verb adjective, and continually lapses into the parallel idea of to become.
The Turkish originally had a true verb substantive, dUil
(Imek) to be.
This exists fragmentarily in Ottoman Turkish;
perhaps in certain persons of the present, certainly in the perfect of the indicative, in the aorist conditional, in the past
active participle, in the perfect verbal noun, and in the gerund,
apparently modified from the present active participle (which in
eastern and old Turkish was and is formed in ^
or J6,
even
o -
J$ , traces of which are numerous in Ottoman, as adjectives).
Thus :
Indicative.
o
o
Present. ^
(1m, im), ^
o
(yim, yfm) / am; ^
thou art; J_J I (Iz, iz), jj
sinlz) you are.
(ylz, yiz) we are ;
(sin, sin)
L d (slnlz,
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
o
145
o
Perfect. *JJ1 (idhn) I was, &±,\ (Idin) thou ivast, ^cjA (idl)
he was; eJjjJ (tdlk) we were ; JSJ±>\ (Idlnlz) you were;
0 ,
j-k±>\ (Idller) they were.
Conditional Aorist.
*w>\ (Isam) if I am, <S)A*J1 (Isan) if thou art, A**JI (tse) 2/ he is;
(*)A^I (ls£k) if we are,
\SA~J)
(Isdnlz) if you are, Ji~~>\
(Isel&r) 2/ £te/ ar#.
Pas* Active Participle*
[J^}\
(linlsh) who or which was.
Verbal Noun Perfect.
o
djuil (Idlk) the fact of having been.
Gerund.
o *y
o '
Jx>l (Iken, oZd ^fol Ikan) during the fact of being.
These fragments are made negative by prefixing the adverb
(J*-i-> dlyll) not. Thus, JCjo (dlylllm) / am not, +xJ\ j £ - p
(diyll Idlm) / was not; *A-^I JXJA (dlyll Isem) ?/ / am not;
o
o ^
djjl J x p (dlyll Idlk) not used as a verbal noun, but replaced
o
*o J
0-0
by J J U J I (olmadiq) the negative verbal noun perfect of j>jy ;
c W J^i-* (<%!! Iken) wMtf wo£ fom#.
The present tense indicative of the foregoing fragmentary
verb is completed, as to its third persons, singular and plural,
L
146
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
by using, when necessary only, the special, unique, and most
distinctive Turkish invariable particle of affirmation,^^ (dlr,
dir) is, and its conventional (unnecessary) plural, Jj± (dlrler^
dlrlar) are (which is just as well expressed by the singular).
O
O
•»
This word ^ , written in eastern Turkish }^ (dur), as it is
still pronounced in provincial Ottoman, is often found also, in
° *
J
old and eastern writings, under the uncontracted form of . j . j j
(durnr). This circumstance leads to a suspicion that the word
O .. O J
is, originally, the aorist of the ordinary verb J ^ J A (durm&q)
to remain.
However that may be, the peculiarity of the word is that it
is not special to the third person singular, or to the two third
persons, singular and plural.
I t is often used, in writing and
in conversation, after a verb of the first or second person also,
singular or plural, of any simple tense of the indicative, with
or without the plural sign J, when the sense admits it.
I t is,
in fact, an exact equivalent to the French inchoative expression
dest que, and the Latin constat quod, which can be used to
o
introduce any indicative proposition, as the Turkish j$ is used
to conclude and complete any such.
And, as the French and
Latin clauses can be omitted without the sense suffering, so
o
also can the Turkish ..>.
In conversation it is much more
dispensed with than used.
The negative of j± is j * J>o^ (drvll dlr) is not; pi.
j±jXi±
147
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
(dlyiller dlr) and J y j C > (dlyll dlrler) are not (just as well
expressed without the J).
SECTION X I X .
The Verb of Presence and Absence, of Existence
and
Non-Existence,
T H E R E ARE NO SUCH VERBS IN T U R K I S H .
What there are,
and what Europeans have erroneously chosen to designate as
o
o +
J
such, are two adjectives, \j (var) present or existent, jfjj (y6q)
absent or non-existent
Like any other substantive or adjective,
o
these may be followed by the verbal particle of affirmation j * ,
which, in this case, as in any other case, may be omitted in
conversation.
I t may be convenient, occasionally, for a novice in Turkish
O
O *
O ^
O •*
Oj
O
•>
to suppose that Jj or s*J\j means there is; that jjjj Wj* {jji
means there is not.
But, unless rightly understood, those ren-
derings are misleading.
The expressions really say and mean
he, she, or it, is present (or existent); he, she, or it, is absent (or
non-existent) ; as, Jj u%\ (atesh var) fire (is) present (here), or
existent (somewhere); J;J> yj*\ (atesh yAq) fire (is) absent (here),
or non-existent (anywhere). J
° °"
Then, such a phrase as J^l Jj (var ol) be thou present (or
existent), J^l jf^-j (y6q 61) be thou absent (or non-existent),
becomes clear.
The first is a kind of prayer, Mayest thou ever
exist, and be at hand, ready to help the afflicted!
while the
148
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
second is a condemnation, a sentence • of banishment
annihilation, or a wish in the nature of a curse,
Avaunt!
or
Away!
&c.
By using a locative with these two expressions, they become
o -
* *•
+ o
o*
special instead of general : J\J *jj sJ*-~&. (jeblmdd p&ra var)
in my 'pocket money is present (I have some money in my
pocket) ; ^±>\ <jjj ^j°j\ *±+li\ (evlmde Adunum yoq Idl) in my
house my firewood was absent, wanting, non-existent (I had no
firewood in my house).
By using a possessive pronoun (with or without a genitive
as well) with these two expressions, the idea of possession is
O "
O '
-
superadded ; as, .lj +*\J (p&ram var) money belonging to me
exists (i. e., I have money, I have some money) ; j j j da AJ (pai an
yAq) money belonging to thee (is) non-existent (i. e., thou hast no
money); j±Jj
ijM^<Jj*
isk—kb (b&ba^Inln ch6q kltablarl var
dir) many books belonging to his father are existent (i.e., his
O
J
O
"
O
'J*
O "
father has many books); fjsA J ^ I j*\&>\ &* ~> (b&nlm sana
Ihtlyajlm y6q idl) any need of mine to (lean on) thee (for assistance) was non-existent (i. e., I had no need of thee).
SECTION X X .
Of the Compound Verbs.
Besides the Turkish verbs already described, the Ottoman
language has been indefinitely enriched with whole classes of
14£
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
compound verbs, active and passive, transitive and intransitive,
formed by a Turkish auxiliary verb preceded by a substantive
or adjective of Arabic or Persian, even of foreign, origin.
An active compound verb is formed, generally, by an Arabic,
rarely by a Persian verbal noun, or by a foreign substantive,
o ^ o
followed by one of the auxiliaries dU-iol (Itmek, vulg. etmek),
(»UJLJI (eylem&k), <jJLi (qilmaq) to do, or J^js-j (buyurmaq)
to command, to deign to do; or by an Arabic (very seldom, a
Persian, never a foreign) active participle, followed by the
auxiliary <jjjl (ilmaq) to be.
tive or intransitive.
These verbs are either transi-
The first three auxiliaries are identical
in sense; the first is the most frequently used ; the second
often, the third occasionally, replaces it, so as to avoid repeti*
tion ; and the fourth is used when a deferential tone is assumed
in speaking or writing to or of a superior, and politely to or
O - O
of an equal.
O
"
O
f: / 0
JJ
O
*• - O
Thus, du^il JL^I (Irsal etmek) to send; jj*^*? J W
(Irsal buyurmaq) to deign or condescend to send, to favour by
O^O
J
0
J
sending, to have the goodness to send; (jjjl u ^ j * (mujlb 6lmaq)
to cause; dijbl JLji (tevattun eyl&mek) to settle (in a place, as
a home) ; j>Jjl ^ U ^ I J (peshlman dlmaq) to be regretfully or
penitently sorry (for some act) ; (sJUql &z-iji) (vlzlte itmek) to
visit, to pay a visit.
Transitive verbs of this class form their passives with the
auxiliary <j«Jjl (6lunmaq), which, by itself, does not admit of
150
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
translation.
O/;J J
O xO
Thus, <j£jjl JL^I (Irsal oltlnmaq) to be sent, to
have done (to it) the action of being sent (for the Arabic and
Persian verbal nouns, the reverse of the more general Turkish
rule, take the passive as well as the active sense).
Deferential
compound passives are formed with the passive auxiliary ( j J ^
<VO J J J
O xO
(buyurulmdq) ; as, <jJ,j*-> j W
(Irsal buynrukn&q) to be con-
descendingly sent, to be kindly sent.
Reciprocal verbs active of this class are formed with the
o -»o
o - o
reciprocal of i»L«ol, that is, with the auxiliary dlcwJ^^ (IdlshO «* O
o X
J J
mek) ; as, csL^jjl o*j,a&. (khusumet idlshmek) mutually io
exercise hostility, litigation, or spite, towards one another.
Causatives of the simple and reciprocal are formed by the
causatives of &J&\ and (&U£ji1, namely, ISUJXA, iiiL^xSo^l; thus,
i!&t>jXj\ JU,I to cause or let (a thing) be sent; dL^J-^l e^wai.
to cause or let (two or more) mutually attach each other.
Negatives and impotentials, as also dubitatives, potentials,
and faciles, are constructed with those forms of ISLSJ>I and the
O <* ' O
O * O
O ^ ^ ^ O ^ O
other auxiliaries. Thus, 12LU0I JL^,I not to send; duL*Jj»l JUjl
0 0
o
^o
not to be able to send; ^ju*-*} Jl-,1 it is said that he sent;
•0*0
+
o ^o
0*0
o ^o
tsUj »JJ\ JL-^I Io 60 aote Io send; d u ^ j ^ JL^l Jwsl Io smd.
151
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
SECTION X X I .
Of the Interrogative Verb, and
Interrogation
in general.
All interrogations, in Turkish (when an interrogative pronoun is not present in the phrase, as such), are made by introducing the interrogative particle or adverb
* (ml, m!) into
its proper position in the phrase.
The proper position of this particle in the phrase is the end
of the word on which the question turns.
We have no equi-
valent for it in English ; in Latin the word an, and the
enclitic particle ne, are its equivalents; also' the French
est-ce que ?
This may be best shown by an example of five elements,
each of which may be the word on which the question specially
turns, so that the adverb ^
is successively joined to each of
them to indicate that speciality.
Thus :
1. iyuMX_>A-Jj 4JAJ »c J^JQJ — Lo ^ J u (sdnml sdbah benlmld 'drdbayd blnejeksln)
Is it thou who art to ride with me to-morrow in the carriage!
2. ^^J-MX-*.^ * i * ^ 4^*? ( 5 ^ " * cJ"*** ( s
sabahml benlmla arabayd benejeksln)
Is it to-morrow that thou art to ride with me in the carriage ?
3. c ^jC*.duj i a ^ ($»&? r C * i^-** ( s ^ n s ^>ah benlml&mi 'arabaya blnejeksln)
I s it with me that thou art to ride in the carriage to-morrow ?
152
4. ^frS^i^i
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
^wAJyC AU> -.L© C^*» (san sabah bemlmla'arabayami blnejeksln)
Is it in the carriage that thou art to ride with me to-morrow ?
5. ^ ^ ^ • x ^ . j j j Ai*?^ A!-*? ^ W cr» ( S ^ n s&baQ benlmla 'arabaya
blnejekmlsln)
Art thou going to ride with me to-morrow in the carriage ?
This does not, however, exhaust the possible points of the
question in the case of this sentence, nor the proper places of
the adverb ^ * in it.
The phrase itself may be in question, as
to whether these words were used, or some others, by the
person to whom the interrogation is addressed.
In that case,
the adverb ^ would stand after the personal ending of the
verb; ^ ^J\^i^>
*i&je- AL«O —L* ^
(san sabah benlmla 'ara-
baya blnejeksln ml), which means, Dost thou say, thou wilt ride
with me to-morrow in the carriage ?
The last two instances call specially for the explanation that,
in compound verbs the proper place of the adverb ^
between the two elements of the verb.
may be
Thus we may ask,
di>.5jjil ^ J W Is it to send (and not himself carry, for instance)
that he is going to do ? and
(jr%-X-&.8jjl
JL^I (Irsal Idejekml)
Is he going to send ?
In Turkish simple or derivative verbs, supposing that the
adverb _* is to follow the verb in the sentence, and not some
153
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
other member thereof, then a further question is seen to arise
in No. 5 above given, as to the exact part of the verb itself
that takes this word after it.
first to be considered.
In this respect, the tenses have
The simple tenses take the adverb at
the end of the tense-root, and their compounds also, before
°J
°J
.
their auxiliary ^ j j l ; thus, igj$.y*} is he doing ? ij±A
vms he doing?
^jjiSA
Next, a distinction has to be made between
the third persons, singular and plural, as one group, and the
first and second persons, singular and plural also, as another
group.
The first-named group of tenses have no personal
endings, the second group have special personal endings, and
the interrogative precedes these, following the tense-root still;
thus, ~*jj~3 (teplyormlylm) am I kicking ? {ji~~+jji>J (teplyor° •* "
mlsln) art thou kicking ? ^JJ» ** (teplyorml) is he kicking ?
o
o j
'
*
o y*r
o J
,
jt*jXr$ (teplyormlylz) are we kicking ? jS~~*jj~-*> (teplyorml&lnlz) are you kicking?
^Jjj^J
(teplyorlerml) are they
kicking ?
The perfect tense indicative forms an exception to the foregoing rule, as it takes the interrogative after the personal
O
endings.
Thus, ^XJ
Of
(tepdlmml) have I kicked ? did I kick ?
^ J ! J J (tepdlnml) hast thou kicked? didst thou kick?
(tepdlml) has he kicked ? did he kick ?
O y*
have we kicked? did we kick? ^yS^xZ
kicked ? did you kick ? ^JJSJ
did they kick ?
%_\y_J
e-^sJ
(tepdlkml)
O*
(tepdlnlzml) have you
(tepdllerml) have they kicked?
154
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
SECTION X X I I .
Of Adverbial
Expressions.
As explained in Section II., every Turkish adjective is also
an adverb.
O ^
O
^X
Every noun of time is also used as an adverb ; as, J> — L*
(sabah gal) come to-morrow; {jtf!
{:^=[}
(erken galdl) he came
early ; jjb A£J»\ (akhsh&m gelir) he will come in the evening.
Adjectives of relative place, like all adjectives, are used as
O
' J
adverbs; thus, j
^ tjJSji (yuqari chiq) mount up, walk
climb up, ascend ; j £ ^ ^
up,
(ashaghi g&l) come down, descend ;
o J f )J*J\ (llerl git) go forward, advance ; JS^--> (gerl gal)
come back.
But substantives of place, like all substantives, can be used
adverbially by the sole means of being joined to prepositions;
O J
J J
»
*
J
4hus, jjijj>j\ *±>J$ym (yuqarida 6tnrly6r) he is sitting higher up ;
£jji$ c P ^ l i l (ashaghidan gellyorim) I am coming from below;
iz+3 a i L (sagha git) go to the right; &Q.
A possessive pronoun may enter into such an adverbial
expression ; as, j^Ji-*. A « ^ I (ustftma chiqdi) he mounted on to
the top of me.
An adjective, substantive, and preposition may join to form
an adverbial expression; as, 1&J0 e J l (alt tarafda) on the lower"
side, lower down; ^ji^? v^Jl (alt tarafdan) from the lower side *
from lower down.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
155
So an adjective, substantive, possessive, and preposition may
*
+
O O
J
be combined in an adverbial expression ; as, A*\J wz^l (ust
yanimd) to the side above me; sjXib e>JI (alt ydnlndd) on the
side below thee; ^xjjo
c C (sagh t&rafind&n) from his (her, its)
right-hand side.
With certain special exceptions, any Arabic substantive or
adjective becomes an adverb by adding an ustun and vowel (
to i t ; this being often marked with a double ustun sign, and
read an ; or, if the word is a feminine in s , by putting two
dots, with or without the double ustun sign to it, without
an I ; thus, Vj_L> (tulan) in length, longwise, in
longitude;
f
a o*
L^«c (*&rzan) in breadth, breadthwise, in latitude;
i^*s j L->
J
St ,
(berr&n ue bahr&n) by land and by sea; Lji* (muq&ddema)
formerly; \j>>y> mfcakhkharan) latterly, recently;
ii>\ij Ulo»
(qaV&n ve qatibet&n) decidedly and entirely.
The first ten Arabic ordinals are thus much used adverbially; as, Vjl (avvala) firstly; G\S (sanlya) secondly; UJC (sallsa)
thirdly;
UK (rabfa) fourthly;
(sadlsa) sixthly;
C*U (khamlsa) fifthly; L o C
UJU (sablea) seventhly; L«\J (samlne) eighthly;
U-U (tasl'a) ninthly; \Ju\& ("ashlraj tenthly.
156
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
SECTION X X I I I .
Of
Prepositions.
They always follow the substantive or pronoun.
Besides
those given in the chapter on the substantive, there are but
four or five others : 5>)jl (uzere) upon, *>. (je, ja) according ton
ja» (siz) and ^ J - (slzln) without, &A (leyln) at the time of, after
the manner of
SECTION X X I V .
Of
Conjunctions.
The conjunctions ».> (da) and ^ o (dakhi) also, follow the
word they unite to a preceding one; as, *jX>£=* *JJJ d ^ > ^ = »
(gidersan, ben-da glderlm) if thou wilt go, I also will go;
^±j,
(bu dakhf) this, too.
All other conjunctions head the clauses which they connect.
The principal of these a r e : J (ve, in Persian couplets read
u, A) and; L*l (amma), {jSJi
(lakln), ^,^-AJJ (ve-lakln) but;
j-jsil (anjaq) only; j£=*\ (&y&r, eger) if; ^ . L ; (yakhod) or;
...li , . \ (ya...ya...) either... or...; ...A> ...AJ (ni...ne\..)w^A0r...
nor...; jf* (h&tta) insomuch that;
o
*£=*+ (m^yer, meger) unless;
o
_
i*" o j
(jxc) (Imdl) therefore, wherefore; \j>\ (zira) for, because ; AX-3J>>
(chunku) since, by reason that;
order that; as far as.
& (kl) that; U (ta) sotfftaf,in
Of these, some are Turkish, some
Arabic, others Persian in origin.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
SECTION XXV.
Of
Interjections.
These are mostly Arabic or Persian in origin.
cede, as in English.
157
They pre-
The principal are : ^1 (ey), U (ya) 0;
» 1 (ah) ah; aljjl (eywah) alas; ^Ju^ (khayf) woe; sx* (nieded)
O
*t*
help; ^j\
(aferln, vulg. aferlm) bravo.
There is, however, a peculiar Turkish interjection I (a) 0,
that joins on to the vocative following it ; as, Gil (a-baba) 0
father;
lill (a-ana) 0 mother.
It also follows nouns, pronouns,
and verbs, taking the sense of Yes! Indeed! I told you so!
You see now ! as, lol (adam-a) a man; you see ! Yjji (gyuzel-a)
nice ; indeed I l^j (benlm-a) mine; in sooth ! \>Xt*jjS (gyilremadin-a) thou couldst not see ; after all !
(
158
CHAPTER
)
III.
T H E OTTOMAN SYNTAX.
SECTION I.
Conversational brevity.
Precision in writing.
COLLOQUIAL and written Ottoman Turkish, as far as Syntax
is concerned, are the very antipodes of each other.
As in the orthography the rule is given : " Never introduce
a vowel-letter into a Turkish
or foreign
word
without
removing a possible doubt as to pronunciation ; never leave
out a vowel in such a word, if by the omission a doubt is
created as to pronunciation,"—that is, be always as concise
as is possible without falling into ambiguity; so also, in colloquial syntax the chief rule is : Never repeat a word, or introduce its equivalent, and never use a subsidiary word, unless for
the sake of emphasis; whereas the golden rule for written language is, Never omit any word that tends to make a sentence
clear and explicit.
On the contrary^ introduce freely as many
new words as may, in the requisite degree, elucidate the sense
sought to be conveyed.
In other words, Spoken Ottoman Turkish
should be as concise as possible, even to the verge of ambiguity;
SYNTAX.
159
written Ottoman Turkish must be as full, verbally, as to leave no
doubt on the mind of the reader at any distance of space or time.
The reasons are obvious and eminently practical, philosophical;
namely: If, by reason of a speaker's conciseness, a doubt as to
his meaning should arise in the mind of the person addressed,
a question can be put, and the doubt at once removed ; if, on
the contrary, a written document be left obscure in any part,
the doubt thence arising must remain unsolved, and the meaning guessed at, because the writer is either dead or away at a
distance.
Hence, if one be asked, j± <JJ y (bu ne dlr) what is this ? the
answer, in Ottoman Turkish, will be, for instance, Ljl (elma)
an apple, as in English.
une pomme")
(A Frenchman would answer: "C'est
Should the question be, ^^yX^)^
^_swljj^
(qarndashim! [vulg. qardashimi] gynrdunuz-mu) have you seen
my brother? the answer will be, either - ^ j ) (gyurdtim) / have
O
^O
*yr
seen (him), or +x*jjS
(gyurmadlm) / have not seen (him).
O
C x O x O
Should one say to you, ui~~vi f^Jj
'
+
J
J
*" J # ( o u n ^ sana versam,
yer-ml-sln) If I give this to thee (you), wilt thou (will you) eat
(it)? the answer will be either +& (yerlm) / will eat (it), or °C!>
(yemam) / will not eat (it).
In this last question, the omission
of " i t , " even by the asker, is to be remarked.
As instances of the omission of all possible subsidiary words
from phrases in conversation, may be mentioned that of the
160
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
affirmative j$ (dlr) is, it is, he or she is, on all occasions of
ordinary assertion or negation.
The personal and corrobora-
tive possessive pronouns are never employed in conversation
° J '
unless for emphasis or distinction ; as, *s£y> (fdviyArlm) I
O
J
,
*
love (thee, you, him, her, it), *jjiy*> ,A— (sanl savlyorim) i" love
thee (you), *jjif~> ,$•**» ^ (ben sanl ...) I, personally, love thee;
ijjK A>\> (b&b&ui galdl) my father came, or has come.
As a consequence of the desire to leave no doubt as to the
meaning of a writing, nouns and verbs in apposition, in pairs,
are much used ; such are, o*s^ j ^ (vldd I!L mahabbet) friendJoJ J
o
o <
•> o j j
_
ship, ^ j J ^ ^ - k - J j JJ£ (tahrir u tastlr olundu) has been written,
A result of the avoidance of unnecessary repetition is that
the third person singular of a verb is often employed instead
of its plural when the nominative plural is expressed; as,
{jd^ h±\ (adamlar g&ldi) some men, or the men have come, or
came.
Another such result is the use of a singular substantive with
a plural cardinal number; as, o i _;! (uch &t) three horses,
*-+>-£• U*L-J (bin 'araba) a thousand vehicles (carriages, carts,
waggons, &c).
To make written composition still more precise, it is very
usual, after introducing a common substantive or a proper
name into a paragraph or article, letter, dispatch, &c, never
to use a personal pronoun to designate the thing or person
161
SYNTAX.
so named, but to repeat the substantive or proper name as
often as may be required, either preceded or followed by one
O Jo ,
O
J
O *>
of the indicative adjectives, j^y* (m&zbur), jj£s*.x* (mezkyur),
O
i
for things or persons, jjJ
O -
~* (mesfur), for a contemned or
/ J
OO/
criminal person, A-J1 ~*J-* (muma lley-h), for a reputable
o o *
*
-» J
person, and a-Jl^ll* (mnsharun lley-h), for a person of rank
and consideration.
These words all mean, in reality, the afore^
said, the afore-mentioned, the said, &c.
In the case of a person
first mentioned by name, or by a common substantive, these
words may be used as substantives,—we might say,—as a kind
of personal or demonstrative pronoun, in all the cases of the
declension; but, in the case of a thing, they must be used as;
adjectives to its name, repeated each time.
SECTION I I . Syntax of the Substantive,
A common noun substantive singular may be either definite
or indefinite, and may represent, according to circumstances
or the context, either an individual or the individual, several
individuals, a portion of the species, or the whole species; as,
°1 Mf6jf\>
(bdghcha gyuzel shey) a garden (is) a pretty thing;
ij±J£ »L£oC (padlshah galdl) the monarch came, or has come;
j j > ^%MJ&>\
(Ingllterada geml ch6q) in England (there are)
162
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
O
•
O
*» ? <•
O ^
many ships; y J O J d U ^ b dL£^ (chlchek baghchanlfi zinetl
dlr) flowers are the ornaments of the gardens, of the garden ;
O
O
J
*sg\ ye (sA Ichdim) I drank (some) water, I drank water (not
O •«*
J
wm£, & c ) , ^Isi j ^ (su aqar) water flows.
In the accusative case indefinite, the substantive is as in the
O
*
O
J
nominative; as, dL*-sslj*© (su Ichmek) to drink water (some
water).
If the declensional accusative is used, it is always
O
O
J
definite; as, ^Assl ^y*
J
(suyu Ichdim) / drank, or have drunk,
the water.
There are four different Turkish methods of constructing
two substantives in a sentence.
First, by simple juxtaposition;
second, by adding the possessive suffix of the third person to
the second substantive; third, by putting the first in the
genitive, and still adding the possessive suffix to the second ;
and fourth, by putting the first in some other prepositional
case, and leaving the second unchanged.
In simple juxtaposition of two substantives, the first indicates a material, the second a form; or, the first indicates a
J
1
O
0»*
quantity, the second a material; as, \fp &yA\ (altfn qutu) a
gold box; A-J \ L^SjJt
(blr klle arpa) a bushel (of)
barley;
Jji d i k s U ^ j l (Ikl sa'&tlikyil) a distance of two hours journey;
s
J
O
0«»
O
•>
A5J>. d J ^ - * -.jl (uch s£trlllk choha) broadcloth enough for three
eoats.
SYNTAX.
163
With the possessive suffix alone added, a relation of genus
and species is indicated, the genus standing last, and the combination remaining indefinite; as, ^ l i ^\SS
book-cover; iS^,y
(kltab qaui) a
j \ (&• kyupeyi) a house (domestic) dog;
^4==**)^ uW (y^han urdeyl) a duck of the wilderness {wild
duck).
If the first is a proper name, the second is the species,
the first the name of the individual, and the combination is
definite ; as, ^ j , ^
jljl (azaq denlzi) the Sea of Azof.
With the first in the genitive, real possession is indicated,
the name of the possessor being the first, and the combination
is definite; as, ^Jl^e. tsU^i (qiralln 'askerl) the king's
*
o
army;
* +
(jj\ (sLbb (babamin &vl) my father's house,
When the first is put into a prepositional case, the second
remains without a suffix, and the combination may be definite
or indefinite, an active participle being always understood; as,
Jji ij^j (shehre yil) a (or the) road to the town; ^ j ^ a &W**
(demlrdan kyupru) a bridge of iron;
i^S j-> *&>\ (ayda bir
kerre) once in a month ; &c.
When two substantives are in apposition, no change is made
in either 5 as, \z\ ^ U (chawushagha) Mr. Sergeant; ^j^i) J£\\J
(yazljl efendi) Mr. Clerk; UA* ^JLo (mushir pasha) the Pasha
(who is) a Mushir.
Here, the generic word stands last, and
the combination is definite.
Sometimes, the specific word or
164:
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
term is complex and obeys its own rules; as, \t\ ^At cj\
O
*
(in-
O '#* O
bashl agha) Mr. Corporal; dL> ^ V l ^ * (mir-alay bey) Squire
Colonel;
L ^ L J I^J y - . * (mirl-llva pasha) the Major-General
Pasha.
There are two exceptions to the rule that the generic word
stands last, when the other word is a proper name.
In all
other cases with proper names, this rule holds good; as,
^IkL U»*»l (esma saltan) Princess Esma, Vj* o ) - c (izzet molla)
O ^x
o x
(jX-iJl v-i^lc ( e arlf efendl) ilfr. *Arif; &c.
Judge Izzet;
The
o «- o>
exceptions are: 1, the word ^UaL*, when applied to the soveII
JO/
O
/OJ
reign before his name ; as, J«yg' j^c ^UaL* (sultan 'abdu-'lhamid); 2, the word Vj*, when applied to a student or schoolboy, also before his name ; as, ±JL\j )ly (mdlla rashld) schoolboy Rashid.
Any number of substantives may be in apposition, and one
of them may be the proper name of the individual; as,
O
•*
J^J
jJLljJi
O *^»
O J
O
J
+ \ c.j\ (ighlum qAlAnuz) your servant, my
J
O x
O
-
OJO
son;
3
J - £ J j i ^ J ^ J JLCJI (6ghlAm r£fiq b&y quluiiuz) your servant,
my son, Refiq Bey ; j J O j i db jJ,
<^H J-* JL£jl (oghlum mir-
al&y ^refiq bey quhiiiuz) #owr servant, my son, Colonel Refiq
Bey;
&c.
When a string of substantives in construction would in
strictness require several of them consecutively to be put in
165
SYNTAX.
the genitive case, the monotonous cacophony of the repetition
of the preposition is avoided by omitting it once or twice
,_/
OJJO
J O
+
O
,» O *»
O
*
*
where most appropriate; thus, J>1 dUl^jl dL^-jib (SJU-JJU^I d^l^U
(pashanin enlshteslntn daylsinin ighlnnun at!) the horse of the
son of the uncle of the brother-in-law of the pasha, may be
expi-essed in either of the following ways: .***Hlb , , - A ^ J I dLili»\j
Jjl
d L l c j l , or ^3\
dLlcjl t ^ H l ^ (»L-»JU^)\ U»b, or
*»AI£J\ UA>
Jii (sJLl^j! d L ~ - j b , or J[l ddc^l du-».ob ^ A ^ J I ISISUAJ; the last
genitive preposition being, perhaps, the most frequently re*
tained and necessary.
Two or more Arabic or Persian substantives may be put in
Persian construction with each other.
Their order is then the
reverse of what it would be in Turkish construction, just as in
English the king's horse is in reverse order with the horse of
the king.
I n Persian construction each preceding substantive
of a series must be vocally connected with its consequent.
This vocal connexion is effected by making the final quiescent
consonant of the preceding substantive movent with &sere;
thus, »Li2» ^ L ^ J (fermanl shah) the command of the king;
° **
'
*°*
JO,
^\jA »U. ^1^9 tfj+^L* (muzmunu fermanl shahl Iran) the tenour
of the command of the king of Persia,
But, if the last con-
sonant of a preceding substantive is movent, and followed by
a vowel-letter, a servile consonant must be introduced to support the 6s£r& vowel of connexion ; and this consonant varies
166
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
with the final vowel of the word.
When the final vowel-letter
is \ or j , the servile consonant is ,j;
as, u-^-^1 ^ U ^ L * (ja-yi
o ,
9
pa-yl esb) ^ 6 j>Zac£ of the foot of the horse; edu ^j
yu ru-yu seg) /^£ hair of the face of the dog.
vowel-letter be a ^ ,
>
^y> (mu-
If the final
this letter is converted itself into the
servile consonant required ; so that no written addition is
needed; thus, - ^ *U < ^ (peri-yl chah-1 burj) the fairy of the
well of the tower.
Ignorance often writes a hemze over such
final <j so converted into a consonant; -but it really is not
requisite.
If, however, the final vowel be the letter s , then
the addition of a hemze is a necessity.
vowel-sign is figured under it, £ .
Sometimes the eser6
Usage is divided as to the
proper place where the servile hemze should be written.
It
is at times more correctly placed between the two words, on a
o * ,
* +
line with the writing; as, dUU $^-> (bere-1 felek) the lamb of
the sphere (i.e., Aries); and otherwise it is less correctly placed
over the vowel 8; as, dlls ij>.
Of two substantives in Persian construction, the first is often
the metaphorical name of the thing literally expressed by the
second, the pair really representing one idea under two images ;
as, JJX&J J>JL> (sa>lqi taqdir) the drover, destiny;
e^*^)-c ^Lc
(Inanl *azlmet) the reins (of) departure.
Whether in Turkish or Persian construction, the same
remark holds good of a pair of substantives, one of which is
SYNTAX.
167
the word^ol (emr), or one of its synonyms, SJL (madde),
ijoj*** (khusiis), o~ip (keyf lyyet), <fcc, all of which signify
our circumstance, and the like.
They are used in written
*
o-
o
o
o«»
*
Turkish for precision. Thus: .^=»}U1 jJ dlLo*? al, (rah-1 tahsllin &mr-l Insilaki) the matter of the pursuit of the path of
study; i&yv* M - J S dLJA^ilJj^ (d6nanmanin gelm£sl khususii)
£/i£ question of the coming of the fleet*
After a proper name of a person or thing, the word J6 (nam)
O
«»
O
«»
O /» O ^
_
name, is commonly employed; as, o b J j j ^ l (ahmed nam zat)
«>
^ 0 personage named Ahmed;
«>
O
*
O
'
yfe* *li ^ l i (qirim nam jezire)
the island (peninsula) named Crimea*
The two words «-^ ^ ^ (hazret), c_>L-». (jenab), which
originally mean presence and szefe, are used before or after the
names or titles of individuals held in honour, with a meaning
varying from that of His Divine Majesty down to that of plain
Mr, or Mrs,, &c. When they precede, they remain unchanged
to the eye, but are in Persian construction; as, I
o ** o
(hazr&t-l khAda) His Divine Majesty, God;
( —~ peygamb&r) His Sanctity,
the Prophet;
j*+.
»LioLj o L i ^ .
(jenab-i padlshah) His Majesty, the Sovereign; c^L^lju* ^U*.
( — sadaret-ma>ab) His Highness, the Repair of the Vezirate
(the Grand Vezir).
When they follow, they are in Turkish
construction, and generally take the possessive pronominal
168
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
suffix of the third person plural, but sometimes that of the
•Ox O ,
third person singular; as, ^jjo^
O*
O
'
O*
O CtO i
d^&lL -JL-VI &£» (sheyktm-
'1-lslam tahlr b&y h&zretlerl) His Eminence
Chancellor', Tahir Bey;
O'
the Lord
High
.e-jt^ (jXJ\ I^WM> £*A»:ZJI* &UJ*J ^Durusa
muftlsi hasan efendl jenabl) His Honour the State Counsel of
Brusa, Hasan Efendi; ^JJSJM* l£l> ^a*» (s&fIr pasha — ) His
Excellency the Pasha Ambassador; ^UU&» csb d^rj (terjuman
hey — ) His Worship the Interpreter Bey;
& c , & c , &c.
° - © ^
Generally, the word c^a^ before a single name indicates one
of the prophets, saints, or patriarchs of old; as, -j3 o ^
(hazretl nuh) the patriarch Noah ; ^j-*
prophet Moses;
— ( — miisa) the
^ L J L — (— suleyman) the prophet
(king)
o • o „
Solomon;
*-^-* — (— meryem) Saint Mary
(the Virgin
Mother) ;
-** c — ( — fIsa) the Prophet Jesus;
^-** —
(— mesih) the holy Anointed One (Christ); &c, &c, &c.
SECTION I I I . Syntax of the Adjective.
Nearly everything requisite in a sketch has been said on
-this subject in the former Chapter (II.), Section I I .
If several
adjectives qualify one substantive, they follow one another
simply in Turkish construction, and are all connected vocally
in the Persian construction ; as, J ^ J * - L-^s^jtal Jj»/(gyuzel,
SYNTAX.
169
edebll, mabjiib chdjuq) a pretty, well-behaved, modest child;
\y-3 —js (jUJ OW^-J (jU (ja-yl blhlsht-n&ma-yl fer&h-feza) a
paradise-like, joy-giving place.
One adjective may qualify several substantives in a sentence;
as, HJLJ J L ^ l j f%-ot (amem u ejyall satire) the other peoples and
nations.
An Arabic or Persian adjective is never placed after a
Turkish or foreign substantive; and whenever either is placed
before one of these, it remains, like a Turkish adjective, unci .. o changed as to gender or number; as, clL> J a c ('azim dagh)
a great mountain;
o ' C
o
*l£oU ^Jac ('azim padlshah) a great monarchy
»» "
o l j ^ *Jafi (^zim devlet) a great state.
Some adjectives take a substantive as a complement to
restrict their application.
In Turkish construction, this com-
plement precedes, with or without a preposition; as, J^oy»
(su d61u) full (of) water, JJJL *y yo (su lid ddlu) filled with
water.
In Persian construction it follows ; as, jij> J J y (laylq-
i beyan) worthy of exposition ; xJo {JJ\J* (muwaffq-f tdb') conformable with nature.
The Turkish adjective ^ i (glbl) like, follows substantives,
the personal pronoun of the 3rd pers. plur., the demonstratives
plural, the interrogatives singular and plural, and the compound
relatives, when its complements, without any change occurring
in them ; as, ^ - . ^ » y > (su glbi) like water;
>
ic*^=
jl^\
(anler
170
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
glbl) like them; ^Jjljj>
(bunlar glbl) like these;
(klm glbl) like whom ? ^$ Jlj
(neler glbl) like what things ?
^ ^ 3 ( j C j C l b (b&bUmlnkl glbl) like the one belonging to my
father;
^S^StX^
(bendekl glbl) like the one I have.
All
other pronouns are put in the genitive, when complements to
this word; as, ^S
^
(benlm glbl) like me; ^-S
c*Jil (anln
glbl) like him, her, it; ^^S ^r* (slzln glbl) like you ; ^_--S dij>
(b&nun glbl) like this; &c.
SECTION IV.
Syntax of the Numerals.
.
The Turkish and Persian cardinals always precede their
substantive, and this is usually left in the singular, whatever
the number ; as, ioi». jjol (Ikl chlft) two pairs;
jihan) the two worlds (present and future).
^ l ^ . j (du
But the Arabic
cardinal follows, the construction is made Persian, and the
* O*
"i
substantive is made plural; as, ***•»• <J1JS (quvayl khamse) the
a
five senses; AI*> c ^ l ^ (jlhatl sltte) the six directions (in space),
six sides (of a solid).
The Turkish and Persian numerals precede the adjectives of
the same substantive; as do also the Arabic (though after the
substantive); thus, ^jg &L- ^ J I (Ikl slyah kechl) two black
goats; *jj*z* ^ \ c^ia> (heft lqlim-1 ma'mure) the seven climates
SYNTAX.
of the habitable earth;
171
*• o*
»,alU g^+i. ^y
«o
(quvayi khamse-1 za*
hire) the five external senses.
But if, instead of an adjective, a descriptive phrase should
qualify the substantive, the Turkish numeral comes between
O
O
,OJ J
O
*
•>
the two; as, <^\j\ »JJ^ dodkjl (idanin biyunda blr Ip) a string
of the length of the room; ^ U l l <j±i jjj\
<LS?1 &~S ^
<Sj>y* (her
blrl besh keyse aqcha eder yedl elmas) seven diamonds, each of
the value of five purses of money.
A Turkish cardinal number can be placed after a substantive
in the genitive, singular or plural.
It does not then define the
number of that substantive, but of a definite portion of what
this represents ; as, <JJ> <zLs\ (adamin blrl) one of mankind, a
man; ^$y tsJ^Lil (adamlerln blrl) one of the men; ^ A J I d o j ^ l
(6dan!ii Iklsl) two rooms, fj»S^} &)iA>j\ (odalarin Iklsl) two of
the rooms.
Very often, between the Turkish cardinal number and its
substantive, another substantive is introduced, with the sense
of individual or individuals, as in our phrases " ten head of
cattle," "six
sail of ships," &c.
This substantive varies in
Turkish according to the nature of the things defined by the
numeral.
o c*>
For men it is^aj (nefer) individual;
o
for beasts it is
•
^ L (re^s) head; for bulbs it is ^ZXJ (bash) head; for ships it is
ixki (qit'a) piece; for cannons, ships, and villages, it is IJJ (pare,
172
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
vulg. p&rd) piece; for things usually counted it is s±c ('dded)
number; for things not usually counted it is aJta (dane, vulg,
tan&) berry; for swords it is ^ A .a (qabza) /h7£; for elephants,
o
^ s i j (zenjir) c k m .
Thus : **\ Ju Ji> five men; ^j^
ten sheep; ^Uj*? ^ b
{S^\
^\j
two onions; AUI* axks Lc-t^i
^\
twenty
ships; Aifeu s^lj ^C,_X_J> twenty vessels; L^JO *JO ^J\ ten cannon
(pieces of artillery) ; ^jj> i^lj <JJ! fifty villages; de>jj*j-i ±±& j£
JO
-
*>
O
^ r
a hundred eggs ; js*l\ «ub ,J>^} two pearls;
O
O
O
^
-"O^
O
J
JU A^J ~J\ three
O
swords; J-j9 J^-J j) one elephant.
The Turkish ordinals precede their substantives ; as,
O
(blrlnjl geyje) ^ first night;
,»•»
J OJ
J
^ \ ^SJjjUh
•*
O
O
*£^Jt
C"»
^ ,•».:;J1 (Ultmish
d6qu.zu.nju. alay) the sixty-ninth regiment.
The Arabic ordinals follow; as, . ^ t i . <_>L> (babl khamls)
chapter the fifth.
The Persian ordinals generally precede, but
sometimes
follow.
The Turkish distributive numerals are used to express the
rates of collection as well as of distribution; as, Ji±ji) ifo j2*>
OS*
*,0*
(besher pdrd verdll^r) they contributed five paras each ; ^t> s/jl
O
^
x
^
^ J J ^ - J J tjj (&nl&r& basher p&ri verlldl) to them five paras each
were distributed.
For emphasis sake, the simpler distributives
are often
173
SYNTAX.
repeated; but they are then generally used as substantives ; as,
**%Ji0 jj{ jj> (blrer blrer t6pladim) I collected (them) one by one;
y>^\jl^\
JtJ&\
(Iklsher Iklsher aliniz) take ye (them) two
apiece each (of you), or, take you (or thou, them) two together
each time*
SECTION V.
Syntax of Pronouns.
The demonstrative pronoun, when an adjective, precedes
all other qualifications of its substantive; as, M^S tsJj-H JT^ j>
O
O o
<y
j * t&kX (bu uch blyuk gyuzel gellnllk qiz) these three tall,
handsome, nubile girls.
The suffixed possessive pronoun is not, in literary style,
necessarily attached to its substantive, but to the last word
of the combination of substantive, adjective, & c , to which it
belongs.
Thus, * , J J +y>j* (merhum pederlin) my late father,
may be rendered in the Persian form, ++J>-JA »JJ (peder-t merhumum) ; so also, j*&\j>>jio\L ^
(vejh-f khatir-kh'aMmiz) the
manner desiderated in mind by us (i. e.5 by me); ^ C l c ^ - *Jj2*J&i\
^St-ttjj-sJe
(dqtar4 sharqiyy£ ser-'&sker-l zHfer-rehberl) the
O *"
O
- J
victorious commander-in-chief of the eastern districts; jA el£l? y
.^Lsil K^J^J (jl^-iJU <J\>-J, (bu b&ghifi her blr ja-yi jan-feza-yl
blhlsht-lntlmasl) each soul-enrapturing,
paradise-prognosticating
spot of this garden*
The corroborative of the suffixed possessive pronoun of
174
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Turkish construction precedes the whole combination to which
the possessive is suffixed ; and this corroborative is always in
the genitive, whether it be a substantive or a pronoun ; as,
*,j-j (^-=^-0 (%-^-J (benlm m&rhum pederlm) my late
^tjJ
father;
(«^j C^AWJI (6danin blyuk qapusu) the great door of the
room.
One possessive suffix may qualify several substantives ; as,
{cj\~>-\
j cjjte j L A - S H j Ji (al A ds-hab A 'Itr^t u. ahbabl) his
family, companions, posterity, and friends.
SECTION V I
Syntax of the Verb.
Verbs of the first and second person agree with their nominatives in number and person; as, +±jy ^ (ben gyurdum) /
saw, have seen (him, her, it, &c.) ; yX->j>jj) y*» (slz gyiirdunftz)
you saw, have seen (me, us, them, &c.\
A verb of the third person must also agree with its subject,
-» O
Jy
if understood; as, \£±j£ (gyurdu) he, she, it saw, has seen (it,&c);
Jl±jjf
(gyurduler) they saw, have seen (it, &c).
When the subject is expressed of a verb of the third person,
the verb does not always agree with it in number,
A singular
subject soraetimes has its verb in the plural, out of respect or
politeness; a plural subject often has its verb in the singular,
so as to avoid the cacophony of repetition.
Thus : JJUxiJf JJIJ
SYNTAX.
175
(bab&m gltdller) my father went, has gone, is gone ; ^S& {jJ&\Z>j\
(ushdqlerl gdldl) his or their servants came, or have come, are
come.
So a verb with several subjects expressed, when all of the
third person, singular or plural, may be in the singular; as,
.3 £)\>\2> J\ji& \-jy»oj c>W; <—SJ)I (uluf-i rlzvan u sunuf-i gufran
shayan dlr) thousands of prayers for God's acceptance, and all
hinds of wishes for God's mercy (on him, &c.) 2*5 (are) fitting.
If one of them be of the second person, singular or plural,
and the other or others of the third person, the verb must be
of the second person plural; as, J j ^ j I i ^ l ^ J x l ^ J j lj±ij
^
(sdn v& pMerlm ve q6nshAfiuz beraber gltdlnlz) thou and my
father, with your neighbour, went together.
And if one be of the first person, even singular, whether the
others be of the second or third, singular or plural, the verb
J J o J^ o
, o ~ * o * , o ,
must be in the first person plural; as, eb^jf dliljj,3 j ^ j ^
(ben, ve s&n, ve qarndashln, gyurdtik) 7, and thou, and thy
brother, saw (him, & c ) .
In conversation, ,^ and its plural J.$ are generally omitted
at the end of a phrase, affirmative, negative, or interrogative;
as, i* j>\jSZL^
{khyilniz lyl ml) is your health good ? y\ (lyl)
it is good; Jyi j>\ (lyl dlyll) it is not good.
But, in repeating the affirmative or negative words of
another,
,.> must be introduced ; as, (^JJLJI jjiXa? j j o ^ AL-JJ-*
176
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
(buyl& dlr, d6yu, tdsdiq eyledl) he confirmed, saying,
Ci
It
is so."
In relating the words of another, no alteration is permitted
in number, person, or tense of the verb; as, ^ J J J +J$ (gellrlm,
didl) he said, " / will come " (not as in English, " he said he
would come").
"When the object of a transitive verb is definite, it is put in
o
r»*
*»
the accusative ; as, ^jJl Jfl (at! dldfm) / bought, have bought (or
taken) the horse.
But, if the object be indefinite, it remains in
o c«*
^*
the nominative; as, *jJI o l (it aldun) / bought a horse or
horses.
Intransitive, like transitive, verbs, govern their indirect
objects by means of different prepositions, i.e., the substantives
or pronouns are put into different cases according to the verb.
0/.CO
J
O ' O J
i
Thus : (J*S,jS &X*Jj\ (Alumdan qirqmaq) to be afraid of death ;
,3*>lJ ^ J ^ J j l (ulumdun qachmaq) to run away from
death;
j^jiU UJJJ (pdrdyabdqmdq) to look at money (i.e., to take money
into account or consideration); isL)ji isj* (sudd yuzmek) to
swim in the water; &*#£=>*j£=a±(denlzfe girmek) to go into
o^ o i
/Ac sea (i.e., to bathe in the sea); j*jj\
*
o
AA - L i (qillj lid wur-
mdq) to strike with a (or the) sword; {J*-J\) &y?\ Jo\*. (khatlr
ichln ydpmdq) to do (a thing) out of regard (for some one) ;
i*U> A-JljX (haywdnd blnmek) to mount on a beast (horsf);
SYNTAX.
177
eU^ ^(C*-J (gemlye blnmek) to mount (go) on board
ship;
j£jL)Li AftU (ayagha qalqmaq) to m e to one's / e ^ (i. e., to rise,
get up, stand up).
Nouns of time and place are often used adverbially (as also
is the case in English) without prepositions after verbs; as,
$
tfji
(yarln gal) come to-morrow; ^ 1 ,PU»T (ashaghiln, vulg.
en) descend, come or go down; j
mount;
i. e., come or go up.
^ ijj&ji (yiiqari chiq) ascend,
Still, on occasions, prepositions
are used with them; as, c->U <icU (sagha s&p) deviate (turn) to
the right; ,jl> A]^> (sola baq) Z00& £0 tfAg left; e ^ 5 jj+3 (gird,
vulg. gerl git) #o 5ac&; JJ ^ ^ ^ 3 (gerldan gal) come from the
rear, from behind.
A transitive verb has sometimes two direct objects, one
o«»
o
o
J
_•
definite, the other indefinite; as, JjSzA *«£»» ^1 (ani nmshir
etdller) ZAey made him a mushir (duke, or field-marshal).
An Ottoman compound verb, active or passive, often takes
its direct or indirect object into the body of the verb, as the
Persian complement of its nominal factor; as, J ^ a ^ juiAflJ^jj
i£&\
s^JJij (bu d&qiqaya tahsili vwftquf &yledl) he acquired
cognizance of (about) this subtle point;
^jJLi A^LO> ol>}* uJ,-»
(sarf-l mnzjat-1 blza'a qlllndi) expenditure of the modicum of
capital was made (i. e., the modicum of capital was spent).
N
178
OTTOMAN TUEKISH GRAMMAR.
SECTION V I I . Syntax of the Participle.
In conversation, the substantive qualified by a particle, active
or passive, is sometimes understood, and the participle is used
as a substantive; as, JSJ AJS (gelane ver) give (thou it) to him
(or her) who comes; A*S\J *S^X>S
(gldlylmd baqmll) look not at
that which I wear; i*jyo ^ i ^ b
(yapajaghim! sorma) ask not
what I shall do.
The active participle present of <jjy, i. e. J)!j\,
is often
omitted after Arabic participles, active or passive; as, «^,
^ J J J « dJU* ailj *y'}j > ^.ft (rnb'l meskyunda vwaqi memalik u
buldan) £A# countries and towns situated in the inhabited quarter
(of the globe); ^jj^oj^y^j^=>'x^
»JJLX^=»^ (bn kltabdd mez-
kyur fdnun u ma'arlf ) ^ 6 sciences and matters of knowledge
mentioned in this hook.
Active participles govern all their objects in the same way
as the verbs from which they derive; so also do the passive
participles, excepting only the object they each qualify as an
adjective; as, ^Ul ^J (qapu dchdn) he who opens a door;
<jUi ^Jj*s (qapnyu ach&n) he who (that which) opens the door;
3*
O
Of
}£ ^i^>\
S
O
*
4J1 JI (ellm He dchdfghfm q&pii) the door that
opened with my hand;
I
<_*-»*» J J O - A ^ J J ! JJ-S j , ^ ^<j*H (pederl-
mln bunu qabiil Idemeyejeyl sebeb) the reason for which my
father will wot he able to accept this.
179
SYNTAX.
The Persian and Arabic participles are constructed, generally, with their objects, in the same manner as if
the
participles were substantives ; as, ^ l ^ jiyt, j>ll> (khaliq-l h&r
dnjlhan), ^JU. d b l ^ j ^ ^ (her du jlhanin khallqi) the Creator
of both worlds; Jj.S-s S-i J j - L i 0 (makhluq-u yed-1 qudretl),
J
JO
*
O
/O/OJ
*.
jjjls.* db^t',S9 J_J (yM-1 qudretlerlnin makhluqu) the creature
Opt
J
,0*
*i*
of the hand of Ris almighty power; ^\j ^\ &x^j>\ (aferinende1 in u an) the Creator of this and that (all things); g»jx-L) &<**»*>
j ^ \ ±j>. (reside3! kyungyure- 3 ! charkh-i esir) which has reached
the battlement of the ethereal sphere.
But sometimes Arabic active participles of transitive verbs
2 o /
govern their direct objects as do their verbs ; thus,
0 ^ 9
c£-~* ^ s ^ ^ s j ^ (keyf lyyet-1 mezkyure-1 mubin) which explains
the said circumstance.
SECTION VIIL
Syntax of the Verbal Nouns and Infinitive.
Turkish verbal nouns are constructed with their subjects,
when substantives, as any two substantives ; thus, ^JS nz)x*o*\
(ahmedln galmesl) the coming of Ahmed, Ahmed's
\hl&dj^^l
coming;
(ahmedln g&ldiyl) Ahmed's (past action of) having
come; jJ^AJsTd.u&.l (ahmedln gelejeyl) Ahmed's (future action
of) coming.
When the subject is a pronoun, it is put in the genitive still,
180
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
and the Turkish verbal noun takes the possessive suffix of the
O
xO ,
O
««
subject's number and person ; as, *AJ6 +*> (benlm galmein) my
coming ; duSo±b du:«* (sanln galdlyln) thy having come ; c^JLii
ijJ&o>6& (anlerln galejeklerl) their future coming.
Turkish verbal nouns and infinitives are constructed with
their objects, direct or indirect, exactly as their verbs; thus,
?*>*jy ,jl (anl gyurmem) my seeing him (her, it) ; cslX-^db *^*)t
(izmire galejeyin) thy future
ifi^i
coining to Smyrna ; &±+*\ A^,JJ
L-JJJLA-© ,JJ^ (pedeiina ahmedlii dun mektub yazdigh!)
}
Ahmed s having written a letter to his father yesterday.
Arabic verbal nouns are constructed with their agents sometimes in the Turkish, sometimes in the Arabic, and sometimes
o J JJ
in the Persian manner;
o
o'„
as, +*jjj (vurud^im) my
oC
arrival;
ouifC Jo j
r>L*s? (tahsilm) thy study; \£jij£ (tahrirl) his writing; 4iJl xi*>
siinM 'llah), AJI SC^> (sune-l llah) the act of God ; J^J\J^J
ztjd
(Idare-i pergyar-1 &fkyar) a revolving of the compasses of the
thoughts.
Arabic verbal nouns are constructed with their objects in
the same manner as the compound verbs formed of them ; as,
c_^_*> fjjjsJLo
(maqdurl sarf ) an employing one's utmost;
^^J
j U * ALOSS ^ U S ] ^ (fann-1 jagraflyay! tahslla medar) a help to
un acquiring the science of geography.
But they may also be-
constructed with them as two simple substantives, either in
SYNTAX.
181
O "
O J
J O*
the Turkish or Persian manner; as, J^> t ^ j i * o r ^ j i * u - i ^ ;
and again, AJLOSJ diUKi>. ^
or «wUI»*>. ^ J ~ o ^ ; &c.
In all cases excepting their construction with their subjects
or objects, the Turkish verbal nouns and infinitives are constructed in sentences exactly like any other substantives; as,
J* LJJ^ O^J? tsUlj' (dlmek bunddn evli dlr) to die is better than
O
,
*
+
O JO J
this; (j±£]\>. a,y, » LJ^i (q^rtalrndghd ch&lishdi) he laboured at
escaping;
+±u\ ±-+i>J yjg} j^Sl* (y&qmaq ichln tertlb etdlm)
/ arranged, have arranged (it) for burning; J^S ^jV .^-la (g&lmesl lazim dlyll) his coming (is) not necessary;
o /
o
^ cJ
t+JL^dLjtxf
.
\) +* & .;>> (glde-bllejeylme sh&b-hem var) wy doubt exists, i. e.,
/ have a doubt as to my being able to go.
SECTION I X .
Syntax
of the Gerunds.
The gerunds are not much used in conversation; there the
discourse is broken up into as many sentences as may be
needed, each with its personal verb; as, *±j>jjj» +±& ?*jf p &
(gltdlm, gyurdAm, gdldlm, kh&ber verdlm) I went; I saw; I
came; I gave information.
But, in the literary style, one long phrase, ending with one
personal verb, will contain a number of clauses, each ending
with a gerund (which thus acts to the ear, as well as to the
eye, like our commas and semicolons); as, *sSjJ& csl^jj C^JSS
1?2
o
o
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
o*,
tif-y^j^
( g ^ P > gyurerek, galdikde, khaber verdlm), / , going
and seeing, on coming back, reported.
When compound verbs are used, the auxiliary gerunds may
O
JJ
>
O^
o
be omitted once or twice in a long sentence ; as, £cjj ijuot* j>
^^sA ^-sti S±**y *JJI j (blr mevzi a vurud, ve anda blr mtqdar
qu'ud Mup,....) ... arriving at a certain place, and sitting down
there awhile, .... In this case, however, a conjunction requires
to be introduced in lieu of the gerund omitted; as is seen in
the example given.
The subjects, and direct or indirect objects, of the gerunds
are constructed as with their verbs.
But, as the gerunds
cannot indicate the person and number of their subjects, the
appropriate personal pronoun must be expressed before them,
when the subject is not a substantive ; as, u^j-jj-ijl c->Ls-5 +$\
(adam kitab oquyub) man, reading a booh (or boohs),
;
j £ ^ l J^l^ *y»> A*J (ftrmanlm size vwasil olijaq) at what time
my command shall attain unto you,
shu adam! gy&rerek) / , seeing that man,
SECTION X .
; tsK»»y #$\ jZ> ^ (ben,
; &c.
Syntax of the Adverb.
The adverb precedes the verb or adjective qualified by i t ;
as, ^jsh c ^ W
(sabahleyln galdi) he came in the morning;
J j / ( J j ^ ( c l l ^ l g y u z a ) ^ry
pretty.
SYNTAX.
183
The negative J $ J (dlyll) not, precedes the verb substantive,
expressed or understood, but follows the substantive or adjective which it negatives; as, +Jb * ^S
young;
(genj dlylllm) / am not
^uJS^jJ&i (Hqlsiz dlyllsln) thou art not
unintelligent;
j i JS^ +±\ (ad&m diyil dir) he or it is not a man; &c.
The adverbial suffixes e*h (dek), ^-^»>> (deyin), follow a
noun of time, place, or condition, in the dative; as, [^*^=»^ A»L<»
(sabahd deyln) until morning; ^MjjS)J
O ^
as London;
(lindurayadek) as far
- J J
&±&*Jj\ (tUnmed&k) until death.
They follow the
third gerund also, put in this same dative case, and thus form
a verbal limit of time; as, d-iA^jJs^ (gellnjeyedek) until (I,
thou, &c.) come, came.
The agent must be named or under-
stood; as, &*&n& sS tf (b£n gldlnjeyed&k) until I go (or went);
ts)±v.*fj\j ±>\jj\ v>^$L* (mektubum 6raya varinjayadek) until my
letter reach (or reached) there.
The tense of this gerund is
decided by the context, in like manner as its agent and
object.
The adverb »;>-> (gyAre) according, also follows a dative;
as, »,^A*ia£ (e&qlima gyure) according to my judgment;
*jS&
(bUna gyure) according to me; &c.
The adverbs ISJ (yaiia), ^ V > (d6layi), JJ)J\
(utdru) rela-
tively, follow substantives or infinitives in the ablative ; as,
<jV>L ,j^lLS^ (kltabdan d<Mayi) relatively to (about) a (or the)
184
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
booh ; tfjj>)\ ^±5* »:•> (gltmekdan uturu) relatively to (about,
concerning) going.
Although it is not grammatically erroneous, in answering a
question, to use the affirmative adverb o j l (evet) or ^
(bell)
ygs, or the negative j|j) (y6q) o r ^ i , (khayr) wo, when appropriate, it is unidiomatic to do so.
The more general custom,
whether one of those adverbs be used or not, is to repeat the
word or words of the question on which the interrogation
turns, with such grammatical modifications as may be necessary.
Thus, turning back to the five questions instanced in Chap. I L ,
sect. 21 (p. 151-2), the respective answers may be : 1, ^
(evet, ben) yes, I (am to ride); 2, &fjlj\
ojl
JJJ> ' (yoq, olblr gyun)
no, the day after ; &c.
SECTION X L
Syntax of the Preposition.
The Turkish preposition always
follows the word
it
governs, noun, pronoun, or verbal derivative, as is seen in
Chap. I L , sections 1 (p. 51), 4 (p. 82), 5 (p. 88), 6 (p. 89),
7 (p. 90), and in Chap. III., section 8 (p. 179) ; but the
Arabic and Persian prepositions always precede; as, j J - c ^ U,
(eale 't-tahqlq) in truth; j\j*j> (ber qarar) in permanence (without change); * A S ^ ('ala hide) singly; *i1jjl <3 (fi '1-waqf) in
/ a c t ; JU> ^l> (bl-eyyl halin) in any case; t^jJ&II io ^
(*&la
SYNTAX.
185
kela 't-t&qdireyn) upon either supposition; j>j*»j\ (ez ser-1 nev)
from a new beginning (over again, again).
A preposition may govern two or more substantives in a
sentence; as, A^L>.IJ O ^ C • c^U^lj Jl to his family,
companions,
posterity, and friends.
But, as the Arabic and Persian preposition precedes the
adjectives that qualify, as well as the substantives qualified,
so the Turkish preposition is placed after all these; consequently, in Persian construction, and when the substantive is
followed by the possessive suffixes, the Turkish preposition is
separated from the substantive it governs, sometimes by a considerable distance; as, dLl *GC (baba-m lie) with my
* 0
•
Mi
J
father;
J
»ji^L> c-*s? J) (b& muhlbb-i sadiq-da) in this faithful
friend;
^£lj (£b#Ud (j^j *J> ^ t e (qallyun-l kyuh-ntlnmn-i httmayunun
bash!) the head of the mountain-like imperial galley.
SECTION X I L
Syntax of the Conjunction.
All conjunctions, except the enclitic »^ (de, da), or ^s
(dakhi),
too, also, head the phrase they belong to.
The enclitic conversational »a, or literary ^ o , is placed after
the word of a phrase to which special attention is directed;
thus : (jjJS C J J L ^ O ^ J J J J U J (Istanboldan dakhl, or Istanbodarida
-
O l O x - O J O x O
top galdl) cannon came from Constantinople also ; i_>jL^jJjJUJ
186
o^
<^j&
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
*
Lr &o
(Istanbildan t6p dakhi galdl) cannon, too, came front
Constantinople.
This enclitic is repeated after each member of a phrase
linked together by its use; as, »JJ«*> *j±f
»JJJ (ben-dd gederlm,
san-da) / , too, will go, as also thou ; j , j ^ » j*>-j\ »jJjl »J^*» »J^
(b&n-da, san-da, 6-da, uchumuz glderlz) I, thou, and he too, will
all three go.
I t is often placed after a verb in the conditional, its sense
being then, in English, rendered by even; as, »^ A13> (galse-de)
even should he come; *.3A~J>1 ^ ^ ^ ( g a l m l s h Ise-de) even though he
be come; S ^ J I I J S (galseydt-da) had he even come; m+Jj\ dts*dJ
(galejek 6lsa-da) even should he be about to come (even should he
think of coming, or resolve to come).
After other verbs than conditionals, it is enclitic with each
that enters a phrase, and answers to our both, followed by and
or also; as, sj^jjS »jwo,j!& (gelliim-da, gyururum-da) / will both
come, and see also; sj^jll *<uol JJ&->I±*JJJ3
*x*jj-6 ( — ,
—,
beyanlr-lse-m, alirlm-da) I will come, and I will see, and if I
admire, will also buy.
The conjunctions j w l , K&J, U , in the sense of whether ... ,
or whether, jhs»\ (eyer) if, with *>J> (ger-chl, vulg. gerche) or
A ^ ^ a l (eyer-chl, vulg. eg&rche) although, put the verb or verbs
of their phrase in the conditional; as, A-1J$U A-JTU (ha gals£,
SYNTAX.
187
ha galmasa) whether he come, or (whether he come) not; i.Jbj£s>\
(eyer galslt) if he come ; m^A J!n& ^j^=»\ (egerchl galmlsh Isada) although he be even come (even though he be come).
When the copulative j joins one verb or phrase to another,
it is pronounced ve, in conformity (to a certain degree) with
its original Arabic pronunciation ; but when, in Persian construction, it unites two nouns, substantive or adjective, it takes
the vowel-sound of u or u, and joins on, in pronunciation, as
though in a syllable, with the consonant preceding i t ; as,
JO V
/
OS,
o *"->
J
'O'
ij*J> j (jjJs (g&ldl ve gyurdu) he came, and he saw; J U I j t^Jj^
(devlet u Iqbal) fortune and prosperity;
<^>~»,JJJj ^^
(qavl-yu
ten-durust) strong and healthy.
The Persian conjunction aT(ki) that, always connects two
members of a phrase, and should never be supposed to be a
relative pronoun in Turkish (as it really is in Persian, as well
as a conjunction); as, *S Jjl ^jls* (ma'lum 61a ki) be it known
that . . . .
Sometimes the clause that follows shows the cause
or reason of that which precedes ; the conjunction may then
O
yr O '\S~'
'
' O S *
0°'C "
be rendered by for or because; as, ^ ^ <o ^ D <m3 j 2dj\ JJ^Ui
O * '•»
Jo
J
OOX
-x^O*'
^jaJ ^ J J J ! du.1 ^M*» JJ,A£* (nlyazmend ilalfin, ve nale-kyunan, kl
jins-1 magferete sim-i eshk 6ldu. nuqud) let us be instant in supplications, and assiduous in moans, for the silver of (man's) tears
has been made the coins payable for the wares of (God's) mercy*
o J i
Jo
j
•* n •> o J J
(The inversion ^5J ^ j j j ! for ^jJjl sju is poetical.)
iOS
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
After a verb signifying to say (which also may mean, to say
to one's self, to think), or to ask, the conjunction
*Sintroduces,
what is,was, or will be said or thought; but the question must
be in the mood, tense, number, and person, in the very words,
used by the speaker or thinker ; as, ^1$ ^Jo
£jfj
(diyor ki,
yarin gellrlm) he says, I will come to-morrow ; >* £ j A-S ijSjye
(s6rdd kl, bii ne dlr) he ashed, What is this ?
We see, then,
that A, so used, is the equivalent of our sign of quotation, the
inverted commas. We cannot alter the phrase as is our custom,
and say, he says he will come, or he ashed what that was.
Occasionally, in a certain style, this
hj&
is omitted ; as,
ij\ <j*l± (dldl: ey shehrlyar) he exclaimed, "0
monarch."
But the method more generally nsed, especially in conversation, and which is the true Turkish mode, is to quote first what
was said, asked, or thought, and then immediately to bring in
the verb to say, fyc., in its proper tense, number, and person;
O,
as
OJ
O
^
> )j?-*jjj*(g&frk
dlyirler) they say, We will come; i. e., they
say they will come ; UXJ± *±+jyS
(gyurmadlm dldl) he said, I
did not see (him, her, it, them, you, &c.) ; i. e., he said he did
O
«"
not see. In this case, if the verb used be any other than dUi«>,
J
the Turkish conjunction JJO (dlyn, vulg. deye), which really is
Ox
o
•»
the first or fifth gerund, modified by usage, of e*U^, viz., i__>£j>
or d p , is introduced before the verb used, and after the quotation ; it is the equivalent of our saying; as, JJO ^y\
JSJUS
SYNTAX.
O
189
O
p y -*}Jlj*, (keyfinlz lyl-ml, dlyA, stibal etdlm) / asked (of him
or her), saying, Is your health yood ? i. e., i" ashed how he was;
Jfjjl^) J& j P jj3*k
(belmeyiiiz, dlyu, Inkyar Idlyorler) they
deny, saying, We know not; i. e., they deny, and say they know
O
O
'O
'
J
O ^^
O
O/
not; * JJJ! U p . JJ^ j - X * jJ£ (galmazslhiz, dlyu, khulya etdlm) /
formed an idea, saying (to myself), You will not come ; i. e., /
imagined that you would not come; jS^s^^
AJ (ne dlyu, gai-
dlniz) saying what (to thyself), ar£ £/iow come? i.e., w;/ia£ are
yow come for ?
The conjunction
sometimes, as in Persian, serves to
connect an incidental qualifying phrase to an antecedent noun,
as though it were a relative pronoun; but in such case it never
undergoes declension or takes a preposition, the following
O
J
O
+
J
O'
phrase being complete in all its parts ; as, J^l Q - L - J ±+S»
^ a (j£^LfcLi«li O j j a g^ka5^J Ass jy&j
J^>\ *j>y *> j^ ]/*» ASIC ^J Jj^lj^.
(hamd n. slpas 61 khudav&nd-l bi-'lUete seza dlr, ki, vujud-1 enhar
u qA'ur-i blhar yek-qatre-1 qudret-1 na-mutenahllerl dlr) glory and
lauds are worthy of that uncaused Lord God, of whose infinite
power the existence of rivers and the depths of oceans are but a
single drop.
T h e foregoing example shows that it is often difficult or
impossible to distinguish whether the phrase that follows JLJ
is a qualificative, or the exposition of a reason.
We might
190
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
take it in this latter sense, and translate: for, the existence of
rivers, fyc, are but one drop, fyc.
But, in ethical works and the like, generally composed by
members of the 'ulema class (Doctors of Canon Law) on a
Persian or Arabic model, the clause that follows A) is generally
qualificative, and the style is anti-Turkish.
Thus : *J>{j£'Jt>
dj\ e^^-o 4 ^ o i ^ J t ^ AW vs*** c ^ i (her kes kl dest-1 hlmmet
lid hHbl-1 metin-1 edqld mtiteshebbis 6\k,
) ; every one who
shall take hold of the firm cable of reason with the hand of
endeavour,
; j±jja^> J^S.JA)
A> J^jf^>- j> (ML janverler kl
5
n&zar-i 'Ibret-la m&nztir dnr,
) these animals which are
looked upon with a regard for instruction,
The conjunctions
(ta kl) in order that, A-5^>)li (shayed
kl) perhaps, lest, A-£_*tab (md-dam-kl) as long as, since, A> tallo
(me-bada kl) lest, & j £ *
(meyer kl) unless, require their verbs
to be in the optative; as, A-JIS \*£
A-> U (
tdhdmmnin
q&lmayd) in order that no power of endurance be left in him;
Jdj\ *j&* A) jjli. (
mnnhezlm ilaler) lest they be routed;
Jllljl »JO\1L A-£-cbL (
AJJ! 4-ij^ & \&>* (
(
h&yatdd ilaler) since they are alive ;
u
yle ola) tes£ it be so; A!JI J^S AS ^-X-*
gy uzel 6U) wwZfSS Atf (sfo, it) be beautiful
191
SYNTAX.
SECTION X I I I .
Syntax of the Interjection,
Some interjections are accompanied by nouns and pronouns,
some by nouns only, others have no accompaniment, and some
precede verbs.
When accompanied by a noun, the noun is always in the
nominative, excepting with the interjection j j L i (yazlq) ; as,
J»IJLJ A) (vwakh babam) alas, my father ! jLcjl tf.j-sh (aferin,
vulg. aferim oghlum) well done, my boy ! y^±\ \j±S (gldl edebO
SO +
Oi*
slz) 0, impudent fellow ! * i l ^ i (j\ (ey qardashfm) well, brother!
O J J
J
O
O
x#*
Oxx
*••
Ox
(•^W eA^ (aman chojughum) 0, ^
child! +xJ>\ Ls^o (merhaba
efeudlm) 6 W s blessing on you, sir !
They always precede the
o
nouo.
*
The word j j i j is used in this way also, but it further
O x
«»x
O
x
permits its substantive to be put in the dative; as, ^-\_*l J;IJ>
(yazlq emeylm), «ux_*l jfjl> (yazlq emeylme) alas my trouble !
alas for my trouble !
When accompanied by a pronoun, except the interjection
i£X-S
(gldl), the pronoun must be in the dative ; as, &J JJ\J
(yazlq bana) poor me ! &-** ±\J (vwakh sana) aZas / o r thee !
s^lil ^.^-il (aferim anlara) 2^^ZZ done, they !
The exceptional
is constructed with the accusative of the second person
singular, which it may precede or follow; as, ^
sanl) or {jxf ^
^s$
(gldl
(sanl gldl) faugh, thou (good-for-nothing)!
192
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Interjections indicative of a desire for the future or regret
for the past, are constructed with the conditional, aorist or
past accordingly; as, <s*J$ »T (ah galsd) 0 that he would come !
<j±«Jb »1 (ah g&lseydl) 0 that he had come 1 One of these,
^Ll,
is constructed also with the imperative, and expresses
vehement desire with the affirmative, or dread with the negative; as, A~*I_S \JU\ (aman gltmasd) 0 that he go not (by his
own desire)! ijj^+iS ,jLl (amdn gltm&sin) 0 that he go not (if
my wish prevail)!
With an imperative, 4 * (hele) expresses an invitation or a
challenge ; as, J^AJ-^ (hele g41) come along ! ^ J S &-*> ( Q ^^
gilsln) just let him only come !
Arabic phrases are often used as interjections, generally
after proper names; as, ^UJ <*Ul \$*fi <u,^=u &£=*«* (mekke-i
mtik&rreme, kerrema-ha 'llahA ta'ala) Mekka the Venerated,
which may God, who be exalted, cause to be venerated I ^UaL»
±j& j jjfrZA\ JJSJ
U +\>y\ (jj** f^e &\j JJU? 4Jll jwo ^t> ^JL ^ U
(jJJjsi > j * ! ^ ^ 1 -SVS Majesty, the champion of the faith,
Sultan
Selim Khan, the shadows of whose clemency may God spread
over the crowns of. the heads of mankind, so long as the months
repeat themselves and the years renew themselves I
FINIS.
(
193
)
ADDENDUM.
I N p. 45, after line 5, as a further remark on the uses of
l e t t e r ^ , the following rule is not without its u s e ; viz.,—
In a few words of Persian origin only, the letter j , following a letter +, and itself followed by a long vowel-letter 1,
is suppressed and lost in the pronunciation.
*\j> kh'ah, jj^alji. kh'ahlsh.
Thus ^1^*. kh'an,
The word A&.IJ£. kh'aja1, of this
class, and its derivatives, JC^\^,
J ^ J A J J ^ . , & C , have been
corrupted in Turkish into khojd, khoj&gyan, khojaliq, &c.
In
Persian proper, a very few words beginning with j i . , without
a following \ , elide the j in like manner in pronouncing ; but
this is never observed in Turkish, unless it may be in the
rhyme-words of ancient poetry.
Thus the word J^.
(usually
read khush in Persian, khosh in Turkish) is made to rhyme
with ijy vesh, for instance; and in consequence must then be
read kh'&sh.
^
(usually khud, Turkish khid) is made to
rhyme with j j bed ; something after the manner of our poets,
who make wind rhyme with find, mind, &c.
This is what is
styled Aj±x*j\j (vwawl ma'dule), deflected j 9 in Persian,
(
195
)
INDEX.
A.
Accidence, p. 51.
Active participles, 100, 105.
„
„
aorist,100—102.
„
„
future, 100, 101.
„
„
past, 100, 101.
„
„
perfect, 100,101.
„
„
present,100,101.
Active verb, 92.
Addendum on 2j J*« J)J , 193.
Adjectival expressions, 72.
Adjectives, 61, 68—74.
„
Arabic, 61, 69.
„
Persian, 68, 70—72.
„
„ Compound, 70-2.
„
Syntax of, 168.
„
Turkish, 68, 69,73-4.
Adverbial expressions, 154.
Adverbs, Arabic, 73.
„
Syntax of, 182.
„
Turkish, 73.
Affirmative verb, 92.
Alphabet by forms, 2.
„
Numeral, 3.
„
Semitic, Greek, and Latin, 3.
Alphabet,Semitic,Greek,and Latin,
Synopsis of, 4.
Aorist active participle, 100—102.
Aorist passive participle, 103.
Aorist tense, 100.
„
„
conditional, 109.
„
„
indicative, 107.
„
„
necessitative, 108.
„
,,
optative, 109.
Apposition, 160.
Arabic active participles (nomen
agentis), 59, 61, 62.
Arabic adjectival expressions, 72.
„
adjectives, 61,69.
„
adverbs, 73.
„
broken plurals, 55—60.
„
chapters of derivation, 57,
62—64.
Arabic diminutives, 60, 67.
„
irregular plurals, 55—60.
„
noun of instrument and
receptacle, 60.
Arabic noun of kind or manner,
60.
„
„
place of abundance,
60.
196
INDEX.
Arabic nonn of time and place, 60.
„
„
unity, 60.
Arabic ordinals, 78.
„
passive participle (nomen
patientis), 59, 61, 62.
Arabic plurals, 55.
„
„
irregular, 55—60.
„
„
regular, 55.
Arabic quadriliteral roots, 65.
„
regular plurals, 55.
„
substantives, 53, 54.
„
triliteral roots, 56.
„
verbal nouns (nomen verbi),
58, 61-2.
Brevity, Conversational, 158.
Broken(irregular) plural, 19,55—60.
C.
Cardinal numbers, 74-7.
Categories of verbs, 99.
„
Complex, 99,^119.
Category, First Complex, 119,120.
„
Second „
119, 125.
„
Simple, of verbs, 99,119.
Third Complex, 119,129.
Causal gerund-like locution, 113.
Causative verb, 93.
„
„
Compound, 150.
Closed syllable, 27.
Combined (true Turkish) Conjugation, 133.
Complex Categories of Yerb, 99,
119.
Complex fractional numbers, 80.
Compound Persian Adjectives, 70.
Yerbs, 148.
„
Active, 149.
„
Intransitive, 149.
„
Passive, 149.
„
Transitive, 149.
Conditional mood, 100.
Conjugation, 99.
„
Combined (true Turkish), 133.
Conjugational root, 96.
Conjunctions, 156.
„
Syntax of, 185.
Consonants, 15.
,,
Hard, 47.
„
Movent, 31, 32 ter,
33 ter.
Consonants, Neutral, 48.
„
Quiescent, 27.
Soft, 47.
Conversational brevity, 158.
D.
Dates of documents, &c, 81.
Declination of Demoustratives, 88.
„
Interrogatives, 89.
„
Nouns, 51.
„
Personal Pronouns,
82.
Defective Yerbs, 98.
Demonstrative Pronouns, 88.
Derivation of Yerbs, 92.
Determinate Yerb, 93.
197
INDEX.
Digits, 81.
Diminutive, Arabic, 67.
„
Persian, 67.
„
Turkish, 66, 73.
Directing vowels, 27.
« Distributive numbers, 78.
Documents, Dates of, 81.
Dominant (letter or vowel), 48, 49.
Dubitative Verb, 141.
„
„
Compound, 150.
E.
Esere, 16 bis.
Etymology, 51.
Euphony, 15, 48—50.
Expressions, Adjectival, 72.
„
Adverbial, 154.
F.
Facile Verbs, 141*
„
„
Compound, 150.
First Complex Category of Verbs,
119, 120.
First Person Plural of Verbs, 116.
„
„
„
Pronoun, 82.
„
„ Singular of Verbs, 115.
„
„
Pronoun, 82.
fi
Formation of the Tenses, 106.
Fractional numbers, 79.
Future Active Participle, 100, 101.
Passive
„
, 103.
Tense, Imperative, 100.
„ Indicative, 108.
„ Past, 100.
Verbal Noun, 104.
G.
Gender, 51.
General Verbal Noun, 103.
Gerund, Fifth, 112.
„
First, 111.
„
Fourth, 112.
„
Second, 111.
Seventh, 112.
Sixth, 112.
r,
Third, 112.
Gerund-like locutions, 110, 111.
„
„
Causal, 110,
113.
Gerund-like locutions of proportion, 113.
Gerund-like locutions of time, 111,
114,115.
Gerund-like locution of time, Fifth,
115.
„ First, 114,
„
„
„ Fourth, 114.
„
„
„ Second,114.
„
>,
», Sixth, 115.
„ Third, 114.
Gerunds, 99, 110.
„
Syntax of, 181*
H.
Half, 79.
Hard consonants, 47.
„ vowels, 48.
Hemze, 10, 30—33.
„
omitted, 24.
„
Radical, 30, 31.
„
Servile, 30, 31.
198
INDEX.
I.
Identity of Semitic, Greek, and
Latin Alphabets, 3.
Imperative Mood, 100.
Imperfect Tense, 100.
„'
„
indicative, 107.
Impotential Verbs, 92.
„
„ Compound, 150
Indefinite numerals (pronouns), 80.
Indeterminate Verbs, 93.
Indicative Mood, 100.
Infinitive Mood, 100.
„
„
Syntax of, 179.
Iuterjections, 157.
Syntax of, 191.
Interrogation, 151.
Interrogative Pronouns, 89.
Verbs, 151.
Intransitive Verbs, 92.
„
„ Compound, 149.
J.
Junctional Letters, 9.
L.
1
Junctional, 9.
Names of the, 1, 10—14.
Non-Junctional, 9.
of prolongation, 17,
of the Alphabet, 1,
Eadical, 30, 31.
Eeduplicated, 29, 30, 32.
Servile, 28, 30, 31.
Locutions, Gerund-like, 110—115.
Letters,
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
M.
Medd, 24—26.
Months, Signs for, in dates, 81.
Moods, 100.
Mood, Conditional, 100.
„
Imperative,
„
„
Indicative,
„
,, Infinitive,
„
„
Necessitative, „
„
Optative,
„
N.
Names of Letters, 1,10—14.
Necessitative Mood, 100.
Negative Verbs, 92.
„
„
Compound, 150.
Neuter Verbs, 97.
Neutral consonants, 48.
„
vowels, 48.
Noun Adjective, 68.
„
„
Arabic, 68, 69.
„
„
Persian, 68.
„
„
„ Compound,70.
„
„
Syntax of, 168.
„
„
Turkish, 68.
„ Substantive, 51.
„
„
Syntax of, 161.
„ Verbal, 99, 103-5.
„
„
Syntax of, 179.
Numbers and persons of verbs, 115.
Numeral Alphabet, 3.
Numeral s, 74 — 82.
„
Cardinal, Arabic, 74-7.
„
,,
Persian, 74-7.
INDEX.
Numerals, Cardinal, Turkish, 74-6.
Distributive, 78.
Fractional, 79.
Indefinite, 80.
Interrogative, 76.
Ordinal, Arabic, 78.
„
Persian, 78.
„
Turkish, 77.
Turkish Peculiar, 8Q.
Syntax of, 170.
0.
Open syllables, 27.
Optative Mood, 100.
Orthographic signs, 15, 28—33.
P.
Participles, 100.
Active, 100—105.
„
Aorist, 100,102.
„
Future, 100,i01.
„
„
General, 100.
Past, 100, 101.
Perfect,100,101.
„
„
Present, 100-2.
Passive, 101, 103,105.
„
„
Aorist, 103.
„
„
Future, 103.
,„
Syntax of, 178.
„
Twenty-eight, 101.
Passive participles, 101, 103, 1Q5.
„
verb, 92.
„
„
Compound, 149.
„ verbal adjective, 104.
Past active participle, 100,101.
199
Past future tense, 100.
Past future indicative, 100, 108.
Past tense, 100.
„
„ indicative, 107.
Peculiar Turkish numerals, 80.
„
„
relatives, 91.
Perfect active participle, 100, 101.
Perfect tense, 100.
,,
indicative, 107.
,,
verbal noun, 103.
Permissive verbs, 93.
Persian adjectives, 68, 70-2.
„
,,
Compound, 70-2.
Persian diminutive, 67.
„
letters, 2, 13.
„
plurals of nouns, 54.
„
substantives, 53, 54.
Personal pronouns, 82.
Phonetic values of letters, 15,34—50.
Phonetic values of vowels,17,48-50
Pluperfect tense, 100.
„
„
indicative, 108.
Plural of nouns, Arabic irregular,
55—60.
Plural of nouns, Arabic regular, 55.
„
„ Persian, 54.
„
„ Turkish, 51.
Possessive pronouns, 83-8.
Potential verbs, 141-2.
„
„ Compound, 150.
Precision in writing, 158.
Prepositions, 156.
„
Syntax of, 184.
Present active participle, 100-2.
„
tense, 100.
„
„
indicative, 106.
200
INI
Present tense infinitive, 110.
„
verbal noun, 103.
Prolongation, Letters of, 17.
Pronoun, 82.
„
Demonstrative, 88.
„
Indefinite (numeral), 80.
„
Interrogative, 89.
„
Personal, 82.
„
Possessive, 83—88.
„
Relative, 90.
„
„ Peculiar Turkish, 91.
Q.
Q derived from <j, <p, 4, 8, 40.
Quiescence, sign of, 19, 28.
R.
Radical letters, 30, 31.
Reciprocal verbs, 93.
„
„
Compound, 150.
Reduplicated letters, 29, 30, 32.
Reflexive verb, 98.
Root of conjugation, 96.
„ tense, 106, 115.
S.
Second Complex Category of Verbs,
119,125.
Second person plural, 118.
„
„
singular, 116*
Servile letters, 28, 30, 31.
Sign of quiescence, 19, 28.
„
reduplication, 24—26.
Signs for the months in dates, 81.
Simple Category of Verbs, 99—119.
„
verbs, 93.
Soft consonants and vowels, 48.
Substantives, 51.
„
Syntax of, 161.
Syllabary, No. 1 and No. 2, 17.
Syllables, closed and open, 27.
Synopsis of Semitic, Greek and
Latin Alphabets, 4.
Syntax, 158.
» of adjectives, 168.
>) of adverbs, 182.
of conjunctions, 185.
99
*» of gerunds, 181.
of infinitive, 179.
it
of interjections, 191.
ti
of
numerals, 170.
»
of participles, 178.
99
of prepositions, 184.
ti
of
pronouns, 173.
»
of substantives, 161.
V
of verbal nouns, 179.
>J
of verbs, 174.
ti
T.
Table of verbal derivation, 94-5.
Tenses, 100,104,106—110.
„ Aorist conditional, 109.
„
„ indicative, 107.
„
„ necessitative, 108.
„
„ optative, 109.
„ Formation of the, 106.
„ Future imperative, 100.
j,
„
indicative, 108.
INDEX.
Tense, Imperfect, 100.
„
indicative, 107.
Past, 100.
„
indicative, 107Future, 100.
„ indicative, 108.
Perfect, 100.
„ indicative, 108.
Pluperfect, 100.
„ indicative, 108.
Present, 100.
„ indicative, 106,
„ infinitive, 110.
Teshdid, 32.
Third Complex Category of Verbs,
119,129.
Third person plural, 118.
„
„
singular, 106.
Transitive verb, 92.
Transliteration, 15,17, 34—47.
Turkish adjectives, 68, 69, 73-4.
„
adverbs, 73.
„
cardinal numbers, 74-6.
„
„
interrogative, 76.
„
conjugation (combined),
133.
Turkish ordinal numbers, 77.
„
plural of substantives, 51.
„
substantives, 51.
,,
true combined conjugation,
133.
U.
Ustun, 16.
Uturu, 16.
201
Values of letters, 15—50.
Verb, 92—153.
Active, 92.
Affirmative, 92.
Auxiliary, 149.
Causative, 93.
„
Compound, 150.
Combined conjugation of,
133.
„ Complex Categories of, 99—
133.
Verb, Complex Category of, First,
119, 120.
Verb, Complex Category of, Second,
119, 125.
Verb, Complex Category of, Third,
119, 129.
Verb, Compound, 148.
Conjugation of, 99.
Defective, 98.
Determinate, 93.
Dubitative, 141.
„
Compound, 150.
Facile, 141.
„
Compound, 150.
Impotential, 92.
„
Compound, 150.
Indeterminate, 93.
Interrogative, 151.
Intransitive, 92.
„
Compound, 149.
Negative, 92.
„
Compound, 150.
Neuter, 97.
202
INDEX.
Verb of Existence, Non-Existence,
Presence, or Absence, 147.
Verb, Passive, 92.
„
„
Compound, 149.
„ Permissive, 93.
„ Potential, 141-2.
„
„
Compound, 150.
„ Reciprocal, 93.
„
„
Compound, 150.
„ Reflexive, 98.
„ Simple, 93.
„ Simple Category of, 99-119.
„ Substantive, 144.
„ Syntax of, 174.
„ Transitive, 92.
„
„
Compound, 149.
Verbal adjective passive, 104.
„ derivation, 92.
Table of, 94.
„ Nouns, 99,103—105.
1 as a vowel, 17, 23, 26, 27.
„ numeral, <1.
\ „ consonant, 23.
T24.
1 25.
i£i 2.
+ 0
*c
0
^\) JVxfo*>\ 5 7 .
S^M! 1 6 .
Verbal Nouns, Future, 104.
„
„
General, 103.
Perfect, 103.
„
„
Present, 103.
„
„
Syntax of, 179.
Vowels, 15.
„
Directing, 27.
„
Hard, 48.
„
Letters, 15,16.
„
Long, 17, his.
Neutral, 48.
„, Points, 15, 16.
„
Short, 16, 17.
„
Soft, 48.
W.
Written digits, 81.
„
signs for months in dates,
81.
^C j Q 57.
^
* r
* 0
1
so
(3V J "*1 57.
^ b ]%A\ 57.
^C
j£Ji
57
v
• •
^G JL^i 57.
203
INDEX.
x o St o
^
J ^
57.
j C JlLJl 57.
A
ill* (pi. J,£l) 57.
J f 82.
x- •
O/O
^C j!L5l 57.
4 82.
^ 1
<a£ 164.
164.
O x
* Jail 2.
X
J Ox
x
|^j*a£« 1—ftJl 1 0 .
6^j-Uo u i l l 10.
^
J U ! 57.
y .
82.
^
88.
^C Jclif 57.
x-
^C j S ? 57.
x
O
OX
JOT 82.
(3b j ^ y 57.
j i 82, 88.
J5K 56.
Jjjl 88.
J \ 2 56.
-i j
J
^ / j l 16.
O
JO J
J > 19, 28.
l&L 167.
Wx
Jjl 82, 88.
"
0 0 J
Jjjl 88.
x*
t5JjJ 1 0 6 .
£j
Cl 20.
•
. ' '
.
* '
.x© i—9j>> (sing, x*
/OJ
4«oA^«...
9.
a ox
aJL»j . . .
9.
O „ ox
167.
•
X J
j j ^ l J ^ 20.
o
J o J
^>L&> 56.
^x
J* 146, 160, 175.
204
INDEX.
J^
56.
AJI^IIO,
c^o
y»,
^
c ^
jj^«i, ^
82-
j consonant, 2 3 ; vowel, 17,20.
o
% 147.
li, 29.
88,
Jj***» 8«7.
AJJJJW J\J in Addendum, 193.
s consonant, 15, 19 ; vowel,
19—23 ; numeral, 4.
fjj* 53.
yo,
j i
56, 57.
]%*
151—153.
jjJLJ , <U , j ) ^ AJ 9 0 .
^\U1 164.
j+t
161.
Vj* 164.
. >*>1 Ju*» O O .
o
AJ! ^ J *
iyJL 10,30—33.
57.
^C j i s 57.
^ consonant, 1 5 ; vowel, 1 7 ;
numeral, 4.
^ b j £ 57.
^ pronounced as \ when final,
10.
^,9,
original of our letter
y q, 4, 8, 4 0 .
-IS (whence
L5-^^)
76,
J^i 147.
1. 10.
.1 16.
L 20.
A> as a conj unction, 187- -190.
J^ 90.
7
*
^89.
161.
16
20.
JL 16.
1
°
J
°*
20.
L 28.
1. 24—26.
o Jx,.° "
7
C J O ^
jjo~+* (also
Jl 29.
L 30—33.
e 166.
London: 'Gilbert & Rivington, Limited, St, John's Sq., Clerkenwell Road.
A LIST OF
KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO.'S'
(LIMITED)
PUBLICATIONS.
7.90.
57 and $9, Ludgate Hill; and i, Paternoster Square,
London.
A LIST OF
KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO.'S
(LIMITED)
PUBLICATIONS.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
GENERAL L I T E R A T U R E .
.
2
THEOLOGY AND PHILOSOPHY.
31
ENGLISH AND FOREIGN PHILOSOPHICAL LIBRARY
.
42
SCIENCE
44
INTERNATIONAL SCIENTIFIC
SERIES .
.
.48
ORIENTAL, EGYPTIAN, ETC. .
52
PAGE
TRUBNER'S ORIENTAL SERIES
MILITARY W O R K S .
EDUCATIONAL
POETRY
.
.
.
.
NOVELS AND TALES
BOOKS FOR THE YOUNG
PERIODICALS .
68
72
73
80
84
87
GENERAL LITERATURE.
Actors, E m i n e n t .
Edited by WILLIAM ARCHER.
Crown 8vo,
2s. 6d. each.
I. W i l l i a m C h a r l e s M a c r e a d y . By WILLIAM ARCHER.
II. T h o m a s B e t t e r t o n . By. R. W. LOWE.
ADAMS, W. H. Davenport.—The W h i t e K i n g ; or, Charles the
First, and Men and Women, Life and Manners, etc., in the First
Half of the Seventeenth Century. 2 vols. Demy 8vo, 21s.
AGASSIZ, Louis.—An E s s a y o n C l a s s i f i c a t i o n . 8vo, 12s.
ALLIBONE,
S. A.—A C r i t i c a l D i c t i o n a r y of E n g l i s h L i t e r a t u r e a n d B r i t i s h a n d A m e r i c a n A u t h o r s . From the
Earliest Accounts to the latter half of the Nineteenth Century.
3 vols. Royal 8vo, £$ &s.
A m a t e u r M e c h a n i c ' s ' W o r k s h o p ( T h e ) . A Treatise containing
Plain and Concise Directions for the Manipulation of Wood and
Metals. By the Author of " T h e Lathe and its Uses." Sixth
Edition. Numerous Woodcuts. Demy 8vo, 6s.
A m e r i c a n A l m a n a c a n d T r e a s u r y of F a c t s , S t a t i s t i c a l ,
Financial, a n d Political.
Edited by AINSWORTH R.
SPOFFORD. Published Yearly. Crown 8vo, *js. 6d. each.
Regan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co.'s Publications.
3
AMOS, Professor Sheldon.—The H i s t o r y a n d P r i n c i p l e s of t h e
C i v i l L a w of R o m e . An aid to the Study of Scientific and
Comparative Jurisprudence. Demy 8vo, 16s.
ANDERSON,
William.—Practical
Mercantile Corresponde n c e . A Collection of Modern Letters of Business, with Notes,
Critical and Explanatory, and an Appendix. Thirtieth Edition.
Crown 8vo, 3^. 6d.
ANDERSON,
W., and TUGMAN, J. ^ . — M e r c a n t i l e C o r r e s p o n d e n c e . A Collection of Letters in Portuguese and English,
treating of the system of Business in the principal Cities of the
World. With Introduction and Notes. i2mo, 6s.
A n t i q u a r i a n M a g a z i n e a n d B i b l i o g r a p h e r (The).
EDWARD WALFORD, M.A.,
Complete in 12 vols. £3
ne
and
G.
W.
REDWAY,
Edited by
F.R.H.S.
tt.
ARISTOTLE.—The
N i c o m a c h e a n E t h i c s of A r i s t o t l e . Translated by F. H. PETERS, M.A. Third. Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s.
ARMITAGE,
Edward, R.A.—Lectures
o n P a i n t i n g : Delivered
to the Students of the Royal Academy. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
AUBERTIN,
J. J.—A F l i g h t t o M e x i c o " With 7 full-page Illustrations and a Railway Map of Mexico. Crown 8vo, *]s. 6d.
S i x M o n t h s i n G a p e C o l o n y a n d N a t a l . With Illustrations and Map. Crown 8vo, 6s.
A F i g h t w i t h D i s t a n c e s . Illustrations and Maps. Crown
8vo, *]s. 6d.
A u s t r a l i a , T h e T e a r - B o o k of, f o r 1 8 8 9 . Published under the
auspices of the Governments of the Australian Colonies. With
Maps. Demy 8vo, 10s. 6d.
AXON, W. E. A.—The M e c h a n i c ' s F r i e n d . A Collection of Receipts
and Practical Suggestions relating to Aquaria, Bronzing, Cements,
Drawing, Dyes, Electricity, Gilding, Glass-working, etc. Numerous Woodcuts. Edited by W. E. A. AXON. Crown 8vo,
3J. 6d.
B a c o n - S h a k e s p e a r e Q u e s t i o n A n s w e r e d ( T h e ) . ByC. STOPES.
Second Edition. Demy 8vo, 6s.
SAGEHOT,
Waller.—The E n g l i s h C o n s t i t u t i o n . Fifth Edition.
Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
L o m b a r d S t r e e t . A Description of the Money Market. Ninth
Edition. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
E s s a y s o n P a r l i a m e n t a r y R e f o r m . Crown 8vo, $s.
S o m e A r t i c l e s o n t h e D e p r e c i a t i o n of Silver, a n d T o p i c s
c o n n e c t e d "with it. Demy 8vo, 5-r,
A List of
4
BALL,
K— T h e D i a m o n d s , Coal, a n d Gold of I n d i a . Their
Mode of Occurrence and Distribution. Fcap. 8vo, 5^.
A M a n u a l of t h e G e o l o g y of I n d i a . Part III. Economic
Geology. Royal 8vo, ior.
BARNES,
William.—A G l o s s a r y of t h e D o r s e t D i a l e c t . With
a Grammar of its Word-Shapening and Wording. Demy 8vo,
sewed, 6s.
BARTLETT,
J. ^ . — D i c t i o n a r y of A m e r i c a n i s m s . A Glossary
of Words and Phrases colloquially used in the United States.
Fourth Edition. 8vo, 2is.
BARTON, G. B.—The H i s t o r y of N e w S o u t h "Wales. From
the Records. Vol. I. Illustrated with Maps, Portraits, and
Sketches. Demy 8vo, cloth, 15J. ; half-morocco, 20s.
BAUGHAN,
Rasa.—The I n f l u e n c e of t h e S t a r s , A Treatise on
Astrology, Chiromancy, and Physiognomy. Demy 8vo, $s.
BEARD,
Charles, LL.D.— M a r t i n L u t h e r a n d t h e R e f o r m a t i o n
i n G e r m a n y u n t i l t h e Close of t h e D i e t of W o r m s .
Demy 8vo, 16s.
B e c k e t , T h o m a s , M a r t y r - P a t r i o t . By R. A. THOMPSON, M.A.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
BENSON, A. C— W i l l i a m L a u d , s o m e t i m e A r c h b i s h o p of
C a n t e r b u r y . A Study. With Portrait. Crown 8vo, 6s.
BE VAN, Theodore F.y F.R.G.S. —Toil, T r a v e l , a n d D i s c o v e r y i n
B r i t i s h N e w G u i n e a . With Maps. Large crown 8vo, 7s. 6d.
BLACKET,
W. S.—Researches
i n t o t h e L o s t H i s t o r i e s of
A m e r i c a . Illustrated by numerous Engravings. 8vo, 10s. 6d.
BLADES,
W.—TYie B i o g r a p h y a n d T y p o g r a p h y of W i l l i a m
Gaxton, E n g l a n d ' s First Printer.
Demy 8vo, handmade paper, imitation old bevelled binding, £1 is. Cheap
Edition. Crown 8vo, $s.
BLEEK,
W. H. / . — R e y n a r d t h e F o x i n S o u t h A f r i c a ; or,
Hottentot'Fables and Tales. From Original Manuscripts. Post
8vo, 3s. 6d.
A Brief A c c o u n t of B u s h m a n F o l k - L o r e , and Other
Texts. Folio, 2s. 6d.
BOTTRELL,
William. —Stories a n d F o l k - L o r e of W e s t C o r n w a l l . With Illustrations by JOSEPH BLIGHT. Second and
Third Series. 8vo, 6s. each.
BRADLEY,
F. JT.—The P r i n c i p l e s of L o g i c .
BRADSJTAW.—'Dictiona.Ty
H e a l t h Resorts.
2s. 6d.
Demy 8vo, 16s.
of B a t h i n g - P l a c e s a n d C l i m a t i c
With Map. New Edition. Crown 8vo,
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & CoJs Publications.
5
BKADSHA W—continued,
A B C D i c t i o n a r y of t h e U n i t e d S t a t e s , C a n a d a , a n d
M e x i c o . Showing the most important Towns and Points of
Interest. With Maps, Routes, etc. New Edition, Revised.
Fcap. 8vo, 2s. 6d.
Bradshaw, H e n r y : Memoir.
By G. W. PROTHERO.
With
Portrait and Fac-simile. Demy 8vo, 16s.
BRENTANO,
Lujo.—On
t h e H i s t o r y a n d D e v e l o p m e n t of
Gilds, a n d t h e O r i g i n of T r a d e - U n i o n s . 8vo, is. 6d.
BRERETON,
C. S. H.—The L a s t D a y s of O l y m p u s . A Modern
Myth. Crown 8vo, is. 6d.
BRIDGETT,
Rev. T. £".—Blunders a n d F o r g e r i e s . Historical
Essays. Crown 8vo, 6s.
BROWN, Horatio F.—Life o n t h e L a g o o n s . With 2 Illustrations
and Map. Crown 8vo, 6s.
V e n e t i a n S t u d i e s . Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
BROWN,
Marie A.— T h e I c e l a n d i c D i s c o v e r e r s of A m e r i c a ,
or, Honour to whom Honour is due. With 8 Plates. Crown
8vo, *]s. 6d.
BROWNE, Hugh Junor.—The G r a n d R e a l i t y . Being Experiencer
in Spirit-Life of a Celebrated Dramatist, received through a
Trance Medium. Edited by H U G H JUNOR BROWNE. Large
post 8vo, 7«f. 6d.
B r o w n i n g S o c i e t y ' s Papers.—Demy 8vo, 1881-84. Part L, 10s.
Part II., 10s. Part III., 10s. Part IV., 10s. Part V., lor.
Part VII., IOJ. Part VIII., 10s. Part IX., 10s. Part X., iar.
BROWNING. — B i b l i o g r a p h y of R o b e r t B r o w n i n g from
1833-81. 12 J.
P o e m s of. I l l u s t r a t i o n s t o . Parts I. and I I . 410, icw. each.
BRUGMANN,
Karl.— E l e m e n t s of a C o m p a r a t i v e G r a m m a r
of t h e I n d o - G e r m a n i c L a n g u a g e s .
Translated by
JOSEPH WRIGHT.
Vol. I.
Introduction and Phonetics.
8vo,
18s. '
BRYANT,
Sophie, D.Sc—Celtic
I r e l a n d . With 3 Maps. Crown
8vo, 5J.
BURKE,
The Late Very Rev. T. N—His Life. By W. J. FITZPATRICK. 2 vols. With Portrait. Demy 8vo, 30J.
B u r m a . — T h e B r i t i s h B u r m a G a z e t t e e r . Compiled by Major
H. R. SPEARMAN, under the direction of the Government of
India. 2 vols. With 11 Photographs. 8vo, £2 10s.
BURTON, Lady.—The
I n n e r L i f e of S y r i a , P a l e s t i n e , a n d
t h e H o l y L a n d . Post 8vo, 6s.
A List of
6
BURY, Richard de.—Philobiblon.
Edited by E. C. THOMAS. Crown*
8vo, i Of. 6d.
CAMPBELL,
Wm.—~An A c c o u n t of M i s s i o n a r y S u c c e s s i n
t h e I s l a n d of F o r m o s a . Published in London in 1650,
and now reprinted with copious Appendices. 2 vols. With 6
Illustrations and Map of Formosa. Crown 8vo, ior.
T h e Gospel of St. M a t t h e w i n F o r m o s a n (Sinkang Dialect).
With Corresponding Versions in Dutch and English. Edited
from Gravius's Edition-of 1661. Fcap. 4to, 10s, 6d,
CATLIN, George.—O-Kee-Pa.
A Religious Ceremony; and other
Customs of the Mandans. With 13 Coloured Illustrations.
Small 4to, 14^.
T h e L i f t e d a n d S u b s i d e d R o c k s of A m e r i c a , with their
Influence on the Oceanic, Atmospheric, and Land Currents, and
the Distribution of Races. With 2 Maps. Crown 8vo, 6s. 6d,
S h u t y o u r M o u t h a n d S a v e y o u r L i f e . With 29 Illustrations. Eighth Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
CHAMBERS, John David.—-The T h e o l o g i c a l a n d P h i l o s o p h i c a l
W o r k s of H e r m e s T r i s m e g i s t u s , C h r i s t i a n N e o p l a t o n i s t . Translated from the Greek. Demy 8vo, js. 6d.
CHARNOCJC, Richard Stephen.—& G l o s s a r y of t h e E s s e x D i a l e c t .
Fcap., 3J. 6d,
N u c e s E t y m o l o g i c a e . Crown 8vo, 10s,
P r c e n o m i n a ; or, The Etymology of the Principal Christian
Names of Great Britain and Ireland. Crown 8vo, 6s,
C h a u c e r Society.—Subscription, two guineas per annum. List of
Publications on application.
CLAPPERTOJST, Jane Hume. —Scientific
Meliorism a n d the
E v o l u t i o n of H a p p i n e s s . Large crown 8vo, 8s. 6d.
CLARKE, Henry W.— T h e H i s t o r y of T i t h e s , f r o m A b r a h a m
t o Q u e e n V i c t o r i a . Crown 8vo, 5*.
CLA USE WITZ, General Carl von.—Oil ' W a r . Translated by Colonel
J. J. GRAHAM.
Fcap. 4to, IOJ. 6d,
CLEMENT, C. E., and HUTTON, Z . — A r t i s t s of t h e N i n e t e e n t h
C e n t u r y a n d t h e i r " W o r k s . Two Thousand and Fifty
Biographical Sketches. Third, Revised Edition. Crown 8vo, 15^.
CLODD, Edward, F.R.A.S.—The
C h i l d h o o d of t h e W o r l d : a
Simple Account of Man in Early Times. Eighth Edition.
Crown 8vo, 3s.
A Special Edition for Schools, is.
T h e C h i l d h o o d of R e l i g i o n s . Including a Simple Account oi
the Birth and Growth of Myths and Legends. Eighth Thousand.
Crown 8vo, $s.
A Special Edition for Schools, is. 6d.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triihner & Co.'s Publications.
7
CLODD, Edward,
F.R.A.S.—continued,
J e s u s of N a z a r e t h . With a brief sketch of Jewish History to the
Time of His Birth. Second Edition. Small crown 8vo, 6s.
A Special Edition for Schools. In 2 parts. Each is. 6d.
COLEBROOKE, Henry Thomas.—X^ife a n d M i s c e l l a n e o u s E s s a y s
of. The Biography by his Son, Sir T. E. COLEBROOKE, Bart.,
M.P. 3 vols. Demy 8vo, qzs.
COLLETTE, Charles Hastings.—"Tine Life, T i m e s , a n d W r i t i n g s
of T h o m a s C r a n m e r , L>,D., t h e F i r s t R e f o r m i n g
A r c h b i s h o p of C a n t e r b u r y . Demy 8vo, js. 6d.
P o p e J o a n . An Historical" Study. Translated from the Greek,
with Preface. i2mo, 2s. 6d.
*.
.
COLLINS, Mabel— T h r o u g h t h e G a t e s of G o l d . A Fragment of
Thought. Small 8vo, 4s. 6d.
CONWA Y, Moncure D.—Travels
i n S o u t h K e n s i n g t o n . Illustrated. 8vo, 12s.
COOK, Louisa . £ — G e o m e t r i c a l P s y c h o l o g y ; or, The Science of
Representation. An Abstract Jof the Theories and Diagrams of
B. W. Betts. 16 Plates, coloured and plain. Demy 8vo, 7s. 6d.
COTTON, H. J.S.— N e w I n d i a , or I n d i a i n T r a n s i t i o n .
Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 4J. 6d.; Cheap Edition, paper
covers, is.
COTTON, Louise.— P a l m i s t r y a n d its. P r a c t i c a l U s e s . 12 Plates.
Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
COX, Rev. Sir George W.\ M.A., Bart.—The
M y t h o l o g y of t h e
A r y a n N a t i o n s . New Edition. Demy 8vo, 16s.
T a l e s of A n c i e n t Greece. New Edition. Small crown 8vo, 6s.
A M a n u a l of M y t h o l o g y i n t h e f o r m of Q u e s t i o n a n d
A n s w e r . New Edition. Fcap. 8vo, 3J.
A n I n t r o d u c t i o n t o t h e j S c i e n c e of C o m p a r a t i v e M y t h o l o g y a n d F o l k - L o r e , " Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 7s. 6d.
COX, Rev. Sir G. W„ M.A., Bart., and JONES, Eustace Hinton.—
P o p u l a r R o m a n c e s of t h e M i d d l e A g e s . Third
Edition, in I vol. Crown 8vo, 6s.
CURR, Edward M.— T h e A u s t r a l i a n R a c e : I t s O r i g i n , L a n g u a g e s , C u s t o m s , P l a c e of L a n d i n g i n A u s t r a l i a ,
a n d t h e R o u t e s b y w h i c h i t s p r e a d itself o v e r t h a t
C o n t i n e n t . In 4 vols. With Map and Illustrations. £2 2s.
CUST, R. iV.—The S h r i n e s of L o u r d e s , Z a r a g o s s a , t h e H o l y
S t a i r s a t R o m e , t h e H o l y H o u s e of L o r e t t o a n d
N a z a r e t h , a n d St. A n n a t J e r u s a l e m . With 4 Autotypes,
Fcap. 8vo, 2s.
A List of
8
D a v i s , T h o m a s : T h e M e m o i r s of a n Irish Patriot, 1 8 4 0 - 4 6 .
By Sir CHARLES GAVAN DUFFY, K.C.M.G.
Demy 8vo, I2j.
DAVITTy
Michael.—Speech b e f o r e t h e S p e c i a l C o m m i s s i o n .
Crown 8vo, $s.
DAWSON',
Geo.— B i o g r a p h i c a l L e c t u r e s . Edited by GEORGF,
ST. CLAIR, F.G.S. Third Edition. Large crown 8vo, 7s. 6d.
S h a k e s p e a r e , a n d o t h e r L e c t u r e s . Edited by GEORGE ST,
CLAIR, F.G.S. Large crown 8vo, *]s. 6d.
DEAN, Teresa H.—How t o b e B e a u t i f u l . Nature Unmasked. A
Book for Every Woman. Fcap. 8vo, 2s. 6d.
DEATH,
/ . — T h e B e e r of t h e B i b l e : o n e of t h e h i t h e r t o
U n k n o w n L e a v e n s of E x o d u s . With a Visit to an Arab
Brewery, and Map of the Routes of the Exodus, etc. Crown
8vo, 6s.
VE JONCOURT,
Madame Marie.— W h o l e s o m e C o o k e r y .
Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, is. 6d,; paper covers, is.
Fifth
DENMAN+ Hon. G.—T h e S t o r y of t h e K i n g s of R o m e . In
Verse. i6mo, parchment, is. 6d.
DONOVAN, J.— M u s i c a n d A c t i o n ; or, The Elective Affinity between Rhythm and Pitch. Crown 8vo, 3.?. 6d.
DOWDEN,
Edward, LL.D.— S h a k s p e r e : a Critical Study of his
Mind and Art. Ninth Edition. Post 8vo, 12s.
Shakspere's Sonnets.
post 8vo, p. 6d.
With Introduction and Notes.
Large
S t u d i e s i n L i t e r a t u r e , 1789-1877. Fourth Edition. Large
post 8vo, 6s.
T r a n s c r i p t s a n d S t u d i e s . Large post 8vo, 12s.
DOWSETT, F. C.—S t r i k i n g K v e n t s i n I r i s h H i s t o r y . Crown
8vo, 2s. 6d.
D r e a m l a n d a n d G h o s t l a n d . An Original Collection of Tales and
Warnings from the Borderland of Substance and Shadow. 3 vols.
6s. per vol., sold separately.
D r u m m o n d , Thomas, Under Secretary in Ireland, 1835-40.
Life and Letters. By R. BARRY O'BRIEN. Demy 8vo, 14*.
DU PREL, Carl.—The P h i l o s o p h y of M y s t i c i s m . Translated
from the German by C. C. MASSEY. 2 vols. Demy 8vo, cloth, 2$s.
E a r l y E n g l i s h T e x t Society.—Subscription, one guinea per annum.
Extra Series. Subscriptions—Small paper, one guinea per
annum. List of Publications on application.
EDMUNDSON,
George.— M i l t o n a n d V o n d e l . A Curiosity of Literature. Crown 8vo, 6s.
Kegan Paid, Trench, Trubner & Cols Publications. 9.
EDWARDS,
Edivard.— M e m o i r s of L i b r a r i e s , together with a
Practical Handbook of Library Economy. Numerous Illustrations. 2 vols. Royal 8vo, £2 Ss. Large paper Edition. Imperial 8vo, £4 4s.
L i b r a r i e s a n d F o u n d e r s of L i b r a r i e s . 8vo, iSs. Large
paper Edition. Imperial 8vo, £1 10s.
F r e e T o w n L i b r a r i e s , their Formation, Management, and
History in Britain, France, Germany, and America. Together
with Brief Notices of Book Collectors, and of the respective
Places of Deposit of their Surviving Collections. 8vo, 21s.
K i g h t e e n t h C e n t u r y E s s a y s . Selected and Edited by AUSTIN
DOBSON. Cheap Edition. Cloth, is. 6d.
E l l i s , W i l l i a m (Founder of the Birkbeck Schools). Life, with Account
of his Writings.
By E. KELL BLYTH.
Demy 8vo, 14*.
E m e r s o n ' s ( R a l p h W a l d o ) L i f e . By OLIVER WENDELL HOLMES.
English Copyright Edition, With Portrait. Crown 8vo, 6s.
E m e r s o n ( R a l p h W a l d o ) , T a l k s w i t h . By CHARLES J. WOODBURY.
Crown 8vo, $s.
E n g l i s h D i a l e c t Society.—Subscription, 10s. 6d. per annum. List
of Publications on application.
FIELD, David Dudley.—Outlines
of a n I n t e r n a t i o n a l C o d e .
Second Edition. Royal 8vo, £2 2s.
F i v e o'clock T e a . Containing Receipts for Cakes, Savoury Sandwiches, etc. Eighth Thousand. Fcap. 8vo, cloth, IJ-. 6d.;
paper covers, u .
F o r b e s , B i s h o p . A Memoir. By the Rev. DONALD J. MACKAY.
With Portrait and Map. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
FOTHERINGHAM,
James.— S t u d i e s i n t h e P o e t r y of R o b e r t
B r o w n i n g . Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s.
FOX, Charles.—The P i l g r i m s . An Allegory of the Soul's Progress
from the Earthly to the Heavenly State. Crown Svo, $s.
FOX, J. A.—A K e y t o t h e I r i s h Q u e s t i o n .
Crown 8vo, js. 6d.
FRANKLYN,
Henry Bowles.—-The G r e a t B a t t l e s of 1 8 7 0 , a n d
B l o c k a d e of M e t z . With Large Map, Sketch Map, and
Frontispiece. 8vo, \$s.
FREEBOROUGH,
E., and RANKEN,
C. E.—Chess
Openings,
Ancient and Modern. Revised and Corrected up to the Present
Time from the best Authorities. Large post Svo, Js. 6d. ; interleaved, gs.
FREEMAN, E. A.—Lectures
t o A m e r i c a n A u d i e n c e s . I. The
English People in its Three Homes. II. Practical Bearings of
General European History. Post 8vo, Ss. 6d
10
A List of
FRITH, /.—Life of G i o r d a n o B r u n o , t h e N o l a n . Revised by
Prof. MORIZ CARRIERE. With Portrait. Post 8vo, 14?.
Froebel's Ethical Teaching.
Two Essays by M. J. LYSCHINSKA
and THERESE G. MONTEFIORE.
Fcap., 2s. 6d.
F r o m W o r l d t o C l o i s t e r ; or, My Novitiate. By BERNARD. Crown
8vo, 5^.
G a r f i e l d , T h e L i f e a n d PuhJUc S e r v i c e of J a m e s A . ,
Twentieth President of the United States. A Biographical
Sketch. By Captain F . H . MASON. With a Preface by BRET
HARTE. With Portrait. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
GASTER, M.—~Greeko~Slavonic
Literature a n d its Relation
t o t h e F o l k - L o r e of E u r o p e d u r i n g t h e M i d d l e A g e s .
Large post 8vo, *]s. 6d.
GEORGE, Henry.—TProgvess a n d P o v e r t y . An Inquiry into the
Causes of Industrial Depressions, and of Increase of Want with
Increase of Wealth. The Remedy. Fifth Library Edition.
Post 8vo, *js. 6d. Cabinet Edition. Crown 8v09 2s. 6d. Also a
Cheap Edition. Limp cloth, is. 6d.; paper covers, is.
P r o t e c t i o n , o r F r e e T r a d e . An Examination of the Tariff
Question, with especial regard to the Interests of Labour. SecondEdition. Crown 8vo, $s. Cheap Edition. Limp cloth, is. 6d. *
paper covers, is.
Social P r o b l e m s . Fourth Thousand. Crown 8vo, $s. Cheap
Edition. Limp cloth, is. 6d. ; paper covers, is.
GIBB, E. y. JF.—The H i s t o r y of t h e F o r t y V e z i r s ; or, The
Story of the Forty Morns and Eves. Translated from the
Turkish. Crown 8vo, 10s. 6d.
GILBERT,
Mrs.—Autobiography,
a n d other Memorials.
Edited by JOSIAH GILBERT.
Fifth Edition.
Crown 8vo,.
*]s. 6d.
G l o s s a r y of T e r m s a n d P h r a s e s . Edited by the Rev. H. PERCY
SMITH and others. Second and Cheaper Edition. Medium
8vo, 3J. 6d.
G o e t h e ' s F a u s t . Translated from the German by JOHN ANSTER, LL.D.
With an Introduction by BURDETT MASON. Illustrated by FRANK
M. GREGORY. Folio, £$ 3^.
GORDON, Major-General C. G.—His J o u r n a l s a t K a r t o u m .
Printed from the original MS. With Introduction and Notes by
A. EGMONT H A K E . Portrait, 2 Maps, and 30 Illustrations.
Two vols., demy 8vo, 21s. Also a Cheap Edition in 1 vol., 6s.
G o r d o n ' s ( G e n e r a l ) L a s t J o u r n a l . A Facsimile of the lasfc
Journal received in England from GENERAL GORDON. Reproduced by Photo-lithography. Imperial 4to, £3 3<r.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Tritbner & CoJs Publications,
n
GORDON, Major-General C. G.—continued, %
E v e n t s i n h i s L i f e . From the Day of his Birth to the Day of
his Death. By Sir H. W. GORDON. With Maps and Illustrations. Second Edition. Demy 8vo, ys. 6d.
GOSSE, Edmund.—Seventeenth
C e n t u r y S t u d i e s . A Contribution to the History of English Poetry. Demy 8vo, IOJ. 6d.
GOSSIP, G. H £ . — T h e C h e s s - P l a y e r ' s T e x t - B o o k . An Elementary Treatise on the Game of Chess. Illustrated by numerous
Diagrams for Beginners and Advanced Students. Medium
i6mo, 2s.
GOULD, Rev. S. Baring, M.A.—Germany,
Present and Past.
New and Cheaper Edition. Large crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
GO WER, Lord Ronald.—My R e m i n i s c e n c e s . MINIATURE EDITION,
printed on hand-made paper, limp parchment antique, I or. 6d.
B r i c - k - B r a c . Being some Photoprints illustrating art objects at
Gower Lodge, Windsor. With descriptions. Super royal 8vo,
15j. ; extra binding, 21s.
L a s t D a y s of M a r y A n t o i n e t t e . An Historical Sketch.
With Portrait and Facsimiles. Fcap. 4to, IOS. 6d.
N o t e s of a T o u r f r o m B r i n d i s i t o Y o k o h a m a , 1 8 8 3 1884.
Fcap. 8vo, 2s. 6d.
R u p e r t of t h e R h i n e ; A Biographical Sketch of the Life of
Prince Rupert. With 3 Portraits. Crown 8vo, buckram, 6s.
GRAHAM, William, M.A.—The C r e e d of S c i e n c e , Religious, Moral,
and Social. Second Edition, Revised. Crown 8vo, 6s.
T h e Social P r o b l e m , in its Kconomic, Moral, a n d
P o l i t i c a l A s p e c t s . Demy 8vo, 14s.
GUBERNATIS,
Angelo ^ . — Z o o l o g i c a l M y t h o l o g y ; or, The
Legends of Animals. 2 vols. 8vo, £1 8s.
GURNEY, Rev. Alfred.—"Wagner's
P a r s i f a l . A Study. Fcap. 8vo,
is. 6d.
HAD DON, Caroline.—The L a r g e r L i f e : S t u d i e s i n H i n t o n ' s
E t h i c s . Crown 8vo, 5J.
HAGGARD, H. Rider.—Getywayo
a n d h i s "White N e i g h b o u r s ;
or, Remarks on Recent Events in Zululand, Natal, and the
Transvaal. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s.
HALDEMAN,
S. S.—Pennsylvania
D u t c h : A Dialect of South
Germany with an Infusion of English. 8vo, 3s. 6d.
HALL, F. T.— T h e P e d i g r e e of t h e D e v i l . With .7 Autotype
Illustrations from Designs by the Author. Demy 8vo, *]s. 6d.
HALLOCK, Charlesv—The S p o r t s m a n ' s G a z e t t e e r a n d G e n e r a l
G u i d e . The Game Animals, Birds, and Fishes of North
America. Maps and Portrait. Crown 8vo, i$s.
A List of
12
H a m i l t o n * M e m o i r s of A r t h u r , B . A . , of Trinity College, Cambridge. Crown 8vo, 6s.
H a n d b o o k of H o m e R u l e , being Articles on the Irish Question by
Various Writers. Edited by JAMES BRYCE, M.P. Second
Edition. Crown 8vo, is. sewed, or u . 6d. cloth.
HARRIS, Emily Marion.—-The N a r r a t i v e of t h e H o l y B i b l e .
Crown 8vo, 5J-.
HARTMANN,
Franz.—Magic,
W h i t e a n d Black", or, The
Science of Finite and Infinite Life. Crown 8vo, 7^. 6d.
T h e Life of P a r a c e l s u s , a n d t h e S u b s t a n c e of h i s T e a c h i n g s . Post 8vo, IOJ. 6d.
L i f e a n d D o c t r i n e s of J a c o b B e h m e n . Post 8vo, ior. 6d.
HAWTHORNE,
Nathaniel.—~Works.
Complete in Twelve Volumes.
Large post 8vo, Js. 6d. each volume.
HE CHER, J. F. C— T h e E p i d e m i c s of t h e M i d d l e A g e s .
Translated by G. B. BABINGTON, M.D., F.R.S. Third Edition.
8vo, 9^. 6d.
HENDRIK,
Hans.—Memoirs
of H a n s H e n d r i k , t h e A r c t i c
T r a v e l l e r \ serving under Kane, Hayes, Hall, and Nares,
1853-76. Translated from the Eskimo Language by Dr. HENRY
RINK.
Crown 8vo, 3J. 6d.
HENDRIKS,
Dom Lawrence.—The L o n d o n C h a r t e r h o u s e : its
Monks and its Martyrs. Illustrated. Demy 8vo,- 14J.
HERZEN,
Alexander.—Du D e v e l o p p e m e n t d e s I d e e s R e v o l u t i o n n a i r e s e n R u s s i e . i2mo, 2s. 6d.
A separate list of A. Herzen's works in Russian may be had on
application.
HILL, Alfred.—The H i s t o r y of t h e R e f o r m M o v e m e n t in the
Dental Profession in Great Britain during the last twenty years.
Crown 8vo, 10s. 6d.
HILLEBRAND,
Karl.—France
a n d t h e F r e n c h in t h e Second
H a l f of t h e N i n e t e e n t h C e n t u r y . Translated from the
Third German Edition. Post 8vo, \os. 6d.
HINTON, y.— Life a n d L e t t e r s . With an Introduction by Sir W.
W. GULL, Bart., and Portrait engraved on Steel by C. H. Jeens.
Sixth Edition. Crown 8vo, 8s. 6d.
P h i l o s o p h y a n d R e l i g i o n . Selections from the Manuscripts of
the late James Hinton. Edited by CAROLINE HADDON. Second
Edition. Crown 8vo, 5^.
T h e L a w B r e a k e r , a n d T h e C o m i n g of t h e L a w .
Edited by MARGARET HINTON.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
T h e M y s t e r y of P a i n . New Edition. Fcap. 8vo, is.
HODGSON, y E.— A c a d e m y L e c t u r e s . Crown 8vo, p. 6d.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co!s Publications.
13
H o l b e i n Society.—Subscription, one guinea per annum. List of
Publications on application.
HOLMES-FORBES,
Avary W.—The S c i e n c e of B e a u t y . An
Analytical Inquiry into the Laws of Esthetics. Second Edition.
Post 8vo, 3,?. 6d.
HOLYOAKE,
G. J.— T h e H i s t o r y of G o - o p e r a t i o n i n E n g l a n d : Its Literature and its Advocates. 2 vols. Crown 8vo,
145-.
S e l f - H e l p b y t h e P e o p l e . Thirty-three Years of Co-operation
in Rochdale. Ninth Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
HOME, Mme. Dunglas.—T>. D . H o m e : H i s L i f e a n d Mission^
With Portrait. Demy 8vo, 12s. 6d.
Gift of D . D . H o m e . Demy 8vo, IOJ-.
H o m e r ' s I l i a d . Greek Text with Translation. By J. G. CORDERY,
C.S.I. Two vols. Demy 8vo, 14s. Cheap Edition,translation
only. One vol. Crown 8vo, 5^.
HO OLE, Henry.-—The S c i e n c e a n d A r t of T r a i n i n g . A Han&
book for Athletes. Demy 8vo, 3«r. 6d.
HOOPER, Mary.—Little
D i n n e r s : H o w to Serve t h e m w i t h
Elegance and Economy.
Twenty-first Edition. Crown
8vo, 2J. 6d.
C o o k e r y for I n v a l i d s , P e r s o n s of D e l i c a t e D i g e s t i o n ,
a n d C h i l d r e n . Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
E v e r y - d a y M e a l s . Being Economical and Wholesome Recipes
for Breakfast, Luncheon, and Supper. Seventh Edition. Crown
8vo, 2s. 6d.
HOPKINS,
Ellice.—'WoT^L
a m o n g s t W o r k i n g M e n . Sixth
Edition. Crown 8vo, 3J. 6d.
HORNADA Y, W. T.—Two Y e a r s i n a J u n g l e . With Illustrations,
Demy 8vo, 21s.
HO WELLS, W. D.—A L i t t l e Girl a m o n g t h e Old M a s t e r s .
With Introduction and Comment. 54 Plates. Oblong crown8vo, 10s.
HUMBOLDT,
Baron Wilhelm J^w.—The S p h e r e a n d D u t i e s of
Government.
Translated from the German by JOSEPH*
COULTHARD, J u n .
Post 8vO, $S.
HYNDMAN,
H. M.— T h e H i s t o r i c a l B a s i s of S o c i a l i s m i n
E n g l a n d . Large crown 8vo, Ss. 6d.
IM THUR.N, Everard F.—Among
t h e I n d i a n s of G u i a n a .
Being Sketches, chiefly anthropologic, from the Interior of British
Guiana.- With 53 Illustrations and a Map. Demy 8vo, iSs.
1NGLEBY, the late Clement ^ " . — E s s a y s , Edited by his Son. Crowifc
8vo, 7J. 6d.
A List of
€4
I r r e s p o n s i b i l i t y a n d i t s R e c o g n i t i o n . By a Graduate of Oxford.
Crown 8vo, 3>r. 6d.
JAGIELSKI,
V.—Modern M a s s a g e T r e a t m e n t i n C o m b i n a t i o n w i t h t h e E l e c t r i c B a t h . 8vo, is. 6d.
JAPP, Alexander H.—Days
w i t h I n d u s t r i a l s . Adventures and
Experiences among Curious Industries. With Illustrations.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
JENKINS,
E., and RAYMOND,
J.— T h e Architect's L e g a l
H a n d b o o k . Fourth Edition, Revised. Crown 8vo, 6s.
JENKINS,
E.—A M o d e r n
Crown 8vo, $s.
JENKINS,
Paladin.
Contemporary Manners.
Jabez.—Yest-Pocket
L e x i c o n . An English Dictionary
of all except familiar Words, including the principal Scientific
and Technical Terms, and Foreign Moneys, Weights, and
Measures. 64mo, is,
JENKINS, Rev. Canon R. C—Heraldry
: English and Foreign.
With a Dictionary of Heraldic Terms and 156 Illustrations.
Small crown 8vo, 3^. 6d.
J e s u s t h e C a r p e n t e r of N a z a r e t h .
*js. 6d.
By a Layman.
Crown 8vo,
JOHNSON, C. P.—Hints t o C o l l e c t o r s of O r i g i n a l E d i t i o n s of
t h e W o r k s of C h a r l e s D i c k e n s . Crown 8vo, vellum, 6s.
H i n t s t o C o l l e c t o r s of O r i g i n a l E d i t i o n s of t h e W o r k s
of W i l l i a m M a k e p e a c e T h a c k e r a y . Crown 8vo, vellum,
6s.
JOHNSTON, H. H., F.Z.S.—The K i l i m a - n j a r o E x p e d i t i o n .
A Record of Scientific Exploration in Eastern Equatorial Africa,
and a General Description of the Natural History, Languages,
and Commerce of the Kilima-njaro District. With 6 Maps, and
over 80 Illustrations by the Author. Demy 8vo, 21s.
T h e H i s t o r y of a S l a v e . With 47 Illustrations. Square 8vo, 6s.
J u v e n a l i s S a t i r s e . With a Literal English Prose Translation and
Notes. By J. D. LEWIS. Second Edition. 2 vols. 8vo, 12s.
-KARDEC, Allen—-The S p i r i t ' s B o o k . The Principles of Spiritist
Doctrine on the Immortality of the Soul, etc. Transmitted
through various mediums. Translated by ANNA BLACKWELL.
Crown 8vo, *]s. 6d.
T h e M e d i u m ' s B o o k ; or, Guide for Mediums and for Evocations. Translated by ANNA BLACKWELL. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
H e a v e n a n d H e l l ; or, The Divine Justice Vindicated in the
Plurality of Existences. Translated by ANNA BLACKWELL. ,
Crown 8vo, *js. 6d.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Cols' Publications. 15
KAUFMANN,
Rev. M, M.A.— S o c i a l i s m : its Nature, its Dangers,
and its Remedies considered. Crown 8vo, 7*. 6d.
U t o p i a s ; or, Schemes of Social Improvement, from Sir Thomas
More to Karl Marx. Crown 8vo, $s.
C h r i s t i a n S o c i a l i s m . Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d.
KERRISON,
Lady Caroline.—A C o m m o n p l a c e B o o k of t h e
Fifteenth Century.
Containing a Religious Play and
Poetry, ""Legal Forms, and Local Accounts. From the Original
MS. at Brome Hall, Suffolk. Edited by LUCY TOULMIN
SMITH. With 2 Facsimiles. Demy 8vo, *js. 6d.
KINGSFORD,
Anna, M.D.—Tlie
Perfect W a y in Diet, A
Treatise advocating a Return to the Natural and Ancient Food of
our Race. Third Edition. Small crown 8vo, 2s.
T h e S p i r i t u a l H e r m e n e u t i c s of A s t r o l o g y a n d H o l y
W r i t . Illustrated. 4to, parchment, ios. 6d.
KINGSFORD,
Anna, and MAITLAND,
Edward.—The
Virgin
of t h e "World of H e r m e s M e r c u r i u s T r i s m e g i s t u s .
Rendered into English. 4to, parchment, IOS. 6d.
T h e P e r f e c t W a y ; or, The Finding of Christ. Thfrd Edition,
Revised. Square i6mo, 'js. 6d.
KINGSFORD,
William.—History
of C a n a d a . 3 vols. 8vo, £2 $s.
KITTON, Fred. G.—John L e e c h , A r t i s t a n d H u m o u r i s t . A
Biographical Sketch. Demy i8mo, is.
KRAUS,
J.—-Carlsbad
a n d its N a t u r a l H e a l i n g Agents.
With Notes, Introductory, by the Rev. JOHN T. WALLERS.
Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s. 6d.
LAMB,
Charles.—-Beauty a n d t h e B e a s t ; or, A Rough Outside
with a Gentle Heart. A Poem. Fcap. 8vo, vellum, iar. 6d.
LANG, Andrew.—Lost
Leaders.
Crown 8vo, $s.
L a t h e (The) a n d i t s U s e s ; or, Instruction in the Art of Turning
Wood and Metal. Sixth Edition. Illustrated. 8vo, IOJ. 6d.
LEE,
Frederick Geo.—A M a n u a l of P o l i t i c s . In three Chapters.
With Footnotes and Appendices. Small crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
LEFEVRE,
Right Hon. G. Shaw.—Veel a n d O ' C o n n e l l . Demy
8vo, ios. 6d.
I n c i d e n t s of Coercion. A Journal of Visits to Ireland. Third
Edition. Crown 8vo, limp cloth, is. 6d.; paper covers, u .
I r i s h M e m b e r s a n d E n g l i s h Gaolers. Crown 8vo, limp
cloth, is. 6d.; paper covers, is.
C o m b i n a t i o n a n d C o e r c i o n i n I r e l a n d . A Sequel to
"Incidents of Coercion." Crown 8vo, cloth, is. 6d.; paper
covers, is.
A List of
i6
LELAND,
Charles G.—The B r e i t m a n n B a l l a d s . The only authorized Edition. Complete in I vol., including Nineteen
Ballads, illustrating his Travels in Europe (never before printed).
Crown 8vo, 6s.
G a u d e a m u s , Humorous Poems translated from the German of
JOSEPH VICTOR SCHEFFEL and others.
i6mo, $s. 6d.
T h e E n g l i s h Gipsies a n d t h e i r L a n g u a g e . Second Edition.
Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
F u - S a n g ; or, The Discovery of America by Chinese Buddhist
Priests in the Fifth Century. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
P i d g i n - E n g l i s h S i n g - S o n g ; or, Songs and Stories in the
China-English Dialect. With a Vocabulary. Second Edition.
Crown 8vo, $s.
T h e G y p s i e s . Crown 8vo, ior. 6d.
L i g h t o n t h e P a t h . For the Personal Use of those who are Ignorant
of the Eastern Wisdom. Written down by M. C. Fcap. 8vo,
is. 6d.
LOCHER* Carl.—An E x p l a n a t i o n of O r g a n S t o p s , with Hints
for Effective Combinations. Demy 8vo, 5^.
LONGFELLOW,
H. Wadsworth.-lA.te.
By his Brother, SAMUEL
LONGFELLOW. With Portraits and Illustrations. 3 vols. Demy
8vo, 42J.
LONSDALE, Margaret.—Sister D o r a : a Biography. With Portrait.
Thirtieth Edition. Small crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
G e o r g e E l i o t : T h o u g h t s u p o n h e r Life, h e r B o o k s , a n d
H e r s e l f . Second Edition. Small crown 8vo, is. 6d.
L o t o s S e r i e s (The).
Pot 8vo, bound in two styles: (1) cloth, gilt
back and edges; (2) half-parchment, cloth sides, gilt top, uncut,
3^. 6d. each.
T h e O r i g i n a l T r a v e l s a n d S u r p r i s i n g A d v e n t u r e s of
B a r o n M u n c h a u s e n . Illustrated by ALFRED CROWQUILL.
T h e B r e i t m a n n B a l l a d s . By CHARLES G. LELAND. Author's
Copyright Edition, with a New Preface and Additional Poems.
E s s a y s o n M e n a n d B o o k s Selected from t h e E a r l i e r
W r i t i n g s of L o r d M a c a u l a y . Vol. I. Introductory—
Lord Clive—Milton—Earl Chatham—Lord Byron. With Critical Introduction and Notes by ALEXANDER H . JAPP, L L . D .
With Portraits.
T h e L i g h t of A s i a ; or, The Great Renunciation. Being the
Life and Teaching of Gautama, Prince of India and Founder
of Buddhism. Told in Verse by an Indian Buddhist. By Sir
EDWIN ARNOLD, K.C.I.E., C.S.I. With Illustrations and a
Portrait of the Author.
Kegan Paul, Trench^ Triibner & Cols Publications.
17
L o t o s Series (The)—continued.
T h e M a r v e l l o u s a n d R a r e C o n c e i t s of M a s t e r T y l l
O w l g l a s s . Newly Collected, Chronicled, and set forth in an
English Tongue. By KENNETH H. R. MACKENZIE. Adorned
with many most Diverting and Cunning Devices by ALFRED
CROWQ/JILL.
A L o v e r ' s L i t a n i e s , and other Poems.
With Portrait of the Author.
By ERIC MACKAY.
The Large Paper Edition of,these Volumes will be limited to
101 numbered copies for sale in England, price \2s. 6d. each, net.
L o w d e r , C h a r l e s i A B i o g r a p h y . By the Author of " St. Teresa."
Twelfth Edition. With Portrait. Crown 8vo, 3*. 6d.
LO WELL, James Russell—The B i g l o w P a p e r s . Edited by THOMAS
HUGHES, Q.C. First and Second Series in 1 vol. Fcap., 2s.6d.
LOWSLEY, Major B.—A G l o s s a r y of B e r k s h i r e W o r d s a n d
P h r a s e s . Crown 8vo, half-calf, gilt edges, interleaved, 12s. 6d.
LUCKES, Eva C. ^ . — L e c t u r e s o n G e n e r a l N u r s i n g , delivered to
the Probationers of the London Hospital Training School for
Nurses. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, is. 6d.
LUDEWLG, Hermann E.—The L i t e r a t u r e of A m e r i c a n A b o r i g i n a l L a n g u a g e s . Edited by NICOLAS TRUBNER. 8vo,
1 or. 6d.
LUKLN, J.—Amongst
M a c h i n e s . A Description of Various Mechanical Appliances used in the Manufacture of Wood, Metal,
etc.
A Book for Boys. Second Edition. 64 Engravings.
Crown 8vo, y. 6d.
T h e Y o u n g M e c h a n i c . Containing Directions for the Use of
all Kinds of Tools, and for the Construction of Steam-Engines,
etc. A Book for Boys. Second Edition. With 70 Engravings.
Crown 8vo, $s. 6d.
T h e B o y E n g i n e e r s : What they Did, and How they Did it.
A Book for Boys. 30 Engravings. Imperial i6mo, 3^. 6d.
LUMLEY, E.—The A r t of J u d g i n g t h e C h a r a c t e r of I n d i v i d u a l s f r o m t h e i r H a n d w r i t i n g a n d S t y l e . With 35
Plates. Square i6mo, $s.
LYTTON, Edward Bulwer, Lord.—Life, L e t t e r s a n d L i t e r a r y
R e m a i n s . By his Son, the EARL OF LYTTON. With Portraits,
Illustrations and Facsimiles. Demy 8vo. Vols. I. and II., 32^.
MACDONALD,
W. A.— H u m a n i t i s m : The Scientific Solution of
the Social Problem. Large post 8vo, p. 6d.
C
18
A List of
MACHIAVELLI,
NiccoVo.
D i s c o u r s e s o n t h e F i r s t D e c a d e of T i t u s L i v i u s , Translated from the Italian by NINIAN H I L L THOMSON, M.A. Large
crown 8vo, 12s.
T h e P r i n c e . Translated from the Italian by N. H. T. Small
crown 8vo, printed on hand-made paper, bevelled boards, 6s.
MAIDEN, J. H.—The U s e f u l N a t i v e P l a n t s of A u s t r a l i a (ineluding Tasmania). Demy 8vo, 12s. 6d.
M a i n t e n o n , M a d a m e d e . By EMILY BOWLES. With Portrait.
Large crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
MARCHANT,
W. T.—lu P r a i s e of A l e . Songs, Ballads, Epigrams,
and Anecdotes. Crown 8vo, IOJ. 6d.
MARKHAM, Capt. Albert Hastings, R.N.— T h e G r e a t F r o z e n S e a :
A Personal Narrative of the Voyage of the Alert during the Arctic
Expedition of 1875-6. With 6 full-page Illustrations, 2 Maps,
and 27 Woodcuts. Sixth and Cheaper Edition. Crown 8vo, or.
M a r r i a g e a n d D i v o r c e . Including Religious, Practical, and Political
Aspects of the Question. By A P RICHARD. Crown 8vo, 5^.
MARTIN,
G. A.— T h e F a m i l y H o r s e : Its Stabling, Care, and
Feeding. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
MA THERS, S. L. M.—Tlcie K e y of S o l o m o n t h e K i n g . Translated
from Ancient MSS. in the British Museum. With Plates.
Crown 4to, 2$s.
T h e K a b b a l a h U n v e i l e d . Containing the Three Books of the
Zohar. Translated into English. With Plates. Post 8vo,
10s. 6d.
T h e T a r o t : its Occult Signification, Use in F o r t u n e T e l l i n g , a n d M e t h o d of P l a y . 321110, is. 6d.; with pack
of yS Tarot Cards, $s.
MAUDS LEY, H., M.D.—Body
a n d W i l l . Being an Essay concerning Will, in its Metaphysical, Physiological, and Pathological
Aspects. 8vo, 12s.
N a t u r a l C a u s e s a n d S u p e r n a t u r a l S e e m i n g s . Second
Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s.
M e c h a n i c , T h e Y o u n g . A Book for Boys. Containing Directions
for the Use of all Kinds of Tools, and for the Construction of
Steam-Engines and Mechanical Models. By the Rev. J. LUKIN.
Sixth Edition. With 70 Engravings. Crown 8vo, 3«r. 6d.
M e c h a n i c ' s W o r k s h o p , A m a t e u r . Plain and Concise Directions
for the Manipulation of Wood and Metals, By the Author of
" The Lathe and its Uses." Sixth Edition. Illustrated. Demy
8vo, 6s.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co.'s Publications. 19
Mendelssohn's Letters to I g n a z a n d Charlotte Moscheles.
Translated by FELIX MOSCHELLES. Numerous Illustrations and
Facsimiles. 8vo, 12s.
METCALFE,
Frederick.—-The E n g l i s h m a n a n d t h e S c a n d i n a v i a n . Post 8vo, I8J.
MINTON, Rev, Francis.—Capital
a n d W a g e s . 8vo, 15*.
T h e W e l f a r e of t h e M i l l i o n s . Crown 8vo, limp cloth, is. 6d.;
paper covers, is.
M i t c h e l , J o h n , L i f e . By WILLIAM DILLON. 2 vols. With Portrait.
8vo, 21 J.
MITCHELL, Lucy M.—A H i s t o r y of A n c i e n t S c u l p t u r e . With
numerous Illustrations, including 6 Plates in Phototype. Superroyal 8vo, 42s.
M o h l , J u l i u s a n d M a r y , L e t t e r s a n d R e c o l l e c t i o n s of. By
M. C. M. SIMPSON. With Portraits and 2 Illustrations. Demy
8vo, 15 s.
MOODIE, D. C. i?.—The H i s t o r y of t h e B a t t l e s a n d A d v e n t u r e s of t h e B r i t i s h , t h e B o e r s , t h e Z u l u s , e t c . , i n
S o u t h e r n A f r i c a , from the Time of Pharaoh Necho to 1880.
With Illustrations and Coloured Maps. 2 vols. Crown 8vo, 36$.
MORFIT, Campbell.—A P r a c t i c a l T r e a t i s e o n t h e M a n u f a c t u r e of S o a p s . With Illustrations. Demy 8vo, £2 12s. 6d.
A P r a c t i c a l T r e a t i s e o n P u r e F e r t i l i z e r s , and the Chemical
Conversion of Rock Guanos, etc., into various valuable Products,
With 28 Plates. 8vo, £4 4s.
MOORE, Aubrey L.—Science a t i d t h e F a i t h : Essays on Apologetic
Subjects. Crown 8vo, 6s.
MORIS ON, J. Cotter.—The S e r v i c e of M a n : an Essay towards the
Religion of the Future. Crown 8vo, $s.
MORRIS, Charles.—Aryan S u n - M y t h s t h e O r i g i n of R e l i g i o n s .
With an Introduction by CHARLES MORRIS. Crown 8vo, 6s.
MORRIS, Gouverneur, U.S. Minister to France.—Diary a n d L e t t e r s .
2 vols. Demy 8vo, 30^.
MOSENTHAL,
J. de, and HAR TING, James £ . — O s t r i c h e s a n d
O s t r i c h F a r m i n g . Second Edition. With 8 full-page Illustrations and 20 Woodcuts. Royal 8vo, 10s. 6d.
M o t l e y , J o h n L o t h r o p . A Memoir. By OLIVER WENDELL HOLMES.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
MULHALL, M. G. and E. T.— H a n d b o o k of t h e R i v e r P l a t e ,
comprising the Argentine Republic, Uruguay, and Paraguay.
With Six Maps. Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, »js. 6d.
M u n r o , M a j o r - G e n . S i r T h o m a s , A Memoir. By Sir A. J.
ARBUTHNOT.
Crown 8vo, 3^. 6d.
20
A List of
N a t u r a l H i s t o r y . " Riverside " Edition. Edited by J. S. KINGSLEY.
6 vols. 2200 Illustrations. 4to, £6 6s.
NEVILL, J. H. N.—The B i o l o g y of D a i l y L i f e . Post 8vo, y.6d.
NEWMAN,
Cardinal,—Characteristics
f r o m t h e W r i t i n g s of.
Being Selections from his various Works. Arranged with the
Author's personal Approval. Eighth Edition. With Portrait.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
%* A Portrait of Cardinal Newman, mounted for framing, can
be had, 2s. 6d.
NEWMAN, Francis William.—Essays
o n D i e t . Small crown 8vo,
cloth limp, is.
M i s c e l l a n i e s . Vol. I I . , III., and IV. Essays, Tracts, and
Addresses, Moral and Religious. Demy 8vo. Vols. II. and III.,
12s. Vol. IV., IOS. 6d.
R e m i n i s c e n c e s of T w o E x i l e s a n d T w o W a r s . Crown
8vo, y. 6d.
P h a s e s of F a i t h ; or, Passages from the History of my Creed.
Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
T h e S o u l : Her Sorrows and her Aspirations. Tenth Edition.
Post 8vo, 3«r. 6d.
H e b r e w T h e i s m . Royal 8vo, 4s. 6d.
A n g l o - S a x o n A b o l i t i o n of N e g r o S l a v e r y . Demy 8vo, 5*.
N e w S o u t h W a l e s , J o u r n a l a n d P r o c e e d i n g s of t h e R o y a l
S o c i e t y of. Published annually. Price 10s. 6d.
N e w S o u t h W a l e s , P u b l i c a t i o n s of t h e G o v e r n m e n t of.
List on application.
N e w Zealand Institute Publications:—
I. T r a n s a c t i o n s a n d P r o c e e d i n g s of the New Zealand Institute. Vols. I. to XX., 1868 to 1887. Demy 8vo, stitched,
£1 is. each.
II. A n I n d e x t o t h e T r a n s a c t i o n s a n d P r o c e e d i n g s of
the New Zealand Institute. Edited by JAMES HECTOR, M.D.,
F.R.S. Vols. I. to VIII. Demy 8vo, 2s. 6d.
N e w Z e a l a n d : Geological S u r v e y . List of Publications on application.
OATES, Frank, F.R.G.S.—Matabele
L a n d a n d the Victoria
F a l l s . A Naturalist's Wanderings in the Interior of South
Africa. Edited by C. G. OATES, B.A. With numerous Illustrations and 4 Maps. Demy 8vo, 21s.
O'BRIEN^ R. Barry. —Irish W r o n g s a n d E n g l i s h R e m e d i e s ,
with other Essays. Crown 8vo, 5s.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 21
O'BRIEN, R. Barry.—continued.
T h e H o m e R u l e r ' s M a n u a l . Crown 8vo, cloth, is. 6d.;
paper covers, is.
OLCOTT, Henry S.—Theosophy,
Religion, a n d Occult Science.
With Glossary of Eastern Words. Crown 8vo, *js. 6d.
P o s t h u m o u s H u m a n i t y . A Study of Phantoms. By ADOLPHE
DASSIER.
Translated and Annotated by H E N R Y S. OLCOTT.
Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
Our P u b l i c Schools—Eton, H a r r o w , 'Winchester, R u g b y ,
'Westminster, Marlborough, T h e Charterhouse,
Crown 8vo3 6s.
OWEN, Robert Dale.—Footfalls
o n t h e B o u n d a r y of A n o t h e r
"World. With Narrative Illustrations. Post 8vo, 7*. 6d.
The Debatable Land between this World and the Next.
With Illustrative Narrations. Second Edition. Crown 8vo,
js. 6d.
T h r e a d i n g m y W a y . Twenty-Seven Years; of Autobiography.
Crown 8vo, *]s. 6d.
OXLEY,
William.—Modern
Messiahs a n d W o n d e r - W o r k e r s .
A History of the Various Messianic Claimants to Special Divine
Prerogatives. Post 8vo, $s.
P a r c h m e n t L i b r a r y . Choicely Printed on hand-made paper, limp
parchment antique or cloth, 6s. ; vellum, *]s. 6d. each volume.
S e l e c t e d P o e m s of M a t t h e w P r i o r . With an Introduction
and Notes by AUSTIN DOBSON.
Sartor Resartus.
By THOMAS CARLYLE.
T h e P o e t i c a l W o r k s of J o h n M i l t o n . 2 vols.
C h a u c e r ' s C a n t e r b u r y T a l e s . Edited by A. W. POLLARD,
2 vols.
L e t t e r s a n d J o u r n a l s of J o n a t h a n S w i f t .
Selected and
edited, with a Commentary and Notes, by STANLEY LANE-POOLE.
D e Q u i n c e y ' s C o n f e s s i o n s of a n E n g l i s h O p i u m E a t e r .
Reprinted from the First Edition. Edited by RICHARD GARNETT.
T h e Gospel according to M a t t h e w , M a r k , and L u k e .
S e l e c t i o n s f r o m t h e P r o s e W r i t i n g s of J o n a t h a n S w i f t .
With a Preface and Notes by STANLEY LANE-POOLE, and
Portrait.
English Sacred Lyrics.
S i r J o s h u a R e y n o l d s ' s D i s c o u r s e s . Edited by EDMUND
GOSSE.
A List of
22
P a r c h m e n t Library—continued.
Selections from Milton's Prose W r i t i n g s .
Edited by
ERNEST MYERS.
T h e B o o k of P s a l m s .
Translated by the Rev. Canon T. K.
CHEYNE, M.A., D.D.
T h e V i c a r of W a k e f i e l d .
With Preface and Notes by AUSTIN
DOBSON.
E n g l i s h C o m i c D r a m a t i s t s . Edited by OSWALD CRAWFURD.
English Lyrics.
T h e S o n n e t s of J o h n M i l t o n . Edited by MARK PATTISON,
With Portrait after Vertue.
F r e n c h L y r i c s . Selected and Annotated by GEORGE SAINTSBURY. With a Miniature Frontispiece designed and etched by
H. G. Glindoni.
F a b l e s b y M r . J o h n G a y . With Memoir by AUSTIN DOBSON,
and an Etched Portrait from an unfinished Oil Sketch by Sir
Godfrey Kneller.
Select L e t t e r s of P e r c y B y s s h e S h e l l e y . Edited, with an
Introduction, by RICHARD GARNETT.
T h e C h r i s t i a n Y e a r . Thoughts in Verse for the Sundays and
Holy Days throughout the Year. With Miniature Portrait of the
Rev. J. Keble, after a Drawing by G. Richmond, R.A.
S h a k s p e r e ' s W o r k s . Complete in Twelve Volumes.
E i g h t e e n t h C e n t u r y E s s a y s . Selected and Edited by AUSTIN
DOBSON. With a Miniature Frontispiece by R. Caldecott.
Q. H o r a t i F l a c c i O p e r a . Edited by F . A. CORNISH, Assistant
Master at Eton. With a Frontispiece after a design by L. Alma
Tadema, etched by Leopold Lowenstam.
E d g a r A l l a n P o e ' s P o e m s . With an Essay on his Poetry by
ANDREW LANG, and a Frontispiece by Linley Sambourne,
S h a k s p e r e ' s S o n n e t s . Edited by EDWARD DOWDEN. With a
Frontispiece etched by Leopold Lowenstam, after the Death
Mask.
E n g l i s h O d e s . Selected by EDMUND GOSSE. With Frontispiece on India paper by Hamo Thornycroft, A.R.A.
Of t h e I m i t a t i o n of C h r i s t .
By THOMAS A KEMPIS.
A
revised Translation. With Frontispiece on India paper, from a
Design by W. B. Richmond.
P o e m s : Selected from PERCY BYSSHE SHELLEY. Dedicated to
Lady Shelley. With a Preface by RICHARD GARNETT and a
Miniature Frontispiece.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 23
PARSLOE,
Joseph.—OMT R a i l w a y s .
Sketches, Historical and
Descriptive. With Practical Information as to Fares and Rates,
etc., and a Chapter on Railway Reform. Crown 8vo, 6s.
PATOAT, A. A.—A H i s t o r y of t h e E g y p t i a n R e v o l u t i o n , from
the Period of the Mamelukes to the Death of Mohammed Ali.
Second Edition. 2 vols. Demy 8vo, *js. 6d.
PAUL/, Reinhold.—S i m o n d e M o n t f o r t , E a r l of L e i c e s t e r , the
Creator of the House of Commons. Crown 8vo, 6s.
P a u l of T a r s u s . By the Author of "Rabbi Jeshua." Crown 8vo,
4f. 6d.
PEMBERTON,
T. Edgar.—Charles
Dickens a n d t h e Stage. A
Record of his Connection with the Drama. Crown 8vo, 6s.
PEZZI, Domenico.—Aryan P h i l o l o g y , according to the most recent
researches (Glottologia Aria Recentissima). Translated by E. S.
ROBERTS.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
PFEIFFER,
Emily.—Women
a n d "Work.
An Essay on the
Relation to Health and Physical Development of the Higher
Education of Girls. Crown 8vo, 6s.
P h a n t a s m s of t h e L i v i n g .
By EDMUND GURNEY, FREDERIC W.
H . MYERS, M.A., and FRANK PODMORE, M.A. 2 vols. Demy
8vo, 21 s.
P h i l o l o g i c a l S o c i e t y , T r a n s a c t i o n s of. Published irregularly.
List of Publications on application.
PICCIOTTO, James.— S k e t c h e s of A n g l o - J e w i s h H i s t o r y . Demy
8VO, 12S.
Pierce G a m b i t :
Chess P a p e r s
a n d Problems.
PIERCE, M.A., and W, TIMBRELL PIERCE.
By JAMES
Crown 8vo, 6s. 6d.
PIESSE,
Charles H.—Chemistry
i n t h e B r e w i n g - R o o m . Being
the substance of a Course of Lessons to Practical Brewers.
Fcap., 5*.
PLINY.—-The
L e t t e r s of P l i n y t h e Y o u n g e r . Translated by
J. D. LEWIS.
Post 8vo, $s.
PLUMPTRE,
Charles John.—King's
College L e c t u r e s o n E l o c u t i o n . Fourth Edition. Post 8vo, 15^.
POOLE, W. F.—An I n d e x t o P e r i o d i c a l L i t e r a t u r e .
Third
Edition. Royal 8vo- £ 3 13^. 6d.
POOLE, W. F, and FLETCHER, W. / . — I n d e x t o P e r i o d i c a l
L i t e r a t u r e . First Supplement. 1882 to 1887. Royal 8vo,
£1 16s.
P r a c t i c a l Guides.—France, Belgium, Holland, and the Rhine, u .
Italian Lakes. I J . Wintering Places of the South. 2s.
Switzerland, Savoy, and North Italy. 2s. 6d. General Continental Guide. $s. Geneva, is. Paris, is. Bernese Oberland. is. Italy. 4^.
A List of
24
P s y c h i c a l R e s e a r c h , P r o c e e d i n g s of t h e S o c i e t y for. Published
irregularly. Post 8vo. Vol. I. to III. IOJ. each. Vol. IV. 8s,
Vol. V. IOS.
PURITZ, Lttdwig.—Code-Book
of G y m n a s t i c E x e r c i s e s . Translated by O. KNOFE and J. W. MACQUEEN.
32mo, is. 6d.
RAPSON, Edivard J.— T h e S t r u g g l e b e t w e e n E n g l a n d a n d
F r a n c e f o r S u p r e m a c y i n I n d i a . Crown 8vc, 4*. 6d.
RAVENSTEIN,
E. G., and HULLEY, John.—The G y m n a s i u m
a n d i t s F i t t i n g s . With 14 Plates of Illustrations. 8vo, 2s. 6d.
READE, Winwood.—The M a r t y r d o m of M a n . Thirteenth Edition.
8vo, Js. 6d.
REND ELL,
J. M.—C o n c i s e H a n d b o o k of t h e I s l a n d of
M a d e i r a . With Plan of Funchal and Map of the Island. Second
Edition. Fcap. 8vo, is. 6d.
RHYS, y<?/^.—Lectures o n W e l s h P h i l o l o g y . Second Edition.
Crown 8vo, i$s.
RIDE'AL, C. , F . — W e l l e r i s m s , f r o m " P i c k w i c k " a n d " M a s t e r
H u m p h r e y ' s C l o c k . " i8mo, 2s.
RIPPER,
William.—Machine
D r a w i n g a n d D e s i g n , for Engineering Students and Practical Engineers. Illustrated by 55
Plates and numerous Explanatory Notes. Royal 4to, 25J.
ROBINSON, A. Mary F.—The F o r t u n a t e L o v e r s . Twenty-seven
Novels of the Queen of Navarre. Large crown 8vo, iar. 6d.
ROLFE, Eustace Neville, and INGLEBY,
Holcombe.—Naples
in
1888. With Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 6s.
ROSMINI SERB ATI, Antonio.—-Life.
By the Rev. W. LOCKHART.
2 vols. With Portraits. Crown 8vo, \2s.
ROSS, Percy.—A P r o f e s s o r of A l c h e m y . Crown 8vo, y. 6d.
ROUTLEDGE,
James.—English
R u l e a n d Native Opinion in
I n d i a . 8vo, ios. 6d.
RULE, Martin, M.A. —The
L i f e a n d T i m e s of S t . A n s e l m ,
A r c h b i s h o p of C a n t e r b u r y a n d P r i m a t e of t h e
B r i t a i n s . 2 vols. Demy 8vo, 32*.
RUTHERFORD,
Mark.—The A u t o b i o g r a p h y of M a r k R u t h e r f o r d a n d M a r k R u t h e r f o r d ' s D e l i v e r a n c e . Edited by
REUBEN SHAPCOTT. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
T h e R e v o l u t i o n i n T a n n e r ' s L a n e . Edited by REUBEN
SHAPCOTT.
Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
M i r i a m ' s S c h o o l i n g : and other Papers.
SHAPCOTT.
Edited by REUBEN
Crown 8vo, 6s.
SAMUELSON,
James.—India,
P a s t a n d P r e s e n t : Historical,
Social, and Political. With a Map, Explanatory Woodcuts and
Collotype Views, Portraits, etc., from 36 Photographs. 8vo, 2\s.
Regan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Cols Publications. 2-5
SAMUELSON,
James—continued.
H i s t o r y of D r i n k . A Review, Social, Scientific, and Political.
Second Edition. 8vo, 6s.
B u l g a r i a , P a s t a n d P r e s e n t : Historical, Political, and Descriptive. With Map and numerous Illustrations. Demy 8vo,
10s. 6d.
SANDW1TH,
F. M.—E g y p t a s a W i n t e r R e s o r t . Crown 8vo,
3J. 6d.
SANTIAGOE,
Daniel.—The C u r r y C o o k ' s A s s i s t a n t . Fcap. 8vor
cloth, is. 6d. ; paper covers, is.
SA YCE, Rev. Archibald Henry.—Introduction
t o t h e S c i e n c e of
L a n g u a g e . New and Cheaper Edition. 2 vols. Crown 8vo, gs.
SAYWELL,
J. L.— N e w P o p u l a r H a n d b o o k of C o u n t y D i a l e c t s . Crown 8vo, 5.?.
SCHAIBLE,
C. H.—An E s s a y o n t h e S y s t e m a t i c T r a i n i n g of
t h e B o d y . Crown 8vo, $s.
SCHLEICHER,
August.—A C o m p e n d i u m of t h e C o m p a r a t i v e
G r a m m a r of t h e I n d o - E u r o p e a n , S a n s k r i t , G r e e k ,
a n d L a t i n L a n g u a g e s . Translated from the Third German
Edition by HERBERT BENDALL.
2 parts.
8vo, 13^. 6d.
SCOONES, W. Baptiste.—'Four C e n t u r i e s of E n g l i s h L e t t e r s :
A Selection of 350 Letters by 150 Writers, from the Period of the
Paston Letters to the Present Time.
Third Edition. Large
crown 8vo, 6s.
SCOTT, Benjamin.—A S t a t e I n i q u i t y : I t s R i s e , E x t e n s i o n ,
a n d O v e r t h r o w . Demy 8vo, plain cloth, 3s. 6d. ; gilt, $s.
SELBY, H. AT.—The S h a k e s p e a r e C l a s s i c a l D i c t i o n a r y ; or,
Mythological Allusions in the Plays of Shakespeare Explained.
Fcap. 8vo, is.
S e l w y n , B i s h o p , of New Zealand and of Lichfield. A Sketch of his
Life and Work, with Further Gleanings from his Letters,
Sermons, and Speeches. By the Rev. Canon CURTEIS. Large
crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
SERJEANT,
W. C. Eldon.—The
Astrologer's Guide ( A n i m a
Astrologia^). Demy 8vo, Js. 6d.
S h a k s p e r e ' s W o r k s . The Avon Edition, 12 vols., fcap. 8vo, cloth,
iSs. ; in cloth box, 21s. ; bound in 6 vols., cloth, 15^.
S h a k s p e r e ' s W o r k s , an Index to. By EVANGELINE O'CONNOR.
Crown 8vo, 5^.
SHAKESPEARE.—The
B a n k s i d e S h a k e s p e a r e . The Comedies,
Histories, and Tragedies of Mr. William Shakespeare, as presented at the Globe and Blackfriars Theatres, circa 1591-1623.
Being the Text furnished the Players, in parallel pages with the
first revised folio text, with Critical Introductions. 8vo.
[In preparation.
A List of
26
SHAKESPEARE—continued,
i
A N e w S t u d y of S h a k e s p e a r e . An Inquiry into the Connection of the Plays and Poems, with the Origins of the Classical
Drama, and with the Platonic Philosophy, through the Mysteries.
Demy 8vo, 10s. 6d.
Shakespeare's Cymbeline.
Edited, with Notes, by C. M.
INGLEBY.
Crown 8vo, is. 6d.
A N e w V a r i o r u m E d i t i o n of S h a k e s p e a r e .
HORACE HOWARD FURNESS.
Royal 8vo.
Edited by
Vol. I. Romeo and
Juliet. I 8 J . Vol. I I . . Macbeth. I 8 J . Vols. I I I . and IV.
Hamlet. 2 vols. 3&r. Vol. V. King Lear. I 8 J . Vol. VI.
Othello. I 8 J .
S h a k s p e r e S o c i e t y ( T h e New-).—Subscription, one guinea per
annum. List of Publications on application.
SHELLEY,
Percy Bysshe.—lAfe.
By EDWARD DOWDEN, LL.D.
2 vols. With Portraits. Demy 8vo, 36s.
SIBREE,
James, Jun.—The G r e a t A f r i c a n I s l a n d . Chapters on
Madagascar. A Popular Account of the Physical Geography,
etc., of the Country. With Physical and Ethnological Maps and
4 Illustrations.
8vo, IOJ*. 6d.
SIGERSON,
George, M.D.—Political
Prisoners at H o m e a n d
A b r o a d . With Appendix on Dietaries. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
SIMCOX, Edith.— E p i s o d e s i n t h e L i v e s of M e n , W o m e n ,
a n d L o v e r s . Crown 8vo, *]s. 6d.
SINCLAIR,
Thomas.—Essays:
is. 6d. ; wrappers, is.
S i n c l a i r s of E n g l a n d (The).
in Three Kinds.
Crown 8vo,
Crown 8vo, 12s.
SINNETT,
A. P.— T h e O c c u l t W o r l d . Fourth Edition. Crown
8vo, y. 6d.
I n c i d e n t s i n t h e L i f e of M a d a m e B l a v a t s k y . Demy 8vo,
1 or. 6d.
S k i n n e r , J a m e s : A M e m o i r . By the Author of "Charles Lowder."
With a Preface by the Rev. Canon CARTER, and Portrait.
Large crown, Js. 6d.
%* Also a cheap Edition. With Portrait. Fourth Edition. Crown
8vo, 3-r. 6d.
SMITH,
Huntington.—A C e n t u r y of A m e r i c a n L i t e r a t u r e ;
B e n j a m i n F r a n k l i n t o J a m e s R u s s e l l L o w e l l . Crown
8vo, 6s.
SMITH, S.—The D i v i n e G o v e r n m e n t . Fifth Edition. Crown
8vo, 6s.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co.'s Publications. 27
SMYTH,
R. Brough.—The
A b o r i g i n e s of V i c t o r i a . Compiled
for the Government of Victoria. With Maps, Plates, and Woodcuts. 2 vols. Royal 8vo, £ 3 3^.
S o p h o c l e s ; The Seven Plays in English Verse. Translated by LEWIS
CAMPBELL.
Crown 8vo, 7.?. 6d.
S p e c i m e n s of E n g l i s h P r o s e S t y l e f r o m M a l o r y to M a c a u l a y . Selected and Annotated, with an Introductory Essay,
by GEORGE SAINTSBURY. Large crown 8vo, printed on handmade paper, parchment antique or cloth, 12s.; vellum, 15^.
SPEDDING, yames.—THie L i f e a n d T i m e s of F r a n c i s B a c o n .
2 vols. Post 8vo, 21s.
S p i n o z a , B e n e d i c t d e : His Life, Correspondence, and Ethics. By
R. W I L L I S , M.D.
8vo,
21s.
SPRAGUE, CharlesE.—Handbook
of V o l a p i i k 1 The International
Language. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, $s.
ST. HIZZS Katharine*—-The G r a m m a r of P a l m i s t r y .
With
18 Illustrations. i2mo, is.
STOKES, Whitley.—Goidelica:
Old and Early-Middle Irish Glosses.
Prose and Verse. Second Edition. Med. 8vo, iSs.
STRACHEY,
Sir John, G.C.S.I.—-India.
With Map. Demy 8vo, 15^.
STREET,
J. C—The H i d d e n W a y a c r o s s t h e T h r e s h o l d ; or,
The Mystery which hath been hidden for Ages andjrom Generations. With Plates. Large 8vo, 15J.
SUMNER, W. G.—What
S o c i a l Glasses o w e t o K a c h O t h e r .
i8mo, 3s. 6d.
SWINBURNE,
Algernon Charles.— A "Word for t h e N a v y .
Imperial i6mo, 5<r.
T h e B i b l i o g r a p h y of S w i n b u r n e , 1 8 5 7 - 1 8 8 7 . Crown 8vo,
vellum gilt, 6s.
S y l v a , C a r m e n (Queen of Roumania), T h e L i f e of. Translated by
Baroness DEICHMANN. With 4 Portraits and 1 Illustration. 8vo,
I2S.
TAYLER,
J. J.—A R e t r o s p e c t of t h e R e l i g i o u s L i f e of
E n g l a n d ; or, Church, Puritanism, and Free Inquiry. Second
Edition. Post 8vo, *js. 6d.
TA YLOR, Rev. Canon Isaac, LL.D.—The A l p h a b e t . An Account of
the Origin and Development of Letters. With numerous Tables
and Facsimiles. 2 vols. Demy 8vo, 36J.
L e a v e s f r o m a n E g y p t i a n N o t e - b o o k . Crown 8vo, $s.
TA YLOR, Sir Henry.—The S t a t e s m a n . Fcap. 8vo, 3*. 6d.
T a y l o r , R e y n e l l , C . B . , C . S . I . : A B i o g r a p h y . By E. GAMBIER
PARRY. With Portait and Map. Demy 8vo, 14s.
28
A List of
T e c h n o l o g i c a l D i c t i o n a r y of the Terms employed in the Arts and
Sciences; Architecture ; Engineering; Mechanics ; Shipbuilding
and Navigation; Metallurgy; Mathematics, etc. Second Edition.
3 vols. 8vo.
Vol. I. German-English-French. 12s.
Vol. II. English-German-French. 12s.
Vol. III. French-German-English. 15*.
THACKERAY,
Rev. S. W., LL.D—The
Land and the Comm u n i t y . Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
THACKERAY,
William Makepeace.—An E s s a y o n t h e G e n i u s of
G e o r g e C r u i k s h a n k . Reprinted verbatim from the Westminster Review. 40 Illustrations. Large paper Edition. Royal
8vo, 7s. 6d.
S u l t a n S t o r k ; and other Stories and Sketches. 1829-1844.
Now First Collected. To which is added the Bibliography of
Thackeray, Revised and Considerably Enlarged. Large demy
8vo, I or. 6d.
THOMPSON, Sir H— D i e t i n R e l a t i o n t o A g e a n d A c t i v i t y .
Fcap. 8vo, cloth, is. 6d. ; paper covers, is.
M o d e r n C r e m a t i o n . Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
T o b a c c o T a l k a n d S m o k e r s 5 Gossip. i6mo, 2s.
TRANT, William.-Tra.de
U n i o n s : T h e i r Origin, Objects, a n d
E f f i c a c y . Small crown 8vo, IJ. 6d.; paper covers, is.
TRENCH,
The late R. C, Archbishop.—-Letters a n d M e m o r i a l s .
By the Author of " Charles Lewder." With two Portraits.
2 vols. 8vo, 21s.
A H o u s e h o l d B o o k of E n g l i s h P o e t r y . Selected and
Arranged, with Notes. Fourth Edition, Revised. Extra fcap.
8vo, $s.
A n E s s a y o n t h e L i f e a n d G e n i u s of C a l d e r o n . With
Translations from his "Life's a Dream" and "Great Theatre of
the World." Second Edition, Revised and Improved. Extra
fcap. 8vo, $s. 6d.
Gustavus Adolphus in Germany, and other Lectures
o n t h e T h i r t y Y e a r s ' W a r . Third Edition, Enlarged.
Fcap. 8vo, 4$-.
P l u t a r c h ; h i s L i f e , h i s L i v e s , a n d h i s M o r a l s . Second
Edition, Enlarged. Fcap. 8vo, 3*. 6d.
R e m a i n s of t h e l a t e M r s . R i c h a r d T r e n c h . Being Selections from her Journals, Letters, and other Papers. New and
Cheaper Issue. With Portrait. 8vo, 6s.
L e c t u r e s o n M e d i a e v a l C h u r c h H i s t o r y . Being the Substance of Lectures delivered at Queen's College, London. Second
Edition. 8vo, 12s.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Go's Publications,
29
TRENCH, The late R. C, Archbishop—continued.
E n g l i s h , P a s t a n d P r e s e n t . Thirteenth Edition, Revised and
Improved. Fcap. 8vo, $s.
O n t h e S t u d y of W o r d s .
Twentieth Edition, Revised.
Fcap. 8vo, 5-r.
Select G l o s s a r y of E n g l i s h W o r d s u s e d F o r m e r l y i n
S e n s e s D i f f e r e n t f r o m t h e P r e s e n t . Seventh Edition,
Revised and Enlarged. Fcap. 8vo, 5*.
P r o v e r b s a n d T h e i r L e s s o n s . Seventh Edition, Enlarged.
Fcap. 8vo, 4s.
TRIMEN, Roland.—S o u t h - A f r i c a n B u t t e r f l i e s . A Monograph of
the Extra-Tropical Species. With 12 Coloured Plates. 3 vols.
Demy 8vo, £2 12s. 6d.
Trubner's Bibliographical Guide to American Literature.
A Classed List of Books published in the United States of
America, from 1817 to 1857. Edited by NICOLAS TRUBNER.
8vo, half-bound, i8.f.
TRUMBULL,
H. Clay.—The
Blood-Covenant, a Primitive
R i t e , a n d i t s B e a r i n g s o n S c r i p t u r e . Post Svo, js. 6d.
TURNER, Charles Edward.—Count T o l s t o i , as Novelist and Thinker.
Lectures delivered at the Royal Institution. Crown 8vo, 3^. 6d.
T h e M o d e r n N o v e l i s t s of R u s s i a . Lectures delivered at
the Taylor Institution, Oxford. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
TWEEDIE,
Mrs. Alec—The
Ober-Ammergau Passion Play,
1890.
Small crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
VAUGHAN,
H. # " . — B r i t i s h R e a s o n i n E n g l i s h R h y m e .
Crown 8vo, 6s.
VESCELIUS-SHELDON,
Louise.—Ail I . D . B . i n S o u t h A f r i c a .
Illustrated by G. E. GRAVES and A L . HENCKE.
Crown 8vo,
*js. 6d.
Y a n k e e Girls i n Z u l u - L a n d . Illustrated by G. E. GRAVES.
Crown 8vo, $s.
V i c t o r i a G o v e r n m e n t , P u b l i c a t i o n s of t h e . [List in preparation.
VINCENT,
Frank. — A r o u n d a n d a b o u t S o u t h A m e r i c a .
Twenty Months of Quest and Query. With Maps, Hans, and
54 Illustrations. Medium 8vo, 21s.
WAITE, A. E.—Lives of A l c h e m y s t i c a l P h i l o s o p h e r s . Demy
8vo, IOJ. 6d.
T h e M a g i c a l W r i t i n g s of T h o m a s V a u g h a n . Small 4to,
10s. 6d.
T h e R e a l H i s t o r y of t h e R o s i c r u c i a n s . With Illustrations*
Crown 8vo, p. 6d.
A List of
30
WAITE, A. E,—continued.
T h e M y s t e r i e s of M a g i c . A Digest of the Writings of filiphas
Levi. "With Illustrations. Demy 8vo, IOS. 6d.
WAKE) C. Staniland.—Serpent-Worship,
and other Essays,
w i t h a C h a p t e r o n T o t e m i s m . Demy 8vo, 10s, 6d.
T h e D e v e l o p m e n t of [ M a r r i a g e a n d K i n s h i p .
Demy
8vo, iSs.
" W a l e s . — T h r o u g h N o r t h W a l e s w i t h a K n a p s a c k . By Four
Schoolmistresses. With a Sketch Map. Small crown 8vo, 2s. 6d,
WALL, George.—Tine N a t u r a l H i s t o r y of T h o u g h t i n i t s
P r a c t i c a l A s p e c t , f r o m i t s O r i g i n i n I n f a n c y . Demy
8vo, I2s. 6d.
WALLACE, Alfred Russel.—On M i r a c l e s a n d M o d e r n S p i r i t u a l i s m . Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 5^.
WALPOLE, Ckas. George.—& S h o r t H i s t o r y of I r e l a n d f r o m t h e
Earliest T i m e s to t h e U n i o n w i t h Great Britain.
With 5 Maps and Appendices. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 6*.
WALTERS,
J. Cuming.—-In T e n n y s o n L a n d .
Being a Brief
Account of the Home and Early Surroundings of the PoetLaureate. With Illustrations. Demy 8vo, $s.
WARTER,
J. ZF.—An Old S h r o p s h i r e O a k .
2 vols.
Demy 8vo r
28.?.
WATSON, R. 6 . — S p a n i s h a n d P o r t u g u e s e S o u t h A m e r i c a
d u r i n g t h e C o l o n i a l P e r i o d . 2 vols. Post 8vo, 21s.
WEDGWOOD,
I7.—A D i c t i o n a r y of E n g l i s h E t y m o l o g y .
Fourth Edition, Revised and Enlarged. With Introduction on
the Origin of Language. 8vo, £1 is.
C o n t e s t e d E t y m o l o g i e s i n t h e D i c t i o n a r y of t h e R e v .
W . W . S k e a t . Crown 8vo, 5*.
WEDGWOOD, Julia.—The
Moral Ideal.
Second Edition. Demy 8vo, gs.
An Historic Study.
WE'/SBA CH, Julius.—-Theoretical
M e c h a n i c s . A Manual of theMechanics of Engineering. Designed as a Text-book for Technical
Schools, and for the Use of Engineers. Translated from theGerman by ECKLEY B. COXE. With 902 Woodcuts. Demy
8vo, 31 s. 6d.
WESTROPP, Hodder JJ/.—Primitive S y m b o l i s m a s I l l u s t r a t e d
i n P h a l l i c W o r s h i p ; or, The Reproductive Principle. With
an Introduction by Major-Gen. FORLONG. Demy 8vo, parchment, p. 6d.
WHEELDON, J. P. — A n g l i n g R e s o r t s n e a r L o n d o n .
Thames and the Lea. Crown Svo, paper, is. 6d.
The
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co!s Publications. 31
WHIBLEY, Chas.—In G a p a n d G o w n : Three Centuries of Cambridge Wit. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
WHITMAN, Sidney.—Imperial
G e r m a n y . A Critical Study of Fact
and Character. Crown Svo, *js. 6d.
WIGSTON, W. F. C—Hermes
S t e l l a ; or, Notes and Jottings on
the Bacon Cipher. 8vo, 6s.
W i l b e r f o r c e , B i s h o p , of Oxford and Winchester, L i f e . By his
Son REGINALD WILBERFORCE.
Crown Svo,
6s.
WILDRIDGE,
T. Tyndall.—The D a n c e of D e a t h , i n P a i n t i n g
a n d i n P r i n t . With Woodcuts. 4to, 3-r. 6d; the Woodcuts
coloured by hand, $s.
WOLTMANN, Dr. Alfred, and WOERMANN, Dr. Karl— H i s t o r y
of P a i n t i n g . With numerous Illustrations. Medium 8vo.
Vol. I. Painting in Antiquity and the Middle Ages. 2$s.f;
bevelled boards, gilt leaves, 30J. Vol. II. The Painting of the
Renascence. 42s. ; bevelled boards, gilt leaves, 45^.
WOOD, M. W.—Dictionary
of V o l a p i i k . Volapuk-English and
English-Volapiik. Volapukatidel e cif. Crown 8vo, 10s. 6d.
WORTHY,
Charts.—Practical
H e r a l d r y ; or, An Epitome of
English Armory. 124 Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 7^. 6d,
WRIGHT,
Thomas.—The H o m e s of O t h e r D a y s . A History
of Domestic Manners and Sentiments during the Middle Ages.
With Illustrations from the Illuminations in Contemporary Manuscripts and other Sources. Drawn and Engraved by F . W.
FAIRHOLT, F.S.A. 350 Woodcuts. Medium 8vo, 21s.
A n g l o - S a x o n a n d Old E n g l i s h V o c a b u l a r i e s .
Second
Edition. Edited by RICHARD PAUL WULCKER. 2 vols. Demy
Svo, 28J.
T h e Celt, t h e R o m a n , a n d t h e S a x o n . A History of the
Early Inhabitants of Britain down to the Conversion of the AngloSaxons to Christianity. Illustrated by the Ancient Remains
brought to light by Recent Research. Corrected and Enlarged
Edition. With nearly 300 Engravings. Crown 8vo, gs.
YELVERTON,
Christopher.—Oneiros;
or, Some Questions of the
Day. Crown 8vo, $s.
THEOLOGY AND PHILOSOPHY.
ALEXANDER,
William, D.D., Bishop of Derry.—The G r e a t Q u e s t i o n , and other Sermons. Crown Svo, 6s.
AMBERLEY,
Viscount.—An A n a l y s i s of R e l i g i o u s Belief.
2 vols. Demy 8vo, 30J.
32
A List of
A n t i g u a M a t e r : A S t u d y of C h r i s t i a n O r i g i n s . Crown 8vo,
7-f. 6d.
BELANY, Rev, R.— T h e B i b l e a n d t h e P a p a c y . Crown 8vo, is.
BENTHAM,
Jeremy.—-Theory
of L e g i s l a t i o n . Translated from
the French of Etienne Dumont by R. HILDRETH. Fifth Edition.
Post 8vo, 7s. 6d.
BEST,
George Payne.—Morali+y
a n d Utility.
of Ethics. Crown 8vot $s.
A Natural Science
BROOKE, Rev. Stopford A .-—The F i g h t of F a i t h . Sermons preached
on various occasions. Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
T h e S p i r i t of t h e C h r i s t i a n Life. Third Edition. Crown
8vo, 5*.
T h e o l o g y i n t h e E n g l i s h P o e t s . Cowper, Coleridge, Wordsworth, and Burns. Sixth Edition. Post 8vo, $s.
C h r i s t i n M o d e r n L i f e . Seventeenth Edition. Crown 8vo, 5*.
S e r m o n s . First Series. Thirteenth Edition. Crown 8vo, $s.
S e r m o n s . Second Series. Sixth Edition. Crown 8vo, 5^.
BROWN, Rev. J. Baldwin.—The
H i g h e r Life. Its Reality, Experience, and Destiny. Seventh Edition. Crown 8vo, $s.
D o c t r i n e of A n n i h i l a t i o n i n t h e L i g h t of t h e Gospel of
L o v e . Five Discourses. Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
T h e C h r i s t i a n P o l i c y of L i f e . A Book for Young Men of
Business. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, $s. 6d.
BUNSEN, Ernest de.—Islam ; or, True Christianity. Crown 8vo, 5s.
C a t h o l i c D i c t i o n a r y . Containing some Account of the Doctrine,
Discipline, Rites, Ceremonies, Councils, and Religious Orders of
the Catholic Church. Edited by THOMAS ARNOLD, M. A. Third
Edition. Demy 8vo, 2is.
CHEYNE,
Canon.—The P r o p h e c i e s of I s a i a h . Translated with
Critical Notes and Dissertations. 2 vols. Fifth Edition. Demy
8vo, 2$s.
J o b a n d Solomon", or, The Wisdom of the Old Testament.
Demy 8vo, 12s. 6d.
T h e P s a l m s ', or, Book of The Praises of Israel. Translated
with Commentary. Demy 8vo. i6s.
CLARKE,
James Freeman.—Ten ;Great R e l i g i o n s . An Essay in
Comparative Theology. Demy 8vo, \os. (yd.
T e n G r e a t R e l i g i o n s . Part II. A Comparison of all Religions.
Demy 8vo, \os. 6d.
COKE, Henry.—Creeds
of t h e D a y " , or, Collated Opinions of
Reputable Thinkers. 2 vols. Demy 8vo, 2is.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trilbner & Co.'s Publications. 33
COMTE, Auguste,-—The C a t e c h i s m of P o s i t i v e R e l i g i o n . Translated from the French by RICHARD CONGREVE. Second Edition.
Crown 8vo, 2s, 6d,
T h e E i g h t Circulars of A u g u s t e C o m t e . Translated from
the French. Fcap. 8vo, is, 6d,
A p p e a l t o Conservatives. Crown 8vo, 2s, 6d,
T h e P o s i t i v e P h i l o s o p h y of A u g u s t e Gomte. Translated
and condensed by HARRIET MARTINEAU. 2 vols. Second
Edition. 8vo, 2$s.
CONWAY, Moncure D.— T h e Sacred A n t h o l o g y . A Book of
Ethnical Scriptures. Edited by MONCURE D. CONWAY. New
Edition. Crown 8vo, $s.
Idols a n d I d e a l s . With an Essay on Christianity. Crown
8vo, 4f.
COX, Rev, Samuel, J9.D.—A C o m m e n t a r y o n t h e B o o k of J o b .
With a Translation. Second Edition. Demy 8vo, 15*.
S a l v a t o r M u n d i ; or, Is Christ the Saviour of all Men ? Twelfth
Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s, 6d,
T h e Larger H o p e . A Sequel to "Salvator Mundi." Second
Edition. i6mo, is.
T h e Genesis of E v i l , and other Sermons, mainly expository.
Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s,
B a l a a m . An Exposition and a Study. Crown 8vo, 5-r.
Miracles. An Argument and a Challenge. Crown 8vo, 2s, 6d.
CRANBROOIC, James,— C r e d i b i l i a ; or, Discourses on Questions of
Christian Faith. Post 8vo, 3^. 6d,
T h e F o u n d e r s of C h r i s t i a n i t y ; or, Discourses upon the
Origin of the Christian Religion. Post 8vo, 6s,
DAWSON, Geo,, M,A,—Prayers,
w i t h a Discourse on Prayer.
Edited by his Wife. First Series. Tenth Edition. Small Crown
8vo, 3J. 6d,
P r a y e r s , w i t h a D i s c o u r s e o n P r a y e r . Edited by GEORGE
ST. CLAIR, F.G.S. Second Series. Small Crown 8vo, 3*. 6d,
S e r m o n s o n D i s p u t e d P o i n t s a n d Special Occasions.
Edited by his Wife. Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, 3s, 6d,
S e r m o n s o n D a i l y L i f e a n d D u t y . Edited by his Wife.
Fifth Edition. Small crown 8vo, 3s. 6d,
T h e A u t h e n t i c Gospel, and other Sermons. Edited by
GEORGE ST. CLAIR, F.G. a Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s,
E v e r y ~ d a y Counsels. Edited by GEORGE ST. CLAIR, F.G.S.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
D
A List of
34
DELEPIERRE,
Octave.— L'Enfer : Essai Philosophique et Historique
sur les Legendes de la Vie Future. Only 250 copies printed.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
Doubter's D o u b t a b o u t S c i e n c e a n d R e l i g i o n . Crown 8vo,
3J. 6d,
FICHTE,
Johann Gottlieb.—Characteristics
Translated by WILLIAM SMITH.
of t h e P r e s e n t A g e .
Post 8vo, 6s,
M e m o i r of J o h a n n Gottlieb F i c h t e . By WILLIAM SMITH.
Second Edition. Post 8vo, 4s,
On t h e N a t u r e of t h e Scholar, a n d i t s M a n i f e s t a t i o n s .
Translated by WILLIAM SMITH. Second Edition. Post 8vo, 3s.
N e w ^Exposition of t h e S c i e n c e of K n o w l e d g e . Translated by A. E. KROEGER.
8vo, 6S,
F1TZ-GERALD,
Mrs. P. F.—K P r o t e s t a g a i n s t A g n o s t i c i s m :
Introduction to a New Theory of Idealism. Demy 8vo.
A n E s s a y o n t h e P h i l o s o p h y of S e l f - C o n s c i o u s n e s s .
Comprising an Analysis of Reason and the Rationale of Love.
Demy 8vo, 5s.
A Treatise o n t h e P r i n c i p l e of Sufficient R e a s o n . A
Psychological Theory of Reasoning, showing the Relativity of
Thought to the Thinker, of Recognition to Cognition, the Identity
of Presentation and Representation, of Perception and Apperception. Demy 8vo, 6s,
GALL WE Yt Rev, P.— A p o s t o l i c S u c c e s s i o n . A Handbook. Demy
8vo, is,
GO UGH, Edward,—The B i b l e T r u e f r o m t h e B e g i n n i n g . A
Commentary on all those Portions of Scripture that are most
Questioned and Assailed. Vols. I., II., and III. Demy 8vo,
16s, each.
GREG, W, R,— L i t e r a r y a n d Social J u d g m e n t s . Fourth Edition.
2 vols. Crown 8vo, i$s.
T h e Creed of C h r i s t e n d o m . Eighth Edition. 2 vols. Post
8vo, 15 J.
E n i g m a s of Life. Seventeenth Edition. Post 8vo, 10s. 6d,
P o l i t i c a l P r o b l e m s f o r o u r A g e a n d C o u n t r y . Demy 8vo,
1 or. 6d,
M i s c e l l a n e o u s E s s a y s . 2 Series. Crown 8vo, 7.?. 6d, each.
GRIMLEY, Rev. H. N., M.A.—Tremadoc
Sermons, chiefly on
the Spiritual Body, the Unseen W o r l d , a n d t h e
D i v i n e H u m a n i t y . Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s,
T h e T e m p l e of H u m a n i t y , aad other Seriaeas. Crown 8vo?
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 35
GURNEY, Alfred.—OUT C a t h o l i c I n h e r i t a n c e i n t h e L a r g e r
H o p e . Crown 8vo, is. 6d.
HAINES, C. R.— C h r i s t i a n i t y a n d I s l a m i n S p a i n , A . D . 7 5 6 1031.
Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
HAWEIS,
Rev. H. R., M.A.—Current
C o i n . Materialism—The
Devil—Crime—Drunkenness—Pauperism—Emotion—Recreation
—The Sabbath. Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, $s.
A r r o w s i n t h e A i r . Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, 5*.
S p e e c h i n S e a s o n . Sixth Edition. Crown 8vo, 5*.
T h o u g h t s for t h e T i m e s . Fourteenth Edition. Crown 8vo, $s.
U n s e c t a r i a n F a m i l y P r a y e r s . New Edition. Fcap. 8vo,
is. 6d.
HUGHES, Rev. H, M.A—Principles
of N a t u r a l a n d S u p e r n a t u r a l M o r a l s . Vol. I. Natural Morals. Demy 8vo, 12s.
JOSEPH, N. . £ — R e l i g i o n , N a t u r a l a n d R e v e a l e d . A Series of
Progressive Lessons for Jewish Youth. Crown 8vo, 3^.
KEMPIS,
Thomas a.—Ol t h e I m i t a t i o n of C h r i s t . Parchment
Library Edition.—Parchment or cloth, 6s. ; vellum, Js. 6d. The
Red Line Edition, fcap. 8vo, cloth extra, 2s. 6d. The Cabinet
Edition, small 8vo, cloth limp, is. ; cloth boards, is. 6d. The
Miniature Edition, cloth limp, 32mo, is, ; or with red lines, is. 6d.
Of t h e I m i t a t i o n of C h r i s t . A Metrical Version. By HENRY
CARRINGTON.
Crown 8vo,
5*.
N o t e s of a V i s i t t o t h e S c e n e s i n w h i c h h i s L i f e w a s
s p e n t . With numerous Illustrations. By F. R. CRUISE, M.D.
Demy 8vo, 12s.
K e y s of t h e G r e e d s ( T h e ) . Third Revised Edition. Crown 8vo,
2J. 6d.
LEWES, George Henry.—Problems
of L i f e a n d M i n d . Demy8vo.
First Series: The Foundations of a Creed. 2 vols. 28*.
Second Series : The Physical Basis of Mind. With Illustrations.
16s. Third Series. 2 vols. 22s. 6d.
LEWIS, Harry £ . — T a r g u m o n I s a i a h i . - v . With Commentary.
Demy 8vo, $s.
MANNING,
Cardinal.—Towards
E v e n i n g . Selections from his
Writings. Third Edition. l6mo, 2s.
MARTINEAU,
James.—Kssays,
Philosophical and Theolog i c a l . 2 vols. Crown 8vo, £1 $s.
MEAD, C. M., D.D, — S u p e r n a t u r a l R e v e l a t i o n . An Essay concerning the Basis of the Christian Faith. Royal 8vo, 14s*.
M e d i t a t i o n s o n D e a t h a n d E t e r n i t y . Translated from the
German by FREDERICA ROWAN. Published hy Her Majesty's
gracious permission. Crown 8vo, 6s.
A List of
36
M e d i t a t i o n s o n L i f e a n d i t s R e l i g i o u s D u t i e s . Translated
from the German by FREDERICA ROWAN. Published by Her
Majesty's gracious permission. Being the. Companion Volume
to " Meditations on Death and Eternity." Crown 8vo, 6s,
NE VILL, F,—Retrogression
or Development.
Crown 8vo, $s, 6d.
NICHOLS, J. Broadhurst, and DYMOND, Charles William.— P r a c t i c a l V a l u e of C h r i s t i a n i t y . Two Prize Essays. Crown
8vo, 3-f. 6d,
PARKER,
Theodore, — D i s c o u r s e o n M a t t e r s p e r t a i n i n g t o
R e l i g i o n . People's Edition. Crown 8vo, is. 6d.; cloth, 2s.
T h e Collected W o r k s of T h e o d o r e P a r k e r , Minister of the
Twenty-eighth Congregational Society at Boston, U.S. In 14
vols. 8vo, 6s, each.
Yol. I. Discourse on Matters pertaining to Religion. I I . Ten Sermons and Prayers. I I I . Discourses on Theology. IV. Discourses on Politics. V. and VI. Discourses on Slavery. VII.
Discourses on Social Science. VIII. Miscellaneous Discourses.
IX. and X. Critical Writings. XI. Sermons on Theism,
Atheism, and Popular Theology. XII. Autobiographical and
Miscellaneous Pieces.
XIII. Historic Americans. XIV.
Lessons from the World of Matter and the World of Man.
P l e a for T r u t h i n R e l i g i o n .
P s a l m s of t h e W e s t .
Crown 8vo, 2s, 6d
Small crown 8vo, $s.
P u l p i t C o m m e n t a r y , T h e . {Old Testament Series.) Edited by the
Rev. J. S. EXELL, M.A., and the Very Rev. Dean H . D. M.
SPENCE, M.A.,
D.D.
G e n e s i s . By the Rev. T. WHITELAW, D.D. With Homilies by
the Very Rev. J. F. MONTGOMERY, D . D . , Rev. Prof. R. A.
REDFORD,
M.A.,
LL.B.,
Rev.
F.
HASTINGS,
Rev.
W.
ROBERTS, M.A. An Introduction to the Study of the Old
Testament by the Venerable Archdeacon FARRAR, D.D., F.R. S.;
and Introductions to the Pentateuch by the Right Rev. H. COTTERILL, D.D., and Rev. T. WHITELAW, D.D.
Ninth Edition.
1 vol., 15 s.
E x o d u s . By the Rev. Canon RAWLINSON. With Homilies byithe
Rev. J. O R R , D.D., Rev. D. YOUNG, B.A., Rev. C. A. GOODHART, Rev. J. URQUHART, and the Rev. H. T. ROBJOHNS.
Fourth Edition. 2 vols., gs, each.
L e v i t i c u s . By the Rev. Prebendary MEYRICK, M.A.
With
Introductions by the Rev. R. COLLINS, Rev. Professor A. CAVE,
and Homilies by the Rev. Prof. REDFORD, LL.B., Rev. J. A.
MACDONALD, Rev. W. CLARKSON, B.A., Rev. S. R. ALDRIDGE,
LL.B,, and Rev. MCCHEYNE EDGAR,
Fourth Edition. 15.S.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 37
P u l p i t C o m m e n t a r y , The—continued.
N u m b e r s . By the Rev. R. WINTERBOTHAM, LL.B. With
Homilies by the Rev. Professor W. BINNIE, D.D., Rev. E. S.
PROUT, M.A., Rev. D. YOUNG, B.A., Rev. J. W A I T E , B. A., and
an Introduction by the Rev. THOMAS WHITELAW, D.D.
Fifth Edition. 15J.
D e u t e r o n o m y . By the Rev. W. L. ALEXANDER, D.D. With
Homilies by the Rev. C. CLEMANCE, D.D., Rev. J. ORR, D.D.,
Rev. R. M. EDGAR, M.A., Rev. D. DAVIES, M.A.
Fourth
edition. 15J.
J o s h u a . By the Rev. J. J. LIAS, M.A. With Homilies by the
Rev. S. R. ALDRIDGE, LL.B., Rev. R. GLOVER, Rev. E. DE
PRESSENSE, D.D., Rev. J. W A I T E , B.A., Rev. W. F . ADENEY,
M.A.; and an Introduction by the Rev. A. PLUMMER, D.D.
Fifth Edition. 12s. 6d.
J u d g e s a n d R u t h . By the Bishop of BATH and WELLS, and
Rev. J. MORISON, D.D. With Homilies by the Rev. A. F. MUIR,
M.A.*, Rev. W. F . ADENEY, M.A., Rev. W. M. STATHAM, and
Rev. Professor J. THOMSON, M.A. Fifth Edition. 10s. 6d.
1 a n d 2 S a m u e l . By the Very Rev. R. P. SMITH, D.D. With
Homilies by the Rev. DONALD FRASER,
D . D . , Rev. Prof.
CHAPMAN, Rev. B. D A L E , and Rev. G. W O O D , B.A.
Seventh
Edition. 15*. each.
1 K i n g s . By the Rev. JOSEPH HAMMOND, LL.B. With Homilies
by the Rev. E. DE PRESSENSE, D.D., Rev. J. W A I T E , B.A.,
Rev. A. ROWLAND, LL.B., Rev. J. A. MACDONALD, and Rev.
J. URQUHART. Fifth Edition. 15^.
2 K i n g s . By the Rev. Canon RAWLINSON.
With Homilies by
the Rev. J. O R R , D.D., Rev. D . THOMAS, D.D., and Rev.
C. H . IRWIN, M.A. 15*.
1 C h r o n i c l e s . By the Rev. Prof. P. C. BARKER, M.A., LL.B.
With Homilies by the Rev. Prof. J. R. THOMSON, M. A., Rev. R.
TUCK, B.A., Rev. W. CLARKSON, B.A., Rev. F . W H I T F I E L D ,
M.A., and Rev. RICHARD GLOVER. 15^.
Ezra, Nehemiah, a n d Esther.
By the Rev. Canon G.
RAWLINSON, M.A. With Homilies by the Rev. Prof. J. R.
THOMSON, M.A., Rev. Prof. R. A. R E D FORD, LL.B., M.A.,
Rev. W . S. LEWIS, M.A., Rev. J. A. MACDONALD, Rev. A.
MACKENNAL, B.A., Rev. W. CLARKSON, B.A., Rev. F . HASTINGS,
Rev. W. DINWIDDIE, LL.B., Rev. Prof. ROWLANDS, B.A., Rev.
G. WOOD, B.A., Rev. Prof. P . C. BARKER, M.A., LL.B., and
the Rev. J . S. EXELL, M.A. Seventh Edition. 1 vol., 12s. 6d.
I s a i a h . By the Rev. Canon G. RAWLINSON, M.A. With Homilies
by the Rev. Prof. E. JOHNSON, M.A., Rev. W. CLARKSON,
B.A., Rev. W. M. STATHAM, and Rev. R. TUCK, B.A. Second
Edition.
2 vols., i$s. each.
3*
A List of
P u l p i t C o m m e n t a r y , The—continued.
Jeremiah.
(Vol. I.) By the Rev. Canon T. K. CHEYNE,
D.D. With Homilies by the Rev. W. F . ADENEY, M.A., Rev.
A. F . M U I R , M.A., Rev. S. CONWAY, B.A., Rev. J . W A I T E ,
B.A., and Rev. D. YOUNG, B.A. Third Edition. \$s,
J e r e m i a h (Vol. II.) a n d L a m e n t a t i o n s . By the Rev. Canon
T. K. CHEYNE, D.D. With Homilies by the Rev. Prof. J. R.
THOMSON, M.A., Rev. W. F . ADENEY, M.A., Rev. A. F . M U I R ,
M.A., Rev. S. CONWAY, B.A., Rev. D. YOUNG, B.A. 15.?.
H o s e a a n d J o e l . By the Rev. Prof. J. J. GIVEN, Ph.D., D.D.
With Homilies by the Rev. Prof. J. R. THOMSON, M.A., Rev.
A. ROWLAND, B.A., LL.B., Rev. C. JERDAN, M.A., LL.B.,
Rev. J . ORR, D . D . , and Rev. D. THOMAS, D.D.
15*.
P u l p i t C o m m e n t a r y , T h e . {"New Testament Series.)
S t . M a r k . By the Very Rev. E. BICKERSTETH, D.D., Dean of
Lichfield. With Homilies by the Rev. Prof. THOMSON, M.A.,
Rev. Prof. J. J. GIVEN, Ph.D., D.D., Rev. Prof. JOHNSON, M.A.,
Rev. A. ROWLAND, B.A., LL.B., Rev. A. M U I R , and Rev. R.
GREEN. Fifth Edition. 2 vols., 10s. 6d. each.
S t . L u k e . By the Very Rev. H. D, M. SPENCE.
With Homilies
by the Rev. J. MARSHALL LANG, D.D., Rev. W. CLARKSON,
B.A., and Rev. R. M. EDGAR, M.A. 2 vols., 10s. 6d. each.
S t . J o h n . By the Rev. Prof. H . R. REYNOLDS, D.D. With
Homilies by the Rev. Prof. T. CROSKERY, D.D., Rev. Prof. J. R.
THOMSON, M.A., Rev. D. YOUNG, B.A., Rev. B. THOMAS,
Rev. G. BROWN. Second Edition. 2 vols., 15^. each.
T h e A c t s of t h e A p o s t l e s . By the Bishop of BATH and WELLS.
With Homilies by the Rev. Prof. P. C. BARKER, M.A., LL.B.,
Rev. Prof. E. JOHNSON, M.A., Rev. Prof. R. A. REDFORD,
LL.B., Rev. R. TUCK, B.A., Rev. W. CLARKSON, B.A. Fourth
Edition. 2 vols., 10s. 6d. each.
1 C o r i n t h i a n s . By the Ven. Archdeacon FARRAR, D.D. With
Homilies by the Rev. Ex-Chancellor LIPSCOMB, LL.D., Rev.
DAVID THOMAS, D.D., Rev. D. FRASER, D . D . , Rev. Prof.
J. R. THOMSON, M.A., Rev. J. W A I T E , B.A., Rev. R. T U C K ,
B.A., Rev. E. HURNDALL, M.A., and Rev. H . BREMNER, B.D.
Fourth Edition. 15^.
2 Corinthians a n d Galatians.
By the Ven. Archdeacon
FARRAR, D.D., and Rev. Prebendary E. HUXTABLE.
With
Homilies by the- Rev. Ex-Chancellor LIPSCOMB, LL.D., Rev.
DAVID THOMAS, D.D., Rev. DONALD FRASER, D.D., Rev. R.
TUCK, B.A., Rev. E. HURNDALL, M.A., Rev. Prof. J. R.
THOMSON, M.A., Rev. R. FINLAYSON, B.A., Rev. W. F . ADENEY,
M.A., Rev. R. M. EDGAR, M.A., and Rev. T. CROSKERY, D.D.
Second Edition. 2U.
Kegcm Paul, Trench, Triihner & Co.'s Publications. 39
P u l p i t C o m m e n t a r y , The—continued.
E p h e s i a n s , P h i l i p p i a n s , a n d C o l o s s i a n s . By the Rev. Prof.
W. G. BLAIKIE, D.D., Rev. B. C. CAFFIN, M.A., and Rev. G.
G. FINDLAY, B.A. With Homilies by the Rev. D. THOMAS,
D.D., Rev. R. M. EDGAR, M.A., Rev. R. FINLAYSON, B.A., Rev.
W. F . ADENEY, M.A., Rev. Prof. T. CROSKERY, D.D., Rev.
E. S. PROUT, M.A., Rev. Canon VERNON H U T T O N , and
Rev. U. R. THOMAS, D.D. Second Edition. 21 s.
Thessalonians, Timothy, Titus, a n d Philemon.
By the
Bishop of BATH and W E L L S , Rev. Dr. GLOAG, and Rev. Dr.
EALES. With Homilies by the Rev. B. C. CAFFIN, M.A., Rev. R.
FINLAYSON, B.A., Rev. Prof. T. CROSKERY, D.D., Rev. W. F .
ADENEY, M.A., Rev. W. M. STATHAM, and Rev. D. THOMAS,
D.D. i$s.
H e b r e w s a n d J a m e s . By the Rev. J. BARMBY, D.D., and Rev.
Prebendary E. C. S. GIBSON, M.A. With Homiletics by the
Rev. C. JERDAN, M.A., LL.B., and Rev. Prebendary E. C. S.
GIBSON. And Homilies by the Rev. W . JONES, Rev. C. N E W ,
Rev. D. YOUNG, B.A., Rev. J. S. BRIGHT, Rev. T. F . LOCKYER,
B.A., and Rev. C. JERDAN, M.A., LL.B. Second Edition. 15s.
P e t e r , J o h n , a n d J u d e . By the Rev. B. C. CAFFIN, M.A.,
Rev. A. PLUMMER, D . D . , and Rev. S. D. F . SALMOND, D.D.
With Homilies by the Rev. A. MACLAREN, D.D., Rev. C.
CLEMANCE, D . D . , Rev. Prof. J. R. THOMSON, M.A., Rev. C.
N E W , Rev. U. R. THOMAS, Rev. R. FINLAYSON, B.A., Rev.
W. JONES, Rev. Prof. T. CROSKERY, D.D., and Rev. J. S.
BRIGHT, D.D. 15*.
R e v e l a t i o n . Introduction by the Rev. T. RANDELL, B.D.,
Principal of Bede College, Durham ; and Exposition by the Rev.
T. RANDELL, assisted by the Rev. A. PLUMMER, M.A., D.D.,
Principal of University College, Durham, and A. T. BOTT, M.A.
With Homilies by the Rev. C. CLEMANCE, D.D., Rev. S. CONWAY,
B.A., Rev. R. G R E E N , and Rev. D. THOMAS, D.D.
PUSEY,
Dr.— S e r m o n s f o r t h e C h u r c h ' s S e a s o n s f r o m
A d v e n t t o T r i n i t y . Selected from the Published Sermons
of the late EDWARD BOUVERIE PUSEY, D.D.
Crown 8vo, 5^.
RENAN,
Ernest.—Philosophical
Dialogues a n d Fragments.
From the French. Post 8vo, *js. 6d.
A n K s s a y o n t h e A g e a n d A n t i q u i t y of t h e B o o k of
N a h a t h s e a n A g r i c u l t u r e . Crown 8vo, 3.?. 6d.
T h e L i f e of J e s u s . Crown 8vo, cloth, is. 6d.; paper covers, is.
T h e A p o s t l e s , Crown 8vo, cloth, is. 6d.; paper covers, is.
REYNOLDS,
Rev. J. J T . ~ T h e S u p e r n a t u r a l i n N a t u r e . A
Verification by Free Use of Science. Third Edition, Revised
and Enlarged. Demy 8vo, 14s.
40
A List of
REYNOLDS,
Rev. % W.—continued.
T h e M y s t e r y of M i r a c l e s . Third and Enlarged Edition.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
T h e M y s t e r y of t h e U n i v e r s e o u r C o m m o n F a i t h . Demy
8vo, 14J.
T h e "World t o C o m e : Immortality a Physical Fact, Crown
8vo, 6s.
RICHARDSON,
Austin.—"What
a r e t h e Catholic C l a i m s ? "
With Introduction by Rev. LUKE RIVINGTON. Crown 8vo,
3J. 6d.
RIVINGTON,
Luke.— A u t h o r i t y , o r a P l a i n R e a s o n f o r j o i n i n g t h e C h u r c h of R o m e . Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo,
3J. 6d.
D e p e n d e n c e ; or, The Insecurity of the Anglican Position.
Crown 8vo, $s.
ROBERTSON,
The late Rev. F. W., M.A.—XAfe a n d L e t t e r s of.
Edited by the Rev. STOPFORD BROOKE, M.A.
I. Two vols., uniform with the Sermons. With Steel Portrait.
Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
II. Library Edition, in Demy 8vo, with Portrait. 12s.
III. A Popular Edition, in 1 vol. Crown 8vo, 6s.
S e r m o n s . Five Series. Small crown 8vo, 3s. 6d. each.
N o t e s o n Genesis. New and Cheaper Edition. Small crown 8vo,
3s. 6d.
Expository Lectures on St. Paul's Epistles to t h e
C o r i n t h i a n s . A New Edition. Small crown 8vo, 5*.
L e c t u r e s a n d A d d r e s s e s , with other Literary Remains. A New
Edition. Small crowji 8vo, 5^.
A n A n a l y s i s of T e n n y s o n ' s " I n M e m o r i a m . " (Dedicated
by Permission to the Poet-Laureate.) Fcap. 8vo, 2s.
T h e E d u c a t i o n of t h e H u m a n R a c e . Translated from the
German of GOTTHOLD EPHRAIM LESSING.
Fcap. 8vo, 2s. 6d.
%* A Portrait of the late Rev. F . W. Robertson, mounted for
framing, can be had, 2s. 6d.
SCANNELL,
Thomas B., B.D., and WILHELM, Joseph, D.D.—K
M a n u a l of C a t h o l i c T h e o l o g y . Based on SCHEEBEN'S
"Dogmatik." 2 vols. Demy 8vo. Vol. I., 15s.
SHEEPSHANKS,
Rev. 7 . — C o n f i r m a t i o n a n d U n c t i o n of t h e
S i c k . Small crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
STEPHEN,
Caroline ^ . — Q u a k e r S t r o n g h o l d s . Crown Svo, $s.
T h e o l o g y a n d P i e t y a l i k e F r e e ; f r o m t h e P o i n t of V i e w of
M a n c h e s t e r N e w College, O x f o r d . A Contribution to
its effort offered by an old Student. Demy 8vo, 9.?.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Go's Publications. 41
TRENCH, Archbishop.—-Notes o n t h e P a r a b l e s of Our Lord.
8vo, I2J. Cheap Edition. Fifty-sixth Thousand. Js. 6d.
N o t e s o n t h e M i r a c l e s of O u r L o r d . 8vo, 12s. Cheap
Edition. Forty-eighth Thousand. *js. 6d.
S t u d i e s i n t h e Gospels. Fifth Edition, Revised. 8vo, ior. 6d.
Brief T h o u g h t s a n d M e d i t a t i o n s o n S o m e P a s s a g e s i n
H o l y S c r i p t u r e . Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
S y n o n y m s of t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t . Tenth Edition, Enlarged. 8vo, 12 s.
S e r m o n s N e w a n d Old. Crown 8vo, 6s.
W e s t m i n s t e r a n d o t h e r S e r m o n s . Crown 8vo, 6s.
O n t h e A u t h o r i z e d V e r s i o n of t h e N e w T e s t a m e n t .
Second Edition. 8vo, Js.
C o m m e n t a r y on t h e Epistles to t h e Seven C h u r c h e s in
A s i a . Fourth Edition, Revised. 8vo, Ss. 6d.
T h e S e r m o n o n t h e M o u n t . An Exposition drawn from the
Writings of St. Augustine, with an Essay on his Merits as an
Interpreter of Holy Scripture. Fourth Edition, Enlarged. 8vo,
ior. 6d.
S h i p w r e c k s of F a i t h , Three Sermons preached before the
University of Cambridge in May, 1867. Fcap. 8vo, 2s. 6d.
TRINDER,
Rev. D.—The W o r s h i p of H e a v e n , a n d
S e r m o n s . Crown 8vo, $s.
WARD,
other
Wilfrid.—The
' W i s h t o B e l i e v e , A Discussion Concerning the Temper of Mind in which a reasonable Man should
undertake Religious Inquiry. Small crown 8vo, $s.
WARD,
William George, Ph.D.—Essays
o n t h e P h i l o s o p h y of
T h e i s m . Edited, with an Introduction, by W I L F R I D WARD.
2 vols. Demy 8vo, 21s.
W h a t is T r u t h ? A Consideration of the Doubts as to the Efficacy of
Prayer, raised by Evolutionists, Materialists, and others. By
"Nemo."
W1LHELM, Joseph, D.D., and SCANNELL,
Thomas B., B.D.—A
M a n u a l of C a t h o l i c T h e o l o g y . Based on SCHEEBEN'S
"Dogmatik." 2 vols. Demy 8vo. Vol. L, i$s.
WYNELL-MA
YOW, S. S.~The
L i g h t of R e a s o n .
Crown 8vo, 5*.
A List of
42
ENGLISH AND FOREIGN PHILOSOPHICAL LIBRARY.
A u g u s t e C o m t e a n d P o s i t i v i s m . By the late JOHN STUART
MILL. Third Edition. 3J. 6d.
C a n d i d E x a m i n a t i o n of T h e i s m (A). By PHYSICUS. Second
Edition. Js. 6d.
C o l o u r - S e n s e ( T h e ) : Its Origin and Development. An Essay in
Comparative Psychology.
By GRANT ALLEN.
IOS. 6d.
C o n t r i b u t i o n s t o t h e H i s t o r y of t h e D e v e l o p m e n t of t h e
H u m a n R a c e . Lectures and Dissertations. By LAZARUS
GEIGER. Translated from the German by D. ASHER. 6S.
C r e e d of C h r i s t e n d o m ( T h e ) . Its Foundations contrasted with
its Superstructure. By W. R. GREG. Eighth Edition. 2 vols.
15*
D r . A p p l e t o n : His Life and Literary Relics. By J. H . APPLETON
and A. H. SAYCE.
IOS. 6d.
E d g a r Q u i n e t ! His Early Life and Writings. By RICHARD HEATH.
With Portraits, Illustrations, and an Autograph Letter. 12s. 6d.
E m e r s o n a t H o m e a n d A b r o a d . By M. D. CONWAY. With
Portrait. ios. 6d.
E n i g m a s of L i f e . By W. R. GREG. Seventeenth Edition, ior. 6d.
E s s a y s a n d D i a l o g u e s of G i a c o m o L e o p a r d i . Translated by
CHARLES EDWARDES. With Biographical Sketch. Js. 6d.
E s s e n c e of C h r i s t i a n i t y [(The). By L. FEUERBACH. Translated
from the German by MARIAN EVANS. Second Edition. p. 6d.
E t h i c Demonstrated i n Geometrical Order a n d Divided
i n t o F i v e P a r t s , which treat (1) Of God, (2) Of the Nature
and Origin of the Mind, (3) Of the Origin and Nature of the
Affects, (4) Of Human Bondage, or of the Strength of the Affects,
(5) Of the Power of the Intellect, or of Human Liberty. By
BENEDICT DE SPINOZA.
HALE WHITE,
Translated from the Latin by WILLIAM
IOS. 6d.
G u i d e of t h e P e r p l e x e d of M a i m o n i d e s (The). Translated
from the Original Text and Annotated by M. FRIEDLANDER.
3 vols. 31 J. 6d.
H i s t o r y of M a t e r i a l i s m (A), and Criticism of its present Importance. By Prof. F . A. LANGE. Authorized Translation from
the German by ERNEST C. THOMAS. In 3 vols. ios. 6d. each.
J o h a n n Gottlieb Fiehte's P o p u l a r W o r k s .
The Nature of
the Scholar; The Vocation of the Scholar; The Vocation of
Man; The Doctrine of Religion; Characteristics of the Present
Age ; Outlines of the Doctrine of Knowledge. With a Memoir
by WILLIAM SMITH, LL.D.
2 vols.
21;,
Regkn Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 43
Moral Order a n d Progress.
By S. ALEXANDER.
An Analysis of Ethical Conceptions.
14s1.
N a t u r a l £.aw« An Essay in Ethics. By EDITH SIMCOX. Second
Edition, IOJ. 6d.
O u t l i n e s of t h e H i s t o r y of R e l i g i o n t o t h e S p r e a d of t h e
U n i v e r s a l R e l i g i o n s . By Prof. C. P. TIELE. Translated
from the Dutch by J. ESTLIN CARPENTER. Fourth Edition.
*js. 6d.
P h i l o s o p h y of L a w (The). By Prof. DIODATO LIOY. Translated
by W. HASTIE.
P h i l o s o p h y of M u s i c ( T h e ) . Lectures delivered at the Royal Institution of Great Britain. By WILLIAM POLE, F.R.S. Second
Edition. $s. 6d.
P h i l o s o p h y of t h e U n c o n s c i o u s (The). By EDUARD VON
HARTMANN.
Translated by WILLIAM C. COUPLAND.
31 j". 6d.
Religion a n d Philosophy i n Germany.
HEINRICH HEINE.
3 vols.
A Fragment.
Translated by J. SNODGRASS.
By
6S.
Religion i n China.
Containing a brief Account of the Three
Religions of the Chinese; with Observations on the Prospects of
Christian Conversion amongst that People. By JOSEPH EDKINS,
D.D. Third Edition. Js. 6d.
S c i e n c e of K n o w l e d g e (The). By J. G. FICHTE. Translated from
the German by A. E. KROEGER. With an Introduction by Prof.
W. T. HARRIS,
IOS. 6d.
S c i e n c e of R i g h t s (The). By J. G. FICHTE. Translated from the
German by A. E. KROEGER. With an Introduction by Prof.
W. T. HARRIS.
12s. 6d.
W o r l d a s W i l l a n d I d e a (The). By ARTHUR SCHOPENHAUER.
Translated from the German by R. B. HALDANE and JOHN
KEMP.
3 vols.
£2 ios.
Extra Series.
A n A c c o u n t of t h e P o l y n e s i a n R a c e : Its Origin and Migrations, and the Ancient History of the Hawaiian People. By
ABRAHAM FORNANDER.
3 vols.
27s.
I*essing! His Life and Writings. By JAMES SIME. Second Edition.
2 vols. With Portraits. 2is.
O r i e n t a l R e l i g i o n s , and their Relation to Universal Religion—India,
By SAMUEL JOHNSON.
2 vols.
21s.
A List of
44
SCIENCE.
BADER,
C— T h e N a t u r a l a n d M o r b i d C h a n g e s of t h e
H u m a n E y e , a n d t h e i r T r e a t m e n t . Medium 8vo, 16s.
P l a t e s i l l u s t r a t i n g t h e N a t u r a l a n d M o r b i d C h a n g e s of
t h e H u m a n E y e . With Explanatory Text. Medium 8vo,
in a portfolio, 2is. Price for Text and Atlas taken together,
£i 12s.
BICKNELL,
C—Flowering
P l a n t s a n d F e r n s of t h e R i v i e r a
a n d N e i g h b o u r i n g M o u n t a i n s . Drawn and described
by C. BICKNELL. With 82 full-page Plates, containing Illustrations of 350 Specimens. Imperial 8vo, half-roan, gilt edges,
£z yBLATER,
Joseph.—'Table of Q u a r t e r - S q u a r e s of a l l W h o l e
N u m b e r s f r o m 1 t o 2 0 0 , 0 0 0 . For Simplifying Multiplication, Squaring, and Extraction of the Square Root. Royal
4to, half-bound, 2ls.
T a b l e of N a p i e r . Giving the Nine Multiples of all Numbers.
Cloth case, is. yl.
BROWNE, Edgar ^ . - H o w t o u s e ! t h e O p h t h a l m o s c o p e . Being
Elementary Instruction in Ophthalmoscopy. Third Edition.
Crown 8vo, $s. 6d.
BUNGE, £ . — T e x t - B o o k of P h y s i o l o g i c a l a n d P a t h o l o g i c a l
C h e m i s t r y . For Physicians and Students. Translated from
the German by L. C. WOODBRIDGE, M.D. Demy 8vo, 16s.
CALLEJA, Camilo, M.D.—Principles
of U n i v e r s a l P h y s i o l o g y .
Crown 8vo, y. 6d.
CANDLER,
C—The P r e v e n t i o n of C o n s u m p t i o n : A New
Theory of the Nature of the Tubercle-Bacillus. Demy 8vo, 10s. 6d.
T h e P r e v e n t i o n of M e a s l e s . Crown 8vo, 5s.
CARPENTER,
W. B.—The P r i n c i p l e s of M e n t a l P h y s i o l o g y .
With their Applications to the Training and Discipline of the
Mind, and the Study of its Morbid Conditions. Illustrated.
Sixth Edition. 8vo, 12s.
N a t u r e a n d M a n . With a Memorial Sketch by the Rev. J.
ESTLIN CARPENTER. Portrait. Large crown 8vo, Ss. 6d.
COTTA, B. von.—Geology a n d H i s t o r y . A Popular Exposition of
all that is known of the Earth and its Inhabitants in Pre-historic
Times. l2mo, 2s.
DANA, James D.—A. T e x t - B o o k of Geology, designed for Schools
and Academies. Illustrated. Crown 8vo, 10s.
M a n u a l of G e o l o g y . Illustrated by a Chart of the World, and
over 10^0 Fi^uies. 8vo, 2is.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co.'s Publications. 45
DANA, James D.—continued.
T h e Geological S t o r y Briefly T o l d . Illustrated. i2mo,
Js. 6d.
A S y s t e m of M i n e r a l o g y . By J. D. DANA, aided by G. J.
BRUSH. Fifth Edition. Royal 8vo, £2 2s.
M a n u a l of M i n e r a l o g y a n d P e t r o g r a p h y . Fourth Edition.
Numerous Woodcuts. Crown 8vo, 8*. 6d.
DANA, E. S.—A T e x t - B o o k of M i n e r a l o g y . With Treatise on
Crystallography and Physical Mineralogy. Third Edition. 800
Woodcuts and I Coloured Plate. 8vo, i$s.
DU MONCEL, Count.—-The T e l e p h o n e , t h e M i c r o p h o n e , a n d
t h e P h o n o g r a p h . With 74 Illustrations. Third Edition.
Small crown 8vo, $s.
DYMOCK, W.—The V e g e t a b l e M a t e r i a M e d i c a of W e s t e r n
I n d i a . 4 Parts. 8vo, 5*. each.
FEATHERMAN,
A.—The S o c i a l H i s t o r y of t h e R a c e s of
M a n k i n d . Demy 8vo. Div. I. The Nigritians. £1 us. 6d.
Div. II.—I. Papuo and Malayo Melanesians. £1 $s. Div. II.II. Oceano-Melanesians. £1 $s. Div. III.-I. Aoneo-Maranonians. 2$s. Div. III.-II. Chiapo and Guazano Maranonians.
28s. Div. V. The Aramaeans. £1 is.
FITZGERALD,
R. D.— A u s t r a l i a n Orchids. Folio. Part I.
7 Plates. Part II. 10 Plates. Part III. 10 Plates. Part IV.
10 Plates. Part V. 10 Plates. Part VI. 10 Plates. Each Part,
coloured, 21s.; plain, IOJ. 6d. Part VII. 10 Plates. Vol. II.,
Part I. 10 Plates. Each, coloured, 25s.
GALLOWAY, Robert.—A. Treatise o n F u e l . Scientific and Practical. With Illustrations. Post 8vo, 6s.
E d u c a t i o n s Scientific a n d T e c h n i c a l ; or, How the Inductive Sciences are Taught, and How they Ought to be Taught.
8vo, 10s. 6d.
HAECKEL, Prof. Ernst.—The H i s t o r y of Creation. Translation
revised by Professor E. RAY LANKESTER, M.A., F.R.S. With
Coloured Plates and Genealogical Trees of the various groups
of both Plants and Animals. 2 vols. Third Edition. Post
8vo, 32J.
T h e H i s t o r y of t h e E v o l u t i o n of M a n . With numerous
Illustrations. 2 vols. Post 8vo, 32.?
A V i s i t to Ceylon. Post 8vo, p. 6d.
F r e e d o m i n S c i e n c e a n d T e a c h i n g . With a Prefatory Note
by T. H. HUXLEY, F.R.S. Crown 8vo, 5*.
I1EIDENHAW,
Rudolph, M.D.—Hypnotism,
or A n i m a l M a g n e t i s m . With Preface by G. J. ROMANES. Second Edition.
Small crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
46
A List of
HEN WOOD, William Jory.—The
M e t a l l i f e r o u s D e p o s i t s of
C o r n w a l l a n d D e v o n . With Appendices on Subterranean
Temperature; the Electricity of Rocks and Veins ; the Quantities of Water in the Cornish Mines ; and Mining Statistics.
With 113 Tables, and 12 Plates, half-bound. 8vo, £2 2s.
Observations on Metalliferous Deposits, a n d on S u b t e r r a n e a n T e m p e r a t u r e . In 2 Parts. With 38 Tables,
31 Engravings on Wood, and 6 Plates. 8vo, £1 16.?.
HOSPITALIER,
£ . — T h e M o d e r n A p p l i c a t i o n s of E l e c t r i c i t y .
Translated and Enlarged by JULIUS, MAIER, Ph.D. 2 vols.
Second Edition, Revised, with many additions and numerous
Illustrations. Demy 8vo, 2$s,
HULME, F. Edward.—Mathematical
Drawing Instruments,
a n d H o w t o U s e T h e m . With Illustrations. Third
Edition. Imperial i6mo, y. 6d.
INMAN, James. — N a u t i c a l T a b l e s . Designed for the Use of British
Seamen. New Edition, Revised and Enlarged. Demy 8vo, 16s.
K1NAHAN,
G. # . — V a l l e y s a n d t h e i r R e l a t i o n t o F i s s u r e s ,
F r a c t u r e s , a n d F a u l t s . Crown 8vo, 7.?. 6d.
KLEIN,
Felix.—Lectures
o n t h e I k o s a h e d r o n , and the Solution
of Equations of the Fifth Degree. Translated by G. G. MORRICE.
Demy 8vo, iar. 6d.
LENDENFELD,
R. von.—Monograph
of t h e H o r n y S p o n g e s .
With 50 Plates. Issued by direction of the Royal Society.
4to, £$.
LESLEY, J. P.— M a n ' s O r i g i n a n d D e s t i n y . Sketched from the
Platform of the Physical Sciences. Second Edition. Crown
8vo, *]s. 6d.
L1VERS1DGE,
A.—The M i n e r a l s of N e w S o u t h W a l e s , e t c .
With large Coloured Map. Royal 8vo, iSs.
M1VART% St. George.—On T r u t h . Demy 8vo, I6J.
T h e O r i g i n of H u m a n R e a s o n . Demy 8vo, IOJ. 6d.
N1C0LS, Arthur, F.G.S., F.R.G.S.—Chapters
from the Physical
H i s t o r y of t h e E a r t h . An Introduction to Geology and
Palaeontology. With numerous Illustrations. Crown 8vo, $s.
PYE9 Waller.—Surgical
H a n d i c r a f t . A Manual of Surgical Manipulations. With 233 Illustrations on Wood. Second Edition.
Crown 8vo, icw. 6d.
E l e m e n t a r y B a n d a g i n g a n d S u r g i c a l D r e s s i n g . For the
Use of Dressers and Nurses. i8mo, 2s.
RAMSA Y, E. P.— T a b u l a r L i s t of all t h e A u s t r a l i a n B i r d s a t
present known to the Author, C*owa 4to, %zs, M,
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co!s Publications. 47
RIBOT, Prof. Th.—Heredity
1 A Psychological Study of its Phenomena,
its Laws, its Causes, and its Consequences. Second Edition.
Large crown 8vo, gs.
E n g l i s h P s y c h o l o g y . Crown 8vo, p. 6d.
RODD, Edward Heark.—Tlie B i r d s of C o r n w a l l a n d t h e S c i l l y
I s l a n d s . Edited by J. E. HARTING. With Portrait and
Map. 8vo, 14s.
ROMANES,
G. 7. — M e n t a l E v o l u t i o n i n A n i m a l s . With a
Posthumous Essay on Instinct by CHARLES DARWIN, F.R.S.
Demy 8vo, 12s.
M e n t a l E v o l u t i o n i n M a n : O r i g i n of H u m a n F a c u l t y .
Demy 8vo, 14s.
ROSS, Lieut.-Colonel W. A.— A l p h a b e t i c a l M a n u a l of
p i p e A n a l y s i s . Crown 8vo, $s.
P y r o l o g y , o r F i r e C h e m i s t r y . Small 4to, 36J.
Blow-
SCHWENDLER,
Louis.—Instructions
for T e s t i n g T e l e g r a p h
L i n e s , and the Technical Arrangements in Offices. 2 vols.
Demy 8vo, 2is.
SMITH, Hamilton, Jun.—Hydraulics.
The Flow of Water through
Orifices, over Weirs, and through Open Conduits and Pipes.
With 17 Plates. Royal 4to, 30*.
STRECKER- WISLICENUS.—Organic
C h e m i s t r y . Translated and
Edited, with Extensive Additions, by W. R. HODGKINSON,
Ph.D., and A. J. GREENAWAY, F.I.C. Second and cheaper
Edition. Demy 8vo, 12s. 6d.
SYMONS, G. / . — T h e E r u p t i o n of K r a k a t o a , a n d S u b s e q u e n t P h e n o m e n a . Report of the Krakatoa Committee of
the Royal Society. Edited by G. J. SYMONS, F.R.S. With 6
Chromolithographs of the Remarkable Sunsets of 1883, and 40
Maps and Diagrams. 4to, £1 10s,
WANKLYN,
J. A.—Milk
A n a l y s i s . ' A Practical Treatise on the
Examination of Milk and its Derivatives, Cream, Butter, and
Cheese. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 5-r.
T e a , Coffee, a n d C o c o a . A Practical Treatise on the Analysis
of Tea, Coffee, Cocoa, Chocolate, Mate (Paraguay Tea). Crown
8vo, $s.
WANKLYN, J. A., and COOPER, W. 7.—Bread A n a l y s i s . A
Practical Treatise on the Examination of Flour and Bread.
Crown 8vo, 5*.
WANKL YN% J. A., and CHAPMAN, E. T.—Water A n a l y s i s . A
Treatise on the Examination of Potable Water. Seventh Edition,
Entirely rewritten, £rown §Vo, 5*.
A List of
4»
WRIGHT, G. Frederick, Z>.Z>.—The I c e A g e i n N o r t h A m e r i c a ,
a n d its b e a r i n g u p o n t h e A n t i q u i t y of M a n . With
Maps and Illustrations. 8vo, 2U.
THE INTERNATIONAL SCIENTIFIC SERIES.
I. F o r m s of W a t e r in Clouds a n d R i v e r s , I c e a n d Glaciers.
By J. Tyndall, LL.D., F.R.S. With 25 Illustrations. Ninth
Edition. 5*.
II. P h y s i c s a n d P o l i t i c s ; or, Thoughts on the Application of the
Principles of " Natural Selection " and " Inheritance " to Political
Society. By Walter Bagehot. Eighth Edition. $s.
III. F o o d s . By Edward Smith, M.D., LL.B., F.R.S. With numerous
Illustrations. Ninth Edition. $s.
IV. M i n d a n d B o d y ; t h e Theories of t h e i r R e l a t i o n . By
Alexander Bain, LL.D. With Four Illustrations. Eighth
Edition. $s.
V. T h e S t u d y of Sociology. By \Herbert Spencer. Fourteenth
Edition. 5^.
VI. T h e Conservation of E n e r g y . By Balfour Stewart, M.A.,
LL.D., F.R.S. With 14 Illustrations. Seventh Edition. 5.?.
VII. A n i m a l L o c o m o t i o n ; or, Walking, Swimming, and Flying. By
J. B. Pettigrew, M.D., F.R.S., etc. With 130 Illustrations.
Third Edition. 5*.
VIII. R e s p o n s i b i l i t y i n M e n t a l Disease. By Henry Maudsley,
M.D. Fourth Edition. 5J.
IX. T h e N e w C h e m i s t r y . By Professor J. P. Cooke. With 31
Illustrations. Ninth Edition. $s,
X. T h e Science of L a w . By Professor Sheldon Amos. Sixth Edition/
5*.
XI. A n i m a l M e c h a n i s m s a Treatise on Terrestrial and Aerial Locomotion. By Professor E. J. Marey. With 117 Illustrations.
Third Edition. $s.
XII. T h e D o c t r i n e of D e s c e n t a n d D a r w i n i s m . By Professor
Oscar Schmidt. With 26 Illustrations. Seventh Edition. 5^,
XIII. T h e H i s t o r y of t h e Conflict b e t w e e n R e l i g i o n a n d
Science. By J. W. Draper, M.D., LL.D. Twentieth Edition.
XIV. F u n g i : t h e i r N a t u r e , I n f l u e n c e s , r a n d U s e s . By M. C.
Cooke, M.A., LL.D. Edited by the Rev. M. J. Berkeley, M.A.,
F.L.S. With numerous Illustrations. Fourth Edition. 5s.
Regan Paul, Trench, Triihner & Co.'s Publications. 49
XV. T h e C h e m i s t r y of L i g h t a n d P h o t o g r a p h y .
By Dr.,
Hermann Vogel. With 100 Illustrations. Fifth Edition. $s.
XVI. T h e L i f e a n d G r o w t h of L a n g u a g e . By Professor William
Dwight Whitney. Fifth Edition. 5*.
XVII. M o n e y a n d t h e M e c h a n i s m of E x c h a n g e . By W.
Stanley Jevons, M.A., F.R.S. Eighth Edition. 5*.
XVIII. T h e N a t u r e of L i g h t . With a General Account of Physical
Optics. By Dr. Eugene Lommel. With 188 Illustrations and a
Table of Spectra in Chromo-lithography. Fifth Edition. 5^.
XIX. A n i m a l P a r a s i t e s a n d M e s s m a t e s . By P . J. Van Beneden.
With 83 Illustrations. Third Edition. 5*.
XX. O n F e r m e n t a t i o n .
By Professor Schiitzenberger. With 28
Illustrations. Fourth Edition. $s,
XXI. T h e F i v e S e n s e s of M a n . By Professor Bernstein. With
91 Illustrations. Fifth Edition. 5*.
XXII. T h e T h e o r y of S o u n d i n i t s R e l a t i o n t o M u s i c . By
Professor Pietro Blaserna. With numerous Illustrations. Third
Edition. 5^.
XXIII. S t u d i e s i n S p e c t r u m A n a l y s i s . By J. Norman Lockyer,
F.R.S. With 6 Photographic Illustrations of Spectra, and
numerous engravings on Wood. Fourth Edition. 6s. 6d.
XXIV. A H i s t o r y of t h e G r o w t h of t h e S t e a m E n g i n e . Bv
Professor R. H. Thurston. With numerous Illustrations. Fourth
Edition. $s.
XXV. E d u c a t i o n a s a S c i e n c e . By Alexander Bain, LL.D. Seventh
Edition. 5^
XXVI. T h e H u m a n Species. By Professor A. de Quatrefages. Fifth
Edition. 5*.
XXVII. M o d e r n C h r o m a t i c s . With Applications to Art and Industry. By Ogden N. Rood. With 130 original Illustrations.
Second Edition. $s.
XXVIII. T h e C r a y f i s h : an Introduction to the Study of Zoology. By
Professor T. H. Huxley. With 82 Illustrations. Fifth Edition, 55.
XXIX. T h e B r a i n a s a n O r g a n of M i n d . By H. Charlton Bastian,
M.D. With numerous Illustrations. Third Edition. $s.
XXX. T h e A t o m i c T h e o r y . By Professor Wurtz. Translated by E.
Cleminshaw, F.C.S. Fifth Edition. 5*.
XXXI. T h e N a t u r a l C o n d i t i o n s of E x i s t e n c e a s t h e y affect
A n i m a l L i f e . By Karl Semper. With 2 Maps and 106
Woodcuts. Third Edition. $s.
XXXII. G e n e r a l P h y s i o l o g y of M u s c l e s a n d N e r v e s . By Professor J. Rosenthal. Third Edition. With 75 Illustrations. 5J.
s
50
A List of
XXXIII. S i g h t : an Exposition of the Principles of Monocular and
Binocular Vision. By Joseph le Conte, LL.D. Second Edition.
With 132 Illustrations. $s.
XXXIV. I l l u s i o n s ; a Psychological Study. By James Sully. Third
Edition. 5-f.
XXXV. V o l c a n o e s s w h a t t h e y a r e a n d w h a t t h e y t e a c h .
By Professor J. W. Judd, F.R.S. With 96 Illustrations on
Wood. Fourth Edition. $s.
XXXVI. S u i c i d e : an Essay on Comparative Moral Statistics. By Professor H. Morselli. Second Edition. With Diagrams. $s.
XXXVII. T h e B r a i n a n d i t s F u n c t i o n s . By J. Luys. With
Illustrations. Second ^Edition. §s.
XXXVIII. M y t h a n d S c i e n c e : an Essay. By Tito Vignoli. Third
Edition. With Supplementary Note. 5^.
XXXIX. T h e S u n . By Professor Young. With Illustrations. Third
Edition. 5«r.
XL. A n t s , Bees, a n d W a s p s : a Record of Observations on the
Habits of the Social Hymenoptera. By Sir John Lubbock, Bart.,
M.P. With 5 Chromo-lkhographic Illustrations. Ninth Edition.
5*
XLI. A n i m a l I n t e l l i g e n c e . By G. J. Romanes, LL.D;, F.R.S.
Fourth Edition. 5*.
XLII. T h e C o n c e p t s a n d T h e o r i e s of M o d e r n P h y s i c s . By
J. B. Stallo. Third Edition. 5*.
XLIII. D i s e a s e s of M e m o r y : an Essay in the Positive Psychology.
By Professor Th. Ribot. Third Edition. 5*.
XLIV. M a n b e f o r e M e t a l s . By N. Joly. With 148 Illustrations.
Fourth Edition. 5*.
XLV. T h e S c i e n c e of P o l i t i c s . By Professor Sheldon Amos. Third
Edition. 5*.
XLVI. E l e m e n t a r y M e t e o r o l o g y . By Robert H. Scott Fourth
Edition. With numerous Illustrations. 5*.
XLVII. T h e O r g a n s of S p e e c h a n d t h e i r A p p l i c a t i o n i n t h e
F o r m a t i o n of A r t i c u l a t e S o u n d s . By Georg Hermann
Von Meyer. With 47 Woodcuts. $s.
XLVIII. F a l l a c i e s . A View of Logic from the Practical Side. By
Alfred Sidgwick. Second Edition. $s.
XLIX. O r i g i n of C u l t i v a t e d P l a n t s .
Second Edition. $s.
By Alphonse de Candolle,
L. J e l l y - F i s h , S t a r - F i s h , a n d S e a - U r c h i n s . Being a Research
on Primitive Nervous Systems. By G. J. Romanes. With
Illustrations. $s.
Regan Paul, Trench, Trilbner & Co!s Publications. 51
LL T h e C o m m o n S e n s e of t h e E x a c t S c i e n c e s . By the late
William Kingdon Clifford. Second Edition. With 100 Figures.
5*.
LII. P h y s i c a l E x p r e s s i o n : I t s M o d e s a n d P r i n c i p l e s . By
Francis Warner, M.D., F.R.C.P., Hunterian Professor of Comparative Anatomy and t Physiology, R.C.S.E. With 50 Illustrations. 5J.
LIII. A n t h r o p o i d A p e s .
tions. 5^.
By Robert Hartmann.
With 63 Illustra-
LIV. T h e M a m m a l i a i n t h e i r R e l a t i o n t o P r i m e v a l T i m e s .
By Oscar Schmidt. With 51 Woodcuts. $s.
LV. C o m p a r a t i v e L i t e r a t u r e . By H. Macaulay Posnett, LL.D. 5*.
LVI. E a r t h q u a k e s a n d o t h e r E a r t h M o v e m e n t s . By Professor
John Milne. With 38 Figures. Second Edition. $s.
LVII. M i c r o b e s , F e r m e n t s , a n d M o u l d s .
With 107 Illustrations. $s.
By E. L. Trouessart.
LVIII. G e o g r a p h i c a l a n d Geological D i s t r i b u t i o n of A n i m a l s *
By Professor A. Heilprin. With Frontispiece. 5*.
LIX. " W e a t h e r . A Popular Exposition of the Nature of Weathet
Changes from Day to Day. By the Hon. Ralph Abercromby;
Second Edition. With 96 Illustrations. 5^.
LX. A n i m a l M a g n e t i s m .
Second Edition. $s.
By Alfred Binet and Charles Fere\
LXI. M a n u a l of B r i t i s h D i s c o m y c e t e s , with descriptions of all the
Species of Fungi hitherto found in Britain included in the Family,
and Illustrations of the Genera. By William Phillips, F.L.S. SSi
LXII. I n t e r n a t i o n a l L a w .
With Materials for a Code of International Law. By Professor Leone Levi. $s.
LXIII. T h e Geological H i s t o r y of P l a n t s .
Dawson. With 80 Figures. $s.
By Sir J. William
LXIV. T h e O r i g i n of F l o r a l S t r u c t u r e s t h r o u g h I n s e c t
a n d o t h e r A g e n c i e s . By Rev. Professor G. Henslow. With
88 Illustrations. 55.
LXV. O n t h e S e n s e s , I n s t i n c t s , a n d I n t e l l i g e n c e of A n i m a l s .
With special Reference to Insects. By Sir John Lubbock, Bart.,
M.P. 100 Illustrations. Second Edition. 5s.
LXVI. T h e P r i m i t i v e F a m i l y : I t s O r i g i n a n d D e v e l o p m e n t ;
By C. N. Starcke. 5-r.
LXVII. P h y s i o l o g y of B o d i l y E x e r c i s e .
M.D. 5^.
By Fernand Lagrange*
A List of
52
LXVIII. T h e C o l o u r s of A n i m a l s s t h e i r M e a n i n g a n d U s e ,
e s p e c i a l l y c o n s i d e r e d i n t h e C a s e of I n s e c t s . By E. B.
Poulton, F.R.S. With Coloured Frontispiece and 66 Illustrations
in Text. 5-r.
LXIX. I n t r o d u c t i o n t o F r e s h - W a t e r Algae. With'an Enumeration of all the British Species. By M. C. Cooke. 13 Plates. 5«r.
ORIENTAL, EGYPTIAN, ETC.
AHLWARDT,
W.— T h e D i v a n s of t h e S i x A n c i e n t A r a b i c
Poets, E n n a b i g a , ' A n t a r a , Tharafa, Zuhair, 5A1q u a m a , a n d I m r u u l q u a i s . Edited by W. AHLWARDT.
Demy 8vo, 12.S,
ALABASTER,
Henry.—The W h e e l of t h e L a w ". Buddhism illustrated from Siamese Sources. Demy 8vo, 14.?.
ALL, Moulavl Cherdgh.—The P r o p o s e d P o l i t i c a l , L e g a l , a n d
Social R e f o r m s in t h e O t t o m a n E m p i r e a n d other
M o h a m m e d a n S t a t e s . Demy 8vo, $s.
ARNOLD, Sir Edwin, C.S.I.—With
S a ' d i i n t h e Garden", or,
The Book of Love. Being the " Ishk," or Third Chapter of
the "Bostan" of the Persian Poet Sa'di. Embodied in a Dialogue held in the Garden of the Taj Mahal, at Agra. Crown 8vo,
p. 6d.
L o t u s a n d J e w e l . Containing " I n an Indian Temple," " A
Casket of Gems," " A Queen's Revenge," with Other Poems.
Second Edition. Crown 8vo, p. 6d.
Death—and Afterwards.
Reprinted from the Fortnightly
Review of August, 1885. With a Supplement. Ninth Edition.
Crown 8vo, is, 6d,; paper, is,
I n d i a R e v i s i t e d . With 32 Full-page Illustrations. From Photographs selected by the Author. Crown 8vo, *js, 6d.
T h e L i g h t of A s i a ; or, The Great Renunciation. Being the
Life and Teaching of Gautama, Prince of India, and Founder
of Buddhism. With Illustrations and a Portrait of the Author.
Post 8vo, cloth, gilt back and edges; or half-parchment, cloth
sides, $s, 6d. Library Edition. Crown 8vo, 7*. 6d. Illustrated
Edition. Small 4to, 21s.
I n d i a n P o e t r y . Containing " The Indian Song of Songs," from
the Sanskrit of the Gita Govinda of Jayad^ra ; Two Books from
" The Iliad of India j " and other Oriental Poems. Fifth Edition.
7*. 6d
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co!s Publications.
53
ARNOLD, Sir Edwin, C.S.I.—continued.
P e a r l s of t h e F a i t h ; or, Islam's Rosary : being the Ninety-nine
beautiful names of Allah. With Comments in Verse from various
Oriental sources. Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
I n d i a n I d y l l s . From the Sanskrit of the Mahabharata. Crown
8vo, 7.?. 6d.
T h e S e c r e t of D e a t h . Being a Version of the Katha Upanishad,
from the Sanskrit. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 7*. 6d.
T h e S o n g C e l e s t i a l ; or, Bhagavad-Gita. Translated from the
Sanskrit Text. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 5^.
P o e t i c a l W o r k s . Uniform Edition, comprising " T h e Light of
Asia," " Indian Poetry," " Pearls of the Faith," " Indian Idylls,"
" T h e Secret of Death," " T h e Song Celestial," and "With
Sa'di in the Garden." In 8 vols. Crown 8vo, cloth, 48J.
T h e I l i a d a n d O d y s s e y of I n d i a . Fcap. 8vo, is.
A S i m p l e T r a n s l i t e r a l G r a m m a r of t h e T u r k i s h L a n g u a g e . Post 8vo, 2s. 6d.
A s i a t i c S o c i e t y . — J o u r n a l of t h e R o y a l A s i a t i c S o c i e t y of
G r e a t B r i t a i n a n d I r e l a n d , from the Commencement to
1863. First Series, complete in 20 vols. 8vo, with many Plates,
;£io, or in parts from 4s. to 6s. each.
J o u r n a l of t h e R o y a l A s i a t i c S o c i e t y of G r e a t B r i t a i n
and Ireland.
New Series. 8vo. Stitched in wrapper.
1864-88.
Vol, I., 2 Parts, pp. iv. and 490, 16s.—Vol. II., 2 Parts, pp. 522, 16s.
—Vol. III., 2 Parts, pp. 516, with Photograph, 22s.—Vol. IV., 2 Parts,
pp. 521, 16s.—Vol. V., 2 Parts, pp. 463, with 10 full-page and folding
Plates, 18s. 6d.—Vol. VI., Part I, pp. 212, with 2 Plates and a Map, Ss.
—Vol. VI., Part 2, pp. 272, with Plate and a Map, 8s.—Vol. VII., Part I,
pp. 194, with a Plate, Ss.—Vol. VII., Part 2, pp. 204, with 7 Plates and
a Map, Ss.—Vol. VIII., Part I, pp. 156, with 3 Plates and a Plan, Ss.
—Vol. VIII., Part 2, pp. 152, Ss.—Vol. IX., Part I, pp. 154, with a
Plate, Ss.—Vol. IX., Part 2, pp. 292, with 3 Plates, 10s. 6d.—Vol X.,
Part I, pp. 156, with 2 Plates and a Map, Ss.—Vol. X., Part 2, pp. 146,
6-y.—Vol. X., Part 3, pp. 204, Ss.— Vol. XL, Part 1, pp. 128, 5.?.—Vol.
X L , Part 2, pp. 158, with 2 Plates, Js. 6d.—Vol. XL, Part 3, pp. 250,
Ss.— Vol. XII., Part I, pp. 152, 5^.—Vol. XII., Part 2, pp. 182, with 2
Plates and a Map, 6s.—Vol. XII., Part 3, pp. 100, 4s.—Vol. XIL, Part 4,
pp. x., 152, cxx., 16, Ss.—Vol. XIIL, Part I, pp. 120, 5s.—Vol. XIIL,
Part 2, pp. 170, with a Map, Ss.— Vol. XIIL, Part 3, pp. 178, with a
Table, *js. 6d.—Vo\. XIIL, Part 4, pp. 282, with a Plate and Table,
10s. 6d.—Vol. XIV., Part 1, pp. 124, with a Table and 2 Plates, $s.-~
Vol. XIV., Part 2, pp. 164, with 1 Table, Js. 6d.—Vol. XIV., Part 3,
pp. 206, with 6 Plates, Ss.—Vol. XIV., Part 4, pp. 492, with I Plate,
14J.—Vol. XV., Part 1, pp. 136, 6s.—Vol. XV., Part 2, pp. 158, with
3 Tables, 5^,—Vol, XV., Part 3, pp. 192, 6s.—Vol. XV., Part 4, pp.
A List of
54
A s i a t i c Society—continued.
140, 5J.—Vol. XVI., Part 1, pp. 138, with 2 Plates, 7J.—Vol. XVI.,
Part 2, pp. 184, with I Plate, 9^.—Vol. XVI., Part 3, July, 1884, pp.
74-clx., 10s. 6^.—Vol. XVI., Part 4, pp. 132, 8^.—Vol. XVII., Part 1,
pp. 144, with 6 Plates, 10s. 6d.—Vol. XVII., Part 2, pp. 194, with a
Map, gs.—Vol. XVII., Part 3, pp. 342, with 3 Plates, 10s. 6d.—Vol.
XVIII., Part I, pp. 126, With 2 Plates, 5^.—Vol. XVIII., Part 2, pp.
196, with 2 Plates, 6^.—Vol. XVIII., Part 3, pp. 130, with 11 Plates,
10s. 6d.—Vol. XVIII., Part 4, pp. 314, with 8 Plates, fs. 6d.— Vol.
XIX., Part I, pp. 100, with 3 Plates, 10s.—Vol. XIX., Part 2, pp. 156,
with 6 Plates, 10s.—Vol. XIX., Part 3, pp. 216, with 6 Plates, 10s.—
Vol. XIX., Part 4, pp. 216, with I Plate, 10s.— Vol. XX., Part I, pp.
163, ior.—Vol. XX., Part 2, pp. 155, los.—Vol. XX., Part 3, pp. 143,
with 3 Plates and a Map, 10s.—Vol. XX., Part 4, pp. 318, ior.
ASTON,
W. G.—A S h o r t G r a m m a r of t h e J a p a n e s e S p o k e n
L a n g u a g e . Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, 12s.
A G r a m m a r of t h e J a p a n e s e W r i t t e n L a n g u a g e . Second
Edition. 8vo, 2%s.
A u c t o r e s S a n s c r i t ! :—
Vol. I. T h e J a i m i n f y a - N y a y a - M a l a ^ - V i s t a r a .
Edited
under the supervision of THEODOR GOLDSTUCKER. Large 4to,
£3 I3J. 6d.
Vol. II. T h e I n s t i t u t e s of G a u t a m a . Edited, with an Index of
Words, by A. F. STENZLER, Ph.D., Prof, of Oriental Languages
in the University of Breslau. 8vo, cloth, 4^. 6d.; stitched, 3^. 6d.
Vol. III. V a i t a n a S u t r a : T h e R i t u a l of t h e A t h a r v a
V e d a . Edited, with Critical Notes and Indices, by Dr. R.
GARBE.
8vo, SS.
Vols. IV. and V. V a r d h a m a n a ' s G a n a r a t n a m a h o d a d h i ,
with the Author's Commentary. Edited, with Critical Notes
and Indices, by JULIUS EGGELING. Part I. 8vo, 6s. Part II.
8vo, 6s.
BAB A, Tatui.—An E l e m e n t a r y G r a m m a r of t h e J a p a n e s e
L a n g u a g e . With Easy Progressive Exercises. Second Edi«
tion. Crown 8vo, 5*.
BADGER, George Percy, D.C.Z.—Axi E n g l i s h - A r a b i c L e x i c o n .
In which the equivalent for English Words and Idiomatic
Sentences are rendered into literary and colloquial Arabic.
Royal 4to, 80s.
BALFOUR, F. # . — T h e D i v i n e Classic of N a n - H u a . Being the
Works of Chuang Tsze, Taoist Philosopher. 8vo, 14^.
T a o i s t T e x t s , Ethical, Political, and Speculative. Imperial 8vo,
IOJ1. 6d.
L e a v e s f r o m m y C h i n e s e S c r a p - B o o k . Post 8vo, p. 6d.
Kegan Paul, Trench^ Triibner & Co.'s Publications.
55
BALLANTYNE,J.
R.—Klements
of H i n d i a n d B r a j B h a k h a
G r a m m a r . Compiled for the use of the East India College at
Haileybury. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 5^.
F i r s t L e s s o n s i n S a n s k r i t G r a m m a r ; together with an Introduction to the Hitopadesa. Fourth Edition. 8vo, 3^. 6d.
BEAL,
S.—A C a t e n a of B u d d h i s t S c r i p t u r e s f r o m t h e
C h i n e s e . 8vo, 15,?.
T h e R o m a n t i c L e g e n d of S a k y a B u d d h a .
From the
Chinese-Sanskrit. Crown 8vo, 12s.
B u d d h i s t L i t e r a t u r e i n C h i n a . Four Lectures. Demy 8vo,
10s. 6d.
BE'AMES, John.—-Outlines
of I n d i a n P h i l o l o g y . With a Map
showing the Distribution of Indian Languages. Second enlarged Edition. Crown 8vo, 5s.
A C o m p a r a t i v e G r a m m a r of t h e M o d e r n A r y a n L a n g u a g e s of I n d i a : Hindi, Panjabi, Sindhi, Gujarati, Marathi,
Oriya, and Bengali. 3 vols. 16s. each.
BELLE IV, Deputy-Surgeon- General H. W.—T h e H i s t o r y of Cholera
i n I n d i a f r o m 1 8 6 2 t o 1881. With Maps and Diagrams.
Demy 8vo, £2 2s.
A Short Practical Treatise on t h e N a t u r e , Causes, a n d
T r e a t m e n t of C h o l e r a . Demy 8vo, js. 6d.
F r o m t h e I n d u s t o t h e T i g r i s . A Narrative of a Journey
through Balochistan, Afghanistan, Khorassan, and Iran, in 1872.
8vo, 10s. 6d.
K a s h m i r a n d K a s h g h a r . A Narrative of the Journey of the
Embassy to Kashghar in 1873-74. Demy 8vo, 10s. 6d.
T h e R a c e s of A f g h a n i s t a n . Being a Brief Account of the
Principal Nations inhabiting that Country. 8vo, Js. 6d.
BELLOWS, John.— K n g l i s h O u t l i n e V o c a b u l a r y , f o r t h e U s e
of S t u d e n t s of t h e C h i n e s e , J a p a n e s e , a n d o t h e r
L a n g u a g e s . Crown 8vo, 6s.
BENFEY, Theodor.—A P r a c t i c a l G r a m m a r of t h e S a n s k r i t
L a n g u a g e , f o r t h e U s e of E a r l y S t u d e n t s . Second
Edition. Royal 8vo, iOf. 6d,
BENTLEY,
W. Holman.—Dictionary
a n d G r a m m a r of t h e
K o n g o L a n g u a g e , as spoken at San Salvador, the Ancient
Capital of the Old Kongo Empire, West Africa. Demy 8vo, 21 s.
BEVERIDGE,
H.—The D i s t r i c t of B a k a r g a n j : Its History and
Statistics. 8vo, 21s.
B u d d h i s t C a t e c h i s m ( A ) ; or, Outline of the Doctrine of the Buddha
Gotama.
By SUBHADRA BHIKSHU,
umo,
%s.
A List of
56
BUDGE, Ernest A.—Archaic
Classics- Assyrian Texts; being Extiacts from the Annals of Shalmaneser II., Sennacherib, and
Assur-Bani-Pal. With Philological Notes. Small 4to, >]s. 6a1.
BURGESS,
James.—ARCHJEOLOGICAL
SURVEY OF WESTERN INDIA : —
Reports—
T h e B e l g a m a n d K a l a d i D i s t r i c t s . With 56 Photographs
and Lithographic Plates. Royal 4to, half-bound, £2 2s,
T h e A n t i q u i t i e s of K a t h i a w a d a n d K a c h h . Royal
4to, with 74 Plates. Half-bound, £3 $s.
The Antiquities in the Bidar and Aurangabad Dist r i c t s , in the Territories of His Highne'ss'the Nizam of Haiderabad. With 63 Photographic Plates. Royal 4to, half-bound,
£2 2S.
The Buddhist Cave-Temples a n d their Inscriptions.
Containing Views, Plans, Sections, and Elevation of Facades of
Cave-Temples; Drawings of Architectural and Mythological
Sculptures; Facsimiles of Inscriptions, etc.; with Descriptive
and Explanatory Text, and Translations of Inscriptions. With
86 Plates and Woodcuts. Royal 4to, half-bound, ^ 3 3s.
Elura Cave-Temples, and the Brahmanical and
J a i n a C a v e s i n W e s t e r n I n d i a . With 66 Plates and
Woodcuts. Royal 4to, half-bound, £3 3s.
ARCHAEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF SOUTHERN I N D I A : —
R e p o r t s of t h e A m a r a v a t i a n d J a g g a y p y a e t a B u d d h i s t S t u p a s . Containing numerous Collotype and other
Illustrations of Buddhist Sculpture and Architecture, etc., in
South-Eastern India; Facsimiles of Inscriptions, etc.; with
Descriptive and Explanatory Text. Together with Transcriptions, Translations, and Elucidations of the Dhauli and Jaugada
Inscriptions of Asoka, by Professor G. BUHLER, LL.D. Vol.1.
With numerous Plates and Woodcuts. Royal 4to, half-bound,
£4 4*
BURGESS, James.—Kpigraphia
I n d i c a a n d R e c o r d of t h e
A r c h a e o l o g i c a l S u r v e y of I n d i a . Edited by JAS. BURGESS, LL.D. Parts I., II., and III. Royal 410, wrappers,
Js. each.
BURNELL, A. C—Elements
of S o u t h I n d i a n P a l a e o g r a p h y ,
from the Fourth to the Seventeenth Century A.D. Being an
Introduction to the Study of South Indian Inscriptions and
MSS. Second enlarged and improved Edition. Map and 35
Plates. 4to, £2 12s. 6d.
A Classified I n d e x t o t h e S a n s k r i t M S S . i n t h e P a l a c e
a t T a n j o r e . Prepared for the Madras Government. 3 Parts.
4to, 10s. each.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Ttubner & Co.'s Publications.
57
CALDWELL,
Bishop R.—A C o m p a r a t i v e G r a m m a r of t h e
D r a v i d i a n o r S o u t h I n d i a n F a m i l y of L a n g u a g e s .
A second, corrected, and enlarged Edition. Demy 8vo, 28^.
CAPPELLER,
Carl—A S a n s k r i t - E n g l i s h D i c t i o n a r y . Based
upon the St. Petersburg Lexicons. Royal 8vo. [In preparation.
CHALMERS, J.—Structure
of C h i n e s e C h a r a c t e r s , under 300
Primary Forms, after the Shwoh-wan, 100 A.D. Demy 8vo,
I2J. 6d.
CHAMBERLAIN,
B. H.—A R o m a n i s e d J a p a n e s e R e a d e r .
Consisting of Japanese Anecdotes, Maxims, with English Translation and. Notes. i2mo, 6s.
T h e C l a s s i c a l P o e t r y of t h e J a p a n e s e . Post 8vo, 7.?. 6d.
H a n d b o o k of C o l l o q u i a l J a p a n e s e . 8vo, 12s. 6d.
CHATTER/I,
Mohini M.—The B h a g a v a d Gita.", or, The Lord's
Lay. With Commentary and Notes. Translated from the
Sanskrit. Second Edition. Royal 8vo, 10s. 6d.
CHILDERS, R. C.—A P a l i - E n g l i s h D i c t i o n a r y , with Sanskrit
Equivalents. Imperial 8vo, £3 3s.
T h e M a h a p a r i n i b b a n a s u t t a of t h e S u t t a P i t a k a . The
Pali Text.. Edited by R. C. CHILDERS. 8vo, 5*.
CHINTAMON, H.—A C o m m e n t a r y o n t h e T e x t of t h e B h a g a v a d - G f t a ; or, The Discourse between Khrishna and Arjuna
of Divine Matters. Post 8vo, 6s.
COOMARA SWAMY, Mutu.—T'h.Q D a t h a v a n s a ; or, The History
of the Tooth Relic of Gotama Buddha, in Pali Verse. Edited by
MUTU
COOMARA
SWAMY.
Demy
8vo,
IOJ*. 6d.
English
Translation. With Notes. 6s.
S u t t a N i p a t a ; or, Dialogues and Discourses of Gotama Buddha.
Translated from the original Pali. Crown 8vo, 6s.
CO WELL, E. B.—A S h o r t I n t r o d u c t i o n t o t h e O r d i n a r y
P r a k r i t of t h e S a n s k r i t D r a m a s . Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
P r a k r i t a - P r a k a s a ; or, The Prakrit Grammar of Vararuchi,
with the Commentary (Manorama) of Bhamaha. 8vo, 14s.
CRA VEN, T.—English-Hindustani
D i c t i o n a r y . i8mo, 3.?. 6d.
and Hindustani-English
CUNNINGHAM,
Major-General Alexander.—The
Ancient Geog r a p h y of I n d i a . I. The Buddhist Period, including the
Campaigns of Alexander and the Travels of Hwen-Thsang.
With 13 Maps. 8vo, £ 1 Ss.
A r c h a e o l o g i c a l S u r v e y of I n d i a , Reports. With numerous
Plates. Vols. I. to XXIII. Royal 8vo, 10s. and 12s. each.
General Index to Vols. I. to XXIII. Rona 8vo, 12s,
58
A List of
CUST, R. AT.—P i c t u r e s of I n d i a n L i f e , Sketched with the Pen
from 1852 to 1881. With Maps. Crown 8vo, p. 6d.
DENNYS, JST. B.— T h e F o l k - L o r e of C h i n a , a n d i t s Affinities
w i t h t h a t of t h e A r y a n a n d S e m i t i c R a c e s , 8vo, 10s. 6d.
DOUGLAS, R. JT.—Chinese L a n g u a g e a n d L i t e r a t u r e . Two
Lectures. Crown 8vo, $s.
T h e L i f e of J e n g h i z K h a n . Translated from the Chinese.
Crown 8vo, 5«r.
DOWSONy John.—A. G r a m m a r of t h e U r d u o r H i n d u s t a n i
L a n g u a g e . Second Edition. Crown 8vo, IOJ. 6d.
A H i n d u s t a n i E x e r c i s e B o o k . -Containing a Series of Passages
and Extracts adapted for Translation into Hindustani. Crown
8vo, 2s. 6d.
DUKAy Theodore.—An E s s a y o n t h e B r a h u i G r a m m a r . Demy
8vo, 3-r. 6d.
DUTT, Romesh Chmider.—A. H i s t o r y of C i v i l i z a t i o n i n A n c i e n t
I n d i a . Based on Sanscrit Literature. 3 vols. Crown 8vo.
Vol. I. Vedic and Epic Ages. Ss, Vol. I I . Rationalistic Age.
Ss. Vol. III.
\In preparation*
EDKINS,
Joseph.— C h i n a ' s P l a c e i n P h i l o l o g y . An Attempt to
show that the Languages of Europe and Asia have a common
origin. Crown 8vo, IOJ. 6d,
T h e E v o l u t i o n of t h e C h i n e s e L a n g u a g e . As Exemplifying
the Origin and Growth of Human Speech. Demy 8vo, 4s. 6d.
T h e E v o l u t i o n of t h e H e b r e w L a n g u a g e . Demy 8vo, 5s.
I n t r o d u c t i o n t o t h e S t u d y of t h e C h i n e s e C h a r a c t e r s .
Royal 8vo, i$s.
E g y p t E x p l o r a t i o n F u n d :—
T h e S t o r e - C i t y of P i t h o m , and the Route of the Exodus.
By EDOUARD NAVILLE. Third Edition. With 13 Plates and
2 Maps. Royal 4to, 25^.
T a n i s , Part I., 1883-84. By W. M. FLINDERS PETRIE. With
19 Plates and Plans. Royal 4to, 25J.
T a n i s . Part I I . Nebesha, Daphnse (Tahpenes). By W. M.
FLINDERS P E T R I E and F. L L . G R I F F I T H .
64 Plates.
Royal
4to, 2$s.
Naukratis.
Part I. By W. M. FLINDERS PETRIE, CECIL SMITH,
E. A. GARDNER, and B. V. HEAD. With 45 Plates. Royal 4to,
2$s.
Naukratis.
Part I I . By ERNEST A. GARDNER.
With an
Appendix by F. L L . GRIFFITH. With 24 Plates. Royal 4to, 25^
G o s h e n . By E. NAVILLE. With 11 Plates. Royal 4to, 25^
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trilbner & Co!s Publications. 59
EITEL,
E. J.—Buddhism
2 Its Historical, Theoretical, and Popular
Aspects. Third, Revised Edition. Demy 8vo, $s.
H a n d b o o k f o r t h e S t u d e n t of C h i n e s e B u d d h i s m .
Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 18s.
ELLIOT, Sir H. M.—Memoirs
on t h e History, Folk-Lore,
a n d D i s t r i b u t i o n of t h e R a c e s of t h e N o r t h - W e s t e r n
P r o v i n c e s of I n d i a . Edited by J. BEAMES. 2 vols. With
3 Coloured Maps. Demy 8vo, £1 16s.
T h e H i s t o r y of I n d i a , as told by its own Historians. The
Muhammadan Period. Edited from the Posthumous Papers of
the late Sir H . M. ELLIOT. Revised and continued by Professor J O H N DOWSON.
8 vols.
8vo, £8 8s.
EMERSON, Ellen Russell.—Indian
M y t h s ; or, Legends, Traditions, and Symbols of the Aborigines of America. Illustrated.
Post 8vo, £1 I J .
FERGUSSON,
T.— C h i n e s e R e s e a r c h e s . First Part. Chinese
Chronology and Cycles. Crown 8vo, IOJ. 6d.
FINN, Alexander.—Persian
f o r T r a v e l l e r s . Oblong 321110, $s.
FRYER, Majer G. E.—The K h y e n g P e o p l e of t h e S a n d o w a y
D i s t r i c t , A r a k a n . With 2 Plates. 8vo, 3s. 6d.
P a l i S t u d i e s . No. I. Analysis, and Pali Text of the Subodhalankara, or Easy Rhetoric, by Sangharakkhita Thera. 8vo, 3.?. 6d.
GHOSE, Loke A7".—The M o d e r n H i s t o r y of t h e I n d i a n Chiefs,
R a j a s , e t c . 2 vols. Post 8vo, 21s.
GILES, Herbert A.—Chinese
S k e t c h e s . 8vo, \os. 6d.
A D i c t i o n a r y of C o l l o q u i a l I d i o m s i n t h e M a n d a r i n
D i a l e c t . 4to, 28*.
S y n o p t i c a l S t u d i e s i n C h i n e s e C h a r a c t e r . 8vo, i$s<
C h i n e s e w i t h o u t a T e a c h e r . Being a Collection of Easy and
Useful Sentences in the Mandarin Dialect. With a Vocabulary.
I2mo, $s.
T h e S a n T z u G h i n g ; or, Three Character Classic; and the
Ch'Jen Tsu Wen; or, Thousand Character Essay. Metrically
translated by HERBERT A. GILES.
GOVER,
i2mo, 2s. 6d.
C. E.— T h e F o l k - S o n g s of S o u t h e r n I n d i a . Containing Canarese, Badaga, Coorg, Tamil, Malayalam, and Telugu
Songs. The Cural. 8vo, los. 6d.
GRIFFIN, L. &.— T h e R a j a s of t h e P u n j a b . History of the
Principal States in the Punjab, and their Political Relations with
the British Government. Royal 8vo, 21s.
GRIFFITH, F L.— T h e I n s c r i p t i o n s of S i u t a n d D e r R i f e h .
With 21 Plates. 4to, IQJ.
6o
A List of
GRIFFIS, W. E.— T h e M i k a d o ' s E m p i r e . Book I. History of
Japan, from B.C. 660 to A.D. 1872. Book I I . Personal Experiences, Observations, and Studies in Japan, 1870-1874. Second
Edition. Illustrated. 8vo, 20s.
J a p a n e s e F a i r y W o r l d . Stories from the Wonder-Lore of
Japan. With 12 Plates. Square i6mo, *js. 6d.
HAFIZ OF SHIRAZ.—Selections
f r o m h i s P o e m s . Translated
from the Persian by HERMANN BICKNELL. With Oriental
Bordering in gold and colour, and Illustrations by J. R. HERBERT, R.A.
Demy 410, £2 2s.
HAGGARD, W. H., and LE STRANGE, G. —The V a z i r of L a n k u r a n . A Persian Play. Edited, with a Grammatical Introduction, a Translation, Notes, and a Vocabulary, giving the
Pronunciation. Crown 8vo, I or. 6d.
HALL,
John Carey.—A G e n e r a l V i e w of C h i n e s e C i v i l i z a t i o n ,
and of the Relations of the West with China. From the French
of M. PIERRE LAFFITTE.
Demy 8vo,
3J.
H e b r e w L i t e r a t u r e Society.—Lists on application.
HEPBURN,
J. C.—A J a p a n e s e a n d E n g l i s h ] D i c t i o n a r y .
Second Edition. Imperial 8vo, 18s.
A Japanese-English and English-Japanese Dictiona r y . Abridged by the Author. Square i6mo, 14$".
A Japanese-English and English-Japanese Dictiona r y , Third Edition. Demy 8vo, half-morocco, cloth sides.
3or.
HILMY, H.H. Prince Ibrahim.—-The Literature of E g y p t a n d
t h e S o u d a n . From the Earliest Times to the Year 1885
inclusive. A Bibliography; comprising Printed Books, Periodical
Writings and Papers of Learned Societies, Maps and Charts,
Ancient Papyri, Manuscripts, Drawings, etc. 2 vols. Demy
4*o, £3 3*H i n d o o M y t h o l o g y P o p u l a r l y T r e a t e d . An Epitomised Description of the various Heathen Deities illustrated on the Silver
Swami Tea Service presented, as a memento of his visit to India,
to H.R.H. the Prince of Wales, K.G., by His Highness the
Gaekwar of Baroda. Small 4to, 3s. 6d.
HODGSON, B. H—Essays
on the Languages, Literature, a n d
R e l i g i o n of N e p a l a n d T i b e t . Together with further
Papers on the Geography, Ethnology, and Commerce of those
Countries. Royal 8vo, 14J.
HOPKINS, F. L.—-Elementary
G r a m m a r of t h e T u r k i s h
L a n g u a g e . With a few Easy Exercises. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d,
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 6t
HUNTER, Sir William Wilson.—The I m p e r i a l Gazetteer of
I n d i a . New Edition. In 14 vols. With Maps. 1886-87.
Half-morocco, £$ 3s.
T h e I n d i a n E m p i r e : Its People, History, and Products.
Second and Revised Edition, incorporating the general results
of the Census of 1881. With Map. Demy 8vo, £1 is.
A Brief H i s t o r y of t h e I n d i a n P e o p l e . Fourth Edition.
With Map. Crown 8vo, 3J. 6d.
The Indian Musalmans.
Third Edition.
8vo, 10s. 6d.
F a m i n e A s p e c t s of B e n g a l D i s t r i c t s . A System of Famine
Warnings. Crown 8vo, *js. 6d.
A S t a t i s t i c a l A c c o u n t of B e n g a l . In 20 vols. 8vo, halfmorocco, £$.
A S t a t i s t i c a l A c c o u n t of A s s a m . 2 vols. With 2 Maps.
8vo, half-morocco, IOJ.
C a t a l o g u e of S a n s k r i t M a n u s c r i p t s ( B u d d h i s t ) . Collected in Nepal by B. H. Hodgson. 8vo, 2s.
I n d i a . — P u b l i c a t i o n s of t h e G e o g r a p h i c a l D e p a r t m e n t of
t h e I n d i a Office, L o n d o n . A separate list, also list of all
the Government Maps, on application.
I n d i a . — P u b l i c a t i o n s of t h e G e o l o g i c a l S u r v e y of
A separate list on application.
India.
I n d i a Office P u b l i c a t i o n s : —
A d e n , S t a t i s t i c a l A c c o u n t of. 5s.
B a d e n P o w e l l . L a n d R e v e n u e s , etc., i n I n d i a . 12s.
Do.
J u r i s p r u d e n c e for F o r e s t Officers. 12s,
B e a l ' s B u d d h i s t T r i p i t a k a . 4*.
B o m b a y C o d e . 21s.
B o m b a y G a z e t t e e r . Vol. II. 14s. Vol. VIII. 9s. Vol. XIII.
(2 parts) 16s. Vol. XV. (2 parts) I6J.
Do.
do.
Vols. III. to VII., and X., XI., XII.,
XIV., XVI. Ss. each.
Do.
do.
Vols. XXL, XXII., and XXIII. gs. each.
B u r g e s s ' A r c h a e o l o g i c a l S u r v e y of "Western I n d i a .
Vol. II. 63J.
Do.
do.
do.
Vol. III. 42J.
Do.
do.
Vols. IV. and V. 126s.
Do.
do.
Southern India.
Vol. I. 84J.
B u r m a (British) Gazetteer. 2 vols. 50*.
62
A List of
I n d i a Office Publications—<r0;z&V«^.
C o r p u s I n s c r i p t i o n e m I n d i c a r u m . Vol. I. 32*. Vol. I I I .
Sos.
C u n n i n g h a m ' s A r c h a e o l o g i c a l S u r v e y . Vols. I. to XXIII.
IOS. and 12s. each.
Do.
Index to Vols. I. to XXIII. 12J.
F i n a n c e a n d R e v e n u e A c c o u n t s of t h e G o v e r n m e n t of
I n d i a f o r 1 8 8 3 - 4 . 2s. 6d.
G a m b l e . M a n u a l of I n d i a n T i m b e r s , ior.
I n d i a n E d u c a t i o n - C o m m i s s i o n , R e p o r t of t h e ,
12s.
Appendices. 10 vols. 10s.
J a s c h k e ' s T i b e t a n - E n g l i s h D i c t i o n a r y . 30J.
L i o t a r d ' s S i l k i n I n d i a . Part I. 2s.
L o t h . C a t a l o g u e of A r a b i c M S S . 10s. 6d.
M a r k h a m ' s A b s t r a c t of R e p o r t s of S u r v e y s , is. 6d.
M i t r a ( R a j e n d r a l a l a ) , B u d d h a G a y a. 60s.
M o i r . T o r r e n t R e g i o n s of t h e A l p s . i.r.
M u e l l e r . Select P l a n t s f o r E x t r a - T r o p i c a l C o u n t r i e s .
8s.
M y s o r e a n d C o o r g G a z e t t e e r . Vols. I. and I I . 10s. each.
Do.
do.
Vol. III. 5*.
N . W . P . G a z e t t e e r . Vols. I. and II. IOJ. each.
T>o.
do.
Vols. III. to XL, XIII. and XIV. 12s.
each.
Oudh ;
do.
Vols. I. to III. IOJ. each.
R a j p u t a n a G a z e t t e e r . 3 vols. 15^.
S a u n d e r s ' M o u n t a i n s a n d R i v e r B a s i n s of I n d i a . $s.
T a y l o r . I n d i a n M a r i n e S u r v e y s . 2s. 6d.
T r i g o n o m e t r i c a l S u r v e y , S y n o p s i s of G r e a t . Vols. I. to
VI. IOJ. 6d. each.
T r u m p p ' s A d i G r a n t h . $2s. 6d.
W a r i n g . P h a r m a c o p o e i a of I n d i a ( T h e ) . 6s.
W a t s o n ' s T o b a c c o . $s.
W i l s o n . M a d r a s A r m y . Vols. I. and II. 21s.
I n t e r n a t i o n a l N u m i s m a t a O r i e n t a l i a ( T h e ) . Royal 4to, in paper
wrapper. Part I. Ancient Indian Weights. By E. THOMAS,
F.R.S. With a Plate and Map of the India of Mann. gs. 6d.
Part II. Coins of the Urtuki Turkumans. By STANLEY LANE
POOLE. With 6 Plates* 9s. Part III. The Coinage of Lydia
Regan Paul, Trench, Triihner & Cols Publications. 63
I n t e r n a t i o n a l N u m i s m a t a O r i e n t a l i a (The)—continued.
and Persia, from the Earliest Times to the Fall of the Dynasty of
the Achsemenidse. By BARCLAY V. HEAD. With 3 Autotype
Plates. 10s. 6d. Part IV. The Coins of the Tuluni Dynasty.
By EDWARD THOMAS ROGERS,
I Plate.
$s.
Part V.
The
Parthian Coinage. By PERCY GARDNER. 8 Autotype Plates.
i&r. Part VI. The Ancient Coins and Measures of Ceylon. By
T. W. RHYS DAVIDS,
I Plate,
IOJ.
Vol. I. Containing the first six parts, as specified above. Royal
4to, half-bound, £ 3 13J. 6d.
Vol. I I . C o i n s of t h e J e w s . Being a History of the Jewish
Coinage and Money in the Old and New Testaments. By F. W.
MADDEN, M.R.A.S. With 279 Woodcuts and a Plate of
Alphabets. Royal 4to, £2.
Vol. III. Part I. T h e C o i n s of A r a k a n , of P e g u , a n d of
Burma.
By Lieut.-General
Sir ARTHUR
PHAYRE, C.B.
Also contains the Indian Balhara, and the Arabian Intercourse
with India in the Ninth and following Centuries. By EDWARD
THOMAS, F.R.S. With 5 Autotype Illustrations. Royal 4to,
8s. 6d.
Vol. I I I . Part I I . T h e C o i n s of S o u t h e r n I n d i a . By Sir
W. ELLIOT. With Map and Plates. Royal 4to, 2$s.
JASCHKE, H. A.—A T i b e t a n - E n g l i s h D i c t i o n a r y . With special
reference to the Prevailing Dialects. To which is added an
English-Tibetan Vocabulary. Imperial 8vo, £i IOS.
J a t a k a (The), together with its C o m m e n t a r y . Being Tales of the
Anterior Birth of Gotama Buddha. Nowfirstpublished in Pali,
by V. FAUSBOLL.
Text.
8vo. Vol. I.
28s. Vol. II. 28s.
Vol. III. 28s. Vol. IV. 28s. Vol. V., completing the work,
is in preparation.
JENNINGS,
Hargrave.—HlciQ I n d i a n R e l i g i o n s ; or, Results'of the
Mysterious Buddhism. Demy 8vo, \os. 6d.
JOHNSON, Samuel.—Oriental
Religions a n d their Relation to
U n i v e r s a l R e l i g i o n . Persia. Demy 8vo, 18s.
KISTNER,
<9#<?.—Buddha a n d h i s D o c t r i n e s . A Bibliographical
Essay. 4to, 2s. 6d.
KNOWLES, J. ^ . — F o l k - T a l e s of K a s h m i r . Post 8vo, 16s.
KOLBE, E. TV—A L a n g u a g e - S t u d y b a s e d o n B a n t u ; or, An
Inquiry into the Laws of Root-Formation. Demy 8vo, 6s.
KRAPF, L.—Dictionary
of t h e S u a h i l i L a n g u a g e . 8vo, 30$-.
LEGGE,
James.—-The C h i n e s e Classics. With a Translation,
Critical and Exegetical. In 7 vols. Vols. I.-V. in 8 PartS|
published. Royal 8vo, £2 2s. each part.
6\
A List of
LEGGEy James—continued.
T h e C h i n e s e Classics, translated into English. With Preliminary Essays and Explanatory Notes. Popular Edition. Crown
8vo. Vol. I. Life and Teachings of Confucius. Sixth Edition.
IOJ. 6d. Vol. I I . Works of Mencius. 12s. Vol. I I I . SheKing ; or, Book of Poetry. 12s.
LILLIE, Arthur, M.R.A.S.—The
P o p u l a r L i f e of B u d d h a .
Containing an Answer to the Hibbert Lectures of 1881. With
Illustrations. Crown 8vo, 6s.
B u d d h i s m i n C h r i s t e n d o m ; or, Jesus the Essene. With
Illustrations. Demy 8vo, i$s.
ZOBSCJIEID, JK—Chinese a n d E n g l i s h D i c t i o n a r y , arranged
according to the Radicals. Imperial 8vo, £2 8s.
E n g l i s h a n d C h i n e s e D i c t i o n a r y , with the Punti and Mandarin Pronunciation. Folio, £8 8s.
M a h a - v i r a - G h a r i t a ; or, The Adventures of the Great Hero Rama.
An Indian Drama. Translated from the Sanskrit of BHAVABHUTI.
By J O H N PICKFORD.
Crown 8vo, $s.
MARIETTE-BEY,
August*.—The M o n u m e n t s of U p p e r E g y p t .
A Translation of the " Itineraire de la Haute Egypt" of AUGUSTE
MARIETTE-BEY.
By ALPHONSE MARIETTE. Crown 8vo, p . 6d.
MARSDEN, Wiltiam.—'NuTriisrria.tSL Orientalia I l l u s t r a t a : T h e
P l a t e s of t h e O r i e n t a l Coins, A n c i e n t a n d M o d e r n ,
of the Collection of the late WILLIAM MARSDEN, F.R.S. Engraved from Drawings made under his Directions. 57 Plates.
4to, 31 J. 6d.
MASON, F.— B u r m a : I t s P e o p l e a n d P r o d u c t i o n s ; or, Notes
on the Fauna, Flora, and Minerals of Tenasserim, Pegu, and
Burma. Vol. I. Geology, Mineralogy, and Zoology. Vol. I I .
Botany. Rewritten by W. THEOBALD. 2 vols. Royal 8vo, £$.
MAXWELL,
W. E.—A M a n u a l of t h e M a l a y
Second Edition. Crown 8vo, *js. 6d.
Language.
MA YERS, Wm. Fred.—The C h i n e s e G o v e r n m e n t . A Manual of
Chinese Titles. Second Edition. Royal 8vo, 15*.
M e g h a - D u t a (The). (Cloud Messenger.) By KALIDASA. Translated from the Sanskrit into English Verse by the late H. PI.
WILSON, F.R.S.
Edition.
The Vocabulary by FRANCIS JOHNSON.
New
4to, IOJ. 6d.
MOCKLER, E.—A G r a m m a r of t h e B a l o o c h e e L a n g u a g e , as
it is spoken in Makran (Ancient Gedrosia), in the Persia-Arabic
and Roman characters. Fcap. 8vo, 5*.
MUIR, John.—Original
S a n s k r i t T e x t s , on the Origin and History
of the People of India. Translated by JOHN MUIR, LL.D.
Regan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 65
MUIR, John—continued.
Vol. I. Mythical and Legendary Accounts of the Origin of Caste,
with an Inquiry into its Existence in the Vedic Age. Third
Edition. 8vo, £i is.
Vol. I I . The Trans-Himalayan Origin of the Hindus, and their
Affinity with the Western Branches of the Aryan Race. Second
Edition. 8vo, £1 is.
Vol. III. The Vedas : Opinions of their Authors, and of later Indian
Writers, on their Origin, Inspiration, and Authority. Second
Edition. 8vo, 16s.
Vol. IV. Comparison of the Vedic with the Later Representation of
the Principal Indian Deities. Second Edition. 8vo, £i is.
Vol. V. Contributions to a Knowledge of the Cosmogony, Mythology, Religious Ideas, Life and Manners of the Indians in the
Vedic Age. Third Edition. 8vo, £1 is.
MULLER, F. Max.—Outline
D i c t i o n a r y , for the Use of Missionaries, Explorers, and Students of Language. i2mo, morocco,
7s. 6d.
T h e S a c r e d H y m n s of t h e B r a h m i n s , as preserved in the
Oldest CoHection of Religious Poetry, the Rig-Veda-Sanhita.
Translated by F. MAX MULLER. Vol. I. Hymns to the Maruts>
or the Storm-Gods. 8vo, 12s. 6d.
T h e H y m n s of t h e R i g - V e d a , in the Samhita and Pada
Texts. 2 vols. Second Edition. 8vo, £i 12s.
N a g a n a n d a ; or, The Joy of the Snake World. A Buddhist Drama.
Translated from the Sanskrit of Sri-Harsha-Deva, with Notes.
By P. BOYD.
Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d.
NEWMAN,
Francis William.—A. H a n d b o o k of M o d e r n A r a b i c .
Post 8vo, 6s.
A D i c t i o n a r y of M o d e r n A r a b i c . Anglo-Arabic Dictionary
and Arabo-English Dictionary. 2 vols. Crown 8vo, £1 is.
Oriental T e x t S o c i e t y ' s P u b l i c a t i o n s . A list may be had on
application.
PALMER,
the late E. H.—A C o n c i s e E n g l i s h - P e r s i a n D i c t i o n a r y . With a Simplified Grammar of the Persian Language.
Royal i6mo, IOJ. 6d.
A Concise P e r s i a n - E n g l i s h D i c t i o n a r y . Second Edition*
Royal i6mo, 10s. 6d.
PRATT, George.—A G r a m m a r a n d D i c t i o n a r y of t h e S a m o a n
L a n g u a g e . Second Edition. Crown 8vo, iSs.
REDHOUSE,J.
W.—The T u r k i s h V a d e - M e c u m of O t t o m a n
C o l l o q u i a l L a n g u a g e . English and Turkish, and Turkish
and English. The whole in English Characters, the Pronunciation being fully indicated. Third Edition. 32mo, 6s.
A List of
66
REDHOUSE,J.
W.—continued.
O n t h e H i s t o r y , S y s t e m , a n d V a r i e t i e s of T u r k i s h
P o e t r y . Illustrated by Selections in the Original and in
English Paraphrase. 8vo, 2s. 6d.; wrapper, is. 6d.
A T e n t a t i v e C h r o n o l o g i c a l S y n o p s i s of t h e H i s t o r y of
A r a b i a a n d i t s N e i g h b o u r s , from B.C. 500,000 (?) to
A.D. 679. Demy 8vo, is.
R i g - V e d a - S a n h i t a . A Collection of Ancient Hindu Hymns. Translated from the Sanskrit by the late H. H . WILSON, F.R.S.
Edited by E. B. COWELL and W. F. WEBSTER.
In 6 vols. 8vo,
cloth. Vols. I., II., I I I . 2U.each. Vol. IV. 14s. Vols. V. and
VI. 21 s. each.
SACHAU, Edward.—MbevvLTii's
I n d i a . An Account of the Religion, Philosophy, Literature, Geography, Chronology, Astronomy, Customs, Laws, and Astrology of India, about A.D.
1030. Edited in the Arabic Original by Dr. EDWARD SACHAU.
4to, £3 3*A n E n g l i s h E d i t i o n . With Notes and Indices. 2 vols. Post
8vo, 36s.
SALMONE,
H. A.--An
Arabic-English Dictionary.
Comprising about 120,000 Arabic Words, with an English Index of
about 50,000 Words. 2 vols. Post 8vo, 36s.
SATOW, Ernest Mason.—An E n g l i s h - J a p a n e s e D i c t i o n a r y of
t h e S p o k e n L a n g u a g e . Second Edition. Imperial 32mo,
12J. 6d.
SCHLAGINTWEIT,
Emit.—Buddhism
i n T i b e t . Illustrated by
Literary Documents and Objects of Religious Worship. With a
Folio Atlas of 20 Plates, and 20 Tables of Native Print in the
Text. Royal 8vo, £2 2s.
SCOTT, James George.—Burma a s i t ' w a s , a s i t i s , a n d a s i t w i l l
b e . Cheap Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
SHERRING,
M. A.— T h e S a c r e d C i t y of t h e H i n d u s . An
Account of Benares in Ancient and Modern Times. With Illustrations. 8vo, 2 is.
STEELE, 7%.— A n E a s t e r n L o v e - S t o r y . Kusa Jatakaya. Crown
8vo, 6s.
SUYEMATZ,
K.—Genji M o n o g a t a r i . The Most Celebrated of the
Classical Japanese Romances. Translated by K. SUYEMATZ.
Crown 8vo, *]s. 6d.
TARRING, C. J—A P r a c t i c a l E l e m e n t a r y T u r k i s h G r a m m a r .
Crown 8vo, 6s.
Y a z i r of L a n k u r a n . A Persian Play. A Text-Book of Modern
Colloquial Persian. Edited by W. H . HAGGARD and G. L £
STRANGE.
Crown 8vo, 10s. 6d.
Kegan Paul, Trench, frilbner & Co!s Publications. 67
WATSON, John Forbes.—Index t o t h e N a t i v e a n d Scientific
N a m e s of I n d i a n a n d o t h e r E a s t e r n E c o n o m i c
P l a n t s a n d P r o d u c t s . Imperial 8vo, £1 us. 6d.
WHEELER,/.
Talboys.—TYie H i s t o r y of I n d i a f r o m t h e E a r l i e s t
A g e s . Demy 8vo. Vol. I. Containing the Vedic Period
and the Maha Bharata. With Map. Vol. II. The Ramayana,
and the Brahmanic Period. With 2 Maps. 21s. Vol. III.
Hindu, Buddhist, Brahmanical Revival. With 2 Maps. 8vo,
iSs. This volume may be had as a complete work with the following title, " History of India: Hindu, Buddhist, and Brahmanical." Vol. IV. Part I. Mussulman Rule. 14s. Vol. IV.
Part II. Completing the History of India down to the time of the
Moghul Empire. I2s.
E a r l y R e c o r d s of B r i t i s h I n d i a . A History of the English
Settlements in India, as told in the Government Records, and
other Contemporary Documents, from the earliest period down to
the rise of British Power in India. Royal 8vo, 15X.
WHITNEY,
W. D.—A S a n s k r i t G r a m m a r , including both the
Classical Language and the older Dialects of Veda and Brahmana.
Second Edition. 8vo, 12s.
WHITWORTH, George Clifford.—An A n g l o - I n d i a n D i c t i o n a r y :
a Glossary of Indian Terms used in English, and of such English
or other Non-Indian Terms as have obtained special meanings in
India. Demy 8vo, cloth, 12s.
WILLIAMS, S. Wells.—A S y l l a b i c D i c t i o n a r y of t h e C h i n e s e
L a n g u a g e ; arranged according to the Wu-Fang Yuen Yin,
with the Pronunciation of the Characters as heard in Pekin,
Canton, Amoy, and Shanghai. 4to, £$ $s.
WILSON.—"Works
of t h e l a t e H o r a c e H a y m a n W i l s o n .
Vols. I. and II. Essays and Lectures chiefly on the Religion of the
Hindus. Collected and Edited by Dr. REINHOLD ROST. 2 vols.
Demy 8vo, 21s.
Vols. III., IV., and V. Essays Analytical, Critical, and Philological,
on Subjects connected with Sanskrit Literature. Collected and
Edited by Dr. REINHOLD ROST. 3 vols. Demy 8vo, 36J.
Vols. VI., VII., VIII., IX., and X. (2 parts). Vishnu Purana, a
System of Hindu Mythology and Tradition. From the original
Sanskrit. Illustrated by Notes derived chiefly from other Puranas,
Edited by FITZEDWARD HALL, D.C.L. Vols. I. to V. (2 parts).
Demy 8vo, £5 4s. 6d.
Vols. XL and XII. Select Specimens of the Theatre of the Hindus.
From the original Sanskrit. Third Edition. 2 vols. Demy
8vo, 21s.
WRIGHT, W.—The B o o k of K a l i l a h a n d D i m n a h . Translated from Arabic into Syriac. Demy 8vo, 21s.
6S
A List of
TRUBNER'S ORIENTAL SERIES.
E s s a y s o n t h e S a c r e d L a n g u a g e , "Writings, a n d R e l i g i o n
of t h e P a r s i s . By MARTIN HAUG, Ph.D. Third Edition,
Edited and Enlarged by E. W. WEST. I 6 J .
T e x t s f r o m t h e B u d d h i s t C a n o n , commonly known as Dhammapada. Translated from the Chinese by S. BEAL. JS. 6d.
T h e H i s t o r y of I n d i a n L i t e r a t u r e . By ALBRECHT WEBER.
Translated from the German by J. MANN and Dr. T. ZACHARIAE.
Second Edition, ior. 6d,
A S k e t c h of t h e M o d e r n L a n g u a g e s of t h e E a s t I n d i e s .
With 2 Language Maps! By ROBERT CUST. p. 6d.
T h e B i r t h of t h e W a r - G o d . A Poem. By KALIDASA. Translated from the Sanskrit by RALPH T. H. GRIFFITHS. Second
Edition. 5J.
A Classical D i c t i o n a r y of H i n d u M y t h o l o g y a n d H i s t o r y ,
Geography and Literature.
By JOHN DOWSON. I 6 J .
Metrical Translations from Sanskrit Writers.
14s.
By J. MUIR.
Modern India and the Indians.
Being a Series of Impressions, Notes, and Essays. By Sir MONIER MONIER-WILLIAMS.
Fourth Edition. 14?.
T h e L i f e o r L e g e n d of G a u d a m a , the Buddha of the Burmese.
By the Right Rev. P . BIGANDET. Third Edition. . 2 vols. 21s,
M i s c e l l a n e o u s E s s a y s , relating to Indian Subjects.
HODGSON.
Selections
from
2 vols.
the
Koran.
A New Edition.
POOLE,
By EDWARD
WILLIAM
LANE.
With an Introduction by STANLEY LANE
gs.
Chinese B u d d h i s m .
A Volume of Sketches, Historical and Critical.
By J. E D K I N S , D.D.
The
By B. H t
28*.
i&r.
G u l i s t a n ; or, R o s e G a r d e n of S h e k h M u s h l i u - ' d D i n S a d i of S h i r a z . Translated from the Atish Kadah, by
E. B. EASTWICK, F.R.S. Second Edition, iar. 6d.
A T a l m u d i c M i s c e l l a n y ; or, ?One Thousand and One Extracts
from the Talmud, the Midrashim, and the Kabbalah. Compiled
and Translated by P. J. HERSHON.
14$-.
T h e H i s t o r y of K s a r h a d d o n (Son of Sennacherib), King of
Assyria, B.C. 681-668. Translated from the Cuneiform Inscriptions in the British Museum. Together with Original Texts.
By E. A. BUDGE,
IOJ. 6d.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co.'s Publications. 69
B u d d h i s t Birth-Stories*, or, Jataka Tales. The Oldest Collection of Folk-Lore extant: being the Jatakatthavannana. Edited
in the original Pali by V. FAUSBOLL, and translated by T. W.
RHYS DAVIDS.
Translation.
The Classical P o e t r y
BERLAIN,
Vol. I.
I8J.
of t h e J a p a n e s e .
By BASIL CHAM-
js. 6d.
L i n g u i s t i c a n d O r i e n t a l E s s a y s . By R. CUST, LL.D. First
Series, iar. 6d. ; Second Series, with 6 Maps, 21s.
I n d i a n P o e t r y . Containing " T h e Indian Song of Songs," from
the Sanskrit of the Gita Govinda of Jayadeva ; Two Books from
" The Iliad of India " (Mahabharata); and other Oriental Poems.
By Sir EDWIN ARNOLD, K.C.I.E. Third Edition. 7J. 6d.
T h e R e l i g i o n s of I n d i a . By A. BARTH. Translated by Rev.
J. WOOD. Second Edition. 16s.
H i n d u P h i l o s o p h y . The Sankhya Karika of Iswara Krishna,
An Exposition of the System of Kapila. By JOHN DAVIES. 6S,
A M a n u a l of H i n d u P a n t h e i s m .
The Vedantasara. Translated by Major G. A. JACOB. Second Edition. 6s.
T h e M e s n e v i (usually iknown as the Mesneviyi Sherif, or Holy
Mesnevi) of Mevlana (Our Lord) Jelalu-'d-Din Muhammed, ErRumi. Book the First. Illustrated by a Selection of Characteristic Anecdotes as collected by their Historian Mevlana
Shemsu-'d-Dm Ahmed, El Efiaki El Arif I. Translated by J. W.
REDHOUSE.
£1
is.
Eastern Proverbs a n d E m b l e m s illustrating Old T r u t h s .
By the Rev. J. LONG.
6S.
T h e Q u a t r a i n s of O m a r K h a y y a m .
E. H. W H I N F I E L D .
A New Translation. By
5*.
T h e Q u a t r a i n s of O m a r K h a y y a m . The Persian Text, with
an English Verse Translation. By E. H. WHINFIELD. IOJ. 6d.
T h e M i n d of M e n c i u s ; or, Political Economy founded upon Moral
Philosophy. A Systematic Digest of the Doctrines of the
Chinese Philosopher Mencius. The Original Text Classified and
Translated by the Rev. E. FABER. Translated from the German,
with Additional Notes, by the Rev. A. B. HUTCHINSON. 10s. 6d.
Yusuf
a n d Zulaika.
A Poem by J AMI. Translated from the
Persian into English Verse by R. T. H . GRIFFITH. SS. 6d.
T s u n i - || G o a m , the Supreme Being of the Khoi-Khoi.
PHILUS H A H N .
By THEO-
js. 6d.
A C o m p r e h e n s i v e C o m m e n t a r y t o t h e Q u r a n . With SALE'S
Preliminary Discourse, and Additional Notes. By Rev. E. M.
WHERRY. Vols. I., II., and I I I . 12s, 6d. each. Vol. IV.
los. 6d.
A List of
70
Hindu
P h i l o s o p h y : T h e B h a g a v a d G i t a ; or, The Sacred
Lay. A Sanskrit Philosophical Lay. Translated by JOHN
DAVIES.
The
SS. 6d.
S a r v a - D a r s a n a - S a m g r a h a ; or, Review of the Different
Systems of Hindu Philosophy. By MADHAVA ACHARYA. Translated by E. B. COWELL and A. E. GOUGH.
Tibetan Tales.
IOS. 6d.
Derived from Indian Sources.
Translated from
the Tibetan of the Kay-Gyur by F . ANTON VON SCHIEFNER.
Done into English from the German by W. R. S. RALSTON. 14^.
Linguistic Kssays.
By CARL ABEL.
gs.
T h e I n d i a n K m p i r e : Its History, People, and Products.
WILLIAM WILSON H U N T E R , K.C.S.I.
H i s t o r y of t h e E g y p t i a n R e l i g i o n .
Translated by J. BALLINGAL.
By Sir
21s.
By Dr. C. P. TIELE, Leiden.
JS. 6d.
T h e P h i l o s o p h y of t h e U p a n i s h a d s . By A. E. GOUGH. gs.
U d a n a v a r g a , A Collection of Verses from the Buddhist Canon.
Compiled by DHARMATRATA. Translated from the Tibetan by
W. WOODVILLE ROCKHILL.
9*.
A H i s t o r y of B u r m a , including Burma Proper, Pegu, Taungu,
Tenasserim, and Arakan. From the Earliest Time to the End
of the First War with British India. By Lieut.-General Sir
ARTHUR P. PHAYRE, C.B.
14*.
A S k e t c h of t h e M o d e r n L a n g u a g e s of A f r i c a . Accompanied by a Language Map. By R. N. CUST. 2 vols. With
31 Autotype Portraits. I 8 J .
R e l i g i o n i n C h i n a . Containing a Brief Account of the Three
Religions of the Chinese. By JOSEPH EDKINS, D.D. Third
Edition. *]s. 6d.
O u t l i n e s of t h e H i s t o r y of R e l i g i o n t o t h e S p r e a d of t h e
U n i v e r s a l R e l i g i o n s . By Prof. C. P. TIELE. Translated
from the Dutch by J. ESTLIN CARPENTER. Fourth Edition. js. 6d.
Si-Yu-Ki.
B u d d h i s t R e c o r d s of t h e W e s t e r n W o r l d .
Translated from the Chinese of H I U E N TSAING (A.D. 629). By
SAMUEL BEAL.
2 vols.
With Map. 24*.
T h e L i f e of t h e B u d d h a , a n d t h e E a r l y H i s t o r y of h i s
O r d e r . Derived from Tibetan Works in the Bkah-Hgyur and
the Bstan-Hgyur.
By W. W. ROCKHILL.
IOS. 6d.
T h e S a n k h y a A p h o r i s m s of K a p i l a . With Illustrative Extracts
from the Commentaries. Translated by J. R. BALLANTYNE,
LL.D. Third Edition. i6.r.
T h e O r d i n a n c e s of M a n u . Translated from the Sanskrit. With
an Introduction by the late A. C. BURNELL, C L E . Edited by
EDWARD W. HOPKINS.
13s.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co!s Publications. 71
T h e L i f e a n d W o r k s of A l e x a n d e r C s o m a D e K o r o s between
1819 and 1842. With a Short Notice of all his Works and
Essays, from Original Documents. By T. DUKA, M.D. gs.
Ancient Proverbs a n d M a x i m s from Burmese Sources;
or, The Niti Literature of Burma. By JAMES GRAY. 6S.
M a n a v a - I > h a r m a - G a s t r a . The Code of Manu. Original Sanskrit
Text, with Critical Notes. By Prof. J. JOLLY, Ph.D. 10s. 6d.
M a s n a v i I M a ' n a v i . The Spiritual Couplets of Maulana Jalalu'd-Din Muhammad I Riimi. Translated and Abridged. By
E. H. W H I N F I E L D .
*]S. 6d.
Leaves from m y Chinese Scrap-Book.
7J. 6d.
By F . H. BALFOUR.
Miscellaneous Papers relating to Indo-China.
Reprinted
from "Dalrymple's Oriental Repertory," "Asiatick Researches,"
and the " Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal." 2 vols. 21s.
Miscellaneous Essays on Subjects connected w i t h t h e
M a l a y P e n i n s u l a a n d t h e I n d i a n A r c h i p e l a g o . From
the "Journals" of the Royal Asiatic, Bengal Asiatic, and Royal
Geographical Societies ; the " Transactions " and "Journal " of
the Asiatic Society of Batavia, and the " Malayan Miscellanies."
Edited by R. ROST. Second Series. 2 vols. With 5 Plates
and a Map. £1 $s.
T h e S a t a k a s of B h a r t r i h a r i .
Rev. B. H A L E WORTHAM.
Translated from the Sanskrit by the
5^.
Alberuni's India.
An Account of the Religion of India: its
Philosophy, Literature, Geography, Chronology, Astronomy,
Customs, Law, and Astrology, about A.D. 1030. By EDWARD
SACHAU.
2 vols.
36J,
T h e F o l k - T a l e s of K a s h m i r .
By the Rev. J. HINTON KNOWLES.
M e d i a e v a l R e s e a r c h e s f r o m K a s t e r n A s i a t i c S o u r c e s . Fragments towards the Knowledge of the Geography and History of
Central and Western Asia from the Thirteenth to the Seventeenth Century. By E. BRETSCHNEIDER, M.D. 2 vols. With
2 Maps.
The
21s.
L i f e of H i u e n - T s i a n g . By the Shamans H w u i Li and
YEN-TSUNG. With an Account of the Works of I-Tsing. By
Prof. SAMUEL BEAL.
10s.
Knglish Intercourse w i t h Siam in t h e Seventeenth Century.
By J. ANDERSON, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S. 15^.
Bihar Proverbs,
By JOHN CHRISTIAN.
\Jn preparation.
72
A List of
Original S a n s k r i t T e x t s o n t h e Origin a n d H i s t o r y of t h e
P e o p l e of I n d i a : Their Religion and Institutions. Collected,
Translated, and Illustrated. By J. MUIR, LL.D. Vol. I.
Mythical and Legendary Accounts of the Origin of Caste, with
an inquiry into its existence in the Vedic Age, Third Edition.
2\s.
MILITARY WORKS.
BRACKENBURYy
Col C. B., R.A. — M i l i t a r y H a n d b o o k s for
R e g i m e n t a l Officers.
I. M i l i t a r y S k e t c h i n g a n d R e c o n n a i s s a n c e . By Col.
F. J. Hutchison and Major H. G. MacGregor. Fifth
Edition. With 16 Plates. Small crown 8vo, 4J.
II. T h e E l e m e n t s of M o d e r n T a c t i c s P r a c t i c a l l y
a p p l i e d to E n g l i s h F o r m a t i o n s . By Lieut.-Col.
Wilkinson Shaw. Seventh Edition. With 25 Plates and
Maps. Small crown 8vo, gs.,
III. F i e l d Artillery. Its Equipment, Organization and Tactics.
By Lieut.-Col. Sisson C. Pratt, R.A. Fourth Edition.
Small crown 8vo, 6s.
IV. T h e E l e m e n t s of M i l i t a r y A d m i n i s t r a t i o n . First
Part: Permanent System of Administration.
By Major
J. W. Buxton. Small crown 8vo, 7,?. 6d.
V. M i l i t a r y L a w 5 I t s P r o c e d u r e a n d P r a c t i c e . By
Lieut.-Col. Sisson C. Pratt, R.A. Fifth Edition. Revised.
Small crown 8vo, 4.J. 6d.
VI. C a v a l r y i n M o d e r n W a r . By Major-General F. Chenevix
Trench, C.M.G. Small crown 8vo, 6s.
VII. F i e l d W o r k s . Their Technical Construction and Tactical
Application. By the Editor, Col. C. B. Brackenbury, R.A.
Small crown 8vo, in 2 parts, 12s.
BROOKE, Major, C. A'.—A S y s t e m of F i e l d T r a i n i n g . Small
crown 8vo, cloth limp, 2s.
C a m p a i g n of F r e d e r i c k s b u r g , N o v e m b e r — D e c e m b e r , 1 8 6 2 .
A Study for Officers of Volunteers. By a Line Officer. With
5 Maps and Plans. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 5*.
CLERY, C. Francis, Col—Minor Tactics. With 26 Maps and Plans.
Eighth Edition, Revised. Crown 8vo, 9*.
CQlVflE,
LieuU-Col C, -ft—Military Tribunals-
Sewed, 2s, 64.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Go's Publications, 73
VRAUFURD, Capt. H. ^ . — S u g g e s t i o n s for t h e M i l i t a r y T r a i n i n g of a C o m p a n y of I n f a n t r y . Crown 8vo, is. 6d.
HAMILTON,
Capt.Ian, A.&.C.—The F i g h t i n g of t h e F u t u r e ,
is.
HARRISON,
Col, R.—The Officer's M e m o r a n d u m B o o k for
Peace and W a r .
Fourth Edition, Revised throughout.
Oblong 32mo, red basil, with pencil, 3^. 6d.
Notes on C a v a l r y Tactics, Organisation, ete.
Officer. With Diagrams. Demy 8vo, 12s.
By a Cavalry
PARR,
Col. H. Hallam, C.M.G.—The
Dress, Horses, a n d
K q u i p m e n t of I n f a n t r y a n d Staff Officers. Crown
8vo, is.
F u r t h e r T r a i n i n g a n d E q u i p m e n t of M o u n t e d I n f a n t r y . Crown 8vo, is.
PATERSON, Lieut.-Colonel William.—-Notes o n M i l i t a r y S u r v e y i n g a n d R e c o n n a i s s a n c e . Sixth Edition. With 16 Plates'.
Demy 8vo, 7^. 6d.
SCHAW, Col. H.—The D e f e n c e a n d A t t a c k of P o s i t i o n s a n d
L o c a l i t i e s . Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, 3.?. 6d.
STONE,
Capt. F. Gleadowe, R.A.—Tactical
Studies from the
F r a n c o - G e r m a n W a r of 1 8 7 0 - 7 1 . With 22 Lithographic
Sketches and Maps. Demy 8vo, 10s. 6d.
WILKINSON,
H. Spenser, Capt. 2.0th Lancashire R. V. — Citizen
S o l d i e r s . Essays towards the Improvement of the Volunteer
Force. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
EDUCATIONAL.
ABEL,
Carl, Ph.D.— L i n g u i s t i c E s s a y s .
Post 8vo, gs.
Slavic a n d Latin.
Ilchester Lectures on Comparative Lexicography. Post 8vo, 5-r.
ABRAHAMS,
L. B.—A M a n u a l of S c r i p t u r e H i s t o r y for U s e
i n J e w i s h S c h o o l s a n d F a m i l i e s . With Map and Appendices. Crown 8vo, is. 6d.
AHN, F.—A C o n c i s e G r a m m a r of t h e D u t c h L a n g u a g e , with
Selections from the best Authors in Prose and Poetry. After
Dr. F. Ahn's Method. i2mo, 3*. 6d.
P r a c t i c a l G r a m m a r of t h e G e r m a n L a n g u a g e , Crown
8vo, 3J. 6d,
A List of
74
AHN, F.—continued.
N e w , P r a c t i c a l , a n d E a s y M e t h o d of L e a r n i n g t h e
G e r m a n L a n g u a g e . First and Second Courses in i vol,
i 2 m o , 3sf.
K e y to Ditto.
i2mo, &/.
M a n u a l of G e r m a n a n d E n g l i s h C o n v e r s a t i o n s , or Vade
Mecum for English Travellers. i2mo, is, 6d.
N e w , P r a c t i c a l , a n d E a s y M e t h o d of L e a r n i n g t h e
F r e n c h L a n g u a g e . First Course and Second Course. i2mo,
each is. 6d. The Two Courses in I vol. i2mo, 3*.
N e w , P r a c t i c a l , a n d E a s y M e t h o d of L e a r n i n g t h e
F r e n c h L a n g u a g e . Third Course, containing a French
Reader, with Notes and Vocabulary. i2mo, is. 6d.
N e w , P r a c t i c a l , f a n d E a s y M e t h o d of L e a r n i n g t h e
I t a l i a n L a n g u a g e . First and Second Courses. i2mo, 3*. 6d.
A i m ' s C o u r s e . Latin Grammar for Beginners.
Ph.D. i2mo, 3^.
By W. I H N E ,
BARANOWSKI,
J. J.—Anglo-Polish
L e x i c o n . Fcap. 8vo, 12s.
S l o w n i k P o l s k o - A n g i e l s k i . (Polish-English Lexicon.) Fcap.
8vo, 12s.
BELLOWS, John.—French
a n d E n g l i s h D i c t i o n a r y for t h e
P o c k e t . Containing the French-English and English-French
divisions on the same page; conjugating all the verbs; distinguishing the genders by different types ; giving numerous aids to
pronunciation; indicating the liaison or non-liaison of terminal
consonants ; and translating units of weight, measure, and value
by a series of tables. Second Edition. 32mo, roan, 10s. 6d.;
morocco tuck, 12s. 6d.
T o u s les V e r b e s . Conjugations of all the Verbs in the French
and English Languages. 32mo, 6d.
BOJESEN, Maria.—A. G u i d e t o t h e B a n i s h L a n g u a g e . De
signed for English Students. i2mo, $s.
BOLIA, C.—The G e r m a n C a l i g r a p h i s t . Copies for German Handwriting. Oblong 4to, ix.
BO WEN, H. C, M.A.Studies
i n E n g l i s h . For the use of Modern
Schools. Tenth Thousand. Small crown 8vo, u . 6d.
E n g l i s h G r a m m a r for B e g i n n e r s .
Fcap. 8vo, is.
S i m p l e E n g l i s h P o e m s . English Literature for Junior Classes.
In four parts. Parts I., II., and III., 6d. each. Part IV., is.
Complete, $s,
Kegan Paul, Trenchy Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 7$
BRETTE, PH.,and THOMAS, F.—F r e n c h E x a m i n a t i o n P a p e r s
set at t h e U n i v e r s i t y of L o n d o n . Arranged and Edited
by the Rev.
P. H. ERNEST BRETTE, B.D.,
and FERDINAND
THOMAS, B.A. Part I. Matriculation, and the General Examination for Women. Crown 8vo, $s. 6d.
F r e n c h E x a m i n a t i o n P a p e r s s e t a t t h e U n i v e r s i t y of
L o n d o n . Key to Part I. Edited by the Rev. P. H. E.
BRETTE and F. THOMAS.
Crown 8vo, $s.
F r e n c h E x a m i n a t i o n P a p e r s s e t a t t h e U n i v e r s i t y of
London.
Edited by the Rev. P. H. ERNEST BRETTE and
FERDINAND THOMAS. Part II. Crown 8vo, ys.
BUTLER, F.—T h e S p a n i s h T e a c h e r a n d C o l l o q u i a l P h r a s e
B o o k . i8mo, half-roan, 2s. 6d.
B YRNE, James.—General P r i n c i p l e s of t h e Structure of L a n g u a g e . 2 vols. Demy 8vo, 36^
T h e Origin of Greek, L a t i n , a n d Gothic R o o t s . Demy
8vo, 18 J.
CAMERINI, E.— L'Eco I t a l i a n o . A Practical Guide to Italian
Conversation. With a Vocabulary. i2mo, 4s. 6d.
CONTOPOULOS, N.—A L e x i c o n of M o d e r n G r e e k - E n g l i s h
a n d E n g l i s h - M o d e r n Greek. 2 vols. 8vo, 27s.
CONWAY, R. Seymour,—Verner's L a w i n I t a l y . An Essay in the
History of the Indo-European Sibilants. Demy 8vo, $s.
T h e Italic D i a l e c t s . I. The Text of the Inscriptions. II. An
Italic Lexicon. Edited and arranged by K. SEYMOUR CONWAY.
8vo.
[In preparation.
DELBRUCK, B.—Introduction
to t h e S t u d y of L a n g u a g e .
The History and Methods of Comparative Philology of the IndoEuropean Languages. 8vo, 5^.
D'ORSEY, A. J. D.—A P r a c t i c a l G r a m m a r of P o r t u g u e s e
a n d E n g l i s h . Adapted to Ollendorff's System. Fourth
Edition. i2mo, *]s.
Colloquial P o r t u g u e s e ; or, The Words and Phrases of Everyday Life. Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, y. 6d.
DUSAR, P. Friedrich.—A G r a m m a r of t h e G e r m a n L a n g u a g e .
With Exercises. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 4s. td.
A G r a m m a t i c a l Course of t h e G e r m a n L a n g u a g e . Third
Edition. Crown 8vo, 3*. 6d.
E d u c a t i o n L i b r a r y . Edited by Sir PHILIP MAGNUS :—
A n I n t r o d u c t i o n to t h e H i s t o r y of E d u c a t i o n a l
Theories. By OSCAR 53ROW^IN,G, M.A. Second Edition^
A List of
76
Education
Library—continued.
Industrial Education.
By Sir PHILIP MAGNUS.
6S.
Old G r e e k E d u c a t i o n - By the Rev. Prof. MAHAFFY, M.A.
Second Edition. 3s. 6d.
S c h o o l M a n a g e m e n t . Including a general view of the work
of Education, Organization, and Discipline. By JOSEPH LANDON.
Seventh Edition. 6s,
EGER, Gustav.—Technological
Dictionary in the English a n d
G e r m a n L a n g u a g e s . Edited by GUSTAV EGER. 2 vols.
Royal 8vo, £1 p.
ELLIS, Robert.—Sources of t h e E t r u s c a n a n d B a s q u e L a n g u a g e s . Demy 8vo, p. 6d.
FRIEDRICH, P . — P r o g r e s s i v e G e r m a n R e a d e r . With Copious
Notes to the First Part. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d.
FRCEMBLING, Friedrich Otto.—Graduated German R e a d e r . A
Selection from the most Popular Writers; with a Vocabulary for
the First Part. Tenth Edition. i2mo, 3«r. 6d.
G r a d u a t e d Exercises for T r a n s l a t i o n into G e r m a n .
Consisting of Extracts from the best English Authors; with
Idiomatic Notes. Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d, Without Notes, 4^.
GARLANDA,
Federico.—Tlie F o r t u n e s of ' W o r d s . Letters to a
Lady. Crown 8vo, $s.
T h e P h i l o s o p h y of W o r d s . A Popular Introduction to the
Science of Language. Crown 8vo, $s.
GELD ART, E. M.—K G u i d e t o M o d e r n G r e e k . Post 8vo, js. 6d.
Key, 2s. 6d.
GO WAN, Major Walter E.—A. I v a n o f F s R u s s i a n G r a m m a r .
(16th Edition.) Translated, enlarged, and arranged for use of
Students of the Russian Language. Demy 8vo, 6s.
HODGSON, W. B.—The E d u c a t i o n of G i r l s ; a n d t h e E m p l o y m e n t of W o m e n of t h e U p p e r Glasses E d u c a t i o n a l l y c o n s i d e r e d . Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 3.?. 6d.
KARCHER,
Theodore.—Questionnaire
F r a n c a i s . Questions on
French Grammar, Idiomatic Difficulties, and Military Expressions. Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, 4^. 6d.; interleaved with
writing-paper, $s. 6d.
LANDON, Joseph.—School M a n a g e m e n t \ Including a General View
of the Work of Education, Organization, and Discipline. Seventh
Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s.
LANGE, F. K. W.—Germania.
A German Reading-Book Arranged
Progressively. Part I. Anthology of German Prose and Poetry,
with Vocabulary and Biographical Notes. 8vo, 3s. 6d. Part II.
Essays on German History and Institutions, with Notes. 8vo,
3s. 6d. Parts I. and II. together, $s. 6d.
Regan Paul, Trench, Triibner & Co.'s Publications. Jj
LANGE, F. K. W.—continued.
G e r m a n G r a m m a r P r a c t i c e . Crown 8vo, is. 6d.
C o l l o q u i a l G e r m a n G r a m m a r . Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d.
LE-BRUN, Z . — M a t e r i a l s f o r T r a n s l a t i n g f r o m E n g l i s h i n t o
F r e n c h . Seventh Edition. Post 8vo, 4s. 6d.
L i t t l e F r e n c h R e a d e r ( T h e ) . Extracted from " T h e Modern
French Reader." Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s.
MAGNUS, Sir Philip.— I n d u s t r i a l E d u c a t i o n . Crown 8vo, 6s.
MASON, Charlotte M.—Home
E d u c a t i o n ; a Course of Lectures to
Ladies. Crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
MILLHOUSE, John.—Pronouncing
and Explanatory English
a n d I t a l i a n D i c t i o n a r y . 2 vols. 8vo, 12s.
M a n u a l of I t a l i a n C o n v e r s a t i o n . i8mo, 2s.
M o d e r n F r e n c h R e a d e r ( T h e ) . A Glossary of Idioms, Gallicisms,
and other Difficulties contained in the Senior Course of the
Modern French Reader. By CHARLES CASSAL. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
M o d e r n F r e n c h R e a d e r ( T h e ) . Prose. Junior Course. Tenth
Edition.
Edited by C H . CASSAL and THEODORE KARCHER.
Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
Senior Course. Third Edition. Crown 8vo, 4s.
M o d e r n F r e n c h R e a d e r . Senior Course and Glossary combined. 6s.
NUGENT.—Improved
French and English and English and
F r e n c h P o c k e t D i c t i o n a r y , 241110, 3s.
OLLENDORFF.—Metodo
p a r a a p r e n d e r a L e e r , escribir yhablar
el Ingles segun el sistema de Ollendorff. Por RAMON PALENZUELA y JUAN DE LA CARRENO.
8VO, 4s. 6d.
Key to ditto.
Crown 8vo, 3s.
M e t o d o p a r a a p r e n d e r a L e e r , escribir y hablar el Frances,
segun el verdadero sistema de Ollendorff.
Por TEODORO
SIMONN£. Crown 8vo, 6s, Key to ditto. Crown 8vo, 3^. 6d.
OTTE, E. C. — D a n o - N o r w e g i a n G r a m m a r .
A Manual for
Students of Danish based on the Ollendorffian System. Third
Edition. Crown 8vo, *]s. 6d. Key to above. Crown 8vo, 3-r.
PONSARD,
^ . — C h a r l o t t e C o r d a y . A Tragedy. Edited, with
English Notes and Notice on Ponsard, by Professor C. CASSAL,
LL.D.
Third Edition. i2mo, 2s. 6d,
L ' H o n n e u r e t l ' A r g e n t . A Comedy. Edited, with English
Notes and Memoir of Ponsard, by Professor C. CASSAL, LL.D.
Second Edition. i2mo, 3^. 6d.
RASK, Erasmus,—Grammar
of t h e A n g l o - S a x o n T o n g u e ,
from the Danish of ERASMUS RASK.
Third Edition.
Post 8vo, $s. 6d.
By BENJAMIN THORPE.
78
A List of
RIOLA, Henry.--How
to L e a r n R u s s i a n . A Manual for Students,
based upon the Ollendorffian System. With Preface by W. R.
S. RALSTON. Fourth Edition. Crown 8vo, I2J.
Key to the above. Crown 8vo, 5J.
A Graduated R u s s i a n R e a d e r . With a Vocabulary. Crown
8vo, IOJ. 6d.
ROCHE, A.—A F r e n c h G r a m m a r . Adopted for the Public Schools
by the Imperial Council of Public Instruction. Crown 8vo, 3^.
Prose a n d P o e t r y . Select Pieces from the best English Authors,
for Reading, Composition, and Translation. Second Edition.
Fcap. 8vo, 2J. 6d.
ROSING, £ . — E n g l i s h - D a n i s h D i c t i o n a r y . Crown 8vo, 8x. 6d.
SA YCE, A. H.—An A s s y r i a n G r a m m a r for Comparative Purposes.
Crown 8vo, 7-r. bd.
T h e P r i n c i p l e s of C o m p a r a t i v e P h i l o l o g y . Third Edition.
Crown 8vo, lay. 6d.
SINCLAIR,
F.—A G e r m a n V o c a b u l a r y .
Crown 8vot 2s.
SMITH, M., and HORNEMAN,
#".-—Norwegian
With a Glossary for Tourists. Post 8vo, 2s.
Grammar.
THOMPSON, A. ^.-—Dialogues, R u s s i a n a n d E n g l i s h . Crown
8vo, 5J*.
TOSCANI, Giovanni.--l\ali2L'a C o n v e r s a t i o n a l Course. Fourth
Edition. i2mo, 5<f.
I t a l i a n R e a d i n g Course. Fcap. 8vo, 4s. 6d.
Trubner's C a t a l o g u e of D i c t i o n a r i e s a n d G r a m m a r s of t h e
P r i n c i p a l L a n g u a g e s a n d D i a l e c t s of t h e "World.
Second Edition. 8vo, 5-r.
Trubner's Collection of S i m p l i f i e d G r a m m a r s of t h e P r i n cipal A s i a t i c a n d E u r o p e a n L a n g u a g e s . Edited by
REINHOLD ROST, LL.D.
Crown 8vo.
I.
H i n d u s t a n i , P e r s i a n , a n d Arabic. By E. H. PALMER.
Second Edition. $s.
II.
Hungarian.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
Basque.
By I. SINGER.
4s. 6d.
By W. VAN EYS. 2S- &d.
Malagasy.
By G. W. PARKER.
M o d e r n Greek.
Roumanian.
5^.
By E. M. GELDART.
By R. TORCEANTJ.
2s. 6d<
5*.
VII. T i b e t a n G r a m m a r . By H. A. JASCHKE. $st
VIII. D a n i s h . By E. C. OTTE. 2s. 6d.
IX.
Turkish.
By J. W. REDHOUSE.
10s. 6d.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Triihner & Co.'s Publications. ?Q
Triibner's Collection of S i m p l i f i e d G r a m m a r s of t h e P r i n c i p a l A s i a t i c a n d E u r o p e a n Languages—<w*##^.
X.
XI.
XII.
S w e d i s h . By E. C. OTT£. 2$. 6d.
P o l i s h . By W. R. MORFILL. 3*. 6d.
P a l i . By E. MULLER. 7-r. 6d.
XIII.
XIV.
S a n s k r i t . By H. EDGREN. IOJ. 6d.
G r a m m a i r e A l b a n a i s e . Par P. W. Js. 6d.
XV.
XVI.
J a p a n e s e . By B. H. CHAMBERLAIN. 5*.
S e r b i a n . By W. R. MORFILL. 4s. 6d.
XVII.
XVIII.
C u n e i f o r m Inscriptions. By GEORGE BERTIN, $st
Panjabx L a n g u a g e .
By the Rev. W. ST. CLAIR
TTSDALL,
XIX.
js. 6d.
Spanish.
By W. F. HARVEY.
3* 6d.
VAN LA UN.—Grammar of t h e F r e n c h L a n g u a g e . Crown 8vo.
Parts I. and II. Accidence and Syntax. 4s. Part III. Exercises. 3J. 6d.
VELASQUEZ, M., de la Cadma.—A D i c t i o n a r y of t h e S p a n i s h
a n d E n g l i s h L a n g u a g e s . For the Use of Young Learners
and Travellers. In 2 parts. I. Spanish-English. II. EnglishSpanish. Crown 8vo, 6s.
A P r o n o u n c i n g D i c t i o n a r y of t h e S p a n i s h a n d E n g l i s h
L a n g u a g e s . 2 parts in one volume. Royal 8vo, £1 4s.
N e w S p a n i s h R e a d e r . Passages from the most approved
Authors, in Prose and Verse. With Vocabulary. Post 8vo, 6s.
A n E a s y I n t r o d u c t i o n t o S p a n i s h Conversation.
2s. 6d.
i2mo,
VELASQUEZ andSIMONNE.—New
Method to Read, Write,
a n d S p e a k t h e S p a n i s h L a n g u a g e . Adapted to Ollendorff's System. Post 8vo, 6s. Key. Post 8vo, 4s.
VIEYRA.—K N e w P o c k e t D i c t i o n a r y of t h e P o r t u g u e s e a n d
E n g l i s h L a n g u a g e s , In 2 parts. Portuguese-English and
English-Portuguese. 2 vols. Post 8vo, 10s.
WELLER, E.—Atk I m p r o v e d D i c t i o n a r y . English and French,
and French and English. Royal 8vo, Js. 6d.
WHITNEY, W. D.—Language
a n d t h e S t u d y of L a n g u a g e .
Twelve Lectures on the Principles of Linguistic Science. Fourth
Edition. Crown 8vo, 10s. 6d.
L a n g u a g e a n d i t s S t u d y , with especial reference to the IndoEuropean Family of Languages. Lectures. Edited by the Rev.
R. MORRIS, LL.D. Second Edition. Crown 8vo, 5^.
8o
A List of
WHITNEY,
Prof. William Dwight. — E s s e n t i a l s of E n g l i s h
G r a m m a r , for the Use of Schools. Second Edition. Crown
8vo, 3J. 6d.
YOUMANS,
Eliza A.— F i r s t B o o k of B o t a n y . Designed to
cultivate the Observing Powers of Children.
With 300
Engravings. New and Cheaper Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
POETRY.
ADAMS, Estelle Davenport.—Sea. S o n g a n d R i v e r R h y m e , f r o m
C h a u c e r t o T e n n y s o n . With 12 Etchings. Large crown
8vo, IOJ. 6d.
ALEXANDER,
William, D.D., Bishop of Derry.—SX, A u g u s t i n e ' s
H o l i d a y , and other Poems. Crown 8vo, 6s.
ARNOLD,
Sir Edwin, C.S.I—In
m y L a d y ' s P r a i s e . Being
Poems Old and New, written to the Honour of Fanny, Lady
Arnold. Imperial i6mo, parchment, 3-r. 6d.
P o e m s : N a t i o n a l a n d N o n - O r i e n t a l . With some New
Pieces. Selected from the Works of Sir EDWIN ARNOLD, C.S.I.
Crown 8vo, Js. 6d.
*** See also under ORIENTAL.
BADDELEY,
St. Clair.—Lotus
Leaves.
Fcap. folio, boards, Ss. 6d.
BARNES,
William.— P o e m s of R u r a l L i f e , i n t h e D o r s e t
D i a l e c t . New Edition, complete in one vol. Crown 8vo,
6s.
BLUNT, Wilfrid Scawen. — The W i n d a n d t h e "Whirlwind*
Demy 8vo, is. 6d.
T h e L o v e S o n n e t s of P r o t e u s .
Fifth Edition.
Elzevir 8vo,
I n V i n c u l i s . With Portrait. Elzevir 8vo, 5*. .
A N e w P i l g r i m a g e , and other Poems. Elzevir 8vo, 5J.
BRYANT, W. C—Poems.
crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
Cheap Edition, with Frontispiece.
Small
CODD,John.—A
L e g e n d of t h e M i d d l e A g e s , and other Songs of
the Past and Present. Crown 8vo, 4$".
DASH, Blancor.—Tales
of a T e n n i s P a r t y .
Small crown 8vo, $s.
DA WE, William.—Sketches
i n Verse.
Small crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
DA WSON, C. ^.—-Sappho.
Small crown SYO, 5/.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 81
DE VERE, Aubrey.— P o e t i c a l "Works.
I. T H E SEARCH AFTER PROSERPINE, etc.
y . 6d.
II. T H E LEGENDS OF ST. PATRICK, etc.
3^. 6d.
III. ALEXANDER THE GREAT, etc.
3.?. 6d.
T h e F o r a y of Q u e e n M e a v e , and other Legends of Ireland's
Heroic Age. Small crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
L e g e n d s of t h e S a x o n S a i n t s . Small crown 8vo, 3s. 6d.
L e g e n d s a n d R e c o r d s of t h e C h u r c h a n d t h e E m p i r e .
Small crown 8vo, 3-y. 6d.
DOBSON, Austin.—Old W o r l d I d y l l s , and other Verses.
8vo, gilt top, 6s.
A t t h e S i g n of t h e Lyre.
DOYLE, J.—Cause.
Elzevir
Elzevir 8vo, gilt top, 6s.
Small crown 8vo, 6s.
DURA NT, Beloi'se.—'Da.Jite. A Dramatic Poem.
Small crown 8vo, 5*.
DUTT, Toru.—A Sheaf Gleaned i n F r e n c h Fields. Demy 8vo,
10s. 6d.
A n c i e n t B a l l a d s a n d L e g e n d s of H i n d u s t a n . With an
Introductory Memoir by EDMUND GOSSE. i8mo. Cloth extra,
gilt top, 5*.
E l e g i e s a n d M e m o r i a l s . By A. and L. Fcap. 8vo, 2s. 6d.
ELLIOTT, Ebenezer, The Corn Law Rhymer.—Poems.
Edited by his
son, the Rev. EDWIN ELLIOTT, of St. John's, Antigua. 2 vols.
Crown 8vo, iSs. S
E n g l i s h Verse. Edited by W. J. LINTON and R. H. STODDARD.
5 vols. Crown 8vo, cloth, 5*. each.
I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
CHAUCER TO BURNS. ;
TRANSLATIONS.
LYRICS OF THE NINETEENTH CENTURY,
DRAMATIC SCENES AND CHARACTERS.
BALLADS AND ROMANCES.
FIFE-COOKSON, Lieut.-Col.—The
8vo, 2s. 6d.
GARRICK, H. B. W.—India.
p. 6d.
E m p i r e of M a n .
Small crown
A Descriptive Poem.
Crown 8vo,
GOSSE, Edmund.—N&w P o e m s . Crown 8vo, p. 6d,
F i r d a u s i i n K x i l e , and other Poems. Second Edition.
8vo, gilt top, 6s.
Elzevir
On Viol a n d F l u t e ; Lyrical Poems. With Frontispiece by L.
ALMA TADEMA, R.A.,
R.A.
and Tailpiece by HAMO THORNYCROFT,
Elzevir 8vo, 6s.
G
A List of
82
GRAY, Maxwell.—Westminster
C h i m e s , and other Poems. Small
crown 8vo, $s.
GURNEY, Rev. Alfred.—The V i s i o n of t h e E u c h a r i s t , and other
Poems. Crown 8vo, 5*.
A C h r i s t m a s F a g g o t . Small crown 8vo, $s.
Voices f r o m t h e H o l y S e p u l c h r e . Crown 8vo, $s.
HARRISON,
Clifford.—-In H o u r s of L e i s u r e . Second Edition.
Crown 8vo, $s. •
HEINE,
Heinrich.—-The L o v e - S o n g s of.
Englished by H. B.
BRIGGS. Post 8vo, parchment, 3J*. 6d.
HUES, Ivan.—Heart
t o H e a r t . Small crown 8vo, $s.
INGLEBY, Holcombe.—Kchoes f r o m N a p l e s , a n d O t h e r P o e m s .
With Illustrations by his Wife. Crown 8vo, 3J. 6d.
KEATS, John.— P o e t i c a l W o r k s . Edited by W. T. ARNOLD. Large
crown 8vo, choicely printed on hand-made paper, with Portrait
in eau-forte. Parchment or cloth, \2s. ; vellum, 15^. New
Edition. Crown 8vo, cloth, y. 6d.
KING,
Mrs. Hamilton.—The
D i s c i p l e s . Tenth Edition. Small
crown 8vo, 5-f. Elzevir Edition. Cloth extra, 6s.
A B o o k of D r e a m s . Third Edition. d o w n 8vo, 3*. 6d.
T h e S e r m o n i n t h e H o s p i t a l (from " T h e Disciples"). Fcap.
8vo, is. Cheap Edition for distribution 3^/., or 20s. per 100.
B a l l a d s of t h e N o r t h , and other Poems. Crown 8vo, 5^.
IANG, A.—-XXXII.
B a l l a d e s i n B l u e C h i n a . Elzevir 8vo, 5J.
R h y m e s a l a M o d e . With Frontispiece by E. A. ABBEY.
Second Edition. Elzevir 8vo, cloth extra, gilt top, $s.
L i v i n g E n g l i s h P o e t s M D C C C L X X X I I . With Frontispiece by
WALTER CRANE. Second Edition. Large crown 8vo. Printed
on hand-made paper. Parchment or cloth, 12s.; vellum, i$s.
LOCKER, /?.—London L y r i c s . Tenth Edition.
Elzevir 8vo, cloth extra, gilt top, $s.
LULWORTH,
Eric.—Sunshine
Small crown 8vo, 5.?.
LYALL,
Sir Alfred.—Verses
top, 5J.
With Portrait,
a n d S h o w e r , and other Poems.
written in India.
MASSEY, Gerald.—My L y r i c a l Life.
Series. Fcap. 8vo, 5-r. each.
Elzevir 8vo, gilt
Poems Old and New.
Two
MEREDITH,
Owen [The Earl of Lytton].—Uic\\e.
New Edition.
With 32 Illustrations. j6mo, y . 6d. Cloth extra, gilt edges,
4^ W
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co!s Publications.. 83
MORRIS, Lewis.—Poetical W o r k s of. New and Cheaper Editions.
In 5 vols., 5-r. each.
Vol. I. contains " Songs of Two Worlds." Thirteenth Edition.
Vol. II. contains "The Epic of Hades." Twenty-third Edition.
Vol. III. contains «Gwen" and "The Ode of Life." Seventh
Edition.
Vol. IV. contains " Songs Unsung " and " Gycia." Fifth Edition.
Vol. V. contains " Songs of Britain." Third Edition. Fcap. 8vo, 5.?.
P o e t i c a l W o r k s . Complete in 1 vol. Crown 8vo, 6s.
T h e E p i c of H a d e s . With 16 Autotype Illustrations, after the
Drawings of the late George R. Chapman. 4to, cloth extra, gilt
leaves, 21s.
T h e E p i c of H a d e s . Presentation Edition. 4to, cloth extra,
gilt leaves, 10s. 6d.
T h e L e w i s Morris B i r t h d a y B o o k . Edited by S. S. COPEMAN, with Frontispiece after a Design by the late George R.
Chapman. 32mo, cloth extra, gilt edges, 2s.; cloth limp, is. 6a\
OWEN, John.—Verse M u s i n g s o n N a t u r e . Faith and Freedom,
Crown 8vo, js. 6d.
PFEIFFER, Emily.—Flowers
of t h e N i g h t . Crown 8vo, 6s.
FIERCE, 7.—In Cloud a n d S u n s h i n e . A Volume of Poems.
Fcap. 8vo, 5J.
FOE, Edgar Allan.—The R a v e n . With Commentary by JOHN H.
INGRAM. Crown 8vo, parchment, 6s.
R a r e P o e m s of t h e 16th a n d 1 7 t h Centuries. Edited by W. J.
LINTON.
ROWBOTHAMt
is. 6d.
Crown 8vo, 5*.
J. F.—The H u m a n E p i c .
Canto i.
Crown 8vo,
RUNEBERG, Johan Ludvig.—Nadeschda.
A Romantic "Poem in
Nine Cantos. Translated from the Swedish by Miss MARIE A.
BROWN (Mrs. JOHN B. SHIPLEY).
With Illustrations.
8vo.
[In preparation.
SCOTT, G. F. £ . — S u r s u m C o r d a ; or, Songs and Service. Small
crown 8vo, $s.
SEARELLE,
Luscombe.—The D a w n of D e a t h . Crown 8vo, 4s. 6d.
SYMONDS, John Addington.— V a g a b u n d u l i
8vo, 6s.
TAYLOR,
Sir H.—W o r k s .
Libellus.
Crown
Complete in Five Volumes.
Crown
8vo, 30J.
P h i l i p V a n A r t e v e l d e . Fcap. 8vo, 3*. 6d.
T h e Virgin W i ^ o w ? et9. Fcap. 8vo, JJ. 6<&
84-
A List of
TRENCH, Archbishop, — P o e m s . Collected and Arranged anew. Tenth
Edition. Fcap. 8vo, Js. 6d.
P o e m s . Library Edition. 2 vols. Small crown 8vo, 10s.
S a c r e d L a t i n P o e t r y . Chiefly Lyrical, Selected and Arranged
for Use. Third Edition, Corrected and Improved. Fcap. 8vo, Js.
T w i l i g h t a n d C a n d l e s h a d e s . By EXUL. With 15 Vignettes.
Small crown 8vo, 5s.
TYNAN, Catherine.—lionise
d e l a V a l l i e r e , and other Poems.
Small crown 8vo, 3-r. 6d.
S h a m r o c k s , Small crown 8vo, $s.
WADDIE, John.— D i v i n e P h i l o s o p h y . Small crown 8vo, 5*.
WILSON, Crawford.—Pastorals
a n d P o e m s . Crown 8vo, .js. 6d.
W o r d s w o r t h B i r t h d a y B o o k (The). Edited by ADELAIDE and
VIOLET WORDSWORTH. 32m©, limp cloth, is. 6d.; cloth extra, 2s.
'Wordsworth, Selections from.
By W M . KNIGHT and other
members of the Wordsworth Society. Large crown 8vo. Printed
on hand-made paper. With Portrait. Parchment, 12s.; vellum,
15s.
YEATS, W. B.— T h e " W a n d e r i n g s of Oisin, and other Poems.
Small crown 8vo, 5-r.
NOVELS AND TALES.
BANKS, Mrs. G. Z.—God's P r o v i d e n c e H o u s e . Crown 8vo, 6s.
BILLER, Emma.—TJXLL The Story of a Neglected Girl. Translated
from the German by A. B. DAISY ROST. Crown 8vo, 6s.
CABLE, G. W. —Strange T r u e S t o r i e s of L o u i s i a n a .
8vo,
ys. 6d.
CAJRD, Mona.—T}ie W i n g of A z r a e l . Crown 8vo, 6s.
COLERIDGE, Hon. Stephen.—The S a n c t i t y of Confession. A
Romance. Crown 8vo, $s.
CRA WFURD, Oswald.Sylvia
A r d e n . With Frontispiece. Crown
8vo, is.
DERING, Ross George.—Giraldi ; or, The Curse of Love. A Tale of
the Sects'. 2 vols. Crown 8vo, \2s.
EBERS, Georg.—Margery.
A Tale of Old Nuremberg. Translated
from the German by CLARA BELL. 2 vols. %s.; paper, 5*.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trilbner & Cols Publications. 85
ECKSTEIN,
Ernst.—Nero.
A Romance. Translated from the German
by CLARA BELL and MARY J, SAFFORD.
2 vols.
Paper, 5J.
FLETCHER, J . S,— A n d r e w l i n a . Crown 8vo, cloth, is, 6d. ; paper
covers, is.
T h e W i n d i n g W a y . Crown 8vo.
FRANCIS, Frances.—M o s q u i t o . A Tale of the Mexican Frontier,
fcrown 8vo, 3-r. 6d.
GALDOS, B. Perez.—Leon R o c h e . A Romance. From the Spanish
by CLARA BELL. 2 vols. i6mo, cloth, 8s. ; paper, $s.
GARDINER,
Linda.—His
H e r i t a g e . With Frontispiece. Crown
8vo, 6s.
GRAY, Maxwell.—The R e p r o a c h of A n n e s l e y . With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
Silence of D e a n M a i t l a n d . With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
GREY, Rowland.—In S u n n y S w i t z e r l a n d . A Tale of Six Weeks.
Second Edition. Small crown 8vo, 5^.
L i n d e n b l u m e n a n d o t h e r S t o r i e s . Small crown 8vo, $s.
B y V i r t u e of h i s Office. Crown 8vo, 6s.
J a c o b ' s L e t t e r , and other Stories. Crown 8vo, 6s.
HARRIS, Emily Marion.—Lady D o b b s . A Novel. In 2 vols. 21s.
HUNTER% Hay, and WHYTE, Walter.—My D u c a t s a n d M y
D a u g h t e r . With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
1NGEL0W, Jean.—Off t h e S k e l l i g s . A Novel. With Frontispiece.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
LANG,
Andrew.—-In t h e W r o n g P a r a d i s e , and other Stories.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
MACDONALD,
G.—Donal G r a n t . A Novel. With Frontispiece.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
H o m e A g a i n . With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
C a s t l e W a r l o c k . A Novel. With Frontispiece. Crown 8VO,'6J.
M a l c o l m . With Portrait of the Author engraved on Steel.
Crown 8vo, 6S.
T h e M a r q u i s of Lossie. With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
St. George a n d St. M i c h a e l . With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
W h a t ' s M i n e ' s M i n e . With Frontispiece. Crovvn 8vo, 6s.
A n n a l s of a Q u i e t N e i g h b o u r h o o d . With Frontispiece.
Crown 8vo, 6S.
T h e S e a b o a r d P a r i s h : a Sequel to " Annals of a Quiet Neighbourhood. " With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s,
86
A List of
MACDONALD, G.—continued.
W i l f r e d C u m b e r m e d e . An Autobiographical Story. With
Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
T h o m a s W i n g f o l d , Curate. With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo,
6s.
P a u l Faber, S u r g e o n . With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
T h e Elect L a d y . With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
MALET, Lucas.—Colonel E n d e r b y ' s 'Wife. A Novel. With
Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
A Counsel of P e r f e c t i o n . With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
MULHOLLAND, Rosa.—M a r c e l l a Grace* An Irish Novel. Crown
8vo, 6s.
A F a i r E m i g r a n t . With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
OGLE, Anna C.—A Lost L o v e . Small crown 8vo, 2s. 6d.
PONTOPIDDAN,
Henrik. — T h e A p o t h e c a r y ' s D a u g h t e r s .
Translated from the Danish by GORDIUS NIELSEN. Crown 8vo,
3^. 6d.
ROBINSON, Sir J. C— T h e D e a d Sailor, and other Stories. Crown
8vo, $s.
SA VILE, Ames.—A* M a t c h P a i r . 2 vols. 21s.
SE VERNE, Florence.—The P i l l a r H o u s e .
With Frontispiece.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
SHA W, Flora L. —Castle B l a i r : a Story of Youthful Days. Crown
8vo, 3-f. 6d.
STRETTON, Hesba.—-Through a Needle's E y e . A Story. With
Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s,
TASMA.—A S y d n e y Sovereign, a n d other Tales. Crown 8vo,
cloth, 6s.
U n c l e P i p e r of Piper's H i l l . An Australian Novel. Third
Edition. Crown 8vo, 6s.
I n her E a r l i e s t T o u t h . 3 vols. Crown 8vo, 31J. 6d.
TAYLOR, Col. Meadows, C.S.I., M.K.I.A.—Seeta..
A Novel. With
Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
Tippoo S u l t a u n : a Tale of the Mysore War. With Frontispiece.
Crown 8vo, 6s.
R a l p h D a r n e l l . With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
A N o b l e Q u e e n . With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
T h e Confessions of a T h u g . With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
Tara ". a Mahratta Tale. With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.'s Publications, 87
TOORGEYNIEFF,
Ivan.—The U n f o r t u n a t e One. A Novel.
Translated from the Russian by A. R. THOMPSON. Crown 8vo,
$s. 6d,
TREHERNE, Mrs,—A S u m m e r i n a D u t c h C o u n t r y H o u s e .
Crown 8vot 6s,
W i t h i n S o u n d of t h e Sea. With Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 6s.
BOOKS FOR THE YOUNG.
B r a v e Men's Footsteps. A Book of Example and Anecdote for
Young People. By the Editor of "Men who have Risen." With
4 Illustrations by C. DOYLE. Ninth Edition. Crown 8vo, 2s, 6d,
COXHEAD, Ethel,—Birds
a n d B a b i e s . With 33 Illustrations.
Second Edition. Imp. i6mo, cloth, is.
DA VIES, G, Christopher,—R a m b l e s a n d A d v e n t u r e s of o u r
School F i e l d C l u b . With 4 Illustrations. New and Cheaper
Edition. Crown 8vo, 3s, 6d.
EDMONDS, Herbert,—-Well-Spent
L i v e s ". a Series of Modern Biographies. New and Cheaper Edition. Crown 8vo, 3s, 6d,
MAC KENNA, S, J,—Plucky
F e l l o w s . A Book for Boys. With
6 Illustrations. Fifth Edition. Crown 8vo, 3s, 6d.
MA LET, Lucas,—Little P e t e r . A Christmas Morality for Children of
any Age. With numerous Illustrations. Fourth Thousand. 5*.
REANEY, Mrs, G, S,—W a k i n g a n d W o r k i n g ; or, From Girlhood
to Womanhood. New and Cheaper Edition. With a Frontispiece. Crown 8vo, 3*. 6d,
Blessing a n d B l e s s e d : a Sketch of Girl Life. New and
Cheaper Edition. Crown 8vo, 3s, 6d.
R o s e Gurney's D i s c o v e r y . A Story for Girls. Dedicated to
their Mothers. Crown 8vo, 3s, 6d.
E n g l i s h G i r l s ; their Place and Power. With Preface by the
Rev. R. W. Dale. Fifth Edition. Fcap. 8vo, 2s, 6d,
J u s t A n y o n e , and other Stories. Three Illustrations. Royal
i6mo, is, 6d,
S u n b e a m W i l l i e , and other Stories. Three Illustrations. Royal
i6mo, is, 6d.
S u n s h i n e J e n n y , and other Stories. Three Illustrations. Royal
i6mo, is. 6d.
STORR, Francis, and TURNER, Hawes.—Canterbury
Chimes",
or, Chaucer Tales re-told to Children. With 6 Illustrations from
the Ellesmere Manuscript. Third Edition. Fcap. 8vo, y. 6d.
88
A List of
STRETTON, ffesba.— D a v i d Lloyd's L a s t W i l l . With 4 Illustrations. New Edition. Royal i6mo, 2s. 6d,
WHITAKER,
Florence.— C h r i s t y ' s I n h e r i t a n c e . A London Story.
Illustrated. Royal i6mo, is, 6d,
PERIODICALS.
A m a t e u r M e c h a n i c a l S o c i e t y ' s Journal.—Irregular.
A n t h r o p o l o g i c a l I n s t i t u t e of G r e a t B r i t a i n a n d I r e l a n d
( J o u r n a l of).—Quarterly, 5s.
A r c h i t e c t ( A m e r i c a n ) a n d B u i l d i n g News.—Contains General
Architectural News, Articles on Interior Decoration, Sanitary
Engineering, Construction, Building Materials, etc. 4 full-page
Illustrations accompany each Number. Weekly. Annual Subscription, 38s. Post free.
B i b l i o t h e c a Sacra.—Quarterly, $s. 6d, Annual Subscription, 14J.
Post free.
B r i t i s h A r c h a e o l o g i c a l A s s o c i a t i o n ( J o u r n a l of).—Quarterly, 8s,
B r i t i s h C h e s s Magazine.—Monthly, 8d,
B r i t i s h H o m o e o p a t h i c S o c i e t y ( A n n a l s of).—Half-yearly, 2s. 6d.
B r o w n i n g S o c i e t y ' s Papers.—Irregular.
C a l c u t t a Review.—Quarterly, 6s, Annual Subscription, 24s, Post
free.
C a m b r i d g e P h i l o l o g i c a l S o c i e t y ( P r o c e e d i n g s of).—Irregular.
E n g l i s h w o m a n ' s R e v i e w . — Social and Industrial Questions.
Monthly, 6d,
G e o l o g i c a l M a g a z i n e , or Monthly Journal of Geology, u . 6d. Annual
Subscription, 18s. Post free.
I n d e x M e d i c u s . — A Monthly Classified Record of the Current Medical
Literature of the World. Annual Subscription, 50^. Post free.
I n d i a n A n t i q u a r y . — A Journal of Oriental Research in Archaeology,
History, Literature, Languages, Philosophy, Religion, Folk-Lore,
etc. Annual Subscription, £2, Post free.
I n d i a n E v a n g e l i c a l Review.—Annual Subscription, ios,
I n d i a n M a g a z i n e . Monthly, 6d,
L i b r a r y Journal.—Official Organ of the Library Associations of
America and of the United Kingdom. Monthly, 2s, 6d, Annual
Subscription, 20J., or with Co-operative Index, 25s. Post free.
Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co.'s Publications. 89
M a t h e m a t i c s ( A m e r i c a n J o u r n a l of).—Quarterly, js. 6d. Annual
Subscription, 24*. Post free.
M e i s t e r (The).—Journal of the Wagner Society. 4to, is.
N i n e t e e n t h Century.—Monthly, 2s. 6d.
O r i e n t a l i s t (The).—Monthly. Annual Subscription, 12s.
O r t h o d o x C a t h o l i c Review.—Irregular.
P h i l o l o g i c a l S o c i e t y ( T r a n s a c t i o n s a n d P r o c e e d i n g s of).—
Irregular.
P s y c h i c a l R e s e a r c h ( S o c i e t y of), P r o c e e d i n g s of.
Publishers' W e e k l y : The American Book-Trade Journal.—
Annual Subscription, I8J-. Post free.
P u n j a b N o t e s a n d Queries.—Monthly. Annual Subscription, 10s.
R e v u e Internationale.—Issued on the 10th and 25th of each Month.
Annual Subscription, including postage, 36^.
Scientific American.—Weekly.
Annual Subscription, iSs. Post
free.
S u p p l e m e n t t o ditto.—Weekly. Annual Subscription, 25J. Post
free.
S c i e n c e a n d A r t s ( A m e r i c a l J o u r n a l of). — Monthly, 2s. 6d.
Annual Subscription, 30J.
S p e c u l a t i v e P h i l o s o p h y ( J o u r n a l of).—Quarterly, 4s. Annual
Subscription, 16s. Post free, i*js.
S u n Artists.—Quarterly, $s.
S u n d a y Review.—Organ of the Sunday Society for Opening Museums
and Art Galleries on Sunday. Quarterly, is. Annual Subscription, 4J". 6d. Post free.
T h e o s o p h i s t (The).—Magazine of Oriental Philosophy, Art, Literature, and Occultism. Monthly, 2s.
T r u b n e r ' s R e c o r d . — A Journal'devoted to the Literature of the East,
with Notes and Lists of Current American, European, and Colonial Publications. Small 4to, 2s. per number. Annual Subscription, 10s. Post free.
&ESSk§.
KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & GO.'S
(LIMITED)
EDITIONS OF
S H A K S P E R E ' S WORKS.
THE PARCHMENT
THE AVON
LIBRARY
EDITION.
EDITION
The Text of these Editions is mainly that of Delius. Wherever a variant reading is adopted, some good and recognized
Shaksperian Critic has been followed. In no case is a new
rendering of the text proposed; nor has it been thought necessary to distract the readers attention by notes or comments
[?. T. %
SHAKSPERE'S WORKS.
THE AVON
EDITION.
Printed on thin opaque paper, and forming 12 handy
volumes, cloth, iSs.9 or bound in 6 volumes, 15X.
The set of 12 volumes may also be had in a cloth box,
price 2 ix., or bound in Roan, Persian, Crushed Persian
Levant, Calf, or Morocco, and enclosed in an attractive
leather box at prices from 315. 6d. upwards.
SOME PRESS NOTICES.
u
This edition will be useful to those who want a good text, well and
clearly printed, in convenient little volumes that will slip easily into an
overcoat pocket or a travelling-bag."—St. /ames's Gazette.
" We know no prettier edition of Shakspere for the price."—Academy.
" It is refreshing to meet with an edition of Shakspere of convenient
$ize and low price, without either notes or introductions of any sort to
distract the attention of the reader."—Saturday Review.
" I t is exquisite. Each volume is handy, is beautifully printed, and
in every way lends itself to the taste of the cultivated student of Shakipcre."—Scotsman.
LONDON : KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TKUBNER & Co., LT?
SHAKSPERE'S WORKS.
THE
PARCHMENT
LIBRARY
EDITION.
In 12 volumes Elzevir 8vo., choicely printed on hand-made
paper, and bound in parchment or cloth, price £$ 12^.,
or in vellum, price £4 IOJ.
The set of 12 volumes may also be had in a strong cloth
box, price £z 17^., or with an oak hanging shelf, j£$ iSs.
SOME P R E S S N O T I C E S .
" . . . There is, perhaps, no edition in which the works of Shakspere
can be read in such luxury of type and quiet distinction of form as this,
and we warmly recommend it."—Pall Mall Gazette.
"For elegance of form and beauty of typography, no edition of
Shakspere hitherto published has excelled the 'Parchment LH?rary
Edition.' . . . They are in the strictest sense pocket volumes, yet the
type is bold, and, being on fine white hand-made paper, can hardly tax
the weakest of sight. The print is judiciously confined to the text, notes
being more appropriate to library editions. The whole will be comprised
in the cream-coloured parchment which gives the name to the series."
—Daily News.
"The Parchment Library Edition of Shakspere needs no further
praise."—Saturday Review.
Just published. Price $s.
AN INDEX TO THE WORKS OF SHAKSPERE.
Applicable to all editions of SKakspere, and giving reference, by topics,
to notable passages and significant expressions; brief histories of the
plays; geographical names and historic incidents; mention of all
characters and sketches of important ones ; together with explanations
of allusions and obscure and obsolete words and phrases.
By E V A N G E L I N E M. O'CONNOR.
LQNDON: IfEg^N J^CL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & Co., LT?.
SHAKSPERE'S WORKS.
S P E C I M E N OF T Y P E .
4
THE MERCHANT
OF VENICE '
ACT I
Salar,
My wind, cooling my broth,
Would blow me to an ague, when I thought
What harm a wind too great might do at sea*
I should not see the sandy hour-glass run
But I should think of shallows and of flats,
And see my wealthy Andrew, dock'd in sand,
Vailing her high-top lower than her ribs
To kiss her burial. Should I go to church
And see the holy edifice of stone,
And not bethink me straight of dangerous rocks,
Which touching but my gentle vessel's side,
Would scatter all her spices on the stream,
Enrobe the roaring waters with my silks,
And, in a word, but even now worth this,
And now worth nothing ? Shall I have the thought
To think on this, and shall I lack the thought
That such a thing bechanc'd would make me sad ?
But tell not me : I know Antonio
Is sad to think upon his merchandise.
Ant. Believe me, no : I thank my fortune for it,
My ventures are not in one bottom trusted,
Nor to one place; nor is my whole estate
Upon the fortune of this present year :
Therefore my merchandise makes me not sad.
Salar, Why, then you are in love.
Ant.
Fie, fie!
Salar. Not in love neither ? Then let us say you.
are sad,
Because you are not merry; and 'twere as easy
For you to laugh, and leap, and say you are merry,
Because you are not sad. Now, by two-headed
Janus,
Nature hath fram'd strange fellowi in her time :
Some that will evermore peep through their eyef
And laugh like parrots at a bag-piper ;
And other of such vinegar aspect
LPNPON ; KEGA?< FAUL, TRENCH, T R U B N M & Co.3 LT?,
P